digital and print
EDITORIAL
DESIGN
Published in 2014
by Laurence King Publishing Ltd
361–373 City Road
London EC1V 1LR
Tel +44 20 7841 6900
Fax +44 20 7841 6910
www.laurenceking.com
Design copyright © 2014 Laurence King Publishing
© text 2014 Cath Caldwell and Central Saint Martins
College of Art & Design
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may
be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopy,
recording or any information storage and retrieval
system, without prior permission in writing from
the publisher.
A catalogue record for this book is available from the
British Library
ISBN 978 1 78067 164 2
Design: TwoSheds Design
Senior Editor: Peter Jones
Printed in China
Laurence King Publishing
Cath Caldwell & Yolanda Zappaterra
digital and print
EDITORIAL
DESIGN
4
Chapter 1 Editorial design 6
Chapter 2 Editorial formats 22
Chapter 3 Covers 40
Chapter 4 Inside the publication 76
Chapter 5 Creating layouts 108
Chapter 6 Editorial design skills 152
Chapter 7 Looking back, looking forward 204
Contents
5
Introduction
Editorial Design will show you how to put the journalistic magic into page
design by integrating your knowledge of typography and image making with
the various channels of modern print and digital magazines. My aim in this
book is to help you base your own design practice on a firm foundation of
knowledge, so in these pages you will find inspiration mixed with solid
practical guidance. Put simply, it will show you how to make images and text
spark together on screen or on paper.
The second edition of this book heralds a return to creative editorial design
after a flurry of nervous debate following the launch of the iPad in 2010. The
debate about print versus digital is over and we are now part of a new golden
age of magazine design, an eco-system of print media integrated with social
media, events, campaigns and mobile media products. Underpinning all these
wonderful communication design opportunities are the principles of type, art
direction and layout design. So don’t throw away your design history books
but add this one to your bookshelf to get a balance between the past, present
and the future.
Use Chapter 2 for an outline of different editorial formats; Chapters 5 and 6 to
develop your own design skills; in Chapter 7, you will find profiles of timeless
design greats. Tried and tested briefs for students and tutors appear at the
end of Chapters 2 to 6 to help you develop editorial samples for your own
portfolio. Plus we show you the editorial formats and products that will inspire
you to create your own great designs.
The great names that inspired me – Janet Froelich, Jeremy Leslie, Mark
Porter and Simon Esterson remain light on their feet, they adapt and show
an interest in new forms of editorial that keep our industry exciting. Connect
your interest in the past to your present learning of software updates. In this
new age of magazine design, anything could happen with new media, so keep
one eye on technological developments and the other on this book and you
will be prepared for the future.
– Cath Caldwell
6
1
7
Chapter 1 : Editorial design
This book is a guide to editorial design for the printed page and for digital forms
of publishing. It connects editorial design history with current practice, and
explains many underlying principles to enlighten and inspire the beginner. The
word ‘editorial’ means articles that express the editor’s opinion on subjects of a
particular interest at a particular time, but editorial design has come to mean
curated storytelling for those with a passion for sharing a point of view, interests
or even a brand. Editorial design is no longer bound by the rectangles of printed
pages, but is increasingly available on mobile media. Young and old designers
agree, however, that good communication and a passion for storytelling remain
essential skills.
We begin by taking a closer look at what is meant by editorial design and the
different roles of designers within editorial.
8 Chapter 1
What is editorial design?
It is impossible to begin an examination of editorial
design without first defining what it is and how it
differs from other forms of design. A simple way of
defining editorial design is as visual journalism, and
it is this that most easily distinguishes it from other
graphic design disciplines and interactive formats.
An editorial publication can entertain, inform, instruct,
communicate, educate, or be a combination of these
things. It is not unusual to have varying opinions in
a publication, although they may tend to be from one
school of thought – newspapers are a good example of
this. For the first time in history, publications can be
interactive. Using mobile tools such as GPS (Global
Positioning System), there is a new era of possibilities
in how the editor and advertiser can interact with the
reader. In this book, the focus will be on the common
themes in editorial design across different media –
those in print and those designed for the web and
for use on personal devices.
!
‘Editorial design is the design of publications
– printed magazines that come out more than
once, normally having a look and a feel that
are distinctive and unique.’
Vince Frost, art director, Zembla
The aims and elements of editorial
The vast majority of editorial has at its heart the idea
of communicating an idea or story through the
organization and presentation of words (arranged into
display and body text) and visuals. Each of these fulfils
a different function: in a magazine a headline will
usually have been written and laid out to grab the
reader’s attention, while a visual element will usually
be there to clarify or support a point made in the body
copy (story content). In digital publications, headlines
and other graphic entry points serve as navigation
links, and type elements invite you to touch and slide
as well as to read.
These images demonstrate how the same
content can reach the reader in a variety
of ways. Strong, iconic photography appears
throughout and is cropped in a very simple
way, using full bleed where the photographer
intended.
Editorial design 9
10 Chapter 1 profile
The making of Wallpaper*
How a global brand explores print and digital formats
‘When it has pushed us to commission things in a different
way when we are at the shoot stage. We are thinking what
happens with the magazine, what happens on the iPad,
what is going to happen on the website? We don’t want
exactly the same things on the website, the iPad and the
printed edition but they need to complement each other.’
Sarah Douglas, Design Director, Wallpaper*
Wallpaper* magazine produced its first iPad edition in 2010 and
continues to produce a monthly edition. The printed magazine
version was originally launched in 1996 by editor Tyler Brûlé,
with the website appearing in 2004 and attracting half a million
unique users a month. Wallpaper* covers design, interiors, arts,
architecture, travel, fashion and technology. The company added
an asterisk to its logo in 2007 on its 100th edition, signalling the
use of the cursor and alluding to its digital future.
There are many examples of how the brand of Wallpaper* has
expanded to partner up with collaborators in fashion,
architecture and design. The editorial team is now headed by
Tony Chambers, who made the unusual transition from art
director to editor. Chambers’ team works closely with the
publishers and operates an open approach to publishing,
working with advertisers on creative projects.
In the following interview Sarah Douglas (design director) and
Meirion Pritchard (former art director) explain how Wallpaper*
has extended its brand into digital outputs, design events,
curating exhibitions and even property.
How do you keep control of the design elements across all
three outputs?
MP: The consensus is that with the introduction to the web,
designers and editors lost control for a while – we were told you
can’t do this and you can’t do that. With tablets and iPhones, the
ball is back in our court. Now it is a controlled environment. The
screens are better now for viewing type online.
What digital tools do you have?
SD: We are making everything relevant to content and not
animating just for the sake of it. We can only get a certain
number of pictures in the magazine for a feature on architecture
for example, but then on the iPad we have started including floor
plans and showing much more. We can say: ‘this photograph
was taken from this viewpoint’. It is a great thing to show
readers and the idea was to help them to understand buildings.
Using the website everyone can navigate through a building.
Where do you get your inspiration from?
MP: Even if it is cycling or walking, travelling around you see
things from a different perspective, not from sitting at a desk.
SD: We really rely on cultural immersion. For inspiration, I would
!
‘What’s fascinating about magazines
generally is their organic nature; unlike
books or other print media they are a
constantly evolving thing that changes
slightly with each issue.’
Jeremy Leslie, creative director, magCulture
The function of editorial design
The design of editorial matter serves different
functions, such as giving expression and personality
to the content, attracting and retaining readers, and
structuring the material clearly. These functions have
to coexist and work cohesively together to deliver
something that is enjoyable, useful or informative –
usually a combination of all three if it is to succeed.
At its very best, design for editorial for both print and
screen is an exciting and constantly evolving research
lab and launch pad for stylistic innovations that are
often then enthusiastically taken up in many other
areas of visual communication.
!
‘Editorial design is the framework through
which a given story is read and interpreted. It
consists of both the overall architecture of the
publication (and the logical structure that it
implies) and the specific treatment of the story
(as it bends or even defies that very logic).’
Martin Venezky, art director, Speak
But editorial design does something else, too: it acts as a
vivid cultural snapshot of the era in which it is produced.
For example, 1960s magazines Nova and Oz not only
brilliantly evoked the visual vibrancy of the decade,
but also captured the spirit of an age that celebrated
experimentation, innovation and new directions.
profile
The making of Wallpaper*
How a global brand explores print and digital formats
Editorial design 11
profile
say that I like The Ride magazine from designer Andrew Diprose
with editor Philip [Diprose]. The fact that Andy works for Wired
is great, but he absolutely loves magazines and produces this
fantastic publication as well.
What’s the main aspect that you as a designer have had to
rethink working for the tablet format?
SD: It is just about re-appropriating your thoughts. You have to
think differently about how things work differently, how they are
read differently. You have to think through the reader’s eyes.
Think how people use it.
Do you get feedback in the form of data?
MP: We get massive statistics about which pages are
successful. The Twitter following is something that never
existed before. We have half a million Twitter followers, which
is pretty good for a magazine. The website has gone so well
we have just been asked to make a Chinese version. We printed
a Made in China issue as part of a series and making those
contacts was really important. Although we are based in
London, Wallpaper* goes much further now with the web
– 150,000 circulation.
Editorial design 13 profile
How do you work with advertisers?
SD: We meet with them with the Wallpaper* bespoke team and
the editor to talk through what will work for them and for us.
The output is tailored to that conversation. It might be a website,
an event or a shoot.
What is going to happen next? Are there any more platforms
to extend into?
SD: I think the way it is going we could do more. The annual
Wallpaper* handmade August issue is a showcase for contemporary
design and craftsmanship. Artists contribute by making items
to display. This has taken the brand into a curatorial activity.
Wallpaper* Composed applies to this. The Apartment is also
another opportunity to extend the Wallpaper* brand. We hold
events in it, use it for photo shoots, and can show it to clients.
It is set up as a venture. Developers see that and start to think
creatively about how they could work with us. It is also useful for
photographers to come and stay in if they are shooting for us!
You commission a lot of photography. Have the different
digital platforms, such as the website and iPad, affected how
you commission photographers?
SD: It is a mixture at the moment; photographers are slowly
getting into it as they did during the switch from film to digital.
We are still in the transition.
Will every still shoot have an element of moving image
content in it in the future?
SD: Maybe about 80 per cent.
What are the other Wallpaper* brand extensions?
The Wallpaper* travel guides have been turned into apps. That
franchise is run by a separate publisher. Wallpaper* Selects is
another franchise which works with contemporary photography
with art retailer Eyestorm. The Wallpaper* Design Awards
feature new and emerging talent and keep the brand positioned
at the top of the international contemporary design scene.
Chunky headlines are underlined in both print
and digital. Designers take care to use topright-hand ‘slugs’ or headers to signify which
section the reader is currently reading.
14 Chapter 1
The different roles of
designers in editorial
Key to successful editorial design is the working
relationship between the designer and the editor, but
equally important is the designer’s relationship with
the rest of the publication’s staff. The designer will
often be second only to the editor in the number of
staff he or she interacts with on a daily basis.
Key staff in editorial
Depending on the type of publication, the size of the
team and how it has been organized, the individual
roles of the team may vary. But, while a magazine
editor will probably have commissioned the bulk of
the material to appear in the publication, it is the art
director, design director or lead designer who will
be responsible for the way this is organized and
presented to represent the magazine’s identity.
It would take a whole book to explain the various roles
and relationships of every designer working in digital
and print formats for newspapers and magazines, and
these will differ vastly depending on the media format,
size and circulation of a publication – an independent
magazine that is produced biannually will have
staffing needs that are very different from those of
a daily magazine blog. Here is a guide to the staff
that an editorial designer will work most closely with.
Editor: ultimately responsible for the publication’s
content. Works most closely with the art director and
the tier of editorial staff immediately below him or
her, including features editor, picture editor and
production editor.
Art director/art editor: responsible for the
organization and ordering of all the content, including
commissioned and in-house articles and all imagery,
to a timescale set by the production manager or
production editor. He or she commissions images and
information graphics (infographics), including from
illustrators and, sometimes, photographers (see also
picture editor, below). Works closely with creative and
production staff across print editions and to some
extent on digital formats.
Production manager/web editor: oversees the physical
compilation of all the material by setting a production
schedule. This works backwards from the publication
date to determine receipt of copy and imagery, editing,
subbing and design schedules, and dates on which the
sections need to go to the printer. The production
manager is also responsible for producing, updating
and circulating the flatplan. Works most closely with
the art department and the printer, particularly in
overseeing all special print requirements.
Chief subeditor, subeditors: responsible for proofing
and ‘subbing’ (subediting) the copy to ensure stylistic
coherence, correct spelling, grammar, punctuation, etc.,
writing all display copy, rewriting badly written copy,
cutting copy and sometimes laying out pages. Works
closely with the editor, art team, features editor and,
depending on the structure of the editorial team, the
writing staff.
Picture editor: usually responsible for sourcing images
and copyright clearing on imagery, but also, in
conjunction with the art director and editor, for
ensuring the quality of photographic material used
throughout the publication. Works closely with these
individuals, but also with picture agencies, photo
libraries and repro houses.
Designers: responsible for laying out the publication
according to the art director’s directions or instructions.
The way designers work with their art director and how
much autonomy they have in laying out the material is
determined by a number of factors, including levels of
seniority, the working practice of the art director (some
like to be very hands-on and oversee every detail of
the publication; others are happy to delegate and sign
off pages once they’ve been laid out), the ratio of staff
to the number of pages, and the lead time to
publication – often, the shorter a lead time, the more
responsibility will be given to designers.
Studio manager: not all publications have a studio
manager, as the project-management aspects of the
job mirror that of the production manager to some
degree. But a studio manager is a great facilitator for
Designing magazines is a collaborative experience. Students here
learn to stand back and look at their images and text from the reader’s
point of view, taking in feedback from other contributors. This image
shows design students at Central Saint Martins in London discussing
work created from the briefs in this book.
profile
The Guardian newspaper
Tackling a brand-new format in print
In 2005, the UK’s The Guardian newspaper became the first
large-circulation British daily to have front-to-back colour,
something that its creative director at the time, Mark Porter,
says was necessary because ‘real life is in colour, and in an age
when we are in competition with TV and the internet as news
providers, it’s crazy to attempt to do it without full colour. That
is a twentieth-century approach which readers found
very frustrating.’
Unlike many of the UK broadsheets, which have adopted a
tabloid format to respond to modern users’ changing needs and
relationship with their daily paper, The Guardian’s redesign
incorporated a move to a brand-new format – the Berliner format
used by Le Monde newspaper. It’s not surprising that the
newspaper is forging its own path with a format that Porter says
‘has a unique ability to combine convenience for the reader with
serious journalism, a contemporary approach to design, and the
demands of advertisers’. Its approach to design has always been
intelligent and forward-thinking; in 1988 a radical redesign by
Pentagram’s David Hillman split the newspaper into two
sections, unveiled a new masthead and, most importantly,
introduced the idea of ‘white space’ to newspaper design,
a concept previously restricted to magazines.
‘Everything changed with the Hillman redesign. It wasn’t just
a new look; it was a whole design philosophy, probably the first
time any newspaper really had one,’ says Porter. ‘The designers
who followed (Mike McNay, Simon Esterson and myself) have
had a very strong set of principles to work with,’ he adds. These
principles were adapted in the 2005 redesign by following
Hillman’s own clear vision of how a newspaper should work –
a vision ‘that was based not on journalistic habits and traditions,
but on sound design principles’.
The Guardian newspaper is now published alongside The
Guardian live website and the app, which updates stories as
they happen. Mark Porter left the newspaper in 2010, but his
influence remains due to the continued impact of his team’s
massive typographic overhaul of the publication in 2005. Since
then the visual identity of The Guardian has been extended to fit
The Guardian online website and The Guardian app. Porter is still
connected to the paper as an editorial consultant and says,
‘Nowadays, when you do a newspaper redesign you are also
designing a website, pages for mobile devices and for apps. It is
getting to be unusual just to do a job for print. Conceptually it all
has to fit together and it’s about having a visual identity for a
brand that works in print and also works in other channels.’
The Guardian website is staffed by a team that follow the core
design values outlined by Porter, supported by the belief that in
any format good balanced typography and strong reportage
photography create an intelligent product. When Porter moved
on to The Guardian iPad, he ensured that these principles were
still there, but enhanced by the interactive nature of the device.
The smooth slide navigation is an important feature, but it is the
mobile nature of the iPad that opens up new possibilities for
editors and advertisers to interact with the reader through
sophisticated data-collection software and GPS. Porter
comments that, ‘Tablets have opened up lots of other
opportunities. This is the first time in the digital sphere that we
have been able to use a lot of what we know about doing things
in print. It is exciting that the tablet market is going to grow. In
the future we will have more opportunities to do good editorial
design in digital media than we have had up until now. The
amazing thing is that it changes every day. We are seeing the
last days of desktop-based browsing. Most people will be
consuming media on mobile devices. Tablets and phones will
be much more important than desktop. Print will always be
a part of what we do but it will not be the biggest part.’
The hierarchy of typography signals the
importance of the story. Crisp headlines
underpin the design and bring a spark through
the juxtaposition of words and images. Every
opportunity for graphic impact is used so that
the website provides a rich experience of
simple navigational tools that help the reader
get straight to the content he or she is looking
for. Gimmicky tools and whizzing pictures
have no place here and are shunned in favour
of a plain and straightforward approach.
profile
profile Editorial design 17
18 Chapter 1
a design studio, acting as a co-ordinator and handling
the everyday interaction between design studio,
picture desk and production. He or she ensures that
everything is going to plan and is on schedule, and
that all the differing elements that go to make up the
page layout are in place and as they should be.
!
‘Magazine content is basically built around
the idea that editorial breaks up the
advertising, which, for a lot of magazines,
is what it’s all about: selling ads.’
Vince Frost, art director, Zembla
What attributes should an editorial designer have?
Tibor Kalman once famously said that it is the job of
the art editor to get the editor fired if he or she believes
the job is not being done properly. By this he meant
that an editorial designer should take as much interest
in the content of a publication as the editor, because
designing a magazine is unquestionably an extension
of editing it. Both roles are creative ones that are
rooted in and play part of a creative process, and how
they function together will nearly always determine
the success or failure of an editorial publication.
So, if editorial designers should ‘become’ editors, the
converse is equally true and editors should ‘become’
editorial designers – or at the very least they should
understand each other’s attitudes, roles and areas of
expertise in order to build the necessary trust to create
a first-rate publication. All the great editorial designers
and editors have expressed this, some of them even
bringing other skills and backgrounds to the mix. Mark
Porter, who designed Colors and WIRED before
becoming creative director of The Guardian newspaper,
read languages at Oxford University instead of
formally studying design. As he explains, this fact lies
at the heart of his approach to design:
‘I approach editorial from the reader’s point of view.
Good editorial design is, firstly, about making people
want to read, and then about telling stories; most
readers aren’t interested in design, and when they
look at a page they should see ideas, people and
places, not graphic design. It may also be that
having been to university makes it easier for me to
communicate with editors, as they tend to share the
same background. Newspapers are full of very smart
journalists, which is a constant intellectual challenge
for me; if I can’t make a clear, convincing case for my
design, then I will just get shot down. Languages
themselves haven’t been that useful in my work
(apart from doing projects overseas), but I believe
that design is a language too, and, like any language,
of no real value in itself; it only becomes useful when
you have something worthwhile to say.’
Dylan Jones, editor of GQ magazine, but also past
editor of i-D magazine, The Face, Arena and Arena
Homme Plus, trained as a graphic designer. Willy
Fleckhaus, art director of the seminal 1960s German
magazine Twen, was a journalist. And David Hillman,
Pentagram partner and designer of New Statesman and
Society and The Guardian newspaper, was both art
director and deputy editor on Nova. He has said, ‘Art
direction isn’t about establishing a grid or styling a
masthead, or even about a good-looking juxtaposition
of image and text. In its best form, it involves the art
director having a full and in-depth understanding of
what the magazine says, and, through design,
influencing how it is said.’
You may well have heard and read about the design
greats and wondered how they got where they are.
Opposite and overleaf are three interviews with some
real-life designers at different levels who explain the
work they do and how they got started.
Editorial design 19 profile
Junior designer
Esa Martinesva, Port digital magazine
What does a junior designer/intern on a digital magazine
actually do?
Since the tablet format (iPad) is so new, there really aren’t any
senior designers who know everything about designing for
them. It’s just one big discovery for everybody. In my role as
a junior/intern I was responsible for thinking about how the
reader interacts with, and navigates through, the magazine,
plus helping to make layouts, and thinking about typography
on screen.
How is this day-to-day activity different from a designer
working in print?
The medium might be new, but the communication and
interaction basics are the same. You need to have an overall
understanding of how type and image (moving or still) and
audio all work together and also when not to use them.
Do you have to learn to deal with different platforms?
Many applications have tried to do too much at the same time.
Obviously the tablets are really good with video and audio, but
the users seem to appreciate simplicity and subtlety in the design.
I don’t think all designers need to technically know every
medium, but it is essential to understand how these different
mediums work. Design-wise, working with Adobe Creative Suite
you don’t really need to touch the coding side, but you will be
dealing with interactive elements like buttons and hyperlinks.
Again, the biggest challenge is to understand how type and
image work differently on the screen than on the printed page.
How do you stay up to date with technology?
You really can’t do it any other way than just taking the bull by
the horns and trying to experiment with the new tools and
mediums as they are released.
How did you get started in magazines?
My portfolio had a reasonable number of editorial and print
projects in it. A tutor of mine remembered my interest in
editorial design and recommended me for the job. I got the
position and was assisting in designing the magazine’s iPad
edition. After the project the team wanted me to continue
working with them. Now I’m mainly working with the printed
edition, but I’m still working a bit with the digital side as well.
Did you work for free as an intern?
Yes, at the start. The magazine was a start-up and made mainly
through voluntary work. That seems to be pretty standard with
freshly started independent magazines before the budget is
stabilized. Since then I have been paid and nowadays our
interns get paid a small fee.
As an intern, it is rare that you can say
‘I did this’, as it is often group work, directed
by an art director. However, your experience
working on even simple layouts really counts.
master
PIECES
CREDITS +
Day or night, the look-at-me skirt makes the most
glamorous statement this spring
PHOTOGRAPHS BY BEN WELLER
STYLING BY NATALIE BREWSTER
master
PIECES
CREDITS +
Day or night, the look-at-me skirt makes the most
glamorous statement this spring
PHOTOGRAPHS BY BEN WELLER
STYLING BY NATALIE BREWSTER
Left: Sweater by Marc
Jacobs; skirt by Preen;
sandals by Alexander
McQueen; glasses by
Linda Farrow Luxe;
necklaces by Tom
Binns and Bottega
Veneta; bracelet by
Tom Binns
Right: Top by J.W.
Anderson; skirt
by Karl; pumps by
Charlotte Olympia;
clutch by Versus;
earrings by Bottega
Veneta; rings by Eddie
Borgo and Erickson
Beamon; bracelet
by DAY Birger et
Mikkelsen
profile
Senior designer
Gemma Stark, Net-a-Porter digital magazine
What does a senior designer on a digital magazine actually do?
In some ways the role is fairly similar to the role on a ‘traditional’
magazine. I art direct fashion shoots, design features for the
magazine and attend planning meetings. I am normally
designing several stories at once, along with finding
photographers and developing shoot concepts. One thing that is
different is having an awareness of the digital aspect of the
finished product, so I work closely with the tech team to discuss
how the pages will work on screen.
How is this day-to-day activity different from a designer
working in print? Is it a faster process?
Well I work on a weekly magazine so it is most definitely
fast-paced! We start to design the majority of the stories on the
Tuesday and by Thursday lunchtime the editor reviews the
whole magazine. Our layouts are then passed over to the tech
team on a Monday and are live on the website by Wednesday.
The proofing process is quite different. We will check the quality
of the images and type on our internal website instead of
cromalins [high-quality colour proofs] and make changes
where necessary, which are then updated by the tech team.
Do you have to deal with different platforms?
Our magazine is built in Flash, but the designs are also used to
create our iPad app in HTML 5 too. We also design a mini PDF
version of one magazine story a week for the iPhone, and we still do
print projects from time to time. We work in InDesign, but also use
Photoshop for site pages and emails. So yes, there is a lot of variety.
At Net-a-Porter we approach everything from an editorial angle –
even the banners and promos have an editorial message. Working
on a digital magazine means we tend to put much less on a page.
This, of course, has its advantages. We can use animation to expose
more information and images. We have to consider things like
animation and usability the second we start designing each layout.
Even the simplest of animation can completely alter the page.
How do you stay up to date with technology?
I am constantly looking at other websites for inspiration and
reading about new ideas on blogs. As a team we get together
and discuss what new things we could be doing. If someone sees
something brilliant we send a link to the whole team. Although it
may not be relevant to each person, or the project he or she may
be working on, it could be useful for someone else. Our tech
department are also really great and constantly highlight any
new tools available to us.
How did you get started in magazines?
I started doing work experience during the summer holiday
while I was at Central Saint Martins. My tutor recommended
me for a summer placement at Elle magazine. I was there for a
couple of months and loved it; for me it perfectly blended two
things I enjoy most – graphics and fashion! I kept in touch with
people and did more work experience whenever I could. While at
Elle I met my now boss. When she approached me about a job at
Net-a-Porter I was so excited. The fact it was a luxury e-tailer
with a strong focus on editorial made it all the more appealing.
By the time I graduated I already had my job lined up. I started
as a junior designer the following September.
opposite: Gemma’s work shows an
understanding of how the fashion reader
loves a clear image but also can scroll over
to read a caption.
profile
Design director
John Belknap, The Jewish Chronicle newspaper
What does a design director on a newspaper actually do?
As a design director there are two levels of design you engage
with. The first is creating and maintaining the signature look of
the paper. Everything from the masthead to the classifieds has
a unique look, and you create it, keep an eye on it, and keep
improving it. The editor might want to create a new section and
you design that, or supervise its design.
The second level is actually producing daily or weekly editions.
That involves working closely with the editors to prepare
photographs, illustrations and infographics for the pages, and
also laying out pages. Designers on big newspapers are usually
only involved with complex layouts, and the subeditors (or copy
editors in the US) lay out most of the news pages according to
strict guidelines given to them previously by the design director.
As a design director you employ other art directors to deal with
the specific pages for various feature sections such as business,
sport and arts reviews. You work closely with the editor to lend
drama to stories on the page, and you work with picture editors,
section editors, graphic artists and, at the end of the process, the
production manager who is anxious to send your work to press.
How do you design in order to allow the content to then go
into the online version?
Most papers have a ‘plug-in’ system attached to Quark or
InDesign or other page-makeup software. This means that the
articles are put into a database and then pulled on to the page
from the database. There are many ways for that copy to be
connected to the web, but basically the copy for the web is
pulled from that database as well. On top of that, the same
database is used to create the paper’s archive of past articles.
In the old days (i.e. a couple of years ago), stories went into the
paper and then onto the web. Now they often go to the web first.
This is mostly a production/IT systems task, but it can affect
design details. For instance, headlines, bylines and text have to
always be in separate boxes – or have separate style sheets – so
the web software can distinguish between them and arrange
them in the right order.
How do you stay up to date with technology?
My IT manager tells me we have to install new this and new that
and I try and stay up to date with it.
How did you get started in newspapers?
I worked on my high school paper and loved its rhythmic
progression from sloth to adrenalin. I got hooked. My first job
was part-time at a newspaper during university. I eventually left
university, but stayed at the paper for ten years.
right: John works closely with the editor to
create bold front covers, and to ensure many
entry points for the target reader. Photo on
left-hand image by John Rifkin.
Editorial design 21
22
2
23
Chapter 2 : Editorial formats
Until the introduction of the tablet in 2010, national newspapers, consumer and lifestyle
magazines, and glossy supplements represented the highest status of editorial design.
However, digital publications are now developing fast and providing new opportunities for
editorial designers, publishers and advertisers. The new digital family consists of websites,
mobiles, Android tablets and the iPad. ‘Apps’ are enabling designers to add moving images
and interactivity to digital newspapers and magazines. Many people now carry mobile
devices which enable publications to have larger followings via their digital interfaces than
they do in print format.
Our focus in this chapter is on editorial design for both print and digital formats, looking at
regularly published editions of newspapers and magazines that set and dictate the trends
for the rest to follow.
24 Chapter 2
A concise history of
digital publications
Early digital publications were mainly websites
featuring PDF (portable document format) pages that
could be flicked through as if turning the pages of a
conventional newspaper or magazine. The files were,
however, large and were limited by the fonts available.
American publisher Condé Nast built their own custom
software in-house and produced Wired, GQ and Vanity
Fair without relying on external software systems. The
arrival of HTML in the 1990s as a computer coding
language enabled designers to embed moving content
into the web. The web browser reads the tags and
renders this code as pictures and text.
As interactive design technology improved, so apps
appealed to advertisers who could then add moving
images and interactive content to advertisements.
With the arrival of the iPad in 2010, digital publishing
became an even better portable experience. The iPad
brought an element of play to the tools available. It
also put editorial in the same portable device as all the
other great things in life – email, photos, shopping,
internet and reading. At the close of 2011, however,
many iPad apps went back to a more stripped-down
delivery: the full ‘bells and whistles’ approach was
rejected and a reliance on good graphic design and
smart editing returned to digital publishing. After the
initial flurry of moving image and complicated
interactive promises, a sense of normality returned to
the digital publishing industry in 2012.
The pitfalls of sharing
However, access to another company’s content causes
friction with those who invest in news gathering.
Those who create journalistic content, such as The
New York Times and the BBC, are bearing the cost of
serious reportage. The WikiLeaks scandal in 2011
highlighted the moral debate about accessibility of
news in the digital age and raised the question of who
content ‘belongs’ to. The law around news gathering
clearly needed to be redefined. In 2012, the British
phone hacking scandal exposed the inability of the
authorities to control the media and the Leveson
Inquiry was called to investigate the culture, practices
and ethics of the press. The report of the inquiry called
for a new regulatory body to enforce set principles
involving the legality, privacy and honesty in copyright.
!
‘When we are designing the magazine we
are thinking about how it is going to work on
the iPad.
The iPad has pushed us to think about how
to build on the content for the printed issue
and from the website. It contains all the
interactive elements. It is similar content
to the magazine but borrows interactive
elements from the website.’
Meirion Pritchard, former Art Director, Wallpaper*
Real Simple art director Janet Froelich uses
this eye-catching feature opener to grab
the attention of the reader. On the iPad the
sharpness of the bold photo by Craig Culter
is enhanced, giving great clarity. Many
publications use a simple PDF of a printed
page, but Real Simple uses the iPad format
at its best, to enhance the content for the
way the reader uses the magazine – often in
the kitchen.
the guide HOME 1 OF 6
REPORTING BY NATALIE ERMANN RUSSELL
PHOTOGRAPHS BY CRAIG CUTLER
Don’t let holiday spills mess with your spirit. Here are solutions
(and soaps and sprays) for every seasonal stain.
oops, I did it again
Editorial formats 25
Obama’s promise
Tom Baldwin Washington
Barack Obama promised a new era of
American leadership yesterday in
which military might would be tempered by humility and restraint.
After being sworn in as the 44th
President of the United States in front
of an estimated crowd of two million
people, Mr Obama reached out to the
Muslim world and said that America
must earn its greatness once again.
In a clear repudiation of the past
eight years, he said that he would not
abandon the principles of America’s
founding fathers for expedience’s
sake. “We reject as false the choice
between our safety and our ideals.”
Mr Obama promised to rebuild alliances and said that Americans must
recognise their duties “to ourselves,
our nation and the world”. He said
that the military might of America did
not entitle the US “to do as we please”.
In a sombre speech that had little of
the soaring rhetoric with which he is
associated, he acknowledged that his
nation was in the midst of a crisis and
that its challenges would not be easily
met. “But know this, America: they
will be met. On this day, we gather
because we have chosen hope over
fear, unity of purpose over conflict and
discord,” he said. “Starting today, we
must pick ourselves up, dust ourselves
off, and begin again the work of remaking America.”
To underline the challenges that he
faces, the US stock market fell 4 per
cent, its worst ever Inauguration Day
fall, eclipsing the 2.3 per cent decline
in 1929 for Herbert Hoover and the
advent of the Great Depression.
Amid scenes of euphoria, America’s
first black president strolled down
Pennsylvania Avenue before moving
his family into the White House,
which was built more than 200 years
ago by slaves. Mr Obama said that the
“meaning of our liberty” was demonstrated by people of “every race and
every faith” celebrating yesterday in a
city where 60 years ago his father
“might not have been served at a local
restaurant”.
To Muslims he offered a “new way
forward, based on mutual interest and
mutual respect”, but warned terrorists
that they would be defeated. To those
watching, he added, “know that America is a friend of each nation and every
man, woman and child who seeks a
future of peace and dignity; and that
we are ready to lead once more.”
Inside The Times today
Gerard Baker
page 3
Daniel Finkelstein
page 24
Barbara & Jenna Bush
page 25
Giles Coren
page 28
Plus seven pages of news
‘We must begin again the work of remaking America’
JASON REED / REUTERS
Max 9C, min 1C Wednesday January 21 2009 timesonline.co.uk No 69538
Inside The Inauguration 20-page souvenir
2GM 90p
THE TIMES Wednesday January 21 2009 2GM 7
Barack Obama News
1999-2001
{ Malia and Sasha,
Obama’s two
daughters, are born
1996
{ Obama’s political
career begins with
his election to the
Illinois state senate
2002
{ In Chicago, Obama says future
war in Iraq would be “a dumb
war. A rash war. A war based
not on reason but on passion,
not on principle but on politics”
1990
{ Becomes
the first black
president of
the Harvard
Law Review
1985-88
{ Joins a church group in Chicago.
Says of calling people for help: “They
would be suspicious as to why this
Muslim — or worse yet, this Irishman
O’Bama — wanted their time”
1987
{ Meets a preacher, the Rev Jeremiah
Wright. Named his book The Audacity
of Hope after one of Mr Wright’s
sermons. Denounced him for “divisive
and destructive” comments about 9/11
1995
{ Publishes Dreams from My
Father, a candid autobiography
that sold modestly in its first run
but has since become an
international bestseller
1991
{ Michelle Robinson argues
with Obama, her boyfriend,
about the validity of
marriage. He then presents
an engagement ring
‘We have chosen hope over fear, unity of
purpose over conflict and discord’
This is probably what
most people expected.
The theme is liberty
under the union, the
unity of faith and race,
an issue that is a
conspicuous absentee
from the speech, and
Obama’s own history
stands as a metaphor for
the nation and the
dream that his
presidency will both
embody and renew. But
no sooner does he tug at
the heartstrings than he
reminds the listener, by
conjuring the memory of
the old enemy
advancing, that America
today faces a threat.
What Republicans fail to
understand is that
Democrats have a
majority in Congress
again.
But what Democrats
in Congress need to
understand is that I
intend to end
Bush-style big
government and
favours for all.
I am going to match
Bush in aid to Africa.
We are not going to be
caricatured as America
the rich, uncaring about
the rest of the world.
But I have even less of
an answer about how I
will pay for this than I
do at home. One answer
is to get our so-called
allies to pay, and I will
say this to Europe: don’t
lecture us on climate
change. You need to do
more on all kids of
fronts: on aid, and on
Afghanistan.
This is the closest that
I’ll come to endorsing
George W. Bush’s
conviction that the US is
fighting a War on
Terror against a
“network of violence
and hatred”. But I won’t
give him a fraction of a
compliment on the
economy. When I talk
about “our collective
failure to make hard
choices”, I really mean
his failure: a refusal to
make cuts while
launching two costly
wars, turning a budget
surplus into a huge
deficit.
In case you miss the
point, I’m going to ram
it home, of how America
the great has been
brought to misery and
weakness. So don’t
expect more tax cuts.
But without quite
spelling out how I’m
eventually going to pay
for it, I’m going to stick
somehow to my
campaign pledge to
extend healthcare to
some of the uninsured,
to schools, and look to
new sources of energy.
Watch out, the oil states
in the Gulf: you may be
our friends, but we want
to work out how to do
without you.
Here is my spending
plan: lots of roads and
bridges.
Science is back. We
will scrap the ban on
stem-cell research. But I
am hoping that people
will believe one piece of
wishful thinking, that
technology can make
US healthcare affordable
where it never has been.
And while the
bioethanol industry may
be safe, drilling in
Alaska is not.
We are getting out of
Iraq, sooner than my
military chiefs currently
recommend. But we are
not out of Afghanistan
yet, nor has the military
death toll ended. On
Iran — Vladimir, do you
want to do a deal?
On climate change,
we are going to talk the
talk, at least. And no, I
am really not soft on
terrorism.
This is the first clap line.
The whole speech is
very short on lines that
are asking for applause.
When applause comes it
is very difficult for the
speaker, in the open air,
to play off it. The
acoustics of an outdoor
speech are dreadful:
applause drifts into the
air and it is harder to
build momentum.
This is also the first
real statement of intent
in the speech. Here is
where the only possible
rhetorical response to a
threat — be confident
and assertive — is
introduced. At this point,
it looks as though the
speech is going to be
therapeutic — be
confident in the face of
a crisis. But, for that
mood to stick, the
speaker needs to shift
the emphasis from
negative to positive. As
we proceed, Obama
declines to do this.
A decidedly downbeat
conclusion. The best
that can be hoped for is
that the gift of freedom
is passed on unharmed.
The end confirms the
sense of gravity and
foreboding that has been
the dominant mood of
the speech. This was the
negative of a habitual
Obama speech. He was
perfunctory in his
optimism and
convincing in the gloom.
He was sparing with his
language but not with
his audience.
China or Iran, but I am
probably not referring
her to Robert Mugabe in
Zimbabwe.
Bad news for bankers
and probably
free-traders too, but you
won’t catch me
attacking markets or
sounding as left-wing as
my critics charge.
In case you missed my
having said it in the past
few months, I am
shutting Guantánamo
and banning
waterboarding.
Hurricane Katrina sank
Bush. I am not going to
let him or anyone forget
it. But (and I am looking
at Democrats in
Congress here, as well as
everyone with sky-high
hopes) this is going to be
really tough. We have
no money, for a start.
People are going to
have to be good citizens
and look to each other,
not the Government, for
solutions to some of
their problems.
Bronwen Maddox
Bronwen Maddox
We are going to avoid
contradicting our own
ideals on the front of
the world stage. And we
are not going to take
issues to the United
Nations unless we have
some allies.
I am quoting George
Washington (himself
quoting Thomas Paine,
revolutionary
pamphleteer), at the
darkest point of the
battle of 1776, rallying
his troops against the
British. No way can
anyone, even Gordon
Brown, interpret this
description of the British
enemy as a pro-British
remark.
Phillip Collins
The threat is specified
and given precise form.
Throughout the speech,
detail and policy
problems replace the
usual spiritual elevation
that marked, for
example, the victory
salute speech in Grant
Park. This passage is like
a popular song that can
be sung only for a short
time. Soon all these
faults, attributed clearly,
even though he is not
named, to the outgoing
President, will soon be
the responsibility of the
new Administration.
Suddenly, the writing
hits a stride and it is not
at all coincidental that
the paragraph contains a
personal reference. The
puzzle with this speech
is why it contained so
little autobiography. The
omission must be
deliberate. It was a
serious and sombre
speech, with few
references to the theme
of binding the nation
that is common in
Lincoln. There is no
single passage in this
speech that is a serious
attempt to bid for
history.
There is also another
candidate for the central
idea here: that American
power will be used
softly, with humility and
restraint. Throughout
the speech the listener is
waiting for the “nothing
to fear but fear itself”
moment. Where is the
phrase that defines the
speech? The claim that
we are ready to lead
once more has the form
of a soundbite of that
kind but it is not, in fact,
a definition of the bulk
of the speech.
This is an exhibition of
Obama’s gift with words,
which he, for the most
part, keeps in check. The
image at the end
achieves what all
imagery is aspiring to: it
actually makes you
think of two people
trying to shake hands. In
your mind’s eye they
have an identity. He has
no need to say who he is
talking about – he does
it all with a beautiful
phrase. In more
expansive mood, “extend
a hand” might have
been the “yes we can” of
this speech.
Another potentially big
idea arrives: duty and
responsibility. Along
with it comes another
possible title for the
speech — “a new era of
responsibility”. It doesn’t
fly as an idea because
it’s too vague. The
contrast drawn between
the ideal world of the
named values and the
real world of America
today, in which paradise
has been lost, is a straw
man.
Phillip Collins
This overwrought
paragraph is a
compendium of
constitutional clichés. It
is not so much purple as
bruised. The subject
changes at random in
the middle and divine
power is called up twice
to lend the weight that
the writing cannot
supply. The whole
speech is more church
than state. God is a
recurrent theme and
that effect is intensified
by a more than usually
evangelical delivery.
In the first substantive
paragraph a candidate
for the governing idea of
the speech is raised: the
sense of threat, the
problems that America
faces. The
meteorological
metaphors that begin
here, however, threaten
to get out of hand as the
speech unfolds: clouds
gather, storms rage,
currents are icy.
The next clap line and
the next candidate for
the main idea.
Well, two candidates:
the journey of America
and the remaking of the
nation. The three main
ideas we have so far is
two too many. The idea
of the journey is
compatible with the idea
of a threat but it has a
different register and
that is the reason the
speech seems to swirl
around a little
unconvincingly. There
are beads of inspiration
but no obvious thread. A
good way to think about
this is: what title would
you give to this speech?
We are on the side of
peace, believe me.
We have patched over
our own rifts. This
qualifies America to be
the mediator-in-chief for
the whole world.
The speech in full Obama supplement
President Obama’s inauguration speech is translated into what it really
means by Bronwen Maddox, chief foreign commentator, and assessed for
technique and craft by Phillip Collins, former speechwriter to Tony Blair
4 2GM THE TIMES Wednesday January 21 2009
News Barack Obama
1979
{ Graduates and continues his
studies at Occidental College, Los
Angeles. He described his drug
use there as his “greatest moral
failure”
1964
{ Obama’s
parents divorce
1967
{ Obama emigrates to Indonesia
with his mother and her new
husband, Lolo. They keep two pet
crocodiles and an ape called Tata
1982
{ An aunt in
Nairobi informs
Obama that his
father has died
in a car accident
1967-1971
{ His education is supplemented
by a US correspondence course —
his mother waking him at 4am
daily. “I offered stiff resistance,” he
says in his autobiography
1963
{ His father moves back
to Kenya, as Obama later
put it, to “fulfil his promise
to the continent”
1971
{ Returns to Hawaii to continue
schooling. Explains to new classmates
that his father is a warrior prince, an
image only dispelled when the stern,
pipe-smoking reality comes to visit
1981
{ Transfers to
Columbia College,
Chicago, majoring in
political science
Pride was much more evident than partying. “You think about what your ancestors went through, and it does weigh on you,” an emotional onlooker said
American weather websites have a
wonderful phrase to describe the temperature once the wind chill has been
taken into account. They call it the
Real Feel. And the Real Feel of the
extraordinary gathering in Washington yesterday was of a people coming
in from the cold. Black people, people
of colour, call them what you will, it
was every American’s celebration, but
it was a celebration for African-Americans more than most. A majority of
the people present were black and, of
them, a majority of their ancestors
had come to this country in chains. “I
get choked just to look at him,” Velda
Howell, 50, from Chicago, said. “He
only has to stand there, he doesn’t
even have to say anything.”
Mrs Howell and her friends have a
right to be emotional, and when a
television camera came by, there was
the predictable cheering and waving,
but pride was much more evident than
partying. “You think about what your
ancestors went through, and it does
weigh on you, it does cause you
anguish,” Mrs Howell said. “I feel like
I really am part of this country now.
Part of the Constitution. Before, I just
felt like I existed. I am still coming to
terms with it.”
When Michelle Obama said last
year, during her husband’s campaign,
that it was the first time that she had
felt proud to be American, it was seen
as a gaffe and she retracted it swiftly,
but it undeniably described how Mrs
Howell and many others feel.
Ranged around a horseshoe-shaped
hotel bar on 14th Street in central DC,
their faces tilted up to the television
screens and aglow with rapturous
pride, perhaps 100 people watched in
reverential near-silence, punctuated
by loud amens, some “all rights” —
and laughter whenever George Bush
came on the screen. When President
Obama thanked President Bush for
his service to his country, the bar
exploded with hoots of derision. As
the screen split to include footage of
people watching in Memphis, in Los
Angeles, in Chicago, yelps of appreciation went up.
It was a mixed bunch in the bar,
some residents, some people, myself included, ducking in at the last moment,
frustrated in their efforts to get close
to a Jumbotron screen. Much has
been made of the Ring of Steel but the
security was not heavy-handed: an
occasional whoop of a siren, one or
two amplified instructions to stick to
the sidewalk, an occasional overheard
request. “I need you to open your outer garment sir, I need to see right
around your waistline.”
The headgear in the hotel bar tells
the story. Large, well-groomed,
mature ladies, their mink and sable
and sealskin hats on their laps, took
the front-row stools. “This is gonna be
beautiful,” one said to her neighbour,
settling in with 15 minutes to go.
Aretha Franklin came on to sing My
Country ’Tis of Thee. “Go on, baby,”
one lady called at the screen. “Ain’t no
big thing.” The ladies sang along with
Aretha. Later they would dismount
their bar stools for The Star-Spangled
Banner and stand up straight. One or
two put their hands over their hearts.
Farther from the bar stood younger
college kids in the ubiquitous Peruvian woolly hats with earflaps. They,
as did most people, closed their eyes
and mouthed along during the Lord’s
Prayer. Behind them stood the chefs,
out from the hotel kitchens in their
whites and caps. Behind them, one or
two ruddy-faced men in Stetsons. Off
to one side were the cool guys with diamond-studded trilbys. “It is the first
time I have felt involved in the political process,” Tyrone Kennard, a salesman, from Philadelphia, said. “I am
proud and happy to be an American. If
he fails, let him fail. I am happy just to
see the day.” Mr Kennard then tried to
sell me some T-shirts. “You want to
take some back to London, England, I
got some in my hotel, the JW Marriott
on Pennsylvania Avenue. We can
close the deal right now.”
Mrs Howell had driven from Chicago on Sunday. “Took 12 hours, got a
busted tyre outside of Columbus,
Ohio, got that fixed, slept in the car.”
With her was her son, Justin, 20. “We
came into town on the metro at 7am,”
Justin said. “Maybe 3,000 people, nobody moving, and then one guy called
out, ‘Yes we can’ and the whole subway station started to chant it and
everybody started moving again.”
Most people chose to walk. A river
of people surging towards the Mall,
diverting around the checkpoints at
the White House, buying their “I Was
There” T-shirts and their funnel cake
and hot chocolate from street vendors,
having their picture taken with the
cardboard Obama cutout outside a
gift shop, moving on. The streets were
full before dawn. People found their
own way to pass the cold hours that
followed. Some were wrapped up on
the pavement and appeared to sleep.
Some played Scrabble, others cards.
One enormous man read a magazine
called Muscular Development, its cover
urging readers to “Get huge! Jack up
Now! Anabolics 2009”. Other groups,
on a bank next to the iced-over pool in
front of the Lincoln Memorial simply
huddled together for warmth, groups
of 10 or 12 youngsters stacked in a pile
as if they had just finished a sub-zero
game of Twister, friends discussing
their next move in a tightening jobs
market.
Mothers urged their children to
keep their hats on, honey. Soldiers,
ranged every few yards along the
Mall, stamped their booted feet. The
DC police, breath steaming through
the slits in their ski masks, did the
same. The grey plastic walkway laid
over the grass was superfluous, the
ground was frozen solid. Everywhere
people talked on their mobiles, giving
running commentaries to family who
had not made the trip from St Louis or
Sacramento, trying futilely to meet up
with friends. “I’m on K and 17th! It’s
backed right up, where are you?”
The crowd was sober. Sober as in
not inebriated; sober, too, as in serious,
purposeful. And it is those qualities
that they like in Obama. “Barack and
Michelle are cool people,” Mrs Howell
said, “but they are respectful people.
Michelle is younger than me but I consider her a role model, the way she carries herself, the way she is with her
children and her husband, the way he
is with her. They take a pride in themselves, they always dress appropriate.”
Mrs Howell is concerned by colleagues who wear sneakers to work.
She thinks the well-educated, wellspoken, family-oriented, churchgoing
Obamas can stop the rot.
After the speech, there was an exodus from the bar, down towards the
Mall to catch a glimpse of the motorcade. Ooohs and aaahs and riotous
applause followed its progress to the
White House. “McCain was right,”
said someone behind me. “We’ve elected a rock star.” No, they have elected a
President, and yesterday when he descended his presidential limousine to
cover the last few blocks of Pennsylvania Avenue on foot, the screams of
pleasure showed how delighted they
are with their choice.
Fluffing their lines
The day in pictures
and video
timesonline.co.uk/uselections
Americans of
all colours get
the real feel
for national
celebration
John Roberts I, Barack Hussein
Obama . . .
Obama I, Barack . . .
Roberts . . . do solemnly swear. . .
Obama I, Barack Hussein Obama, do
solemnly swear. . .
Roberts . . . that I will execute the
office of President to the United
States faithfully. . .
Obama . . . that I will execute . . .
Roberts . . . faithfully the office of
President of the United States . . .
Obama . . . the office of President of
the United States faithfully . . .
Roberts . . . and will to the best of my
ability . . .
Obama . . . and will to the best of my
ability . . .
Roberts . . . preserve, protect and
defend the Constitution.
Obama . . . preserve, protect and
defend the Constitution.
Roberts So help you God?
Obama So help me God.
Tim Reid Washington
For all his famed eloquence, the
moment for which Barack Obama had
strived so hard began with fluffed lines
and a nervous laugh. More than two
million people looking on in Washington’s National Mall caught their
breath, almost unbelieving.
As he prepared to be sworn in as
America’s 44th president, Mr Obama
faced John Roberts, the US Chief
Justice: two of America’s most
eloquent men surrounded by 22 panes
of bullet-proof glass. Mr Obama raised
his right hand, and placed his left on
the Lincoln Bible, the one used for the
inauguration of the sixteenth
president in 1861.
Everything was still. A hush
descended. Then an extraordinary
thing happened: in the midst of the
ceremony that would confirm him as
President, this dazzling orator seemed
to freeze.
Mr Roberts began: “I, Barack
Hussein Obama . . .”
Mr Obama cut in: “I, Barack . . .”
before the Chief Justice had reached
the bit about solemnly swearing. Mr
Roberts cut across him. Mr Obama
paused. Mr Roberts then repeated the
right words but in the wrong order.
It was a relief, in a way, to learn that
even “No-Drama Obama” could
become flustered before an estimated
worldwide television audience of
2.5 billion.
Yet on this day, and before this vast
Washington crowd, it was easy to
forgive Mr Obama his nerves.
As he emerged from the white marbled splendour of the US Capitol and
into the inauguration arena, he was
met with a distant roll of thunder. The
wall of sound that erupted more than
a mile away at the Washington Monument roared towards the US Capitol
like a giant wave. “O-BA-MA! O-BAMA! O-BA-MA!” When the soon-tobe President looked up, and outwards,
he saw an immense, beautiful, but
possibly intimidating sight: a vast gathering of humanity as far as the eye
could see, a shimmering ocean of hope
and expectation, lit by the midday sun.
As Mr Obama stumbled through
the swearing-in, close behind him sat
an impassive George W. Bush, who
perhaps felt like tapping his successor
on the shoulder to whisper: “See? Not
as easy as it looks, is it, Mr Hotshot?”
It did not matter, for within seconds
Mr Roberts had declared: “Congratulations, Mr President.” The people leapt
into the air. Some wept, but most
cheered as a 21-gun salute boomed
across the Mall.
At times the scene was almost
vaudevillian. When a giant screen
beamed pictures of Dick Cheney
being pushed to the ceremony in a
wheelchair — the former Vice-President pulled a back muscle on Monday
— the crowd laughed. When Mr Bush
was announced, many booed.
Just before Mr Obama was sworn
in, Aretha Franklin sang My Country
’Tis of Thee. She wore what surely
must be one of the most spectacular
hats to have graced the Western Steps
of Congress — an immense grey felt
affair with a diamond-studded bow
the size of a small propeller.
She was watched by, among others,
the boxing promoter Don King, who
on this day wore a jacket of such
extravagant design that for once his
frazzled hairstyle was upstaged. On
the left breast sat an image of US
soldiers raising the flag at Iwo Jima.
On the right was a picture of Mount
Rushmore, and on the back a map of
America with the words “The United
States of America, In God We Trust”.
Already the inauguration has been
recorded in millions of images beamed
around the world. Yet Malia, Mr
Obama’s ten-year-old daughter,
reminded everyone that for her it was
an intensely personal affair seeing her
Daddy become the new Commanderin-Chief. She took photographs of him
with her digital camera throughout.
Mr Obama’s sobering speech
boomed out of loudspeakers all the
way to his hero, Abraham Lincoln, at
the other end of the Mall. Yet it was
the words of America’s first President
— George Washington — that he
used when he proclaimed: “Let us
brave once more the icy currents, and
endure what storms may come.”
Thunder-struck Obama lost for words
Huge crowds on the streets and in the bars of
Washington gave an emotional welcome to
their new President, writes Robert Crampton
SHANNON STAPLETON / REUTERS
Online
The Times newspaper uses simple headlines
and iconic imagery to great effect. Special
historic occasions like the presidential
inauguration are an opportunity to play to
its strengths as one of the world’s papers
of record. Here we see the combination of
foreign correspondent reporting, thorough
attention to detail and dense graphical
information to give the reader a
substantial product.
26 Chapter 2
Editorial formats 27
Newspapers
Harold Evans, editor of The Sunday Times from 1967
to 1981, wrote a series of seminal books on newspaper
editing, layout and typography that are still used in
journalism schools. In Book Five: Newspaper Design,
he said:
‘A newspaper is a vehicle for transmitting news and
ideas. The design is an integral part of that process.
We begin with a blank sheet of newsprint and a
mosaic of ideas we want to communicate, and it is
the function of newspaper design to present that
mosaic in an organized and comprehensible way.
To do this, the newspaper designer uses text type,
display type, photographs, line work, white space
and a sequence of pages in the most fitting
combinations.’
This is probably as succinct and accurate a
description of newspapers as you will find anywhere.
But Harold Evans didn’t have the internet and mobile
media to contend with. The immediacy of these
delivery media has now forced newspapers to provide
a different service to their readers, and required
designers to respond accordingly. As Mark Porter,
former creative director at The Guardian, explains:
‘Many papers are now less concerned with simply
reporting and more with providing background,
perspective and interpretation. Rather than just
telling readers what happened, these papers now
have to help them understand the significance of
events, and encourage them to think. Design has to
respond to this in a number of ways. As stories get
longer and more complex, rational and readable
The logo on the front page of the
Portuguese colour daily Publico is iconic;
the use of a flower image is bold and
symbolic, balanced by the gravitas of the
small headshots below. This tabloid front
page uses scale dramatically and
combines it with a thoroughly modern
typographic look.
Publico’s inside pages have a magazine feel,
with dense, structured content packing in four
stories. A common byline treatment helps the
reader to navigate entry points to the stories.
The coloured panel indicates a different kind of
content and the vertical columns balance the
horizontal axis, intro and headline, while the
cut-out image on the pull quote adds a little air.
28 Chapter 2
page layouts and typography become increasingly
important. And visual journalism – intelligent use
of photography, infographics and layout – has also
become an essential tool for editors.
The best thing about working on a newspaper is
the opportunity to work with such a wide range of
incredibly intelligent and knowledgeable people.
The worst is the lack of control over the detail.
Most newspaper pages are not laid out by trained
designers. This is very difficult for magazine-trained
art directors to adjust to!’
Mark Porter, Design Director, Mark Porter Associates
Digital newspapers
In the early days of digital format, newspapers
published the same pages online as in print by using
PDFs on their websites. Since then a more interactive
approach has been developed and is now enhanced by
the use of GPS tracking. With more people buying
mobile devices, news organizations have begun
exploring GPS as an advertising tool. News services
can link in to advertisers, based either on the reader’s
interests or his or her location. This enables news
organizations to retain important advertising revenue
that was once generated by print advertising.
Today, editorial news designers need to be able to work
with the developers of digital platforms and require a
basic knowledge of coding. They must understand the
verbal language that developers use so that they can
work with them on keeping the visual identity of the
publication intact once the pages are processed by
content management systems. These systems
distribute page designs onto the different platforms
for mobile and tablet. They enable the change of
scale required for each device, which makes a huge
difference to the reader’s perception of the storytelling.
Newspaper sizes
Although there are many other sizes for newspapers
(in particular, a number of European newspapers
publish in sizes between a Berliner and a broadsheet),
the majority of papers worldwide use one of three
formats: tabloid, Berliner or broadsheet. Dimensions
are as follows:
Broadsheet (or Nordic/Nordisch) approximately
56 x 43.2cm (22 x 17in)
Berliner (or Midi) approximately 47 x 31.5cm
(18½x 12½in)
Tabloid (also known as Half Nordic or Compact)
approximately 35.5 x 25.5–30.5cm (14 x 10–12in)
Broadsheet Berliner Tabloid
Editorial formats 29
Common digital myths debunked
The arrival of the tablet marks the death of print
False The introduction of the iPad in 2010 has not
changed everything; magazine titles and editorial brands
are the same as they were before its launch. Tablets are
fantastic devices that offer more interactive possibilities.
Readers don’t read long text on digital devices
False The idea that people use mobile devices for an
instant hit when they are on the go is a myth. Since the
improvement of on-screen legibility, there is evidence
that readers read long-form text on digital devices.
There are new ways to view information quickly and
to store text for reading later, such with in apps like
Instapaper. Reading habits have changed, however,
and in 2012 statistics show that the average length of
an online session has lengthened from a quick update
to between 17 and 31 minutes.
Readers prefer to read editorial on desktop screens
False By the time this book is published, the amount
of data being downloaded through desktop browsers
on PCs will have been overtaken by the amount
downloaded by mobile devices. It appears that the best
computer is the one that you take with you. Mobile
devices are used even when people are not on the
move, with 84 per cent usage being from the home in
2012. This is changing our behaviour, and reading
magazines and newspapers is increasingly becoming
something we can do while watching television or
consuming some other kind of media. Editors are
realizing that they no longer have the undivided
attention of their audience.
Small-run print publications will survive
True Independent publishers fiercely champion print
and there will always be print publications as long
as we can afford the paper to print them on. The design
community continues to play with print formats and
readers seem to like this. Cheaper digital printing
makes it easier than ever to print a short run
publication. A good example is the Newspaper
Club, one of the websites where you can go to
upload your editorial material and have it printed
or published online.
Large print publications will not survive
False The giant media companies are less sentimental
than independent publishers about print because the
overheads for the traditional model of print and
distribution are so expensive. Familiar titles have
ceased to print and have moved to a paywall website,
using responsive design across mobile and desktop.
The publication has survived and in 2012 won the
Society of Newspaper Designers (SND) best-designed
news website. News weeklies, such as Newsweek, also
closed their print operation in 2012. Such large
publications, however, may be resurrected in another
form in the future.
Digital terminology
Frictionless experience
A website or app’s user experience (referred to as UX)
that is smooth and describes the ideal journey
between different sections of a site without frustrating
layers of navigation, e.g. having to go to the home page
or log in again.
Geo-targeting
A marketing term for enabling content to be directed
straight to a reader depending on their physical
location. Publishers can use this to tailor both editorial
and advertising content, e.g. restaurant listings. Mobile
devices need to be GPS-enabled.
Global Positioning System (GPS)
A satellite-based navigation system that provides
location and time information to devices such as those
in cars, smartphones and tablets.
Liquid layout
Design software can adjust rectangular page layouts
slightly between different device screen sizes. Liquid
layouts are cost effective, but typographers and
photographers often dislike their work being stretched.
Paywall
A system where internet users pay to access content.
Some newspapers use paywalls on their websites to
generate revenue following the general decline in print
subscriptions and advertising revenue.
Phablet
A tablet with the added functionality of a phone.
30 Chapter 2
Magazines
Mainstream consumer magazines
and news-stand titles in print
In a bookshop in New York or London, a news-stand in
Barcelona or a magazine outlet in China, you will find
hundreds of consumer magazines all screaming for
the customer’s attention through a combination of
their choice of cover image, cover mounts, cover lines,
brand recognition and appeals to reader loyalty. For a
medium whose imminent death was widely predicted
with the growth of the internet, the magazine market
remains both international and vibrant in its appeal.
Now, however, the printed magazine is only one
member of a family of outputs. In fashion and lifestyle,
the glossy printed pages remain a tactile pleasure,
but this is no longer true of news and special-interest
magazines, where the printed publication might be
the secondary product.
The majority of consumer titles – including women’s,
men’s, business, leisure, news, style and special interest –
can be broken down further into different areas,
interests and genres, each with its own target audience
and often appearing in different country editions.
Independent publications (selfpublished magazines and zines)
The worldwide appetite for not only consuming
magazines but also creating them seems to be
insatiable, and nowhere is this more apparent than in
the rise of independently published zines (a small
circulation ‘fanzine’ with minority interest) and
special-interest publications, which cater to niche
audiences worldwide. These publications all hope to
offer readers something that the mainstream titles,
with their pursuit of huge circulation numbers, don’t.
They are not afraid to indulge in long-form writing
online and are seen as a powerful force in emerging
graphic trends, crossing over into other areas such as
art, architecture, photography, fashion and music.
Adbusters is the ultimate example of an
independent magazine, founded in Canada
in 1989 as an anti-consumerist, proenvironmental organization. It continues
to challenge the establishment with its
international campaigns such as Buy
Nothing Day and Digital Detox Week.
Fear and loathing at the BBC
China: who’s in, Hu’s out
Sex and the Pentagon
Japan’s new video-game champions
NOVEMBER 17TH–23RD 2012 Economist.com Gay marriage goes global
The time-bomb at
the heart of Europe
A 14-PAGE SPECIAL REPORT ON FRANCE
Editorial formats 31
Using elements from parent titles for
supplements may seem the only way to
ensure a brand is consistent, but international
design consultant Mario Garcia believes that
’beyond placing the logo somewhere,
supplements should have a life and identity of
their own; readers are smart and will know the
parent publication. Supplement design should
be adventurous, and the typography more
relaxed and not that of the newspaper. Photos
should be bigger, more colour, better quality
paper.’ The San Francisco Chronicle Magazine
(left) takes this on board, with great use of
full-page illustrations and wide columns to
differentiate its tone and style.
The Economist exists in print format and
has a successful free app. Subscribers get
straightforward news, designed with clarity.
There is no overreliance on interactive
content, instead links to relevant articles
and websites prevail, staying true to the
mother brand.
profile of a weekly news magazine art director
Richard Turley, Bloomberg Businessweek
Richard Turley originally worked with Mark Porter at The
Guardian on various projects, including specials, books and the
redesign of the newspaper. Turley is now creative director of
Bloomberg Businessweek in New York. The success of this
magazine began when he arrived in 2009 and with his team
began to breathe new life into the financial publication. His style
is to integrate bold graphics and sharp words to produce
sparkling and memorable poster-like covers. This contemporary
visual style really stands out within the context of financial
magazines. It punches hard and to the point, coolly reminiscent
of 1960s activist graphics. The variety of imagery used on the
covers changes to keep the reader guessing. However, the real
success is due to the combination of sharp ideas (using words
as images and clever infographics) with dense analytical
content in a weekly magazine format.
Design awards from the Design and Art Direction association
(D&AD) and Society of Publication Designers (SPD) recognize
Turley’s redesign of Bloomberg Businessweek. One accolade
from the SPD says:
‘It’s a look that fuses the formatting brilliance of New York
and the smart visual approach of The New York Times
Magazine, with a hierarchy and architecture lifted from the
best British and European publications (The Guardian chief
among them). Most impressively, Businessweek has a high
level of visual intelligence, challenging its readers, pushing
the boundaries of traditional newsweekly and business
magazine design.’- Bob Newman, Grids magazine.
Source www.spd.org
In the following interview, Richard Turley discusses digital design.
What inspires you about magazines for the future?
Small-circulation independent magazines inspire me for the
future. Apart from the odd issue of Vanity Fair I rarely even look
at, let alone buy, big commercial magazines. Equally I have zero
interest in iPad mags. Just can’t be bothered with them. I’m
a dinosaur – I know that – but for me a magazine should be
printed on paper. Actually that’s a lie. I look at one mag, and
that magazine is, somewhat shamefully, the London Evening
Standard’s ES Magazine. Fridays just aren’t Fridays without the
ES Magazine. And that’s a PDF reader. Which is more than fine
for me. I like websites. I especially like websites on my iPad.
Can designing for digital editions be as satisfying as
designing for print when you are dealing with dense content?
I haven’t done much digital design. I quite enjoy what I have
done. But for me the exciting thing about digital design is the
‘design’ is often the least important part. It’s all about strong,
simple editorial ideas. Once you have the framework, there is far
less messing around with fonts and all the (quite often) dumb
bells and whistles that magazine design has become. (I say that
being a practitioner of dumb bells and whistles magazine design.)
You love Twitter. Is it your favourite way of sharing information?
I like Twitter and Tumblr. Twitter more than Tumblr. I share
using both, but my default would be Twitter. I don’t think I share
that much. I use Twitter far more to learn than to share.
Editorial designers need skills. Which digital crafts do you
think are needed alongside the traditional print crafts?
I’m not really a digital designer so not sure I can answer that.
I think the most important trait an editorial designer needs is
endless inquisitiveness and a desire to communicate and share.
2012
U.S. complains that
China is unfairly
subsidizing its
auto parts
industry
Car TIreS
amerICan JobS CreaTed by ChIneSe CompanIeS
If investment
from China remains
on track, Chinese
businesses
will employ
200,000 to 400,000
americans by 2020
aUTo naTIonS
american cars, the
third-most-popular
foreign autos in
China, made up
14 percent of
total sales
in 2010
2012
U.S. lodges
a complaint
that China is
choking off
rare earth
supplies
2012
Three hours later,
China lodges
complaint about
U.S. tariffs on 30
Chinese products
2011
2011
2008
2008
2007: 8k
2012: 27k
2008 Co2 emissions, metric tons per capita
China: 5.2 tons
U.S. 17.3 tons
ChIna’S holdIngS of U.S. TreaSUry SeCUrITIeS
1.2t
1.0
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
2001 2008 2011
more
TarIffS
▲158% from
end of 2008
The U.S. and China have grown closer in
the last four years, bound together by an
increasing flow of goods and investments.
At the same time the countries have also
exchanged complaints through the World
Trade Organization, arguing about everything
from chickens to rare earth minerals.
U.S. ImporTS of ChIneSe U.S. eXporTS of goodS and goodS and SerVICeS SerVICeS To ChIna
amerICanS STUdyIng ChIneSe
The number
of U.S.
students
taking the
ap Chinese
language
Test is
up ▲187%
2007
3,261
2010
9,357
reSpeCT
U.S. imports from
China totaled
$412 billion in 2011,
up from $349 billion
in 2008
◼ $1 billion
U.S. exports to China
totaled $132 billion in
2011, up from $86 billion
in 2008
2009
Congress bans
imports of
Chinese chicken
over avian flu
concerns
2009
China protests
U.S. ban at
the WTo
poUlTry
2009
China protests
U.S. tariffs
on Chinese car
tires
2010
WTo backs China,
says U.S. ban was
discriminatory
and unscientific
2010
U.S. complains
that China is
unfairly propping
up its wind power
industry 2012
China says new
U.S. law is
discriminatory,
appeals to WTo
2010
China slaps
tariffs on
U.S. poultry
2009
U.S. complains that
China is unfairly
restricting
exports of raw
materials
2011
U.S. launches WTo
complaint against
China’s tariffs
on U.S poultry
imports
2010
U.S. accuses
China’s state-owned
credit-card company
of shutting
U.S. out
2012
2012
WTo calls on
China to end
discrimination
2012
Congress passes
law saying it’s
oK to tax imports
the U.S. believes
are unfairly
subsidized
WTo SpaTS
ChIna dIreCT InVeSTmenT
In The U.S.
◼ fossil fuels and chemicals
◼ Industrial
machinery
◼ aero, auto,
and transport
◼ renewable
energy
hospitality
and real
estate
◼ electronics and IT
metals and minerals
health, bio, and pharmaceuticals
financial and business services
Consumer products
logistics
2011
2010
2009
2008
SoUrCeS rhodium group, World education Services, Undp, U.S. department of homeland Security, College board, University of Southern California, bea, Coca-Cola, WIpo, U.S.-China business Council, office of the U.S. Trade representative, U.S. department of the Treasury
paTenT applICaTIonS
2008 2011
4,455 10,545
24,527 28,457
Chinese applications in the U.S.
U.S. applications in China
ChIneSe per-CapITa
SerVIngS of CoCa-Cola
2008 2011
28 38
americans drank 403
servings of Coca-Cola
last year
Chimerica
applICaTIonS for enTrepreneUr VISaS
Chinese applications
◼ Total applications
0 1k 2k 3k 4k
’08
’09
’10
’11
ChineSe STUdenTS in The U.S.
▲ 135% 2008 2012
84k 197k
Top 10 U.S. eXporTS To ChIna (2011)
power generation equipment
oil seeds and fruits
electrical machinery/equipment
Vehicles, excluding rail
aircraft and spacecraft
optics and medical equipment
plastics
pulp and paperboard
Copper
organic chemicals
$10.8b
10.7
7.2
6.4
6.3
5.2
5.0
3.8
3.7
3.5
9.7%
-3.1%
-16.6%
55.6%
10.8%
8.3%
7.2%
27.1%
32.7%
17.8%
Top 10 U.S. ImporTS from ChIna
electrical machinery/equipment
power generation equipment
Toys, games, sports equipment
furniture
footwear
apparel (knitted)
apparel (not knitted)
plastics
Iron and steel
Vehicles, excluding rail
$98.7b
94.9
22.6
20.5
16.7
15.1
15.0
10.9
8.6
8.1
8.7%
14.7%
-9.4%
2.7%
5.1%
7.4%
1.8%
13.0%
18.0%
17.0%
By Jennifer Daniel and Caroline Winter
68
August 29 — September 4, 2011 | businessweek.com
March 21 — March 27, 2011 | businessweek.com
Editorial formats 33 profile of a weekly news magazine art director
Turley’s irreverent oil cover from 29 August,
2011 (left), shows that mobile media is a
powerful addition to print and is a vibrant and
exciting medium to work in. The rock and roll
treatment of both the image and the type here
shows Bloomberg Businessweek is up there
in the realms of Rolling Stone for visual
treatment. Arresting covers like this proved
that the redesign demonstrated the title’s
confidence in itself and in its readers as
intelligent viewers.
This bold, minimal graphic treatment of the
Japanese flag on Bloomberg Businessweek
(right) stands out in the weekly market among
some other fussy covers.
Bloomberg Businessweek delivers different
covers for iPad and print, but they are all
related to the popular website, full of business
data. The graphic images are created by art
director Richard Turley and then repeated
throughout all the different deliveries of the
publication and all its constituent parts.
34 Chapter 2
Supplements
When The Sunday Times launched a full-colour glossy
magazine with its newspaper in 1962, a whole new
form of publishing was born. Supplements had been
around in the US since the end of the nineteenth
century, but the sheer pizzazz, gloss and production
values of this new form of magazine made them an
instant success. They quickly came to have a cachet
and regard in design circles that matched those for
the highest-quality magazines, and in their 50-year
history they have attracted some of the world’s best
designers, delivering some of the world’s best editorial
design. The need to brand and express the title as part
of a much bigger family – the newspaper it comes with,
which has a particular tone, stance and readership –
yet give it a distinct identity of its own, is a particularly
exciting challenge for designers, who can experiment
with elements such as fonts, layouts and formats with
greater freedom than the designer of news-stand titles.
Add to this good budgets (because newspaper
proprietors know that readers will buy their paper if
they particularly like the magazine or supplement),
and designing newspaper supplements becomes one
of the best editorial-design jobs there is.
!
‘Design is at the forefront of establishing
a relationship with the reader. It telegraphs
the content, spirit and forward-thinking
qualities of the publication and gives the
reader an instant relationship with the spirit
of the magazine.’
Janet Froelich, Creative Director, Real Simple
The gothic ‘T’ logo signals the style magazine
section of The New York Times, but it is the
striking headshot that invites the reader in to
this fall fashion issue. Photographers capture
the moment with striking lighting and styling.
The pure graphic impact of The New York
Times Magazine is clear. Janet Froelich,
the art director, commissioned strong,
conceptual photographs to fit within an
editorial brief in close collaboration with
photographers. Such great photographic
details can be enhanced by typography: here
the extreme exaggerated drop cap draws the
eye to the curve of the jacket.
Editorial formats 35
above and above right: inside front cover and
contents page from M-real for paper
specifiers. Every issue of the magazine
changes completely, with the exception of the
page size, the grid system and a diagonal
corner pattern at the start of each feature,
while the majority of the design elements
provide newness.
Customer magazines and
business-to-business
Customer magazines have developed the art of
branding into an integrated part of the business world,
merging visual branding with product placement and
marketing. The magazines began by being exclusively
available to users of a particular consumer product or
service, but are now inventive and cross-platform,
creating communities of people who like the same
brand of product or service and who like to talk about it
on social media. Unlike consumer magazines, they are
financed by businesses and seen as an essential way
of promoting the ‘good news’ about their brands. Brand
marketers understand that for a customer magazine to
work well, the content has to be informative and
entertaining, and the brand promotion element should
remain subtle and understated. These dual needs
mean that much more is expected of a designer in
customer publishing, maintains Jeremy Leslie,
creative consultant at magCulture:
‘There is little difference in terms of design skills, but
much in terms of strategy, thinking and broader
creativity. Consumer magazines need to stand out on
the shelf, but cannot risk alienating their existing
audience as they seek to attract new readers. Customer
magazines are interested in standing out in every
and any way they can. They have to demand the
attention of the reader in an appropriate way for the
brand or service they are promoting. So there is far
more emphasis on ideas and conceptual thinking –
what can a magazine be?’
!
Business-to-business (B2B) magazines are
a vast area of activity, often overlooked in
the consumer world. This area of publishing
includes the branding of editorial
communications within the public and
private sectors. Often design is not a priority
in these journals, newsletters and blogs as
they are member-based and not sold to the
public. However, there are some exceptions –
The Lawyer magazine and the website
designed by Esterson Associates are good
examples. Organizations such as the
Periodical Publishers Association Services
(PDAS) promote good practice in the B2B
sector and run awards.
36 Chapter 2
above and left: cover and pages from
Carlos, a publication for first-class
passengers of Virgin Atlantic. The visual
identity is very strong, but its strength is
also its weakness; it is defined as much by
what it does not do (no photography, no
full colour) as what it does.
The marketplace: what’s out there?
• Each month, over 30 million copies of magazines
are bought through subscription or news-stands
in the US.
• In 2004 American magazines numbered 18,821
titles.
• The average American supermarket carries 700
titles, and may have 300 to 400 of those titles on
the shelf at any given time.
• There are over 120 Asian–American magazine
titles published in the US.
• In 2002 Germany saw 224 news-stand launches
and more than 200 customer magazine launches.
• The UK has around 3,000 magazines, with about
200 of these accounting for more than 90 per cent
of the total sales.
• Each year in the US around 1,000 titles are
proposed, of which around a third make it to a
launch issue.
US STATISTICS from the Magazine Publishers of America and Audit
Bureau of Circulations (ABC), based on 2002 sales/circulation.
UK STATISTICS from Nielsen BookData.
Digital magazine publishing
In magazine publishing, the type of market dictates
the content and mode of delivery. In fashion
publishing, print editions still host glossy
advertisements and uphold high production values,
but the sister websites offer enhanced moving-image
content and exclusive reader offers. In lifestyle
publishing, such as Real Simple in the US, the
magazine content feeds into the website, and in turn
the website introduces readers to the print version and
draws in subscribers.
+ TAP FOR PIECRUST RECIPE
RECIPES BY SUE LI AND DAWN PERRY PHOTOGRAPHS BY PAUL SIRISALEE
FOOD STYLING BY SUSAN SUGARMAN
coconut
custard
chocolatewhiskey pecan
gingery
pumpkin
cranberry
apple
shoofly sweet potato
raspberry
buttermilk
chocolate
cream
lemon
cheesecake
peanut
butter
TAP PIE FOR RECIPE
10 ideas for: pie
food QUICK TAKES 1 OF 1
gingery pumpkin pie HANDS-ON: 10 MIN. | TOTAL: 5 HR. | SERVES 8
Whisk together 1 15-oz. can pure pumpkin puree, 3/4 cup each sugar
and heavy cream, 2 large eggs, 1 tbsp. grated fresh ginger,
1/2 tsp. ground cinnamon, 1/4 tsp. kosher salt, and a pinch of ground
cloves. Pour into an unbaked 9-in. piecrust and bake at 350° F
until the center is set but still slightly wobbly, 40 to 50 min. Let cool.
Before serving, top with 1 tbsp. pepitas (hulled pumpkin seeds).
All you need to know to keep
the stuff in your refrigerator,
freezer, and pantry in peak condition.
(Plus, learn when those leftovers
really should be tossed.)
THE ULTIMATE
FOOD-STORAGE
GUIDE
WRITTEN BY ELIZABETH PASSARELLA ADDITIONAL REPORTING BY RACHEL SHELASKY
PHOTOGRAPHS BY JAMIE CHUNG PROP STYLING BY KAITLYN DUROSS FOOD STYLING BY KAREN EVANS
Editorial formats 37
Social magazines
The most innovative companies started to gather
together content that the user defined in their history
or indicated that they ‘liked’. These magazines were
named ‘social magazines’ in the US and were
pioneered by apps such as Flipboard and Editions
from AOL, and build-on social media tools such as
Twitter and Facebook. The Editions app brings in
content from feeds supplied by other AOL news
providers and combines this with local content,
enabled by the use of GPS. These kinds of magazines
are a hybrid blend of a tightly edited branded product
and an aggregated content feed and encourage the
user to ‘share’, in a similar way that friends used to
tear out printed pages to show each other.
The slick and clean look of Real Simple
underlines the aspirational values of the
brand. Using a selected colour palette, it looks
beautiful in print but also works well on the
tablet. The interactive videos present the
how-to approach and are an example of
enhanced content.
The simplicity of complex editorial content on
an iPad is a joy for both the reader and the
designer. Here, you just tap a finger on the
little pies and the recipe pops into the central
area. Lots of information is held as latent
content within this simple page.
The success of Flipboard combines the power
of social networking sites with content drawn
in from other sites according to the reader’s
data profile. The editorial content is
automatically generated. It is designed to
be a one-stop shop of the user’s interests.
CURIOSITY Febuary 2012
8 9
The Names
of Phobias
Ever wondered why many phobias have bizarre names such as Oikophobia (fear
of bees) and hippopotomonstrosesquippedaliophobia (fear of long words )?
Salomi Desai discovers the origins of the names of phobias from Greek and Latin.
CURIOSITY Febuary 2012
4 5
Adisitatio. Tatquia sitas sum accus as nisti apicatus aditiae aut eos es alit
mos dis in nim ut hil es in restem nemque sunte re pribus modioribus,
quatatur, officil ipsa qui dolum es eveniet ea dolora int lligentur? Quiatis am
nusande ntium, vendele stioraerum apicilit arumquo cus ipiscium quate volor sus
dolorepta natus, quas moditam ut et molup tatios il intio.
Menim aut volut alistiur maio ommodio restota voloreh entiumque et, consequasse si rero que isinum exceped ictotae cullita sperum corem po rianditiis exceatur aut recus eum solorerovid enetur as sa volut hario eum re, omnis non rate
volorescit faccum hicipsam eratinus int utatur as verum, simod molorem porepre
peditassim aut evenet pla quas ex et es teturest repero vid quam ipsant volorep
ellent, offic tet aboreseque laudit harum eaqui delles dit voloresequas cusam,
nectatibus vendele stioraerum apicilit arumquo.
Torum rescia volupta ssequid etureic temquas et, sincia volla volup tatet incip
samet offici nimus es ditati sitas doluptate volupit abor maiost am hari ommo
invellabo. Cimusda nis rectasi voluptatur, quisci re dendi aut dolescil moluptat et
dolorehende officilis consequodios rerum, voloreh entotatiis volor rem. Nam ex
eum eum haruntiorum rest, ut omnimus eost volorest, cus re cus rataquate sae
consendem id ut volorendi il ipsantur serchil lorrum estrum qui alit fugitam nobis
repellor aditatate voluptaepuda corestia de volo es ea conse est, estotat.
Les rero blatur ataes eos ea quisi simpereptat.Ed quae necae inctias se nobitatem
inim ullit possit arcimilita ducilibus ab ilit est eum faci blam et utene nustia venimus
rerspissit quas velitat iistotasit reribus, inciendi quos debis quas volorio ratempe
pe cum aliquia spiendi tatibus, quid maximus aboremqui simin et ullaut adis experum aut es eum dolupta conse cullestium volo rem. Neque sandic tet ex ernam
evellup tassimusda quas idemporem ullit ligenim iunt. Icaborem rae voluptatem
non nem quat. Duciassimos in ea ni vercit repero eris dolecest imenis volor aut ea
im rem. Nemquaecabo. Ped eum videndam ea nossum ilibusanda dist, cones auta
eum videndam vendele stioraerum apicilit arumquo.
Optam eatiatur mo inciderfero tem. Hentio con corenie ndignihil et quis repudit
delestiorio. Ita consequ ibuste nobitem fuga. Nem atiorerum, quiassimo imporitium
re eturehent aut faccusapit quos iur?
Dolori vent aut qui consequi ut dolorum aut enitas nim ipsant, solut quia commolut
hillaut expelicipsa verci aciendigendi dolest alis aute cone pe rum id quodit odi
debistia sim dunt.Et molorio. Nem eatiosam, ium eum esti officipsum eat.
At ellupta con evenihi litium cor molorio od ma cum harchicit alique pa explabo.
Et reribus di cone con pliquo evenistior am quas dolupta ssuntist doluptas et que
velicilicium qui bea dolupta temporitium et ommo quod magnam iumque qui is
endi dolut volorestem quibus dipsa ventium fuga. Ro experitae aut lanis aut alitisc
iumqui blaccum illes dellauda dicatur, volupta vellab iditatur, quame plique aut aut
ea nectat andi testium receria doluptam que volorro rentota erfernate perum fuga.
Itatis di blacipsam cor molorio od ma cum.
Maxim quident illabor epuditi consequi bersper oviducipsant quiam laut optur?
Hil expersp ientoratecti ut is nias et aut voluptatur? Quissit ipsam volut moluptae
consedit vide officto et fuga. Hari nost, nimin est que officiis duciusanis imilitas
et porem quae sequundam qui odit as dolorepe voloris as dolorrum explibusda
ent quia sequi untessint magnatem voloris as et elenihi llumquas et maxim fac
cae voles ex expelent abo. Veriam rem excerumendit fuga. Ovid explam volupta
volectur? Qui autae voluptatur, ut fuga. Vit quam faccaboria volutet expliquaspid
quo eate nimi, nostium el maios untumqu con nobitis tiunti duciusanis.
Are you afraid to enter?
1
Issue 1 Febuary 2012
Curiosity Why are we the way we are
What are you afraid of?
38 Chapter 2
Brief One
Concepts
Tutors, use this as a basis for your own brief, and build
on and add references that you think are relevant to your
part of the world. This is aimed at first-year BA or BFA
students and can be adapted for higher levels.
Students or those teaching themselves, use these briefs
to give you a structure for your personal learning.
Generate your own photography. Get your friends to
critique your work and take in their feedback.
Aim
To capture the feeling of the moment by inventing a
concept for a magazine on a contemporary subject.
The brief
Use your imagination to think of a contemporary subject
and then follow this up with research into the kind of
stories you would like to feature in your magazine.
To get started, brainstorm and create ideas for at least
five different magazines. Draw up each idea with a felt
pen on a separate sheet of paper. A masthead (also
referred to as a logo) and an outline sketch are sufficient.
Play with combining your ideas.
Choose one of the concepts and collect visual material
that suits the content of the magazine. Research other
magazines that have related content, and clubs or
communities that share a similar interest. What is their
approach? Visit libraries or independent bookshops and
also seek out online magazines. Start by taking clippings
from magazines or photocopies of photographs you
think will suit the content. Make a note of any fonts or
illustrations that could enhance the storytelling. Keep
adding to your collection of material. Refine the idea of
your magazine into a cohesive ten-word manifesto, e.g.
My magazine is called…. It is about….
Create a moodboard which demonstrates the concept
of your magazine. Edit down all your created and
researched images and stick them on a piece of A3 or A2
card. The aim here is to create a visual style linked to the
content. Write some cover lines and think of a name for
your magazine. This will become the masthead.
This idea for a magazine from student
Salomi Desai is all about superstitions
in everyday life. The idea gave Salomi
a chance to play with photos and
images that she could create herself
by shooting everyday things and
making them look extraordinary.
1
Curiosity Why are we the way we are
Issue 3 April 2012 Do you need to clean it?
1
Is it your lucky day?
Curiosity Why are we the way we are
Issue 2 March 2012
CURIOSITY March 2012
2 3
Are superstitions really the result of feeble minds (As Edmund Burke
suggested), or have we learnt to keep them for more practical and
commonsensical reasons? Salomi Desai finds out more.
Wisdom or Folly?
CURIOSITY Febuary 2012
2 3
The Infinity
of Phobias
Just how many phobias are there? The only answer to that is that they can be
of any and everything. In fact there is even a phobia on that- panophobia, and
a phobia of phobias- phobophobia. So what are the the ‘common’ phobias or at
least the ones popular enough to make it on most lists? Salomi Desai finds out.
2
Porro doluptatum quo coribus non pelitataquo
omnis sunt quae volut laudandae veribus es is
eiuritiae rescit perfero odit endaeria nonetur?
Qui recus velesti ntiscitam aut rem aut volorrovid
utem. Et omniaec erum quam, et expeliquis atquam
ad molorun tibus, sequide aut qui re verrum atur,
nossimus eos quiates tiumque qui sum remquam
quat resequas conseque por alictias doluptasim
verro blaborporat expeliquis.
Aquiam estibus, odigent unt ipsae. Temporerum
volorem disquod itibust ionsed quossim poreicilita
cus, oditas que et que maion ea quam lignam none
pore quas sundenis exerrum ad ma quiae volores
el erum facest molorer uptaeru ptatiatio ipid experia
quam fuga. Tiis elicilicid ut vellabor repere poreicae.
Itatempore, quidia vel ipis sinias dolor sitem ipsum
audit optures cidunto qui cum dit pos aut apiet
omnis endi torpore am, ommodig enimaio ritios mod
min nonsequ iandissitis magnimus et explici demque
quamusam ut aspe pellum res quis et eossumq uis
quid quiaectur, qui beratur, toria dunti te possequo
tem fuga ipis sinias. Ut mosam, con re dolorro enda
autestrum repelesto dolora et volorita vellestincte.
Olorisci llandanducil maxim ipidio. Et eium volu ptas
eici ab illabor eptiae omniae velit vendanis pera
ipient quiaspelit fuga. Et et ulpa plabore pratia conet
elessenimus plabore pratia.
Agnite vit aspernation essimint pratem ra parciam
hiliciis qui rerum aut ent occaborpore vent libus
dolum inis anisiti undelen ihillaut re viduci in ratia
volecaest, utempor simo lest, il erepudita dendi
delliquo conseni volo quiduci dolupta cum aliqui il
luptur anihit, tet quis volorerisqui de laut officte rerit
apidesciis num lant volorpor autatureptam auta
volorem derferi sit offictes aut int poribus non corro
omnihil luptatio voloressum lam il eos net quam,
cum ea culparum, nis dolupit volupta sinverum que
sapideni nita si accab ipsandi as nam quam saes
doluptatur sam quam deles etum es ma dollandi
ciam faccat enem rest, volupta tiatquiatur, que cum
quo tem quassum facepro incipicias voluptatquis is
aut mil ipsa voleceaqui reritatur, consequia con rest
aut oditae cup tatis asit eos di sit quis earum sunti
bus dolut volecero bea eatas re eum hiciis maiorem
voluptatet, sam exceate seque peligent quis evel
labo. Parum non ni corecus qui re ni.
CURIOSITY Febuary 2012
CURIOSITY March 2012
6 7
Bizarre Superstions?
• Ibeaqui di ius abo. Nequi aut iure sit magnist, ommolorrum alis
repudi occus escia eos ipsusa ni omnia quam destrum quo
dis am aut initate mperatur re culparum que nonseque praepe
rumqui re nullorumque ellore lendae ex et illa nonsequ atibus
eos quidi imus quae sum.
• Officita temquia nestionsera plabo. Te vera volluptatur aut modici
cori cullam, qui inis reiunti busdam et aliberi asimenectios vidit
etum dolorae. At doluptas quiatur?
• Aspe voluptae vel incitatibus, am qui ut rem sinis delicit, to cup
tius, as sit aboribustis ne nat explabo rerum, ario duciis omnimus
Erferchit dolorum re corpor as
pernatus rerorem voluptaest
ipis magnihici consequae et,
que sam aut qui cumet explanto
cus eossimil is sitionsequi conecte
moloris ipicil exped mod et moditi
aut etur, quiscia persperunt que
nonseque sequatin tis dolore dese
volupitatet lanihil moditam consecte nis nobit faces rem ium dendips anisqui recupta sun tiumque
dolore, occum, apid quo volutem
volorro ea niet latem repreius utem
ditatur, tese accullupta quo tectas
dolum et volorepre dolupit, offic
temporiscia invenimil int, quidus
suntotatem archili.
Itaspie ndanturepuda volupis
ad ut ab ipsa dis reped earcipi
endipsum dis ditas nitiamet aperchi
llanimilla volup tatem. Ita corehene
plis dignis audicia nullanturion et
ipisquunt aut aut volectus et litat
eaque laccus sectat quatem alit,
eicient incius, quis id quia qui que
cone volesen ducit, corporpor aped
et pre inulparcil mi, quid eos dolupti
tempore ne sinisti seque ditati aut
ommodignat velesciam audam ne
coria voluptat voluptatatin rerchillis
in porio molorep elibus ea sum et
evento to vel inullorem facest qui
optatem aditece stibus eature sit,
optat velique sam, cor sincto que
autem susciis voluptat od qui alit
ad qui undestio beris eossimaion re
aut ma sitist, earchillab ipsa ilique
mi, ut fuga. Ut il intiore perspelitiam
faceptaectem rep tatquat omniet
este volore quaera iliquid ex eum
aut am comniscipsa volorro ritior
aut et aut dolo omnihit ionectisciam
ea ped et quas quidelis dolore
sit laut ac cupta volupis eatecum
re, sit quas que volupie ndusda
as eost duntis rehendandit hil et,
omnihic molorpo.
Nemolut in natur a dis aut
estrum que dolupta sperum apis
sanducitam, as aditi aut incim
audaest aut verunte moloribus et,
que plibea quatenihic te sitio eaqui
corpor aut fugit laboremos audae
pratem faccusdamus quatibus,
volupta essunte debis dusanih
icimpore velit iur, consedipsant rep
erfe rovider speliqu asimpos sedi
beatibusciae sit, si nus.Cepedit
atusae int vo loreium quide verspie
ntoreiciumet harum lis as.
Editorial formats 39
At first Desai sketched out ideas with a pencil
and then worked them up to actual size. The
simplicity of these images meant that she
could get started and create stories and
headlines quite easily. She named her
magazine Curiosity – a reference to the
collections of oddities in Victorian
curiosity shops.
40
3
41
Chapter 3 : Covers
Who can ignore the impulse to pick up a copy of a magazine with
a compelling image and masthead? If you can get a viewer to interact
with your printed cover, then you have a potential reader. The digital cover
goes further, functioning as a portal to the content. The reader engages
through the touch of a button and is transported to the editorial content
and moving and interactive elements. The cover also provides a vital
means of establishing the brand message, and we begin this chapter
by considering the importance of branding for any new publication.
42 Chapter 3
Branding and identity
On a new publication the first thing that has to be
established is the brand message, or the identity,
expression and feel of the publication. This is best
explained as the editor and designer working together
to construct a strong bridge across which the client –
the publisher (or self-publisher) – can deliver the
brand and its values to the customer – the reader. Once
this has been done, the actual construction of the
publication can begin, as detailed in Chapters 4, 5 and
6. The graphic design elements of a brand will consist
of logos, colour palettes, typefaces, photography and
illustration. There will also be a set of rules that govern
their use. These elements come together to form the
visual identity that represents a particular brand. With
each issue, the visual identity must be reviewed so
that it is kept fresh and vibrant, retaining the values
and identity of the core brand without simply adopting
a formulaic approach. It is not sufficient to copy the
same look across to different outputs. Each extension
of the identity must be relevant to the format. Key to
doing this successfully is the ability to keep a
recognizable style to the publication, while making
each issue sufficiently different from the last one that
it is instantly recognized by the reader or the potential
reader as a new issue of a familiar, loved object.,
These curious images by artist Noma Bar
were commissioned by Wallpaper* to create
eight global editions, so that wherever you
were in the world a ‘local’ cover appeared on
your issue. At first they each appear
conventionally drawn, but a closer look
reveals these are actually 3D room sets,
painted full-size and incorporating props such
as furniture and lamps. The final series of
images had a fine-art allure and created a
memorable image campaign, playing with
scale and negative space. Their iconic nature
reinforces the brand, playing on its underlying
ideas about the ease of travelling and working
within different countries.
Covers 43
44 Chapter 3
The cover
The first and most important part of any publication on
which to stamp the brand and its values is the cover.
This is the part of the printed magazine that will work
tirelessly for the publisher, both on the news-stand,
where it must get its feel across and stand out from the
competition and where, after purchase, it will continue
to sell the brand values on a more intimate scale to
both the owner and other readers. For digital editions,
the cover serves to reinforce the brand but also acts as
an entry point to the content, part of the navigational
toolkit. The same cover image will appear on the print
edition, on the website, for tablet and for any app,
depending on the preferred formats. An art director
needs to create a cover, therefore, with this variety of
formats in mind. The cover of any publication has an
enormous task – it must be many things to many
people. The publisher has to believe it will deliver
sales. It has to be striking and stand out from the
crowd, drawing the reader to it rather than to its
competitors. If it is a periodical, it has to be familiar to
regular readers but look sufficiently different from its
predecessor so that those readers recognize it as being
a new issue. It has to appeal to potential new readers
without alienating existing readers. It has to express
the publication’s character as well as its content. It
then has to entice potential readers to look inside. So
it’s no wonder that many publishers and designers
spend almost as much time, money and energy on this
one page as on the rest of the publication. If it is digital,
it will likely pop up on Facebook or in a blog, so the
cover must be iconic and work even at thumbnail size.
The power of the cover needs to draw unique users
each month.
Covers 45
Newspaper covers
News no longer sells newspapers. The internet and
mobile media have made newspapers redundant as
the preferred media for breaking news, and newspapers
have had to reposition themselves accordingly. ‘The
old definition was: news is what I find out today that
I did not know about yesterday. My definition of news
today, which I share with my clients, is this: news is
what I understood today, which I found out about
yesterday,’ explains Mario Garcia, design consultant on
a global range of newspapers. Consequently, the early
years of the twenty-first century have seen a great
number of newspaper redesigns, and this is apparent,
above all, on the front page where, for publications
across the board, the desire for impact has become
all-consuming. As Mario Garcia says, newspapers
have to offer readers ‘good stories that surprise, with
photos that have not been shown on television and the
net for the last 24 hours. It’s all about redefining news,
offering surprises and not just reaffirmation.’
Newspaper covers still rely on eye-catching
images and gut-clenching headlines as here
in The Guardian. However, the modern
newspaper selling on the news-stand has to
show a spread of its stories so as to attract
attention. In El País we see there are many
teasers for articles which continue on the
inside in the coloured horizontal banner and
also in the vertical column. Even the main
story about Syria only runs for 17 lines, so as
to squeeze in an advertisement too.
Similarly The Guardian strips four or five
‘turns’ across the bottom of the page. The
designer must find a balance, which should be
predicated on the brand: a quality newspaper,
in particular, will always want to present a
number of stories on its cover. As Mark Porter
says, ‘Turns enable us to get a presence for a
wide range of stories on the front page, which
is essential for a newspaper that aims to give
a broad and balanced view of the day’s news.’
46 Chapter 3
Newspaper designers, who lack luxuries such
as huge images, colour or glossy stock, have
to make a title appealing in a very different
way to magazine designers, as these examples
from the Boston Sunday Globe show.
‘Typography is the key to look and feel – what
readers perceive in the first ten seconds when
their eyes land on a page. It is through the feel
of typography that one conveys seriousness,
youthfulness, playfulness and so on. The
colour palette is the second important criterion.
We react instantly to the combination of type
and colour on a page, and, as a result, white
space and its allocation within the architecture
of the page play the third most important
role,’ says Mario Garcia.
Digital covers
Publishers now see the potential of a cover as an entry
point to a landscape where the editor and advertiser
can interact with the reader. The digital screen format
will alter the nature of the cover image: an image on a
smartphone, for example, will be much smaller in size
than the same image on a printed cover. When
designing digital covers, the two basic principles of
cover design remain the same: a strong iconic image
and cover type that excites and attracts the reader.
Covers on tablets can, of course, allude to the traditional
print heritage, as for example with The New York Times,
which uses a small icon of the paper for fun, part of the
reassurance to the reader that the digital version can
deliver as much as the paper one. The experience of
actually choosing a magazine or newspaper to read on
a screen on mobile media is different to choosing to
read a physical publication. There are many entry
points that lead to a cover – via a website, an app or a
link a friend has sent to you. The designer has to work
around this and remember to keep the masthead and
the brand identity reassuringly simple.
On a touch screen, the cover becomes a visual
to swipe or touch to enter the page. The reader
buys a digital version by getting the package as
a subscription; often the tablet version and apps
come ‘free’ when you subscribe to the print version.
Self-published covers and zines
There are now many opportunities for small
companies to set up their own publications. Selfpublishing can bypass the constraints of printing and
distribution by using technology that prints to order.
As a result, waste is reduced and costs are low. The
independent magazine sector is thriving creatively
and dedicated individuals are producing editorial to
satisfy new niche markets and their fan bases. Social
media also enables publishers to spread the word
about their titles without paying for advertising. The
organization Stack Magazines, for example, runs an
independent magazine group in London. Set up by
Steve Watson, it features titles like Oh Comely, Anorak,
RiDE, Port and Huck. The covers of these magazines
look different to news-stand titles for the obvious
reason that they don’t require so many cover lines and,
therefore, have a cleaner look.
Art director of The Ride Journal, Andy Diprose
has spread the cover image right across the
front and back pages. Being an independent
publication, The Ride has few of the
constraints of the conventional magazine,
such as cover lines and barcodes.
Zines are also part of the independent publishing
sector. A zine is a small-circulation ‘fanzine’, which
has minority interest and is usually reproduced on a
photocopier. Historically they were black-and-white
pamphlets produced firmly outside the mainstream,
often with content that would have been deemed
inappropriate, subversive or slightly obsessive. Both
Dazed & Confused and i-D magazine started as zines.
They were noticed as cultural hotbeds of ideas before
they became magazines. In the 1990s, the New York
Riot Girl scene triggered the production of a number
of homemade and politically challenging zines.
They became a famous barometer of feminist anger
and through word of mouth helped that movement to
gain publicity.
The theory that a zine should be freely available to all
was helped by the arrival of cheap photocopying,
followed by the availability of home digital printing in
the 1990s. Now zine fairs are held around the world
and there is a thriving collectors market. Zines survive
by promoting these niche interests via social media
and blogging.
Custom-made covers
In 2010, Wallpaper* invited readers to custom make
their covers using an online app, choosing from some
limited elements created by artists and designers Nigel
Robinson, James Joyce, Kam Tang, Hort and Anthony
Burrill. Readers submitted their own creations using a
template and then received their printed copy in the
post. As art director Meirion Pritchard explains:
Fire & Knives, a foodie magazine, looks like
a fanzine and is in A5 format. The covers use
illustration instead of food photography,
indicating that this title is unlike any other
foodie magazine. The magazine has little
advertising and exudes a literary air, with a
zealous and critical take on the food industry.
Produced largely by hand by art director Rob
Lowe, some of the pages are drawn and
then scanned directly, avoiding the use of
conventional design publishing software.
This keeps the cost down and the small size
of operation avoids the use of distributors.
These silkscreened zines are produced in
Sydney and use mono colour. They are
created by Neil Edwards, formerly of i-D
magazine. Edwards says, ‘They are like the
little photocopied books I made at Saint
Martins College, each one is different as
I try to keep the imperfections.’
Covers 49
‘The first time we did The Handmade Issue it was to
get manufacturers and designers together and to get
our readers involved as well. We made an app that
allowed readers to combine some elements that our
designers had created. We printed every different
unique design. We had to find a printer who could
produce a good print product. We wanted to push
the print quality. Each reader received a unique cover
of his or her own design. We printed 21,000, each
one different.’
Alistair Hall at We Made This designed a cover
and posted the image on their blog. http://
wemadethis.typepad.com/we_madethis/2010
/06/we-made-this-wallpaper-cover.html
The design awards judges at the Design and
Art Direction association awarded this a
Yellow Pencil in 2011. http://www.dandad.org/
awards/professional/2011/categories/mags/
magazine-newspaper-design/18602/
wallpaper-custom-covers
50 Chapter 3
The development of
covers from 1940
to the present day
1940 – 1950
During the 1940s, magazines in the UK were usually
printed in black-and-white with perhaps colour covers.
Some still resembled 1930s listing magazines, typeset
by hand in metal type. This process restricted the use
of fonts and what advertisers could do. Film magazines
were early examples of specialist titles responding to
the popularity of the cinema. They were cheap, although
during the World War II there was a paper shortage in
the UK and some magazines had to stall production.
In the US, Esquire magazine (launched in 1933)
introduced features written by prominent authors
such as F. Scott Fitzgerald and Ernest Hemingway.
Magazines began using colour on their covers to stand
out on the news-stand. The war also had an impact as
creative talent fled Europe and headed for America,
such as Austrian émigré Henry Wolf (see p.211).
Post-war some of these talented designers, such as
Alexey Brodovitch (see p.208) at Harper’s Bazaar,
introduced European artists like Salvador Dalí and
A.M. Cassandre to the American public. Alexander
Liebermann became art director at American Vogue in
1943, and went on to inspire art directors all over the
US, and in the UK and Europe, with his flair for art
direction and his modern attitude towards
photography, art and the medium of print.
As women returned to the home after the war effort,
women’s magazines, such as Good Housekeeping and
Better Homes and Gardens appeared. The cover images
were important to attract the reader’s attention.
1950 – 1960
The 1950s heralded the birth of modern advertising –
magazines carried adverts for products and services
with a readymade audience of women who stayed at
home after the war effort. Women’s fashion magazines
benefitted from the influx of emigrant talent to the US,
designers escaping from the aftermath of the World
War II. Alexander Leiberman worked at Condé Nast
and brought a whiff of European glamour.
George Lois at Esquire used simple iconic
photographs and collage to communicate
stories. The beauty of his style is that the
text and image spark off one another. This
style has been an inspiration to many art
directors looking for an eye-catching idea
to attract the reader.
A great example of visual confidence in the
brand that might be misplaced if the brand
was not well known. Harper’s Bazaar or Vogue
would still be recognized with barely any of its
logo showing; a less well-known magazine
would not be.
Covers 51
52 Chapter 3
Collaborators included Man Ray and Lee Miller.
Esquire magazine started to print in colour and soon
attracted advertisers. Britain’s recovery after the war
was slower than that of the US, but there was a
crossing over of talent between London and New York.
Magazine covers during this period featured news
items, and reportage photography exposed the
shocking images of war.
1960 - 1970
The use of composition and double-page spreads in
The Sunday Times Magazine set the tone in the UK,
with David King heading a team of young designers
and talent spotting photographers like David Bailey.
Magazine covers of the 1960s reflected the radical
changes taking place in society. Covers dealt with
political issues such as the Vietnam War and the
sexual revolution. The stalwart work at Life magazine
brought news photos into the home of the average
American even before televisions became widely
available. Illustrated News did the same in the UK. The
magazine cover became an important visual window
onto the outside world. Colour printing became more
widely available and advertisements in the US and UK
reflected changes in lifestyle. The 1960s also gave us
the pop icon as a cover image. Celebrity photographers,
such as David Bailey, Richard Avedon and Norman
Parkinson, contributed to memorable covers that still
look striking today.
The seventh issue of Oz magazine is one of
the publication’s most famous, thanks to its
iconic Bob Dylan cover by Martin Sharp. Sharp
exploited new printing techniques to create
an image that expressed the experimental,
druggy mood, music and culture of the time.
Covers 53
1970 – 1980
The 1970s was a decade of burgeoning cultural
change, reflected in editorial design, with magazines
like Rolling Stone and Nova setting exciting new
standards. In the US, Rolling Stone began making its
mark with its political coverage and focus on music
and popular culture. The British magazine Nova was
a woman’s magazine with a politically liberal bias. As
the German magazine Twen had achieved a decade
earlier, these magazines reflected the society around
On Interview magazine, Andy Warhol often
employed both front and back covers to
present a portrait in full frame. On the front it
would look like the traditional star close-up,
but the back gave readers greater insight into
the shoot and the subject.
them with bold cover photography aimed at a restless,
enquiring and youthful readership. In Europe, political
unrest gave rise to perfect opportunities for
photojournalism and in Germany Der Speigel brought
political issues onto their graphic covers.
Designers explored the double-page spread format
with gusto. Elle magazine developed a strong use of
the diagonal, reflecting a departure from the upright
fashion photograph of the 1960s glossies. Magazines
were suddenly a dynamic format, with Interview
Covers 55
magazine using scale to full advantage on its celebrity
cover models. Italian Vogue used Fabien Baron’s strong
sense of art direction, and Neville Brody (see p.216)
brought a typographic flair to his magazines and gave
other designers confidence to explore the grid and
push it further. The specification of type was a skill
that moved from specialist typesetters in type shops to
the in-house Apple Mac (introduced in 1984), giving
birth to the designer being the producer as well.
In the early 1970s, in production terms, magazines
used black-and-white sections and restricted colour
to certain sections, such as covers and features. As
print technology advanced during the decade, colour
printing on four-colour presses became cheaper
and the use of colour became more widespread.
Publications also began to print on gloss papers
and experiment with different sizes and formats.
1980 – 1990
At the beginning of the 1980s, there were a few great
fashion magazines and a handful of men’s titles. The
magazines published by newspapers (supplements)
were an experimental place for fashion and almost the
last bastion of proper reportage photography in print.
Their covers basked in the glory of iconic photography
with few cover lines. In the UK, style magazines like i-D
and The Face really captured the fashion mood. In the
US, interest in technology was triggered as people
became computer owners. There was an interest in
computer-related magazines, such as MacUser which
launched in 1984. In magazine publishing, designers
could play with early digital fonts and designed entire
publications on a screen for the first time. In California,
Emigre designers were experimenting typographically
as they played with the pixel as a design element.
David Carson applied his deconstructed approach to
This Annie Leibovitz cover photo of John
Lennon and Yoko Ono helped establish Rolling
Stone as one of the must-have magazines
of its time. A beautiful cover image, full of
symbolism, it captured the spirit of the time
perfectly. Published by Rolling Stone as a
tribute to the former Beatle, this picture
was taken only five hours before John Lennon
was shot dead outside the Dakota building in
Manhattan in December 1980.
In 1984 Emigre captured the changing mood
in San Francisco as Dutch designer Rudy
VanderLans and his Czech-born wife Zuzana
Licko created an innovative magazine using
Zuzana’s fonts and Macintosh computers.
They used their magazine to experiment with
digitized type and layout forms. Looking back,
it was a real turning point, as desktop
publishing enabled designers to create their
own fonts out of mere pixels and bend the
established rules.
56 Chapter 3
Dave King’s bold covers for City Limits, the
London listings magazine, used some of the
techniques of political posters. Here the
crowd scene is repeated in three different
tones while the magazine’s title is featured
as a cut-out. King often used the City Limits
name in different sizes and in a different
position in each issue but kept to the same
font, thus ensuring maximum flexibility while
maintaining a strong identity.
Clever placement of the photograph in this
Blitz cover from 1989 makes it appear as
though the singer Madonna is looking fondly
at the magazine’s title, creating dynamic
interplay between image and text.
Covers 57
Beach Culture and RayGun. In the UK, Neville Brody,
Vaughan Oliver and Vince Frost showed a bold
approach to the medium.
Fashion publications benefitted from the rise of
fashion designer superstars and showcased their
collections every season, producing fat issues in
spring and autumn. These issues were beloved by
advertisers, who in turn employed the same
photographers to produce their advertising pages. The
fashion industry boomed along with the economy, and
luxury goods become more available to ordinary
people. By the end of the 1980s in the US and the UK,
magazines were enjoying a golden age of inspired
collaborations and a respect for the specialist skills of
designing editorial and visual journalism.
1990 – 2000
The rise of the celebrity cover seemed to dominate
the style of this decade. Appearing on the front of
a magazine launched the career of some celebrities,
actors and musicians, and also helped to keep the
medium fresh and vibrant. Magazine covers reflected
the cultural appetite of their audiences. Consumer
magazines were joined in the marketplace by
customer magazines, which became more interesting
with the development of brand building and
innovations in cheaper digital print technology.
Instead of customer magazines having to be printed
on large-scale litho print presses, designers were able
to go to smaller digital printers and produce shorter
runs. Digital printing used simpler technologies,
including inkjet, and there was no need for pre-press
processes such as plate making, thus saving time and
proving more cost effective.
Newspapers also had to rethink their traditional
dominance of the news market and saw advertising
sales fall. As the publishing arena became more
crowded, competition increased. News websites were
launched for free at first, but paywalls were soon
introduced. The arrival of digital print technology and
the improvement in its quality also changed the way
newspapers were produced. Old presses were
abandoned and broadsheets downsized. The lower
cost of sending digital pages straight to the print press
without the need for plates or colour proofs, meant that
Below, metallic embossing adds an unusual
dimension to this Dazed & Confused cover.
Sleazenation’s attention-grabbing
typographic cover (bottom) is actually very
simple and appears to state the obvious,
but also plays on the ironic, knowing
personality of the magazine’s brand.
58 Chapter 3
Covers 59
digital print became more widely available to all
companies – not just to designers.
Fashion publications used celebrities on their covers
as the trend for featuring supermodels waned due to
cost. Editors tried introducing variety to increase their
audiences. Lifestyle magazines appeared and the
news-stand became crowded with titles. Some closed
as the dot-com bubble burst in March 2000 and
advertisers and publishers pulled in their belts.
2000 – 2010
In the ‘noughties’, before the iPad launched and other
tablets arrived, magazines were in a strong position.
Large publishing companies took their print titles onto
the internet, designing web and mobile versions of
them. Apps were soon to emerge for familiar titles
such as The New Yorker and Wired in 2009 and The
Guardian in 2011. The internet became the biggest
threat to the advertising model and news
organizations were forced to rethink. The integrity of
the press was challenged by the WikiLeaks case and in
the UK by the phone hacking scandal. Respect for the
established press proprietors was in decline. In the US,
jobs were lost as age-old newspapers reshaped their
staff, for example at the Boston Globe when it shifted
from print to digital in 2009. Print-trained designers
had to retrain, learning to code and adapt their skills
to interactive digital. Younger ‘digital natives’ found
no problem designing across different platforms.
Vogue is a good example of a publisher who
covers all bases, with different editions being
created for different platforms. The magazine
enlisted the help of a website to expand its
readership and give its advertisers a platform
to reach readers in another way.
Literary culture magazine Zembla was
designed by Vince Frost, who adopted
a frenetic, in-your-face approach to
typography and a bold, structural format.
60 Chapter 3
2010 to present day
The arrival of the iPad in 2010 meant that publishers
and designers could include interactivity in their box
of design tools. The lightweight, touch-screen tablet
design made the iPad accessible to fans of the iPhone
and other Apple technology. It appeared as a class
above the other developing tablets, which had to adapt
fast to catch up. Other tablet devices followed featuring
new operating systems, such as the Android one by
Google, which was developed on an open source
model. Designers developed a visual navigational
format to take advantage of the touch-sensitive
screens and enhanced moving-image content of
tablets and phones. Covers for the tablet editions of
many consumer titles looked grown up, and became
interactive for the first time. The design elements on
the cover became entry points, allowing readers to
move through the pages using a simple finger swipe.
Aggregated content was designed to flow into the
reader’s choice of format, whether tablet or mobile. The
idea was that the reader’s history of internet searches
and data profile generated content pulled from various
sources that was just right for him or her. The absence
of an actual editor was daunting for some and
liberating for others. The very nature of the editor/art
director/publisher role changed to include developers
as well. The idea that an individual could have his or
her own version of a magazine flowing into a personal
device also became a reality. Content publishers,
such as Flipboard, emerged as publishers strived
to bring targeted content to subscribers. Through
a downloadable app, Flipboard are able to transform
content from social feeds, websites and blogs into
beautiful digital magazines for millions of readers
to flip through.
Navigating through magazines is no longer
linear. As this example from The Guardian iPad
version shows, the designer’s task is to guide
the reader using the visual identity, and avoid
putting any hurdles in the way.
Covers 61
Flipboard flows digital content into your
phone for free, making updated content
always available from a variety of news
sources. The viewer swipes to flip the pages,
and can share pages instantly using social
media. Inspired by the beauty and ease of
print media, Flipboard describes itself as
‘the world’s first social magazine’.
62 Chapter 3
Quaterly Canadian magazine Adbusters
(above) – subtitled ‘the magazine of the
culture-jamming revolution’ – is an excellent
example of the relationship that a specialinterest publications can develop with its
target audience. Each issue deals with one
theme and is treated as a mini-book, enabling
a compeltely different look each quarter.
The different ways of
designing covers
There are many different approaches to cover design,
but broadly speaking, covers can be categorized under
three headings: figurative, abstract and text-based.
The latter are rare now as editors shy away from
text-dominated covers and graphic puns, but the very
fact that they are rare creates its own impact.
Figurative covers
The traditional face or figure shot can be made more
engaging by approaching it with some element of
originality. For example, the smiling face shot can be
replaced with a face displaying an emotion such as
anger, fear or elation. The degree to which this kind
of treatment can be attempted depends on the
conformity of the publication’s readership: readers of
anti-consumerist magazine Adbusters, for instance,
are unlikely to be repelled by a negative figure image,
while the readers of a weekly women’s magazine
probably would be. Wit and humour can often attract
readers, and an action shot with a sense of adventure
invites us to join in the fun. Even a regular face shot
can be made interesting: style magazine i-D has
always shown its cover faces winking, aping the
‘winking face’ created by its logo. With full-figure
shots there is a greater flexibility, a fact that Dazed
& Confused plays with inventively. Carlos magazine
uses illustration to depict cover figures, enhanced
by a striking splash of metallic ink.
Fashion magazines can use illustration effectively, too;
an illustration of a garment can convey an emotional
sense of the material, rather than the literal
representation of photography. And illustration has the
advantage of enabling words to be incorporated in a
way that is different from photography’s clear
boundaries, which make it distinct from any
surrounding or superimposed text. Montage is an old
device that can bring another dimension – that of
metaphor – to figurative covers, and can be used most
effectively to make incisive comments.
Two very different interpretations of the usual
close-up head shot. On M-real (above),
creative director Jeremy Leslie playfully
undermined the idea of the close-up female
head shot making eye contact. Pop (right) did
the same thing with a Jennifer Lopez cover,
using a very different technique. Again, there
is no eye contact with the viewer and Lopez’s
emotive and expressive state, as opposed to
a passive, non-specific one, marks the image
out from its competitors.
Covers 63
64 Chapter 3
There is a simple guiding rule to cover design:
appeal to the reader’s interest. The image is
the first point at which design does this, but it
is by no means the only element of the cover
that does so. Covers are, in fact, made up of
four elements:
• format – size, shape and design
characteristics;
• logo or title and other regular page
furniture (tag-line, date and barcode);
• image(s);
• cover lines and headlines.
In the 1990s, ‘lad mag’ Loaded used all of
these to great effect. Targeting its readership
with a tag-line that read ‘for men who should
know better’, its design and editorial approach
was an exuberant ‘we’re off our heads’ one
that was completely in tune with the sex-,
lager- and drug-fuelled, frenzied lifestyles its
readers were – or wanted to be – living. Editor
James Brown said at the time that it was ‘for
the man who believes he can do anything, if
only he wasn’t hung-over’. In design terms
this attitude was successfully interpreted
through art director Steve Read’s clever
devising of a style that looked undesigned
but was full of energy and motion, with its
excellent use of colour, typefaces, images and
layout construction. Cover lines and headlines
were big, bold, active and funny.
Concept covers can be particularly arresting.
Pearce Marchbank at Time Out (above right)
in the 1970s used such covers to great effect,
skilfully employing photography, illustration,
collage and typography to ‘sell’ difficult
concepts such as Dadaism and ‘Envy’. Vince
Frost achieved equally striking results with his
covers for The Independent on Saturday
newspaper magazine supplement (right).
These used abstract cut-out photography on
white backgrounds with wit and elegance to
intrigue readers and suggest a broad concept
of a story, rather than explaining it literally.
Both these designers knew that the key issue
in designing a cover is to approach it as a
poster, as that is, in effect, what it is. First
and foremost, it has to be striking and draw in
the viewer.
Covers 65
Abstract covers
Abstract covers are rare in publications that rely
heavily on news-stand sales, but feature regularly in
special-interest and subscription-only publications,
news weeklies or newspaper supplements. These often
have the luxury of minimal or no cover lines, and the
freedom to place the logo wherever it best suits the
design, since shelf visibility isn’t an issue. This can
result in highly original designs, but it is important to
remember that the brand and its message must be
maintained through a clear design direction and
approach. Wired has always been particularly skilful at
doing this (see p.68). From the magazine’s inception,
its designers John Plunkett and Barbara Kuhr made
frequent use of abstract cover illustrations in order to
communicate complex concepts in simple ways.
Adbusters also uses this method, while Tentaciones,
A figurative cover can be inventive and
original if a publication’s designer, editor and
publisher have the courage to counteract the
perceived notion of what is acceptable,
popular or sellable, as seen in these examples
from Adbusters (far left) and French magazine
WAD (left). Adbusters, in particular, slyly
undermines traditional notions of a cover’s
saleability by showing a traditional head shot
of an attractive blonde woman in a very
confrontational and unconventional way.
‘This was our first “design special” issue, and
we treated it as a primer, an advance-guard
explanation to our readers of all the places
where they would find good design. We
decided to involve them slightly in the process,
and made the cover into a graphic-design
competition in which we invited six great
graphic designers from varied backgrounds to
create a concept. We printed all six solutions
(above right). When we opened Jennifer
Morla’s contribution (above), we knew right
away it was the winner – it was so simple.
“The Shock of the Familiar” was in bold,
simple Helvetica, like signage, on a plain silver
background. But The New York Times
Magazine logo was upside down and at the
bottom. It made you turn the cover upside
down, and [be] aware of the cover as an
object. And the shock factor was there as
well. Its absolute clarity was riveting. It was
also fun to read about the other five solutions
inside, and begin to understand the way
designers think and how they go about solving
problems.’ – Janet Froelich, former art
director, The New York Times Magazine.
66 Chapter 3
the El País supplement designed by Fernando
Gutiérrez (see p.220), moves the logo around the white
space of the cover at will, unrestrained by anything
other than the fact that, because the magazine is
printed on newspaper presses, it cannot use full-bleed
photos, so instead floats images on white backgrounds
to give the illusion of bleeds.
Text-based covers
Text-based covers are rare in contemporary
periodicals, but many designers, including George Lois
on Esquire, Herb Lubalin on Fact, and Scott King on
Sleazenation, have used text-based covers to brilliant
effect. Pearce Marchbank often took this option for his
Time Out covers in the 1970s, for instance eschewing
photography for an issue on Japanese movies,
The directness of text has an appeal and
impact that sometimes simply cannot be
conveyed by an image, as in this Esquire cover
(below left) by George Lois. It can also work
well as a conceptual tool, as in this New York
Times Magazine cover (below right) for the
‘Ideas’ issue, the annual end-of-year
compendium of the year’s best. ‘Our approach
was to present the best ideas, inventions and
schemes in an encyclopaedic fashion, using
the alphabet as a construction device. To that
end, we created a template that resembled
both a dictionary and an encyclopaedia, in its
use of thumb index, the illusion of thick pages,
the wide columns, the little drawings in the
margins and the somewhat stuffy, dictionarystyle typographic conventions. The cover was
designed as an old-fashioned book cover, with
the texture of fabric and embossed gold
lettering. It was then photographed in three
dimensions, with the depth of the pages on
the right forcing the image into a slightly
narrower format,’ says Janet Froelich. Scott
King’s use of words on youth-culture magazine
Sleazenation (opposite) took its cue from
a T-shirt design and was a direct, witty joke,
slyly poking fun at its readers, magazines
and fashion.
choosing instead a graphic treatment of a bleeding
Japanese flag with a single, pithy cover line. A more
recent issue, featuring an Amsterdam guide, opted for
a typographic approach because, as its art director at
the time Jeremy Leslie explains, ‘Amsterdam lacks an
iconic location, building or event, so a typographic
solution was used to express the buzz of the city.’
There is no doubt that text-based covers work, but in
a culture that is now so visually orientated their use is
minimal – which, of course, can be useful for the editor
and designer who are looking to make an impact or
stand out: hence their use when tragedy strikes or
a famous person dies.
Covers 67
A weekly magazine has to look very different
from issue to issue – the reader needs to be
aware that the one on the news-stand is new.
Moreover, it is possible for two issues to be on
the news-stand at the same time (as was the
case with Time Out, which overlapped by a
day). Consequently, Time Out made the most
of the ability of text to stand out in a way that
a succession of images can’t. For this cover
(above), it’s hard to imagine anything working
as well as the type does. Micha Weidmann’s
solution to an issue on whether North or
South London is better was innovative and
original; rather than simply show a photo or
illustration of the Thames River, he devised
two covers: depending on which side of the
river you bought your copy, either ‘North’ was
the right way up or ‘South’ was – an ingenious
and simple solution to a difficult concept.
profile of a publication
WIRED magazine
WIRED magazine, launched in San Francisco in 1993, is that rare
thing in print publishing: a magazine whose design is perfectly
attuned to its times and subject matter. As a general-interest
magazine that specialized in the rise of technology as a cultural
force, it replaced traditional, technology-related severity in
design and visual expression with a layout, structure and
aesthetic that challenged readers with their frenetic pace, and
an inventive and web-inspired content and design format. It
made eye-popping use of colour, which, through the placement
of tinted text on a background of the same colour, often
frustrated as much as it excited. In giving readers a very real
sense of how amazing this emerging medium and technology
were, and of their potentiality, it demanded much of them. An
intelligent, knowledgeable readership understood, however, the
connections immediately and responded enthusiastically as
circulation soared. When the internet bust came, most
magazines folded, but WIRED slimmed down and survived.
Overall creative direction, design and typography for WIRED’s
first five years were by John Plunkett, and his partner Barbara
Kuhr of Plunkett+Kuhr. Their designers included Tricia McGillis,
Thomas Schneider and Eric Courtemanche.
In 2010, WIRED led the way forward when Scott Dadich
presented a video to the Society of Publication Designers
in New York about redesigning the magazine for the iPad. He
demonstrated the new features of WIRED designed for the iPad
and the choices that readers could expect from the magazine in
the future. Speaking in 2010, Dadich explained they wanted ‘to
offer more choice to our readers and advertisers and move
beyond the static notion of a magazine.’
In 2012, the Nieman Journalism Lab asked Dadich about
reinventing magazines for the iPad. Justin Ellis wrote that ‘there
are some things, old-school things, that don’t change whether
you’re dealing with print or tablet.’ Dadich, then Condé Nast’s
vice president of digital magazine development, said, ‘The cover.
As magazine makers, we see the cover as the one and only ad
we have for your purchase and your time. It’s an inducement to
pick it up and give us your time.’
Covers 69
The components
of a cover
The term ‘cover’ comprises the outside front cover (or
OFC), the inside front cover (IFC), the outside back
cover (OBC) and the inside back cover (IBC). In most
periodicals all but the OFC will be given over to
lucrative advertising, but if they are not, it’s worth
remembering that these pages are infinitely more
valuable than any other available pages, apart from
the main cover. The publication’s logo – the graphical
representation of its title (sometimes referred to as
a ‘masthead’) – is the first and often most important
element of its cover. Cover lines, which indicate content,
are also a vital component of any periodical cover.
The logo
While the publication’s title may be as important as
the way it looks, for the majority of designers this is
something that will already have been decided. A logo
is intended to capture and impart the publication’s
character, subject, stance and attitude to its intended
readership, often in a subliminal way. While its
primary function is to appear on the cover of the
publication, it also needs to work on all of the brand’s
representations. Thus, it will appear in print and on
digital editions for various platforms, and on
promotional and marketing material, including the
Style magazine Flaunt’s covers are always
highly original in both production and design
terms, and always include an inside and outside
front cover. This one features a teasing twopart cover that has an unrecognizable colourby-numbers front (top). Only when readers
turn the page do they see that it’s Reese
Witherspoon (bottom). ‘Where other
magazines would use a simple card cover,
Flaunt always goes the extra distance. Cover
ideas are discussed with the photographers
many times prior to shooting the inside
cover, but the majority of the time we find
a particular artist who has a gallery show
opening, or recently opened, or just someone
whose work we like, and let him or her run with
it. It’s also great when you find an art director/
designer/illustrator group all-in-one situation
to work on the cover – that’s only happened
a couple of times.’ – Jim Turner, creative
director, Flaunt.
Let it shine today’s most luxurious rooms are all about light: Sunlight, moonlight, even neon light. ready, set, glow!
117
PHOTOGRAPH BY JAMES WOJCIK
T MADE FOR THE NEW YORK TIMES BY LITE BRITE NEON
The New York TimesStyleMagazine SPRING 2005
N56117 3/8/05 17:10 Page 1
70 Chapter 3
website. All these uses need to be considered when
designing a logo. If a publication is successful, then
its logo will be around for a very long time and its
treatment, manipulation and positioning, along with
any obscuring it, become significant.
Playing with the logo
A logo is a publication’s calling card and should
therefore be visible. Publishers are not happy with the
logo of their title being obscured (by a photo or an
illustration), but there have been many examples of a
title being covered or partially covered and still selling
very well; the trick is to show just enough of the title
to make it instantly recognizable. There are many
instances when obscuring a logo strengthens a
concept that would otherwise be weakened if the logo
had to be visible in its entirety: Henry Wolf’s cover for
the March 1959 issue of Harper’s Bazaar (see p.51)
interwove gloves with the magazine’s title to create a
riveting cover that looked three-dimensional and
offered a seamless, completely integrated image.
Nest, the American interior design magazine, changed
both the design and position of its logo for a while, as
did David Carson for RayGun. This conceit was copied
by sister title Blah Blah Blah, designed by Substance
UK. FT The Business magazine (see p.101) also played
decorative and visual tricks with its logo each week,
treating it as a moveable graphic element that was an
integrated and witty part of the image and stood out
boldly from it. Other publications stuck with a good
thing. Nova, with its elegant logo set in an old wood
type, Windsor, worked brilliantly with just the logo and
an expressive single theme on each cover, using just one
cover line to sell it (see p.214). Interview, too, with its
hand-drawn logo by illustrator Mats Gustafson, rarely
played around with the logo or cover lines, which
remained minimal. It played to its strengths – a large
format, a unique logo and a visual style of tight, harsh
crops of celebrities that was all its own.
The team at T Magazine – the Style section of The New York Times
Magazine – use the logo as a playful and engaging element of their
visual toolkit. Readers were included in the visual jokery as the gothic
letter ‘T’ was made out of neon, fur and cherry pie and almost
unrecognizably morphed into a Constructivist cover. Art director Janet
Froelich paid attention to the tiny detailing of these still-life images to
give an overall sense of craft and confidence in the masthead.
CHERRY PIE BASED ON A RECIPE FROM ‘‘PIE’’ (HARVARD COMMON PRESS) BY KEN HAEDRICH. FOOD STYLED BY BRETT KURZWEIL.
PHOTOGRAPH BY JAMES WOJCIK
The New York Times StyleMagazine SPRING 2006
RECIPES FOR LIVING THE GOOD LIFE.
Easy as Cherry Pie
N58069 4/10/06 12:41 PM Page 1
Covers 71
72 Chapter 3
with death and tragedy, but on the inside pages of a
magazine its use can be striking. In colour psychology,
many people think that it implies submission.
White is almost as complex as black: innocence,
cleanliness, wealth and purity are some of the
associations we make with white, but it can also be
sterile and neutral to the point of blandness.
Red The extreme vibrancy of red has both good and
bad points: it is confrontational and can render other
elements on a page almost invisible. But it will
definitely attract the eye and has been proved to create
a strong emotional response in a viewer, stimulating
faster heartbeats and breathing.
Blue Peaceful and tranquil, blue causes the body to
produce calming chemicals, but choose it carefully –
it can also be cold and depressing.
Green is the easiest colour on the eye and is calming
and refreshing. As the colour of nature, most
associations viewers make are positive ones.
Additionally, dark green implies wealth and power.
Yellow is the most difficult colour for the eye to take in,
thus is potentially overpowering – possibly why it’s
seen as an unpopular colour choice for covers.
Purple Used in the right way, purple has associations
of luxury, wealth, romance and sophistication, but it
can also appear overly feminine or gauche.
Orange Our associations with orange are good ones:
exciting, vibrant and joyous. But it can be a difficult
colour to use – too red and it can overpower; too yellow
and it can appear washed out.
Brown Another ‘nature’ colour with good associations:
light brown implies genuineness, while dark brown
suggests wood or leather. The combination of these
makes them appealing for men’s subjects.
Colour
The choice of colour or colours on a cover is important.
Green logos and blue backgrounds don’t sell. Red sells.
Blondes on a cover sell better than brunettes. Yellow is
often seen as an unpopular cover colour choice. All
these are accepted conventions in magazine design,
but hard evidence for these beliefs is hard to come by,
and designers and editors would do well to follow their
gut instinct, which will often be based on colour and its
emotional impact. Remember, any colour can be used
to emphasize and highlight, and specific colours can
be used symbolically or to trigger emotions and
memories, but trying to use colour to sell a publication
is unlikely to work, largely because colour is so
personal, and associations with it are dependent
on so many different factors.
Colour use
While there is little hard evidence for many
conventions that have grown around colour use in
publications, there is one area in which colour use
does follow hard-and-fast rules: cultural colour
psychology. The high visibility of red might make it
appealing in the West, but in South Africa, where it is
associated with mourning, it would be seen on a cover
about as often as black would be in the West. Blue is
generally appealing to all of us irrespective of culture
because of its calming influence, but is a turn-off when
used for food. It’s all about context. So while it is simply
useless to tell you how to use colour, here’s a helpful
guide on how NOT to use it.
Black is complex; it can be sexy, authoritative,
powerful, menacing, intriguing, rich, depressing, dull,
glossy, textural, timeless ... on many occasions it will be
at least two of these at the same time. Avoid using
black on the cover, where it is too widely associated
Covers 73
Cover lines
These apply exclusively to periodicals. News-stand titles
will usually display a mass of these in a bid to show they
have more and better content than the competition. The
largest cover line, if the publication is using size to
distinguish order of ‘importance’, is nearly always related
to the cover image. The content, use and placement of
cover lines in such titles as Vogue, GQ, Vanity Fair and
Marie Claire are generally decided by the editor and art
director, but marketing and competition considerations
drive this process (they often appear on the left third of
the cover, as this is most likely to be visible on the
newsagents’ shelves). But the look and tone of the cover
lines – their colour, how they stand out against
competitors and each other, what their number, length
and words say about the magazine and its personality
– are very much the responsibility of the designer. In
newspapers, too, designers have started to use the
space above the banner for cover lines that highlight
featured articles inside the paper and its supplements.
Spines
While book designers know the value of spines as a
design area, this little band of space is generally ignored
by periodical publishers, beyond using it to show the title
and publication date. This is a shame for two reasons:
first, the spine has excellent sales value as, when stacked,
it is more visible than the cover, and, second, because this
strip is an excellent place in which to reinforce the brand
and style of the title, a fact not lost on the designers of
titles such as Arena, Loaded, Vanidad and Wallpaper*.
Rather than simply list title information, the first two of
these use the spines to build up arresting narratives
that make readers feel they are buying part of a series
and not just a single issue, thereby encouraging loyalty
and the desire to build up a whole set. Wallpaper* uses
it to carry a list of key contents, an excellent indexing
feature. Separating what’s important from what’s not
can be achieved by using different weights and sizes
of fonts: the title logo and date should attract from
a distance, drawing the potential reader closer to
The separate spines of Fernando Gutiérrez’s finding further, more detailed information.
design for Vanidad combine to form the
crossed-through ‘V’ of the title, or upside
down (as here) forms a perfect ‘A’.
March 2012
S
K
E
T
C
H
Graphic design
Repositories for random thoughts
Sketch
Fashion Photographer
Gary Wallis
Fashion
March 2012 May 2012
S
K
E
T
C
H
Graphic design
Repositories for random thoughts
Sketch 74
Brief Two
Masthead and covers
Aim
To design a masthead and three covers for an imaginary
pitch of your magazine concept.
The brief
Take your magazine mood board from Brief One (see
p.38) and use it to develop three covers. Use the
typography of your masthead (logo) to reflect the visual
philosophy of your magazine. Find a suitable font or
draw your own. Decide whether the masthead should
dominate the page or be more demure. Who is your
magazine aimed at? Think about the clarity of
communication in the visual language that you are using.
Now create visual layouts for your covers using a digital
page template. Choose a format for your magazine. Avoid
A4 if you can as the page will be a little bit too tall and
not quite right for page turning. Magazines tend to be
slightly wider than A4 and slightly shorter. To start, scan
images in or, better still, shoot or create your own
imagery. Think about how the typography you use on
the cover will reflect the visual identity of the whole
magazine. Should it be serif or sans serif? Light or bold?
Imagine that your first cover is for the launch issue and
the other two for following monthly or quarterly editions.
If you imagine your publication to be A5 size then
produce your covers at 100%. If your publication is
tabloid size, however, you may need to tile your layouts
using the tiling settings in the printout menu and tape
them together on the back. It is very important to get
each cover off the screen and output it in actual size.
Trim your covers to actual page size if necessary.
Chapter 3
Sketch March 2012 2 Sketch March 2012 3
Onseri conseque volum repel est, solum
saectae enda voloreh enianis essi volo
beatur molupicipis animo quo is repratus
experitat dolestia velluptae repratincte illabo. Et odi to corisquam, quatia nosanime molupta tionseribus nis con provid
quia poratia nones exerepe llendisquia
serferchil et, conseque offictiate quasitiae
quia nis ressinia sitaqui veliqui cusdae
sum eat omniend usamet elest ma nonsequi del id eum rest imo tem aute perum
quia voloribusa dolut es doloria quianih
iliqui corit laboreperum eum dit et lanihilicius quibus.
Turest opta quatem nonsequia cum hit
aliam verist, que necabor epudant omnihil ipient ommodit atempor roviti nimi,
si simincil maion consenimenis nonseriae volenis doluptatem. Nam, te parum
eatur?
Alicte num iditi as es accusam, nus is
commolo rehendae rempor alique etur,
nonsecepuda precea dolut aut officiureped utas everum entotatus dolupta
tempor reium ipienti te ped quam quae.
Itaecaes repe vollit idelitam re consequi
ipid unt autaqui doluptatur?
Photography:Gary Wallis
“magical, treasuring a special moment”
Photgraphy: Gray Wallis
Covers 75
Pictured here are layouts for an imaginary
student project. The first is Sketch, a
magazine about sketchbooks by Central Saint
Martins College BA graphics student Jetmire
Dvorani. The masthead is strong and becomes
an icon in itself. Shown here are pages from
the sketchbooks for the development of t
he masthead. First the name is simple and
used in a satisfying thick black font, with
an underline, a bit like an extended doodle.
If you use another photographer’s image,
make sure you get permission.
76
4
77
Chapter 4 : Inside the publication
Having a proper understanding of editorial design
is just the first ingredient in a complex mix.
Another essential element is a real understanding
of the publication and the ability to apply this to
the constituent parts of the magazine or
newspaper. It’s not simply about design decisions,
but a deep knowledge and fascination with what
underpins and motivates these design decisions.
78 Chapter 4
Anatomy of a publication
A publication is broken down into areas that largely
follow an established format for its particular type.
Thus, a magazine breaks down into three areas: the
news-led first third (called the front of the book), a
middle third housing the features (called the feature
well), and a back third (called the back of the book),
which is usually where information-based content –
reviews, listings, directories and so on – is located.
A newspaper can be similarly broken down into areas
of content: hard news (the unpredictable, including
international news and business); analysis and
opinion of the news; expected content (television,
stock-market information, reviews, weather, sport
reports, etc.); and irregular features.
A flick through any newspaper or magazine will reveal
that the different areas are often signposted by
varying layouts or grids: column widths, headlines,
fonts and their weights, images and so on are all
likely to differ subtly from each other, identifying
departments and making navigation easier for the
reader. There is, of course, no reason why designers
should not deviate from these formats, but, if they do,
they should use consistency in flow and navigation to
compensate for the reader’s lack of familiarity with the
structure. This is particularly true for popular and
predictable content – TV listings, weather forecasts,
letters, crosswords, horoscopes and so on.
Contents page
What does the contents page of a magazine do?
Contemporary readers use the contents page in a
number of different ways: to find the cover story,
browse the entire content of the publication, find
favourite sections or find a story they vaguely
remember reading years earlier. Some people don’t
use the contents page at all; others read or flip from
back to front, making the contents page at the front
fairly redundant. But the contents page remains very
important because, after the cover, it is the only device
that can literally guide the reader deeper into the
publication and signpost a way through and around
its content. Because of this status, contents pages are
Inside the publication 79
often located on the right-hand side, since this is the
page most easily read. However, precisely because of
this, right-hand pages – and particularly those near the
front of a magazine – are more appealing to advertisers
and therefore may be sold, forcing contents pages onto
the left-hand side of a spread.
Designing the contents page
First and foremost, the contents page – and
particularly the essential information it contains –
should be clear to read, simple to follow and easy to
find. While traditionally it is placed as close to the
cover as possible, its position isn’t as important as
consistency of positioning. Every issue of the same
magazine will put the contents page in the same place.
Regularity leads to familiarity. This, in turn, fosters the
sense of a publication being a friend. The arrangement
and organization of a contents page should be
Contents pages have to list everything in the
publication, but there is no reason why their
design cannot be handled inventively, as
these examples from Zembla (below) and
The New York Times Magazine (below right)
demonstrate. For the latter’s November
2003 annual issue on ‘Inspiration’, former
art director Janet Froelich found inspiration
at the Cooper-Hewitt Design Museum’s
biennial. ‘I saw the wonderful “Alphabits”,
which designer and writer Paul Elliman
constructs from scrap materials, found
objects and bits of industrial waste,
including bottle tops, computer components,
engine parts and so on. As such, they are
a perfect embodiment of the question of
where inspiration comes from. His
letterforms are powerful graphic objects
and they made our pages look fresh and
inspirational. They were so much fun to
work with,’ says Froelich.
80 Chapter 4
Contents pages can be designed well as lists,
as illustrated by these examples from Twen
(this page), Sleazenation (opposite below)
and About Town (opposite top left), which use
strict underlying grids and a Swiss formalism
to make the text matter-of-fact and
informative while retaining a graphic elegance.
But there are many different ways of
representing the navigation of the magazine.
In Metropolis (opposite top right), ‘The map
on the table of contents is a graphic device
that was created by Paula Scher when she
redesigned the magazine in 1999. It provides
a framework to show the reader where the
stories appear in relation to each other.
Although the table of contents has gone
through many design variants over the last
five years, the map has remained, and has
actually become a more significant element
in the design of the page,’ says former
Metropolis art director Criswell Lappin.
Inside the publication 81
attractive, lucid and quick to absorb and navigate – to
find the cover story, for example, or a favourite regular
section. It should highlight individual features and
important section stories through the use of type,
imagery and graphic devices such as rules and icons,
and it should summarize main stories to tempt the
reader to them. After all, someone reading the contents
page may not have bought the magazine as yet.
Finally, it should echo the arrangement of the contents
that come after it; so, if there’s a news section followed
by a feature well (see p.83) and a directory, this should
be reflected in the contents page.
Some publications don’t bother with a contents page
at all. Chris Dixon, former art editor at Adbusters, did
away with the contents page because he and the
editor, Kalle Lasn, agreed that it segmented the
magazine too much and dictated the approach.
Instead, navigational tools, including colour bars and
colour stock, were used, the former signifying the
length and variety of the section’s contents by their
width, colour selection and length. This is an extreme
solution to a design problem and one that, in any case,
can only be applied to certain types and sizes of
publications; a news weekly or listings magazine with
no contents page would quickly annoy its readers,
while a publication with 300-plus pages simply has
to be navigable in a practical way.
82 Chapter 4
The front sections
Magazine editorial-department pages – pages into
which all the editorial departments on the publication
will feed, whether culture, fashion, sport, music, travel
or interiors and so on – will generally have wellstructured style sheets and templates that are based
on a selected range of fonts (size and weights), colours
and page furniture (including graphic icons, rules and
keylines), all laid out across a well-defined grid. Design
has a part to play in the masthead and editorial
comment, too, where the way in which information is
laid out sends strong clues as to the style and tone of
the publication. This is particularly true of the editorial
comment, which should deliver the editorial tone of the
publication very clearly.
Contemporary news pages (and the writing for them)
have learnt much from web design, which uses boxes,
colours and a variety of font weights and sizes to make
pages lively and energetic. Wired and Business 2.0, in
particular, pioneered this approach, which was picked
up by Gary Cook at FT The Business. In an effort to
make the Wired news pages busy and energetic,
designers use an abundance of overlapping boxes,
shades, tints and colours, fonts, photos and shapes.
White space, which would add an unwelcome sense
of calm to the layout, is completely obliterated.
A newspaper’s front section shares certain aspects
with magazines in that it contains the most up-to-theminute content laid out across flexible templates on a
well-structured grid. The bulk of unpredictable content
– breaking news stories, developments in current news
stories and so on –is contained here.
On alternative style magazine The Face, editor
Nick Logan and designer and typographer
Neville Brody recorded a post-punk era by
taking typography, layout and design in new
directions, which drew on the politics and
visual aesthetic of Russian Constructivism.
However, the layout of the contents page
was still clear, and remained fairly traditional
in its design.
Inside the publication 83
The feature well
Features are the most important textual element
of a magazine’s branding. Whether it be the handling
of a celebrity interview that every other publication is
running that month, an in-depth analysis of an event,
situation or topic that is currently hot, or a scoop that
no one else has, the style, content and tone of the
writing and layout are what will make it stand out
from competitors.
Many publications use a standardized house style or
‘look’ for features, and employ design to distinguish
them from other editorial content through elements
such as wider columns, more white space, different
typefaces, larger headlines and longer stand-firsts or
‘sells’ beneath them. If the feature begins on a spread,
it will often open with a full-bleed image – a head shot,
figure or illustration – facing the feature opener, which
will usually consist of the text (a headline, stand-first
In becoming the first ‘lad mag’, Loaded in
the 1990s identified a new market, but it
remained successful because the features
and how they were written both tuned in
perfectly to that market. Here were great
writers expressing all the things their readers
wanted to be doing, thinking, seeing, having
and being. Its design also brilliantly conveyed
and illustrated the energy, mayhem and
anarchy expressed in the writing. Art director
Steve Read achieved this by developing an
‘undesigned’ style that suggested features
had been thrown together. The combination
of vibrant colour, big, full-bleed action shots,
huge headlines that were manipulated to
convey movement and depth, and body copy
printed out of the image created an effect of
sheer joie de vivre.
84 Chapter 4
On Vogue Paris, former art director Fabien
Baron used both black and white space to
construct spreads that reference, the
underlying grid and accentuated display text.
Willy Fleckhaus’s bold use of white space in
this issue of Twen (opposite top) from 1968
is an unexpected treatment for the subject
matter, and is therefore an elegant surprise,
both visually and conceptually.
Inside the publication 85
or sell, body copy and pull quotes) and perhaps further
images that will tie the full-bleed image to the feature
(if no such imagery is used, the headline usually does
this instead). If the feature begins on a single page
facing a full-colour ad, a bleed image in black-andwhite to contrast with the ad next to it, or judicious use
of white space, can create a distinction between the
two pages and draw the eye away from the ad towards
the editorial. Using white space formed part of a move
away from the excessive over-design of the 1990s
towards a clean simplicity, a move whose popularity
has, unsurprisingly, continued well into the new
century. One way of ensuring consistent use of white
space is by incorporating it into the grid or templates:
for example, in top or bottom margins or in the
relationship between headline and stand-first, in
‘blank’ columns and in space around pull quotes.
Back sections: reviews,
listings, commentary
As with the front of the publication, elements that
come after the feature well (for instance, reviews,
listings, letters and horoscopes) are often laid out by
junior designers and have a fairly well-determined
structure and grid. A colour palette is usually in place,
as are font selections, weights and styles. Imagery is
all-important in these pages: good use of illustration
and photography will determine whether the pages are
lively, and, indeed, which individual story on the page
is read. Equally, layout is crucial: using cut-outs on
white backgrounds will make an image stand out and
allow the page breathing space, something that can be
difficult to achieve on editorial department pages, which
are often crammed with stories and imagery. Very few
people will read all the stories, but they may be tempted
to do so if faced with a page that surprises and excites
This section opener for The New York Times
‘T:Travel’ Magazine reinforces the brand
through the use of the hand-drawn Fraktur
font of The New York Times, and the concept
of the content through lettering in sand, while
also presenting an image that is both original
and inviting.
86 Chapter 4
them, a fact that is true for all editorial design, even
listings pages, where the intelligent use of typefaces
and rules is crucial if the page is not to look an overall
grey. Of the back section, the most valuable page is
that facing the inside back cover; readers flicking from
back to front will see this page first, which is why some
titles use it for high-volume or popular content such as
horoscopes, letters or the masthead.
Section openers
Section openers are often an indulgence in a periodical
publication, but a welcome one for the reader. In
content terms, they are generally unnecessary spreads
with an eye-catching image and a minimal amount of
text, but they do allow breathing space and, if used as
a spread, offer a rare opportunity for a landscape,
image-led layout, which can be used to create a much
greater design impact than a portrait (though ensuring
that you have an image of good-enough quality and
impact to repeat this regularly can be tricky). Because
they generally stand out in a memorable way, such
openers can act as a useful ‘marker’ for the reader
looking for an article in a particular section. If this is
their primary use, it can be helpful to create a distinct
format that the regular reader can recognize and use
to navigate the publication.
The role of typography
Type design is the backbone of editorial design and
every designer has to know the basics. In digital
formats the same typographic principles still apply
as in print, but with a few additional adjustments.
Any designer with a keen knowledge of type and an
ability to handle complex typographic material will
find they can work on any number of different
publishing systems.
logo/masthead left third
barcode date-line cover lines issue number main cover line
Inside the publication 87
Copy
The terminology for copy can be confusing to a
designer unused to the array of terms used in editorial
design. It doesn’t help that many of them have different
names for the same thing (see illustration p.88), but it
is important for the designer to know four things when
it comes to copy:
• the different terms for copy;
• what these different forms of copy are;
• how writing for editorial generally, and these
types of copy specifically, differs from other
types of writing;
• how this affects the designer.
Tag-lines
Tag-lines or slogans under a logo can add enormous
value to a publication. A well-worded tag-line not only
tells the reader what a title is, but also indicates tone
and target audience. For regular readers, it reinforces
the feeling that they are ‘the men who should know
better’ (Loaded), the people who care about ‘the stuff
that surrounds you’ (Wallpaper*) and the fashionistas
that form part of the unusually styled ‘we’ar different’
cognoscenti (WAD). For newcomers, it’s a handy
instant clue to content that they may not
otherwise get.
Headlines
A sub-editor will argue that the headline is just as
important in persuading a reader to read a story as the
layout. A headline creates a strong bond between the
publication and the reader; it says, ‘We know you, we’re
like you, we share the same sense of humour/interests/
cultural references and we know you’re intelligent
enough to understand this headline and story’.
Therefore, appropriate size, positioning and treatment
are vital. This is particularly true on a text-driven
newspaper, which may not have the luxury of images
with which to entice the reader into a purchase.
Stand-first
The content of the stand-first (aka sell, deck or intro
text) is textually more important than the headline, for
it sets the tone, after the headline, in informing the
reader of the story’s intention, and acts as the bridge or
link, both textually and visually, between the headline
and the body copy. As such, it must contextualize the
headline, but also summarize and sell the story to the
reader in a pithy, arresting way.
Pull quotes
Pull quotes are another very useful tool at the
designer’s disposal when it comes to orientating the
reader and breaking up copy to make readability
easier and the feature more enticing. The content for
pull quotes is pulled directly out of the copy, or is a
summarized excerpt.
Subheads (aka cross-heads)
Subheads can break up dense columns of copy and are
most usefully employed in lengthy news items, where
continuous copy can be off-putting or a reader may be
looking for a particular aspect of a story. Subheads are
also useful for denoting a new section, chapter subdivision
or a subject change, and they will help readers find
their place if not reading the article in one sitting.
Bylines and credits
The treatment and positioning of bylines and credits
should be determined largely by the publication and
the importance of these elements to it: a magazine will
generally want to flag contributors and staff,
particularly if they are using a well-known writer,
photographer or illustrator; newspapers (which used
not to have bylines at all) focus on the news, not who is
reporting it, so bylines will be smaller on news pages
than on feature pages.
!
‘A designer should have a willingness to read
the material, to discuss it thoughtfully and
passionately, and to develop visual
components that expand the read while still
working within the publication’s architecture.’
Martin Venezky, art director, Speak
88 Chapter 4
Body copy
On many titles, a publication’s design will draw a
readership in, but if the textual content or body copy
does not match expectations, sales will fall, advertisers
will stop advertising and the publication could fold.
Of course, a publication’s content will change to meet
trends and remain relevant to its readership, but key to
such change is the ability to remain true to the brand
and the brand’s message, and essential to this is the
strength of content, its writers and its entire staff.
The designer’s involvement in body copy is, therefore,
twofold: he or she must deal with its main requirements
and characteristics, using column and font selection to
folio
credit
byline
panel/box copy
headline body copy running head
pull quote
caption/cutline
sell/stand-first
reflect and deliver the brand and the individual content
of the story to the reader; but they should also
contribute ideas and knowledge of cultural trends to
the editorial mix, as this can lead to dynamic content.
Panels, box copy, sidebars
and infographics
Panels function as short news items or adjuncts to
lengthy articles, where they are used to impart data
such as facts and statistics, a case study or another
element that is separate from but still relevant to the
main article. Because of this, panel and box copy is
Inside the publication 89
The Flaunt headline (above) is more
traditional, but is still strong, clever and
insightful, suggesting as it does a selfeffacing attitude to (and on the part of?)
superstar actor Brad Pitt, but also promising
real insight rather than half a story.
More and more newspapers are using pull
quotes, a device borrowed from consumer
magazines, to catch the reader’s eye and also
to break up dense columns of body copy, as
seen here in Spanish newspaper El País (left).
90 Chapter 4
usually snappier than the more discursive or in-depth
approach of feature writing. This is reflected in shorter
sentences, a more factual tone, lots of snippets of
information and elements that break down continuous
text into lists, points and the like. The design should, of
course, visualize this snappiness.
Captions
Just as stand-firsts act as the bridge between headline
and body copy, captions bridge the image and the text,
and are therefore an important design element that
requires a well-thought-out design solution. There are
different approaches to designing captions and their
placement (as outlined in Chapter 5), but their design
will be dependent on the designer knowing what the
role and tone of the caption is in the publication.
Folios
Consisting of a page number, the publication’s title
and, in some cases, a section or chapter title, folios are
an indispensable part of the page furniture, helping to
orientate the reader in the publication and strengthening
Two differing approaches to body copy from
two very different publications: The New York
Times Magazine (above) fills the page with
body copy yet retains a sense of space, light
and accessibility through its selection of fonts
(Cheltenham redesigned by Jonathan Hoefler,
Stymie redesigned by Cyrus Highsmith and
Matthew Carter, Garamond and Helvetica). In
Speak (opposite), Martin Venezky shapes the
body copy to create space, but also to create
a sense of cohesion across the spread,
unifying the various elements.
the structure of the format and therefore the brand. On
a title where the content is straightforward and direct,
folios will not usually be made into a design feature,
but a publication whose readers are visually literate
will use fonts, weights and positioning to make folios
stand out as design elements in their own right. David
Carson, Martin Venezky and Rudy VanderLans often
did this on RayGun, Speak and Emigre magazines.
Many magazines will drop folios on pages featuring
full-bleed images. There is nothing intrinsically wrong
with this, but too many folio-free pages together might
make production difficult for the design team and
printer, and make navigation difficult and irritating for
the reader. If choosing a left- or right-hand page for a
folio, the right is the more visible page.
Screen fonts versus print fonts
There is one big difference between the way the
human eye reads text printed on paper and text on a
screen: the human eye is actually reading backlit
letterforms on a screen. Depending on the brightness
and calibration of the screen, letterforms can appear
slightly bleached out if the contrast is too high.
Compare this to paper where the eye is seeing black
letters printed on a natural white background. The
quality of the reading experience depends on the light
reflecting off the paper stock. The traditional ‘dot gain’
effect is also a factor when text is printed on newsprint
or recycled paper, where letters appear slightly softer
or blurry under a magnifying glass.
These factors mean that the designer must choose
fonts carefully and know the difference between a font
designed for screen and a font designed for print. Digital
fonts are design products in their own right and
commercially available from manufacturer companies,
which are aptly named foundries. There is a bewildering
array of digital fonts available to download from the
internet and a little background knowledge of type
history will certainly help the beginner. There exists
a thriving community of typography fans who are only
too willing to engage via blogging, type societies and
lectures. For the more experienced designer, learning
about typography is a life-long special interest.
Learning new software and staying informed about
technological advances is an essential part of
continuing professional development as a designer.
Saturday June 27 2009
MICHAEL JACKSON
1958 — 2009
profile of a design editor
Jon Hill
News organizations, such as The Times newspaper, are able to
draw on their vast archive of material, and use this content in
both print and digital formats to make reference to a current
story. In this way publications can bring forward some of their
heritage into the present. Readers of The Times still want a
reliable and trusted journalistic product. If they now have to pay
to read content on the website, then they want a polished product,
not the aggregated content they could get from free news sites.
The digital product needs, therefore, to be of a high standard.
Jon Hill is Design Editor at The Times in London and oversaw
redesigns of the paper, The Times website and the iPad edition.
He also oversaw the launch of the Eureka supplement. In the
interview which follows he explains his views on typography
and the impact of the digital environment on design.
How do you take the The Times brand and keep it looking fresh?
It is a bit like setting up a kit or palette: not so much setting
up templates as setting up a toolbox that all the designers can
use. That goes all the way down to the font. We use Times
Modern, which was created as part of the Neville Brody
redesign in 2006/7.
We worked very hard to make sure that the font worked across
all the platforms from print to digital. Times Modern is our DNA;
it is our brand if you like, because, of course, a big part of The
Times is its headline font. It appears on everything we do.
You are known as a strict typographic designer who knows
the deep structure of editorial pages and the visual language
of page architecture. Do you still use these typography
skills when working on the screen versions of The Times?
The biggest challenge for me is working with developers and
the people that work with and build our content management
systems. When you work with these people, you realize that
their idea of a successful publication is one that is published
automatically: it takes the journalism then automatically flows it
into the web or the tablet edition. Meanwhile, art directors want
to retain control and craft every page of the edition and this can
be an area of conflict. The editing team want to have the last
word on the way it looks, for example to make the headline
better or adjust the picture crop for the iPad edition. The truth
is somewhere in the middle. Where possible, the systems will
automate much of our digital editions, but we have a level of
control that allows for typographic and editorial adjustments.
Who has the last word when setting up these digital editions?
One of the things that we have learned is that, because of the
paywall at The Times, we aim to give our readers an elegant
and considered product if they are paying for it. Therefore it is
important to get specifics like drop caps right and paragraph
spacing. Polishing these details also shows that we care and
makes the product stand out from all the free news sites. We
discussed this with the developers and made sure they knew
this was important to the integrity of The Times when they were
prioritizing their work.
Do you feel like the quality of digital fonts has improved to
match the print version?
We are happier. We are still working with Monotype to try and
improve the website fonts because there are still different
browsers to consider and each browser displays the type
differently. On the tablets you are in control because you know
the resolution and quality of the device. Now in 2012 on some of
the retina screens it is as good as it is in print. I am confident that
we are now in control of our brand and the colour palettes across our
digital editions in a way that we weren’t, say, five years ago.
Can you explain how the new digital environment has had an
impact on your work?
No publisher has really cracked what it means to publish
editorial on the iPad and how you make that a rich experience.
It hasn’t quite happened yet but I am sure it will. It is important
that our designers know about interactive graphics, motion
profile of a design editor
Jon Hill
Inside the publication 93
I can explain.
Pete Townshend
in his own words. Exclusive extracts from his memoir
plus
kofi annan’s
verdict on
tony blair
By James Harding
29.09.12
profile
graphics and are able to handle large amounts of data. They
need storytelling skills in a digital context. It is no longer a case
of moving around text and images on a page layout. Designing
for digital newspapers demands a whole new approach.
Tell us about the iPad. Is making the tablet version very
different to making the website?
A bit of history: Rupert Murdoch made a promise to Steve Jobs,
so the story goes, that we would be the first newspaper to
publish on the iPad, within three months of its UK launch. From
a standing start we created the app within three months. It is a
daily edition as opposed to a constantly updated website, with
the editorial mantra that it is ‘like the newspaper but better’.
The idea behind the app is that it shouldn’t be a ‘live’ product,
like the website, but a daily edition with all the journalism you’d
get in the paper plus interactive graphics, video and extra
archive material to give background content to bigger articles.
The reader can have an edition-based linear experience.
We think readers prefer this, they don’t want an infinite,
overwhelming product, which is sometimes what navigating
a news website can be like.
Inside the publication 95
! Jon Hill’s advice for getting into news design
Do you think that young designers still need
to know typographic rules and basics or can
they survive without this knowledge?
Yes, they need to have a passion for design
and typography and show some evidence of
working with complex information and large
amounts of text.
Graduates need to have a basic knowledge
of typography and information design, but
now they must also have the ability to teach
themselves new software. Designers in the
workplace update their knowledge all the
time by using online tutorials. They need
some knowledge of coding, so that they can
appreciate what website developers do and
be able to speak their language.
In terms of specialist publishing software,
that is learned on the job. Many large
publishers have custom-built systems that
are not publicly available and so training is
done in-house. This means that an aptitude
for learning quickly is the most important
attribute. If an applicant can demonstrate an
ability to learn, this would be a good thing.
Once they are at work, can students pick
up typographic rules as they go along?
The temptation is to bring people in who have
a technical set of skills, but you can spend
longer explaining rules of typography. We
take students with technical skills, but we
spend time training them to work with type.
We can train them on our own system, called
Methode. I like to see portfolios that show the
person has a real interest in typography so
you can have a deep conversation with them
about that.
We look for people who have done some
heavyweight typography before, or who
show some sort of passion, even if it’s for
wooden type, so you know you can have
a conversation with them about details.
After all, crafting type is common to
everything we do at The Times, from print to
digital, information design to animation.
everything we do at The Times, from print to
digital, information design to animation.
What specialist skills would you look for?
An understanding or appreciation of how
websites and basic coding works is an
advantage. Currently that includes HTML5
and CSS. We wouldn’t expect a designer to
code everything by hand, but they have to
appreciate how it is done. Knowledge of how
to handle stories with a lot of data, visuals
and graphics is important. The rising
popularity of storytelling using infographics
has come about because of the trend
towards organizations and governments
sharing more of their data and this is good
for designers. Designers need to interrogate
the journalism, and be able to tell complex
stories simply, especially when designing
for the tablet, perhaps by using maps or
moving graphics. It is not just about pure
typography now; we need to tell stories in
a number of different formats. Moving
image, handling data and coding is all part
of a designer’s skill set now, on top of the
more traditional skills of page layout,
typography and how to crop an image. I
want designers who can do all those things.
Myths about type
True or false? All mastheads need to appear at the
top of the cover.
This principle came from the days when magazines
were only sold in shops or kiosks and covers were
stacked for display purposes, so the masthead had
to appear at the top of the cover. Now, with many
customers subscribing, this is no longer the case.
However for hierarchy and a sense of authority the top
is an ideal place.
True or false? Never run small x-height body copy
across long line lengths to create wide columns.
This is a question of legibility and there are many
books you can read about legibility. See Better Type
by Betty Binns (Roundtable Press, Watson-Guptill
Publications, 1989). Once the eye reads too far down
a line it can’t find its way back again. As a general rule,
keep lines of moderate lengths. (The x-height is the
height of a lowercase ‘x’ of a given typeface measured
from the baseline to the mean-line. Different fonts can
be the same point size but have a different x-height.)
True or false? Headlines should never be placed over
a beautiful/reportage picture or any image if it can
be avoided.
When reportage pictures were as precious as pieces
of art, then this was the maxim. Any fine artist will be
irritated by a headline placed over his or her work
reproduced in a magazine. However, there is nothing
wrong with text on pictures. The ‘pop’ of a headline on
an image can be amazing and the design can make
brilliant combinations. See George Lois’s book
Covering the Sixties (The Monacelli Press, Inc, 1996).
True or false? Don’t reverse white text out of a black
background. People won’t read it.
In a printed glossy magazine, the ‘black’ of an image
is made up from at least black plus blue; sometimes
magenta and yellow as well. This is part of the
four-colour printing process: the colours are known as
CMYK. Once on the press the registration can vary.
Tiny reversed-out type will not hold its shape and the
reader will be unable to read pieces of the letters. (In
colour printing, registration is the system that print
machines use to ensure colours are lined up and print
clearly and crisply.)
True or false? Headlines should run across the top of
the page but never across the gutter.
This statement came from the days when type
hierarchy existed to help the reader digest the content
step-by-step. In our multi-channel world there is no
reason why a more unconventional publication should
adhere to this. When tablets can flip a page from
portrait to landscape, a headline might move or even
appear as a navigational link. Headlines along the
bottom of a page can use scale to dominate. Because
of the way magazines are bound, the gutter in thick
glossy magazines is a 12mm (half-inch) no-go area.
Most magazines use a binding technique known as
perfect binding, which uses hot-melt adhesive to glue
folded sections together. For those thick publications,
headlines should be kept out of the gutter to avoid
losing a letter. In a digital or saddle-stitched magazine,
you can place headlines across the gutter. Think about
your reader.
96 Chapter 4
Inside the publication 97
REF
Type resources
Website references:
For a description of fonts for print and
fonts for screen:
Opinionated Font Facts, Research and
writing, Alissa Faden with Ellen Lupton.
This site is linked to Ellen’s book and
Princeton Architectural Press.
http://www.thinkingwithtype.com
To find out more on the psychology
of reading:
The Science of Word Recognition, Kevin
Larson, Advanced Reading Technology,
Microsoft Corporation
July 2004, http://www.microsoft.com/
typography
Book references:
While You Are Reading, Gerard Unger,
Mark Batty Publisher, 2007
Detail in Typography, Jost Hochuli,
Hyphen Press, 2008
Image treatment
Imagery and what the designer does with it have an
enormous impact on a publication’s feel. Newspapers
are increasingly relying on pictures as storytelling.
As more newspapers move from text-driven to
image-driven content, their use of all kinds of images
– graphs, illustrations and graphic devices – is
growing. But there is a key difference between the use
of pictures in newspapers and magazines. As Mario
Garcia puts it, ‘The nature of the content is different;
newspapers need imagery that imparts immediacy in
contrast to the more relaxing environment for the
images that you’d find in a magazine.’ Production and
In his work for The Face from 1981 to 1986,
Neville Brody made radical experiments with
typography and layout. Influenced by
Constructivism and Dada he broke many of
the conventions of typography, highlighting
individual words and phrases and changing
the size of letters within the same word.
The cover above from January 1986
features a portrait of the singer Grace
Jones by Jean-Paul Goude.
98 Chapter 4
budget issues are also factors, as time and money
spent on images for a newspaper will be minute
compared to that of magazines.
Myths about art direction
True or false? The cover is the most important page
in any magazine.
Increasingly true. If the cover doesn’t attract the
reader’s attention then all the work inside is wasted.
For digital magazines, the cover is an entry point and
a home page that reinforces the brand. On the web,
magazines are represented as thumbnail icons and
covers have to work hard, therefore, to be memorable
even at tiny size.
True or false? Designers only exist to do what
editors say.
Designers are partners and equals in the creative
process. They add spark to the fire and can make dull
editorial content look good. The best editor/designer
team is one of mutual respect and partnership.
True or false? Every picture needs a caption.
If you want readers to follow the meaning of a picture
story then every picture does need a caption. If
pictures are used as decorative elements then it is not
necessary. Pictures always need to be credited to the
photographer or to the stock agency that supplied
them. Copyright infringement is not good design
practice and must be avoided.
True or false? Money spent on original photography
or illustration is worth every penny.
Creating something original is what designers get out
of bed for. If the budget allows for new material then it
is worth creating something unique to the magazine.
In addition, the rights to use that image again can be
included in the original fee. A publisher can, therefore,
start to build a library of images that can be reused.
Fashion and lifestyle magazines have profited by
syndicating images in this way.
True or false? Using images for free from the internet
is the way of the future.
Aiming for a unique product should be the top priority.
Producing original images cannot be beaten but this
can be expensive. Remember that images available for
free on the internet can turn up anywhere. If using
These fashion photographs from Wallpaper*
for a story in their ‘Reborn In India’ edition
explode with colour and movement. The
fashion shoot was created during the Hindu
festival of Holi and can be seen on the
Wallpaper* website as a video clip. The use
of full-bleed colour shows how photographs
can underpin the identity of a magazine
– in this case a curiosity for different
cultures and locations.
All you need to know to keep
the stuff in your refrigerator,
freezer, and pantry in peak condition.
(Plus, learn when those leftovers
really should be tossed.)
THE ULTIMATE
FOOD-STORAGE
GUIDE
WRITTEN BY ELIZABETH PASSARELLA ADDITIONAL REPORTING BY RACHEL SHELASKY
PHOTOGRAPHS BY JAMIE CHUNG PROP STYLING BY KAITLYN DUROSS FOOD STYLING BY KAREN EVANS
Inside the publication 99
images from the web, credit must be given to sources
and care taken to check permission for usage.
True or false? White space does not sell magazines.
If white space adds to the atmosphere and visual
storytelling (tension/absence) then it has value. If
it exists simply to stretch out copy and fill up pages
then it has no editorial value. See Emigre magazine
(see p.179) and RayGun as examples of magazines
that use white space to create dynamic and graphic
visual elements.
Using photography
Photography functions as visual reporting or
storytelling, and the huge range of contemporary
photographic techniques and styles available offers
the editorial designer a vast choice of reporters and
storytellers. Even if photography cannot be
commissioned for financial reasons, the photos that
are supplied by a PR agency, or by the subject of the
story, can be edited just as text is. Commissioning a
visual story or style is just the beginning (see p.190 for
successful commissioning), for although photographs
are taken in a rectangular format, the designer then
has the option to crop the image or change the shape,
as well as alter tonal values and employ other
photo-manipulation techniques. All of this is visual
editing; just as the editor makes selections and
decisions about the copy, so art directors work
with the image content of a publication.
But they can go further than that: if an art editor wants
a different perspective on a story, he or she has the
luxury of not giving the photographer any information
about it, possibly resulting in two very different
interpretations (image and text), which can add up to
much more than the sum of their parts. Just as editing
can shape a viewpoint, so can editorial design. The
selection, juxtaposition, combination and positioning
of images and text with captions that ‘tell’ viewers
what they are seeing can strongly suggest a ‘truth’ that
may not be there at all. Added to this is the growing
sophistication in photo manipulation (both in and out
of camera), which literally changes truth to lies. Hence
the intervention of art editor, editor, picture editor and
photographer can result in myriad representations of
a story. Michael Watts, editor of many newspaper
When shooting for the iPad, still-life photos
can make good use of the single-page format.
In this Port fashion shoot, the bench provides
a strong diagonal emphasis within the
composition. Instead of a cut-out garment
shot, this lovely photographic set-up helps to
define the thick texture of the coat, and in so
doing tells the story of the garment.
‘The December 2001 issue was our first after
9/11. Because of our two- to three-month lead
time, the world had been saturated with
images of the Twin Towers being destroyed by
the time this issue was printed. We decided
not to show any images of destruction but use
the space to celebrate the past and look
towards the future,’ says Criswell Lappin,
former art director of Metropolis. This
photograph by Sean Hemmerle did just that.
A great photo is the basic requirement for
a great image, but equally important are
sympathetic and appropriate cropping,
scaling, positioning, format and stock. This
image from Twen (left) is a brilliant image,
brilliantly cropped.
Inside the publication 101
supplements, recalls experiences on the FT The
Business magazine for the Financial Times:
‘Sometimes there were difficulties between myself
and Julia Cuthbertson, who ran the weekend paper.
She wanted conventional magazine items like food
and restaurant reviews, while we wanted something
that was visually dynamic and new, reflecting the
dot-com boom and the new, cool status of business.
The trick was to subvert the genre. On the food
pages we photographed food in its raw state, when
everyone else was showing cooked dishes. Our
picture editor, Caroline Metcalfe, came up with some
great food photographers, notably Rob White. Then
we illustrated the restaurant reviews – by the very
witty Marion McGilvary – with a mixture of maps
showing where the restaurant was located, and bills
that we reproduced. The combination of all these
elements made the mag highly idiosyncratic, which
irritated some but pleased many more. It gave it
character. And sales of the weekend Financial Times
rose to over the 250,000 mark in my time there
– a 20 per cent leap. People who never read the
Financial Times in the week would get it at
the weekend.’
Whereas photography in magazines is as
much about image as text, in newspapers
imagery is very much used to support text.
But aspects of magazine design are creeping
in, so that a front page will ofen use one
striking image to attract the eye immediately
and communicate something that no words
could do, as in this powerful Guardian cover of
12 September 2001.
102 Chapter 4
In this July 1967 issue of Harper’s Bazaar
(left), a piece on poetry is illustrated
with a picture of the score for Karlheinz
Stockhausen’s ‘Refrain for the Players, no.11’.
Art directors Ruth Ansel and Bea Feitler were
making the conceptual link between the
elegant intricacy and visual lyricism of the
score (and the music it represents) and the
nature and concept of poetry. It is a brilliant
visual metaphor for the article. Newspapers
are also increasingly using illustration to give
readers a less literal interpretation of a story,
as illustrations will offer a different dynamic
to a page. Below, Marion Deuchars’ illustration
for The Guardian gives breath and life to the
page. Its composition and colour contrast well
with the blocks of text beneath it, while its
obvious hand-craftedness gives the story
something a photo would struggle to do.
Below left, in this page for iPad, the
brushstrokes of the illustration by Dan
Williams contrast with the crisp typography.
Inside the publication 103
Using illustration
When at The Guardian newspaper, Mark Porter used
illustration because ‘it has always been an important
part of The Guardian visual mix, and, by introducing
more contemporary illustrators, we have ensured that
the paper feels fresh and modern’. Other art editors use
illustration when a story demands a conceptual or
oblique interpretation, or there are no good photographic
images to be used, or simply to create an interesting
and constantly varying dialogue between visuals and
By choosing to use illustration in place of
photography, which is only used for highgloss, full-colour ads confined to two or three
spreads in the centre of the magazine, firstclass Virgin Atlantic fanzine Carlos (right) ‘set
out to avoid the clichéd world of celebrity-led
magazine content, both editorially and
visually. Or, in the words of the then art
director, Carlos is “post-photography”!’ –
Jeremy Leslie.
‘If we didn’t incorporate the textiles into an
illustration [right], then we would be left
showing carpet swatches, which would be
pretty dull. By having Christopher Neal
incorporate the textiles into his one-colour
line drawings, we accomplished two things.
First, we made carpet samples interesting
to look at without taking away from the
product. Second, the illustrations give the
viewer information about the product. The
environments, while somewhat tongue-incheek, indicate the locations that the different
textiles are designed for – schools, offices,
airports and so on. I gave Christopher a rough
page layout, the approximate size for each
illustration and told him which environment
went with each textile. Christopher came up
with the content of each illustration with little
direction. Once he sent me the finished
illustrations, I decided to hand-letter the word
‘edges’ in the headline to reflect what he did.’
– Criswell Lappin, former art director, Metropolis.
text. Illustration can express a concept or feeling more
than photography can, because readers often cannot help
but attach a narrative to a photograph, particularly if it’s
figurative. This is because they ‘read’ the photograph
literally: ‘This image is made up of this figure wearing
these clothes in this setting doing this thing, therefore
I am being told this.’ But illustration is not read in this
way, allowing the story, art editor and reader to create
other, often more expressive and abstract associations.
Illustration can also illustrate the zeitgeist in a more
obvious way than photography can, and it can be used
104 Chapter 4
Many editorial publications incorporate
illustrations into their design, but none besides
The Illustrated Ape (above), edited by Christian
Patterson and Michael Sims, designed by
Darren Ellis at See Studio and illustrated by
top illustrators such as Paul Davis, builds its
whole raison d’être around it. Created by using
open submissions from writers, artists and
illustrators, this cultural quarterly of poetry
and fiction uses only illustration as its
imagery – and more often than not its text,
too. The resulting large-scale spreads are rich
and textural, and form an intelligent, cohesive
whole that always looks fresh.
to support a brand. The Illustrated Ape magazine in the
UK is famed for only using illustration, as is Carlos,
which retains colour photography solely for the ads.
Cropping an image
Cropping, magnifying, repeating or shooting an image
from unusual approaches can have a huge impact on a
layout and create original and unexpected perspectives.
Techniques such as cropping and magnifying can also
concentrate the eye on the portion of an image that
contains its essence, or create a meaningful dialogue
with the text, and, ultimately, a dynamic rapport with
the text and layout. If more than one image is used, this
rapport becomes more complex, with the need to create
a narrative interaction both between the images and
between the images and text. American industrial
design magazine I.D. uses these tools to great effect: by
blowing up a product to massive proportions on a page,
an everyday item such as a toothbrush becomes a surreal
object of beauty whose sculptural qualities are revealed,
making for a visually arresting page. Tight close-ups
can be equally effective, as can using images to create
abstract patterns and focusing on or bringing out an
unusual curve, shape or aspect in an object.
Inside the publication 105
On the spread from Japanese magazine
Eat (top), the close-up photograph of the
scales of an upside-down artichoke turn
what could have been a mundane image into
a sculptural, striking graphic. In I.D.
magazine, the image of a bicycle (left) works
hard to pull two spreads literally and boldly
together while also suggesting movement and
continuity; in another issue, toothbrushes
become abstract translucent objects (above).
STUDENT
UNIQUE
.
February 24, 2012
www.Standoutfromtheproud.co.uk
www.I’mamartstudent.co.uk
UK £5.99 in association with Intelligence Limited
106 Chapter 4
them from a different perspective. Collage your
elements together in your sketchbook for
reference later on.
• Consider the letter kerning. Almost all digital
fonts will need adjusting. Don’t accept the output
from the computer. It does not have your human
eye and cannot ‘see’ type. You are learning to feel
type and really see it in use. Look at the letters off
screen and absorb the shapes they make.
• Be confident in your ability. You are aiming
for a typographic style sheet that reflects and
enhances the idea of your magazine.
This magazine is an example of a student project that
utilizes and explores a largely typographic format. It
uses graphic language to reflect the opinionated content
of the editorial, which is a slightly cynical take on the
art-school experience and a critique of the lifestyle. The
creator Jordan Harrison-Twist has chosen sharp Futura
Italic as his headline font and made provocative covers
that challenge the reader.
Brief Three
Typographic style sheets
Aim
To create typographic worksheets for your magazine.
The brief
Work on a visual typographic identity for your magazine
and think about how the fonts will relate to the
philosophy of your magazine’s content. Start with two or
three fonts that relate to each other and work together
visually as a headline font, subhead font and text font.
Other design elements tend to be sisters and brothers of
these main three fonts. As you progress, you might cut
this number down to one font or two, but be open to ideas
at the start. Remember that if your magazine is bold and
powerful then use fonts that have a dynamic page
presence. If your magazine is contemplative, however,
choose fonts that reflect a softer visual sensibility.
• Write some headlines and stand-firsts. Explore
scale by looking at what would work for drop
caps. Which font reads smoothly for pull quotes?
Print them out and pin them to a wall to view
Inside the publication 107
Much of the content was written by
Harrison-Twist, who is talented in that area,
but the visual looks raw in its lack of respect
for convention. The magazine evokes a
fanzine feel in its use of two colours and line
drawings, all of which serve to reinforce
the concept of the editorial.
108
5
109
Chapter 5 : Creating layouts
Having established what editorial design is, and how an understanding of it and its
components is essential to good design and art direction, we come to a key part of the
design process itself: creating layouts. Although there is no magic formula for composing
the perfect layout, there are certain considerations that condition the design of an editorial
publication. Those dealing with roles, branding and the publication’s identity and readership
have already been discussed, but others, such as specific factors (space, amount of copy,
time, purpose) and required elements (type styles, weights, symmetry, images) play an
equally important part. All these elements combine to act as guiding principles for the
design. The way in which a designer interprets, applies or sets aside these principles is
fundamental to editorial design, as is the ability to look at content and make the constituent
parts work within the proportions of a rectangular page on paper or on screen.
110 Chapter 5
Principal components
of a layout
The components of this layout are contained on two
single pages, which, together, form a double-page
spread (DPS). Some of these components have been
defined from a branding and identity point of view in
preceding chapters; here, they are examined from a
visual and layout-composition perspective. The box
opposite shows the component parts, but it also shows
the grid substructure, which consists of columns,
column gutter, spine gutter, margins, folio line,
baseline and trim area (see Chapter 6 for more
information on grids).
Templates
For newspapers and news pages of magazines, flexible
templates will speed up the layout and production
processes, and give the pages and overall design a
cohesion that might otherwise be lost in the frantic
days and hours before going to press. Templates
simplify all aspects of page make-up, but they can also
be restrictive in design terms, and care must be taken
to ensure that they don’t make pages look too alike.
Imagery plays an important part here; subject, crop,
scale and tension can all be used to distinguish pages
from each other.
Template essentials
The essential elements of a template consist of margins (blue),
columns and gutters (green), baseline grid (pink), folio (purple) and
bleed area. This template uses a six-column grid, allowing the option
of two-, three- or six-column layouts. The sizes of the margins are
integral to creating white space on a page – their size is often
influenced by advertising revenues as every extra centimetre can
be sold. The baseline grid determines the variations in leading, and
consequently type size, allowing the possibility for type of varying
sizes to align. This baseline grid is founded on 9-point type on 11-point
leading, meaning that all other type sizes need to fit on leadings that
are multiples of 11. The folio is a guide line to mark the positioning of
page numbers and sections.
The spread opposite top incorporates some of the principal
components of a layout. The image, headline, stand-first and pull
quotes help to grab attention and provide easy, instant access to the
article. The drop cap and folio help guide the reader, while the caption
and credit add interest to both image and article. These components,
plus colour and graphic rules, create variety within the layout.
There are many other components that can be included in the design.
The spread opposite bottom shows the added use of a subhead,
a byline and sign-off. It also demonstrates the flexibility of the same
template, using two columns instead of three, and a varying headline
size and colour, all of which contribute to creating a different look and
feel for this article.
Creating layouts 111
This is dummy text. It is intended to be read but have no
meaning. As a simulation of actual copy, using ordinary
words with normal letter frequencies, it cannot deceive eye or
brain. Dummy settings which use other languages or even
gibberish to approximate text have the inherent
disadvantage they distract attention to themselves. Simultext
is effective in any typeface, at whatever size and format is
required. Paragraphs may be long or short. Text can be
produced to complete any area, as the copy is simply
repeated with different starting points. This is dummy text.
Intended to be read but have no meaning. A simulation of
actual copy, using ordinary words with normal letter
frequencies, it cannot deceive eye or brain.
Trial settings which use other languages or even gibberish
to approximate text have the disadvantage they distract
attention to themselves. As a simulation of actual copy, using
ordinary words with normal letter frequencies, can’t deceive
eye or brain. Simultext is effective in any typeface, at what
ever size and format is required. Paragraphs may be long or
short. What you see is dummy text. It is intended to be read
but have no meaning. As a simulation of actual copy, using
ordinary words with normal letter frequencies, can’t deceive
eye or brain. Copy can be produced to complete any area, as
the basic copy is simply repeated with different starting points.
It is intended to be read but have no meaning.
Presentation copy which uses languages or gibberish to then
approximate text have the disadvantage that they distract
attention to themselves. Simultext is effective in any typeface,
at whatever size and format is required. Paragraphs may be
long or short. This is dummy text. Intended to be read but
have no meaning. As a simulation of actual copy, using
words with normal letter frequencies, it cannot deceive eye or
brain. What you see here is dummy text.
Simultext is effective in any typeface, whatever size and
format required. Paragraphs may be long or short. Text can
be produced to complete any area, as the basic copy is simply
repeated with different starting points. This is dummy text.
This is dummy text. It is intended to be read but have no
meaning. As a simulation of actual copy, using ordinary
words with normal letter frequencies, it cannot deceive eye or
brain. Dummy settings which use other languages or even
gibberish to approximate text have the inherent
disadvantage they distract attention to themselves. Simultext
is effective in any typeface, at whatever size and format is
required.
Paragraphs may be long or short. Text can be produced
to complete any area, as the copy is simply repeated with
different starting points. This is dummy text. Intended to
be read but have no meaning. A simulation of actual copy,
using ordinary words with normal letter frequencies, cannot
deceive eye or brain. Trial settings which use other
languages or gibberish to approximate text have the
disadvantage they distract attention to themselves. As a
simulation of actual copy, using ordinary words with normal
letter frequencies, it can’t deceive eye or brain. Simultext is
effective in any typeface.
As a simulation of actual copy, using ordinary words with
normal letter frequencies, it cannot deceive eye or brain. Copy
can be produced to complete any area, as the basic copy is
simply repeated with different starting points. This is dummy
text. Intended to be read but have no meaning. Presentation
copy which uses languages or gibberish to approximate text
have the disadvantage that they distract attention to them
selves. Simultext is effective in any typeface, at whatever size
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
This is a pull quote. It is intended
to be read but have no meaning.
As a simulation of actual copy,
using ordinary words with normal
letter frequencies, it can’t deceive
eye or brain.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
The headline A stand-first is a short summary of the following article allowing
quick and easy access for the reader. Often it includes the Author’s
and Photographer’s Names as a byline
FEATURE 11
«This is a caption.
Intended to be read
but has no meaning.
This is a typical subhead
The headline
of this story
ummy settings which use
other or even gibberish to
approximate text have the
inherent disadvantage they distract
attention to themselves. Simultext is
effective in any typeface, at whatever
size and format is required. Paragraphs
may be long or short. Text can be to
complete any area, as the copy is simply
repeated with different starting points.
This is dummy text. Intended to be read
but have no meaning. A simulation of
actual copy, using ordinary words with
normal letter frequencies, it cannot
deceive eye or brain.
Settings which use other languages
or even gibberish to approximate text
have the disadvantage they distract
attention to themselves. As a simulation
of actual copy, using ordinary words with
normal letter frequencies, can’t deceive
eye or brain. Simultext is effective in any
typeface, at what ever size and format
is required. Paragraphs may be long or
short. What you see is dummy text. It
is intended to be read but have no real
meaning. As a simulation of actual copy,
using ordinary words with normal letter
frequencies, can’t deceive eye or brain.
Copy can be produced to complete any
area, as the basic copy is repeated with
different starting points. It is intended
to be read but have no meaning.
Presentation copy uses languages or
gibberish to approximate text have the
disadvantage that they distract attention
to themselves. Simultext is effective in
any typeface, whatever size and format
is required. Paragraphs may be long or
short. This is dummy text. Intended
to be read but have no meaning. As a
simulation of actual copy, using words
with normal letter frequencies, cannot
deceive eye or brain. What you see here
is dummy text.
Simultext is effective in any typeface,
whatever size and format required.
Paragraphs may be long or short. Text
can be produced to complete any area,
as the basic copy is simply repeated with
different starting points. This is dummy
text. It is intended to be read but have
no meaning.
This is dummy text. It is intended to
be read but have no meaning. As a
simulation of actual copy, using ordinary
words with normal letter frequencies,
it cannot deceive eye or brain. Dummy
settings which use other languages or
even gibberish to approximate text have
the inherent disadvantage they distract
attention to themselves. Simultext is
effective in any typeface, at whatever size
and format is required. Paragraphs may
be long or short. Text can be produced
to complete any area, as the copy is
simply repeated with different starting
points. This is dummy text. Intended
to be read but have no meaning. As a
simulation of actual copy, using words
with normal letter frequencies, cannot
deceive eye or brain. Trial settings which
use other languages or gibberish to
approximate text have the disadvantage
they distract attention to themselves. A
simulation of actual copy, using ordinary
words with normal letter frequencies, it
can’t deceive eye or brain. Simultext is
effective in any typeface, at whatever
size and format is required. Paragraphs
may be long or short. What you see is
dummy text. It is intended to be read
but have no meaning. As a simulation
of actual copy.
Using ordinary words with normal letter
frequencies, it cannot deceive eye or
brain. Copy is produced to complete
any area, as the copy is simply repeated
with different starting points. This is
dummy text. Intended to be read but
have no meaning. The Presentation
copy which uses languages or gibberish
to approximate text have the inherent
disadvantage that they distract attention
to them selves. Simultext is effective in
any typeface, at whatever size and format
is required. Paragraphs may be long or
short. This is dummy text.
Settings which use other languages
or even gibberish to approximate text
have the disadvantage they distract
attention to themselves. As a simulation
of actual copy, using ordinary words with
normal letter frequencies, can’t deceive
eye or brain. Simultext is effective in any
typeface, at what ever size and format
is required. Paragraphs may be long or
short. What you see is dummy text. It
is intended to be read but have no real
meaning. As a simulation of actual copy,
using ordinary words with normal letter
frequencies, can’t deceive eye or brain.
Copy can be produced to complete any
area, as the basic copy is repeated with
different starting points. It is intended
to be read but have no meaning.
Presentation copy uses languages or
gibberish to approximate text have the
disadvantage that they distract attention
to themselves. Simultext is effective in
any typeface, whatever size and format
is required. Paragraphs may be long or
short. This is dummy text. Intended
to be read but have no meaning. As a
simulation of actual copy, using words
with normal letter frequencies, cannot
deceive eye or brain. What you see here
is dummy text.
Simultext is effective in any typeface,
whatever size and format required.
Paragraphs may be long or short. Text
can be produced to complete any area,
as the basic copy is simply repeated with
different starting points. This is dummy
text. It is intended to be read but have
no meaning. What you see here is
dummy text. It is intended to be read.
This is a stand-first.
Intended to be read
but have no meaning.
A simulation of actual
copy, using ordinary
words with normal
letter frequencies,
it cannot deceive
the eye or brain.
D This is a caption. Intended to be read but has no meaning. A simulation of actual copy, using ordinary words with normal letter frequencies, it cannot deceive the eye.
•••••••••••••••••••
A pull quote intended
to be read but have no
meaning. A simulation
of actual copy, using
ordinary words.
•••••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••••
A pull quote intended
to be read but have no
meaning. A simulation
of actual copy, using
ordinary words.
•••••••••••••••••••
Photo by Laura Simpson
12 FEATURE FEATURE 13
112 Chapter 5
Depending on the size of the other
components on the page, impact can be
created by using a head that is either huge or
small, and by placing the headline in dynamic
relationship with other items on the page.
Elements such as imagery or the content of a
headline can be incorporated into the type to
unify the whole layout, as with this spread in
The Observer Music Monthly (above). If there
is no pictorial image, the headline itself can be
used illustratively and visually to create
impact and focus. Key to good use of headline
type is experimentation. Fishwrap (right)
illustrates this well, with a range of decorative
fonts that are created by illustrators making
type and designers being inventive with
letterform and, in some cases, designing
original typefaces for the magazine.
Creating layouts 113
Headline and heading
The title of the story is usually the largest type size on
the layout, as its aim is to stimulate curiosity about the
feature and tempt you to read on. A headline written
before the story gets to the design stage can be helpful
in determining a direction for the layout, but different
publications construct layouts in different ways. It
may be that the designer dictates the headline space
by laying out the feature first, in which case the
designer may have an input into the content of the text
This spread from Inner Loop (left) uses an
oversize graphical headline as if it were part
of the image. This headline contrasts strongly
with the neat, ordered columns of text on the
facing page. Interestingly, by aligning columns
of text to a baseline, the designer has created
the silhouette of an urban cityscape that
echoes the facing graphic. The bleeding
horizontal rule in the bottom third of the
spread unifies the pages, drawing the
disparate elements together.
These pages from El País (above) and
The New York Times (above right) illustrate
different ways of using bylines. Incorporating
such different styles into a newspaper signals
to the reader the section they are in: news
comment columns tend to be dense, with little
use of white space, conveying a sense of
importance and gravity. In more general
comment and debate, bylines can be more
engaging through the use of white space and
playful pull quotes. The former signals news,
the latter opinion.
114 Chapter 5
as well as its design. Either way, the content of
the headline and its visual representation are
interconnected and should be handled as such.
Stand-first
As with the headline, the stand-first (or sell, intro,
sub-deck) will usually be written by the subeditor and
is normally around 40 to 50 words in length; any
longer and it defeats its purpose, any shorter and it
becomes difficult to get the necessary information
in and can make the page look unbalanced. It is
a good idea to construct a system – or style sheets
– for displaying this kind of information rather than
applying it on an ad hoc basis, but flexibility and the
ability to deviate from the norm when necessary are
important, so style sheets should always be used as
guiding tools rather than hard-and-fast rules.
Byline
If the name of the author or writer is well known, it often
appears alongside a picture of him or her to form a
picture byline. Picture bylines are usually popular with
readers and they work well in newspaper design, but in
a magazine feature there is a danger they will detract
from the many other elements on an opening spread.
Body copy
Text as a component of a layout can be handled in a
number of ways. Columns of text are either justified
(text filling the column width), ranged left with ragged
right, or ranged right with ragged left. Left-ranged text
is the most common in editorial because text that is
centred or ranged right (ragged left) can be tiring on
the eyes when reading large quantities of print.
Similarly, column widths should be narrow enough to
read easily (see Fassett’s theorem of legibility, p.156),
but not so narrow as to create rivers of white space,
which can occur when gaps between words in adjacent
lines form distracting vertical shapes. Lengthy blocks
of text can be broken up, making overall readability
easier, but also making the page lighter and more
attractive to the reader.
Towards the end of the production cycle, when all
necessary editing, cutting and changing of copy has
Cross-heads, paragraph indents, extra
leading before a new paragraph, and
paragraph breaks are employed to break up
text and create smaller, more visually
appealing blocks of text than lengthy
columns of grey print. However, Janet
Froelich, former art director of The New York
Times Magazine (top and above), advises
designers not to be afraid of such text use:
‘The New York Times Magazine is a reader’s
magazine. Its mission is to present both text
and images that give our readers a deeper
understanding of the cultural and political
forces at work in the world. To this end
writers’ and photographers’ voices are
critical, and the design serves that mission.
Large blocks of text have a beauty that our
designers respect. When juxtaposed with
powerful photography, judicious use of
white space and strong headline
treatments, they give the reader a varied
intellectual experience.’
Text can be used as well as images to illustrate
a concept. A conversation can be laid out to be
oppositional, confrontational, light-hearted or
animated. Font use, runarounds, shaping and
spacing can all work towards delivering not
just letterforms but the tone, content and
style of an article. David Carson famously
used dingbats to illustrate the irrelevance of
a Bryan Ferry interview in a month when very
similar interviews with the star had already
appeared in dozens of magazines, but Vince
Frost in Zembla (top) and Martin Venezky in
Speak (right) illustrate more subtle ways of
suggesting expression through body-copy
layout. Look at concrete poetry and the work
of the Dadaists for inspiration.
Creating layouts 115
116 Chapter 5
designers should be able to use such tweaks to make
blocks accessible and appealing. It looks neater to
have at least two lines of a paragraph at the top and
bottom of a column – more details on type sizes,
leading and alignment can be found in Chapter 6.
During the 1980s and 1990s it was fashionable to see
pages that were built purely around text and typography, and
stories that were interpreted through typography. It takes
been completed, a good designer will manually
fine-tune body copy to make it look as appealing as
possible. Words may be kerned or lines tracked back to
remove a single word at the end of a paragraph (widow)
or a single word at the top of a column (orphan), soft
returns added to create a better shape in the ragging of
the column, words taken over to improve line lengths,
and hyphenation inserted in the case of awkward word
or line breaks. By looking at the blocks as shapes,
The initial capital (which is also a partial drop
cap) for this spread in Fishwrap (left) deftly
echoes the headline, which, set at a diagonal,
directs the reader’s eye straight to the first
paragraph of text.
Drop caps can do more than indicate the
start of an article, chapter or paragraph.
On the New York Times Magazine spread
below about the identity crisis among French
Jews facing the rise of anti-Semitism, art
director Janet Froelich split the drop cap
‘I’ in two and used it to illustrate that crisis,
while echoing the split Star of David in the
facing image.
.
Creating layouts 117
The drop cap in this layout by Janet Froelich
from The New York Times Magazine introduces
an element of discord into an otherwise
harmonious layout.
skill and cooperation between the editorial and design
departments to do this well, and a very active engagement
with the material on the part of the designer. Vince Frost
on Zembla went as far as creating shapes to suggest
dialogue, and using the language of printing as a visual
element – literally, having ‘fun with words’, as the tag-line
for the magazine states. He says, ‘There is no point in
designing a magazine if you don’t like the subject matter.’
Drop caps and initial caps
As well as indicating where a story begins, drop caps
and initial caps – the former drops below the baseline,
the latter sits on it but is bigger than the rest of the
body copy – can be put into paragraphs to break up
copy and avoid a page of monotonous ‘grey blocks’.
Drop caps and initial caps can sit within the body copy
or outside; they can be enormous, and whole words or
118 Chapter 5
symbols. Thought should be employed when choosing
the font for a drop cap or initial cap to complement the
rest of the body-copy style; it could be a heavy cut
of the body typeface or a completely contrasting
typestyle, such as an elaborate italic juxtaposed
with a clean, modern sans serif.
Cross-heads or subheads
These small headings usually sit within the body
copy but may be a larger size, bolder, ‘capped-up’
(in upper case), coloured, or set in a different typeface.
Pull quotes can be used in a number of ways,
from the standard blown-up text, seen in
virtually all editorial, to unique ones that
visually enhance the content. More
traditionally, quote marks can be run
Quotes, pull quotes and sound bites
As with most display copy, pull quotes are selected by
the subeditor, but the design team should have a say in
their number, placement and length. Quote marks form
a focal point on a page, and can be used in varying
ways to create extra interest. Either single (‘ ’) or
double (“ ”) quote marks can be used, as long as usage
is consistent. When the quote is taken from the text
but has not been made by an interviewee or subject,
quote marks are not usually used. Ways of designing
pull quotes (with or without quotation marks) might
include floating text in a box, running them in a
separate column, running them as bands across
a whole spread or using them over pictures.
vertically to create energy or dynamic
interest on the page, or run in a blank column
to enhance white space, as seen below on
a spread from Het Parool.
Creating layouts 119
In newspapers their use is vital as a device for drawing
readers into a news page.
Straplines, section headings and
running headlines
These give structure to the various sections of a
publication, identifying or emphasizing what that
subject matter, section or feature is about. Graphics
such as lines or rules, blocks, bars, WOBs (‘white on
blacks’) and shapes can be used to give straplines an
identity. A running headline is an abbreviated headline
that may appear on further pages of an article,
especially if the article continues over several pages,
thus reminding readers which story they are reading.
Jumplines (or turn arrows) and end icons can
be emphasized graphically with a box, bullet
or initial from the publication title or other
symbol. End icons show the reader the end of
the story, and are a good visual guide to the
length of an article, as here in Twen, which
used whimsical jumplines.
Along with pull quotes, there are many other
devices for adding visual interest and alerting
readers to particularly interesting text. Twen,
for example, used numerous icons, including a
little trumpet that announced a newsworthy
item in a column (top). The web uses a range
of visual indicators that print designers can
incorporate into page layouts, including
arrows, buttons and rules.
120 Chapter 5
Captions
Captions usually appear near to or on an image, giving
information about either that picture’s content, or the
reason for the image’s presence and its relationship to
the story. When there are a large number of images to
caption, it can be useful to number each picture and
relate it to a list of captions elsewhere on the page.
Extended picture captions give additional text
information not included in the main body copy.
Captions in newspapers are treated as factual matter
and rarely stray far from their associated image.
Icons
If a story is to continue overleaf or elsewhere in an
issue, it is helpful to let the reader know by employing
either “continued on” and “continued from” lines or
some form of directional arrow. This is called a
jumpline, turn arrow or, on a newspaper, a slug. Stories
spanning more than one page should break midway
through a sentence or paragraph, as a full stop at the
end of a page might make readers think they have
reached the end of the story. The end of a story should
be made clear with an end icon.
Creating layouts 121
Folios
Folios work as a navigational aid around the issue and
so are usually in the same place on each page – either
bottom right or middle in order to find and see the
number easily. If they are placed near the gutter,
flicking through to locate a page can be hard work.
Newspapers often put numbers at the top; book folios
often incorporate the title and chapter, too. While
magazines often drop folios (on full-bleed pictures,
full-page ads, etc.), it is vital that a newspaper does
not do so (except on ads) in their main news sections.
Here, navigation and swift location of stories is key
to the reader’s experience, so folios must be easy to
read and well placed, enabling the reader to flick to a
particular story or to one continuing from the front page.
Picture credits
The credits for images normally run on the same page
as their image, either running vertically up the side of
the image or in the inside gutter of the page. However,
if the photographer is well known, his or her name is
likely to be treated as a byline or incorporated into the
stand-first.
Boxes, panels and sidebars
Rules, colour tints, borders, different column widths
and sans-serif faces (as opposed to the serif faces
often used in feature copy) are traditional ways of
handling box or panel copy, either related to a story or
being laid out as a stand-alone item.
Images
Images are a key visual element on a page and their
relationship to the story is crucial to the design. Either
the text is driven by the image or the image illustrates
the story; in both cases what is important is to create
an interesting dialogue between text and visual.
Within these two simple functions there are many
different ways to approach image use. Martin Venezky
in Speak, for example, ‘used design as a device to open
up the interpretation of an article. ... Rather than
directly illustrating a story’s content, I might develop a
visual metaphor as a companion to the text,’ he explains.
In Fishwrap (above) all individual page credits
are listed on an inventive map at the front of
the publication. This approach makes finding
credits easy and means they do not have to
be incorporated on the highly visual spreads
that are a trademark of the magazine.
There are numerous ways of designing
captions, including the caption map seen
opposite in a page from Graphic International.
122 Chapter 5
It is important to know when to use images as straightforward illustrations of the text.
Faced with designing a spread on little-known modernist Cuban architect Mario Romanach,
Criswell Lappin in Metropolis (above) remembers he was ‘less concerned with the graphic
layout reflecting modernism as I was with showing a range of Romanach’s work. He was
virtually unknown in the US, and his architecture says more about modernism than my
layouts could. The red tint behind some of the images signifies that a building is in danger or
is being destroyed.’
‘For our first issue after 9/11, Sara Barrett, our
photo editor, found this shot from the original
construction of the north tower in 1972. I
tinted the sky blue to give it a little sense of
hope, but other than that the image is unretouched. We knew it was a success because
of all the reactions it elicited. People attached
different meanings to it, many based on their
personal experiences, and it really resonated
with what people – both architects and the
general population – were thinking. The image
references the past and questions the future
at the same time. From a distance it looks
a bit like wreckage, but once you have it in
your hands you realize that it is an image of
construction, and with the cover line “How Do
We Begin Again?” it made readers think and
reflect. Even David Carson asked me how I
photoshopped the image, but we didn’t do
anything to it except add a little cyan –
Criswell Lappin, former creative
director, Metropolis.
How an image is cropped and scaled, where it is placed
in relation to text and other images, and its position on
the page or spread all create expression and narrative
for the viewer. Faces looking towards the spine create
harmony, those looking out draw the eye away from the
publication and create tension; if two images face in
opposite directions even greater tension is created.
A large close-up of a banal image will draw the viewer
in, while its contours or shape may create an abstract
image that intrigues or surprises.
Creating layouts 123
This layout in The New York Times T:Travel
Magazine (above) was constructed around a
photo to convey the bleached-out white
light of Venice. ‘I love the Massimo Vitale
photograph – inspired by Canaletto, but utterly
contemporary. The same holds true for the
typography, with that gorgeous letter “I” in
Fraktur. The formal arrangements just feel
very satisfying, and the depth of the image,
along with the use of white space and the
variations in typography, create a very
satisfying page,’ says Janet Froelich, former
art director.
Tension and movement are conveyed in these
spreads from Flaunt (left). This is achieved
through the donkey facing to the left and
using the image as a bleed. This draws the eye
out and away from the confines of the page,
suggesting movement and space.
profile of a design consultant
Jeremy Leslie
In the following interview, Jeremy Leslie discusses art direction
for print and digital.
Jeremy Leslie worked for Blitz magazine in the 1980s, and then
The Guardian, Time Out, M-real and others, always striving to
explore the magic of communication through publishing of all
kinds. From 1999 to 2009, he was creative director at John
Brown Media during a time when customer magazines became
some of the most innovative products around.
Leslie is a passionate fan of magazines and started his magCulture
blog to accompany his book magCulture, which was published in
2003. The magCulture blog was voted one of the best design blogs
of its time and Jeremy is creative director of the associated design
studio magCutlure, and also writes for Creative Review. He is a
founder member of the British Editorial Design Organisation, and a
judge for the Society of Publication Designers in the US.
MagCulture is also an editorial content consultancy company and
recent work includes Port magazine, for digital. Leslie’s keen
interest in publishing itself, no matter the business model or
delivery, is reflected in his work as co-curator of Colophon, an
independent magazine conference.
Does the designer have control again now we are a few years
into the tablet era?
There are still arguments going on in different elements of
media about how you should do it. Big publishers are using their
in-house design teams to adapt what they do in print, take it and
make it work for the web, mobile and tablet.
Is the trend amongst big publishers to want to press a button
and have one massive content management system?
It is the theoretical endgame. Whether you like it or not, people
are talking about everything we do and make as ‘content’. We
might not be comfortable with that but that is what we do now. It
is almost a cliché but now editorial designers work with content.
Finally technology is catching up with that. The mobile is a good
example of that. How do you create an identity so that The
Guardian looks different with the small screen space and
limitations of font?
The problem with the iPad is that every app appears the same
on it – the same size and glossy finish. Tablets are touch-sensitive
but anything but tactile. The statement of the obvious is that a
tablet is touch sensitive but is anything but tactile. It is brightly
lit and shiny. It is either on or off. It doesn’t change depending on
where you are. With paper you have the benefits of touch and
smell, different size, the ability to easily share and tear a bit out.
People are desperately using Twitter for sharing in a similar way.
I am not a Luddite but we do have to recognize the differences.
You were known for designing some very successful customer
magazines and now 15 years later there has been a shift onto
digital platforms.
Customer magazines were creative and became a buzzword;
they were fashionable as part of big marketing campaigns. Once
their power and reach was understood, and people realized just
how successful customer magazines could be for companies, it
suddenly got serious. Attempts to do interesting things and
ideas got knocked on the head because people were concerned
about the risk they were running in terms of cost. ... Companies
were prepared to spend money on magazines and wanted a
return for that and so the grip of marketing tightened and
creativity was lost. I was lucky to be involved in a period when it
was possible to make customer publications that challenged
what magazines could be.
Did the advances in digital technology increase this change?
It was the digital thing that inspired the change in the first
place. With digital tools you can immediately measure success.
Customer magazines would create a positive aura around the
brand that got media coverage and won awards. It was
immeasurable.
profile of a design consultant
Jeremy Leslie
Creating layouts 125
Once you start to analyse that then it becomes less creative. As
soon as you start to measure it, as soon as you want to know
how many clicks there are and oranges or flights you are selling
then everything has to connect together. So this in turn created
expectations that you could do this with your print magazines
as well. The whole focus of the creative magazine changed
and there was a shift from a creative business to a business
business. Now, there is a different focus. You have people
expecting the whole thing.
Is digital technology the tail that wags the dog?
It is a different focus and you can understand why companies
are doing it. There are some nice examples around. A lot of the
mainstream magazines are functional and they do their job, but
the brand voice is more than just selling the product. For me the
great thing the magazine can achieve is about creating a world of
its own....
People now might buy fewer magazines and less regularly than
they used to. When they do, they lose themselves in that world, and
this provides a fantastic space to market to people and, in a subtle
way, allows you to flesh out your brand. If you do it right you are
going to make people feel good about your brand and be able to
explain things about your brand often subconsciously that you
can’t explain in an advert or a TV ad, where it is much more brash.
In terms of business models, we have seen the big companies
invest in custom-built production systems. They have
bargaining power. Are you optimistic for the middle-weight
consumer magazines?
Tablet magazines have largely failed; several large publishers
have invested heavily, if not in capital outlay certainly time and
resource. Its still very early in the experiment but despite some
very nice creative examples of work there are many major
issues facing magazine app sales. One of which is marketing –
how do you get readers to find your app? Its simply not the same
as spotting a publication on a shop shelf.
But for most independent magazines the app is out of reach.
Their business model is tight already. They need other models
– Monocle has succesfully ignored apps and invested in a radio
studio to create online audio content.
126 Chapter 5
You are not going to make money out of publishing your own
’zine unless you are lucky, apart from a few examples like Anorak
who found a niche which is working. There are spin-offs from it,
which are businesses based on a spin-off.
Fire and Knives are resolutely undigital. It is based on the idea
that nobody gets paid, it covers its costs but everybody gets tons
more work because they are involved in the magazine.
What can we learn from looking back at different business
models?
The Face, Blitz and i-D. are a generation that we can look back on
that people thought, ‘I am going to do this myself’. Nick Logan
launched The Face on the kitchen table when he couldn’t get
backing for it. Terry Jones left Vogue and started i-D. Blitz was
begun as a university magazine. Those magazines stood apart.
At the time they were launched, fashion and culture did not
feature in mainstream media, unlike now when there are many
references to popular culture in everyday media, so that is why
they made such a big splash. It is harder now to make a splash
since there is so much information everywhere.
Your magCulture blog created a community. Is it growing?
The reach of the blog continues to grow, yes. People like being
connected with others who share their interests. Blogs aren’t so
different to fan clubs and specialist magazines. They connect
people – I grew up with the NME and that played the same role
in my teenage years as something like Facebook does for my
sons today. It connected me with like-minded people. It’s just
faster and easier today.
We’ve go to the point where a magazine like Creative Review is
so much more read and shared online that they add a line to
every blog post reminding readers they publish a print edition.
The middle-market magazines like Cosmo and Company, for
example, now have a huge Twitter following and massive interaction
with that following. Editors use their social networks to build on,
and to expand into, events and special offers. If you are a magazine
without any social network presence then you will have a hard
time surviving. Most people who want to engage with magazines
aren’t there for the products but to participate in that club.
Have the basic principles of art direction remained the same
across print and digital?
The basic principles haven’t changed. There are extra bits. The
basic, basic principle is to understand what you are trying to say
and whom you are saying it to and then to figure out how you are
going to say it. The whole visual language thing has developed
and moved on, in the way that English language moves on. The
basic premises of the grid are the same, but it is changing and
developing visual language that has moved on.
People think that there is such a huge difference between
working for print and digital, but there really is not unless you
make it that way.
You have to be able to communicate and explain the idea. You
have to able to sell, do your research; you have to understand
the grid and legibility. Designers can’t get by looking at editorial
design as blocks of text. In magazine design you can’t design
it without reading it. You have to read the words in order to
respond to the words. On top of that you should be experimenting
with whatever the latest form of communication is and make it
work for you. You have to find out. Moving image is important;
if you are doing photography now you will be shooting video.
It is part of general graphic design.
What is the potential for digital that you are most
excited about?
Digital is turning everything over. The actual potential for new
forms of editorial media is proving much harder to realise than
many thought, certainly when the iPad first arrived. It’s a slower
change than envisaged.
The really exciting thing is the challenges of digital making us
all question the basics of what we do. There are some very
exciting editorial projects out there in print as a direct result
of the flux digital has caused.
Including the time-based element we didn’t have in print?
There is a new space there on devices – it is not a printed
magazine, it is not a TV show. People don’t buy an iPad to buy
magazines; they are doing so many other things on it. You have
to figure out how you are going to make it its own. It can’t be a
website TV show, so what is it? What is that space? We are still
far away – these are just the first steps.
Creating layouts 127
Gary Cook’s layout for a feature on politician
Jonathan Aitken in FT The Business uses the
negative space of the underlying grid wittily
to convey the religious theme of the article,
and tie the text page to the image to unify
the spread.
Determining factors
in layout construction
The construction of a layout has no magic formula.
Essentially, it is about organization, communication
and navigation. It takes in everything from knowing
what a planning meeting is for to knowing how much
a feature is going to cost, how much time is available
for changing layouts, and understanding how the
required on-page elements work best together for a
particular section’s style. Many of these factors will be
outside the designer’s control, such as budget, space
allocation, pagination and time constraints. This is
part of the challenge of any design – finding ways
around the boundaries is what makes you creative.
Planning and timeline
All publications have planning meetings or a series
of progress meetings. The purpose of these editorial
or production meetings is to establish and inform all
the editorial departments as to the content and
importance of the features for the issue, and sketch
out estimates of the amount of space needed for
each item or feature. From this information the art
department can start to plan how each feature will
be illustrated. Visuals might need to be commissioned
or sourced and bought in. At the same time, the
editorial departments will begin researching, writing
and commissioning articles; the technical or beauty
departments will start to call in products for testing
and photographing; the fashion department will be
getting in outfits and organizing shoots. This process
is ongoing and fluid – material is constantly assessed,
tweaked or dropped during this period.
TIP Before starting page design
Gather the copy, illustrative material and any
information from the editorial team, including
the most up-to-date flatplan. As the deadlines
approach, this will change frequently as more
ads are sold or incoming material is found to
need more or less space.
Read the copy so that you understand the
article and purpose of the page(s).
Examine all visuals (illustrations, photos and
any graphics). Are they good enough quality
for publication? Remember, digital photographs
have to be 300 dpi (dots per inch) to be of
satisfactory quality for print; many digital
cameras take photos at 72 dpi. Consequently,
in converting them, their optimum print size
will be reduced to a quarter of the size.
Make sure you have all the style elements in
place, including the template pages of the
publication, style sheets, colour palettes and
magazine livery.
128 Chapter 5
The production cycle
For the art department, the production cycle begins
when editorial, pictures and illustrations start to arrive
in the department. At this point the process of laying
out pages begins. If there is imagery, it is usual to build
the layout around this; if not, a focal point can be
created by a strong heading. It is important not to
detract from or dilute any impact, so avoid elements
fighting with each other. Non-printing areas, or empty
space, also create a focus for the eye. Once completed,
layouts are passed on to the subs’ desks for cutting (if
necessary) and proofing. By now, the sections of the
magazine will have been defined for the printer’s
schedule. If the publication is large, these sections
may have different deadlines and be sent in a
particular order to the printer, with the cover often
going last. Sections have to be complete, including
advertisements, before they can be printed.
How the eye scans a page
While there are no definitive rules about how
any individual will scan a page or spread, the
use of visual hooks, whether in the images or
text, will often determine where the eye starts
its journey. The eye is drawn to the oversized
‘G’ in this layout from Loaded (left) because of
its dominant size and colour, then follows the
horizontal serif of the letter to footballer Paul
Gascoigne’s eye, then finally moves to the
smaller stand-first text. In the complex spread
from Dutch newspaper Het Parool (opposite),
the eyeline of the man in the main photograph
runs towards the running head, and the
reader’s attention then moves through the
other elements, often following the vertical
and horizontal dominance of the grid.
Practical factors
The amount of money the art department has to spend
on images, special stocks, inks and special effects, such
as die-cutting, is set well in advance, but exactly how the
art budget is spent is up to the art director, who has to
make such decisions early on and adhere to them as
much as possible, just as the deadlines agreed by the
publication and its printer have to be adhered to if the
publication is not to miss printing and publication
dates. Such time factors may determine the amount
of experimentation possible or whether there is time
to change a layout if it is not working to a designer’s
satisfaction. Designers have an entirely personal
method of coping with the constraints of tight deadlines.
Some get the overall design established on the page, then
tweak boxes, type and colour until they are entirely happy.
Others will keep starting a fresh layout, saving different
versions until they are happy or until time runs out.
Similarly, the running order of the pages and number of
pages available to editorial are set by the publisher and/
Creating layouts 129
or editor, and are usually tied to the advertising sales;
pages are sold to advertisers against a particular section
or feature, and a publication will have an editorial/
advertising ratio, so if ads are added, dropped or moved,
editorial pages are lost, gained or shifted accordingly.
Again, this can have a big impact on design if, for example,
a five-page feature has to be shrunk into three pages.
Design factors: spatial issues
The demand from contemporary readers is for a
publication to be portable in size and format, and
flexible and varied in its content – a publication that
can be dipped in and out of randomly. This is reflected
in the design by the use of imagery, display copy,
coloured headings, boxed type, bullet points and lists.
A publication that tends to run text-heavy articles will
probably use white space to counterbalance the grey
effect. All these devices take up space, but a balance of
text, images and graphic elements must be achieved.
The number of words for an editorial page is usually
predetermined. If the story has been massively
overwritten and the page becomes impossible to
design, the subeditor can usually cut copy to a
reasonable length. Occasionally, a feature might need
to be designed before the words have been written, or
be completely design-led. In this case a word count is
decided on and the piece written to length. The format
of any illustrative material must also be taken into
account. If the illustration is a digital image, it may
have to be used at a certain size; some photographs
are grainy and any enlargement would emphasize this,
which may not suit the magazine’s style. Sometimes
when journalists are writing articles they come across
information that should be emphasized to make better
sense of the copy, or the picture research team may
have negotiated to print a picture at no bigger than a
couple of columns. This sort of information may well
be supplied at the last minute and it will have some
degree of impact on the design.
•A4
ONSDAG 27 MARS 2013 ○ SVERIGES STÖRSTA MORGONTIDNING ○ GRUNDAD 1864
Upptäck Stockholm.
Påskvandra genom
stan med Eva-Karin.
Sidan 10
Debatt. ”Byggbolag och politiker hotar miljön vid Råstasjön” Sid 4
Slussen. Därför kan beslut om ombyggnationen dröja ytterligare. Sid 9
Ordlistan. Vart ska alla bilar ta vägen? Tja, vad sägs om att de stannar hemma? Sid 19
Regeringen
äter upp alla
vackra hus
Sid 6–7
Graik: Stefan Rothmaier. Idé: Karin Forsberg. Foto: Virginia Mayo
Rösta på Årets Stockholmsbyggnad! Läs mer på www.stockholm.se/aretsstockholmsbyggnad
fredag 29 juni 2012 ○ SVERIGES STÖRSTA MORGONTIDNING ○ GRUNDAD 1864
•A2
Fredrik Strage: Ibland försöker
jag äta mer etiskt men det innebär oftast bara att jag undviker
gulliga djur (som kanin). Sidan 2
Filmsommar film i sommarskrud.
Filmfredag har semester men Filmsommar
håller ställningarna
fram till skolstarten.
Homoerotik. Brittiska
ilmen ”Weekend” får
en fyra av Johan Croneman. Sidan 11
filmvärlden älskar sina älskvärda
svin. frågan är varför
Kommande ”On the road” odlar en nattstånden manlig myt. Sidorna 8–9
Mellan skalmarna
på en ilmlegendar
Woody Allen låter oss följa med in i det mest privata i en ny dokumentärilm. Sidan 10
Foto: Ann-Soi Rosenkvist Illustration: Axel Björklund
SÖNDAG 16 OKTOBER 2011
SVERIGES BÄSTA HELGLÄSNING MED
MÄNNISKOR, REPORTAGE OCH RESOR
DN.Resor
Vid Medelhavet är det
fortfarande
sommar.
Elsas lilla röda
Höstens läppar är röda. Elsa Billgren och
sex andra kvinnor om sin läppstiftspassion.
Med must i
marinaden
Julmusten är en svensk älskling – Jens Linder
bejakar det i matlagningen också. Sidan 10
DN Motor. Ett
mörkt monster
Mercedes C63 AMG är
svart som synden och
snabb som en gasell.
Plus: Volvos färgexpert
om svarta bilar. Sidan 18
Min lördag:
”Inte bara död,
ångest också”.
Quetzala Blanco om när
helgen är som tyngst.
Sidan 8
Sorg, elegans, frigörelse. Inget ger så många vinklar som svart – från mode till mat till motor.
Kronstams svarta
Sidan 14
SÖNDAG 23 SEPTEMBER 2012
•A4
10
Nyheter
Valet som påverkar världen.
jan
feb
mar
apr
maj
juni
juli
aug
sep
okt
nov
dec
3
Presidentval
6 november.
4
Kongressval
6 november.
2
Valkampanjen
Slutet på augusti till
början på november.
Republikanernas
kandidater 2012
Tidpunkter då de officiellt
gav upp sina kandidaturer.
Ron Paul
var uträknad tidigt
men höll kampanjen aktiv ända till
partikonventet.
Newt Gringrich
Rick Santorum
Buddy Roemer
Rick Perry
Jon Huntsman Michele Bachmann
1
Primärvalen
januari till juni.
22 maj
Mitt Romney har
fått tillräckligt många
delegater för att säkra
sin nominering på
partikonventet.
Demokraternas
presidentkandidat:
Barack Obama
Vicepresident:
Joe Biden
Romney utses
formellt till partiets
presidentkandidat
på Republikanernas
partikonvent.
Barack Obama
utses formellt till
Demokraternas
presidentkandidat på
partiets konvent.
Vägen till Vita huset
1 Primärvalen Presidentkandidaterna röstas fram i primärval
(primaries) som arrangeras av partierna och
genomförs delstat för delstat. Vid varje val
fördelas delegater som sedan utser partiets
kandidat på ett konvent. För Demokraterna
var primärvalet en ren formalitet eftersom
Obama ställde upp för omval, och ingen
utmanade honom. På den republikanska sidan
däremot blev primärvalen en långdragen
kamp mellan flera olika kandidater.
Obama och Romney slutspurtar mot Vita huset.
DN guidar dig genom valdramat.
Ballot: valsedel.
Campaign trail: presidentkandidatens turné under
valrörelsen.
Caucus: nomineringsmöte för att
välja kandidater.
Convent: partimöten där
presidentkandidaterna utses.
Exit poll: vallokalundersökning, en
prognos som görs under valdagen.
Front runner: den som leder
i opinionen.
Gerrymandering: förändring av
gränserna för ett valdistrikt
i syfte att säkra en majoritet
för en kandidat.
Incumbent: en kandidat som är
sittande president.
Poll: opinionsundersökning.
Ordlista
Tre direktsända tv-debatter:
3, 16 och 22 oktober.
Vicepresidentkandidaterna
debatterar den 11 oktober.
Debatterna kommer att ha betydelse
eftersom läget mellan kandidaterna
är jämnt.
Det finns två tv-sända debatter som
anses ha avgjort presidentval:
Kennedy–Nixon år 1960 och
Reagan–Carter 1980.
Super tuesday: Tisdag i mars då
många delstater håller primärval.
Super pac: Kampanjorgan som kan
samla in obegränsade summor.
Swing voters: osäkra väljare.
Förklaring till några av de
vanligaste amerikanska val-orden.
Maria Westholm
Texter: Hans Rosén, Michael Winiarski.
Foto: Scanpix
Demokraterna
Republikanerna
334,6 totalt
655,5 totalt
491,7
255,2
spenderat
spenderat
Källa: Washington post
Obama
Romney
Vågmästarstaterna
Ett antal avgörande delstater där opinionen
brukar väga jämnt. Kandidaterna koncentrerar
därför sina valkampanjer hit. De tyngst
vägande är Florida och Ohio.
Pengarna
Kampanjkassorna har stor betydelse för
kandidaternas möjlighet att påverka väljarna.
Nya regler har öppnat för SuperPacs, kampanjorgan som kan ta emot obegränsade summor
från miljardärer, företag och organisationer.
Framför allt läggs pengarna på politisk reklam
i tv, där det oftast handlar om att framställa
motståndaren i negativ dager.
Kampanjarbetet
Kandidaterna reser flitigt mellan olika valmöten, nästan uteslutande i vågmästarstater.
Samtidigt mobiliseras gräsrötter för att ringa
och knacka dörr och på andra sätt nå ut till
väljarna. Även nätet används till detta.
Eftersom valdeltagandet är lågt i USA handlar
valarbetet mycket om att få soffliggarna
engagerade.
2 Valkampanjen
Alaska
(AK)
Hawaii
(HI)
Washington
(WA) Montana
(MT)
North Dakota
(ND)
South Dakota
(SD) Wyoming
(WY)
Arizona
(AZ)
Kalifornien
(CA)
Idaho
(ID)
Nebraska
(NE)
Kansas
(KS)
Texas
(TX)
New Mexico
(NM)
Colorado
(CO)
Utah
(UT)
Nevada
(NV)
Oregon
(OR)
Hittills insamlade pengar
(21 sep) Miljoner dollar
Opinionsläget i USA just nu
Oklahoma
(OK)
Säker vinst Obama Lutar åt Obama
Special fredag 8 juni 2012
•a4
8
Nyheter
Våldet i Syrien fortsätter. Något slut på dödandet kan inte skönjas. Över 10 000 har
dödats sedan upproret startade förra våren. Trots detta kommer inga kraftfulla
åtgärder från omvärlden för att stoppa våldet mot civilbefolkningen.
Upproret i Syrien.
Nyhetsredaktionen Nyhetschefer: Lars axelsson, Stafan Kihlström Nattchef: niclas Lagerstedt Nyheter Telefon: 08-738 10 00 E-post: [email protected]
En tvåårig licka skadas när byn al-Rami attackeras. Hon förs till ett hemligt sjukhus i Shnan, ett asketiskt rum med tre sängar och en sjukskötare. Flickans hela familj dödades när familjens hus
Hur många ler ska
SÖNDAG 23 SEPTEMBER 2012
•A4
11
Nyheter
januari 2013
Republikanernas
presidentkandidat:
Mitt Romney
Vicepresidentkandidat:
Paul Ryan
270 krävs för att vinna
149 68 100 41 150
Obama Romney
2008 2010 2012 2014 2016
Klass
1
2
3
21
10
20
10
24
13
Demokratiska
Så byts senatorerna ut
Republikanska
33 väljs
om i år.
100
stolar
435
stolar
Alla väljs
om i år.
Väljs
om i år.
\"Överhuset\", den mer
prestigefyllda
kammaren, består av
två senatorer från
varje delstat. Beslutar
om lagar, ratificerar
fördrag, godkänner
utnämningar till
högsta domstolen,
ambassadörer m m.
Senatorerna väljs för
sex år.
Antalet representanter motsvarar varje
delstats befolkningsmängd. Alla har rätt
till minst en representant. Beslutar om
federala lagar.
Samtliga platser väljs
om varje jämnt år.
30 37
Vinnaren tar allt
Den kandidat som får flest av folkets röster –
oavsett hur liten majoriteten är – får rätten att
välja alla delstatens elektorer. Elektorerna är
538 personer, som utser presidenten vid en
omröstning i december efter valet. Hur många
elektorer en delstat har styrs av befolkningsstorleken, men alla delstater har minst tre
elektorer. Systemet leder till att en kandidat
kan vinna (få flest elektorer) utan att ha flest
röster i landet som helhet. De minsta delstaterna får relativt sett större tyngd än de stora
sett till folkmängden.
Hålls samtidigt som presidentvalet.
Kandidater väljs till kongressens bägge kamrar,
senaten och representanthuset. Samtliga stolar
i representanthuset står på spel i årets val och
var tredje i senaten. Vilket parti som dominerar i kongressen har stor betydelse för
presidentens handlingsutrymme.
3 Presidentvalet 4 Kongressvalet 5 Elektorskollegiet
Stor skillnad mellan stora och små stater
i elektorsrepresentation
Källa: US Census bureau
Källor: Realclearpolitics, US Federal Election
Commission, Wikipedia, Utrikespolitiska institutet/
Landguiden, NY Times, senate.gov, Nationalencyklopedin.
*Räknat på antal invånare 2010
Hur går det till att rösta?
14–30 dagar (beroende på
deltstat) före valdagen
måste alla valdeltagare
registrera sig hos valmyndigheten. Det går att
rösta i förväg. På valdagen avger väljarna sina
röster i vallokaler. Rösträkningen går till på olika sätt i olika delstater.
Den har ibland skapat stora problem, som
i valet 2000.
Vem får rösta?
Amerikanska medborgare över 18 år.
I huvudstaden Washington DC, får väljarna
delta i presidentvalet, men inte i val till
kongressen (District of Columbia är inte
en delstat).
Vem får inte rösta.
Medborgare i USA-kontrollerade territorier som
Puerto Rico, Guam, med flera får inte rösta i
nationella president- eller kongressval. Det får inte
heller fängelseinterner i de flesta stater, men dömda
kan efter avtjänat straff få tillbaka sin rösträtt efter
en särskild process.
Fler elektorsröster
sedan 2008
Färre sedan 2008
Så många elektorsröster har delstaterna
CA
55
HI
4
AK
3
AZ
11
UT
6
NV
6
ID
4
MT
3
WY
3
ND
3 MN
10 WI
10
IL
20
LA
8 MS
6
AL
9
GA
16
SC
9
IN
11
MI
16 OH
18
FL
29
PA
20
MD
10
NJ
14
DE
3
D.C
3
VA
13
NC
15
NY
29
VT
3
CT
7
MA
11 RI
4
NH
4 ME
4
IA
6
MO
10
SD
3
NE
5
KS
6
OK
7
AR
6 TN
11
KY
8
WV
5
TX
38
CO
9 NM
5
OR
7
WA
12
190
4 tomma
241
Kalifornien
Wyoming
Representanthuset
*(i Maine och
Nebraska kan
rösterna
fördelas proportionellt)
677 000 inv/elektor* 187 000 inv/elektor*
Bush mot Gore år 2000
Republikanen George W Bush kunde vinna
valet trots färre röster än demokraten Al Gore
i landet som helhet. Genom att han vann i flera
små delstater och fick Floridas 25 elektorsröster med endast 571 rösters marginal fick
Bush ihop de 270 elektorsröster som krävs för
majoritet. Avgörandet kom dock först efter att
oenighet om rösträkningen avgjorts i domstol.
Så röstade folket år 2000
Så röstade elektorerna 2000
47,9% Bush 3,74% övr. 48,4% Gore
270 krävs
271 Bush 266 Gore
Senaten
Foto: Alamy Tre grupper kallade ”klasser” byts ut varannat år.
Presidenten
svär eden.
20 januari.
Vita huset
Se en klickbar
version med
DN-plus i din
läsplatta.
Valsedlar
Folkrikaste
delstaten.
Delstaten med
minst antal
invånare.
Foto: Scanpix
Minnesota
(MN)
Wisconsin
(WI)
Iowa
(IA)
Louisiana
(LA)
Arkansas
(AR)
Missouri
(MO)
Illinois
(IL) Indiana
(IN)
Ohio
(OH)
Virginia
(VA)
Georgia South Carolina (SC)
(GA)
Tennessee (TN)
Kentucky (KY)
Alabama (AL)
Missisippi(MS)
Florida
(FL)
New York
(NY)
Maine (ME)
Michigan
(MI) Vermont (VT)
Rhode Island (RI)
Connecticut (CT)
New Jersey (NJ)
Delaware (DE)
Maryland (MD)
District of Columbia (DC)
W. Virginia
(WV)
Massachusetts (MA)
New Hampshire (NH)
Pennsylvania
North Carolina (NC)
Vågmästarstat Lutar åt Romney Säkert vinst Romney Säker vinst Obama
Lutar åt Obama
Lutar åt Romney
Säkert vinst Romney
Vågmästarstat
5
Elektorskollegiet
17 december.
Special
Nästa uppslag.
Väljarnas budskap
FREDAG 8 JUNI 2012
•A5
9
Nyheter
○○I onsdags rapporterades om ännu en
massaker, i al-Qubair nära Hama, med
minst 78 dödade, många av dem kvinnor och barn.
Dagens Nyheter kan i dag publicera
ett unikt bildreportage av fotojournalisten Niklas Meltio. Han följde under
knappt två veckor i slutet av maj syriska
rebeller i gruppen al-Mujaerin al-Ansar
i bergsområdet Jabal az Zawiyah i regionen Idlib knappt tio mil norr om Hama.
Det är ett område av Syrien där den
kanske mest militanta motståndsrörelsen mot den syriska regimen inns.
I rebellgruppen om cirka 80 män,
som befriat sin by från regeringsstyrkor, ingår avhoppade militärer, bönder
och studerande, ingenjörer och lärare.
Erik Ohlsson: Kriget
är redan en verklighet
för folket i Syrien.
Nästa sida
besköts av pansarvagnar. Rebellerna lyckades rädda lickan.
Rebellerna tillverkar egna vägbomber och granater av gödsel och socker som fylls i stora metallrör och förses
med en fjärrutlösare, bomber kraftiga nog att spränga regimens pansarvagnar och militärfordon.
Rebellerna har placerat ut vägbomber nära en vägspärr och tagit upp positioner i närheten. Bomben exploderar
och regimstyrkorna öppnar eld med maskingevär som besvaras av rebellerna. Vägbomben missade pansarfordonet och dödade i stället fyra soldater som befann sig bredvid.
En del inköpt ammunition är laddad med
TNT för att explodera i vapnet och skada
skytten och måste tas bort.
behöva dö i Syrien?
Fången A hörde till en regimtrogen milis när han greps av rebellerna
sedan han skjutit mot demonstranter. Han friköptes senare av sin
familj för 1 000 dollar, pengar som rebellerna använder till vapenköp.
Niklas Meltio, foto
FREDAG 8 JUNI 2012 ○ SverigeS StörSta morgontidning ○ grundad 1864 ○ PriS 30 kronor
7 388101 003001
•A5
Nr 152
Den tvååriga lickan från byn al-Rami blev ett av den syriske diktatorns
Bashar al-Assads tiotusentals ofer.
Hennes familj utplånades, men
hon överlevde med splitterskador
och kunde räddas av rebeller som
förde henne till ett hemligt sjukhus
i trakten.
DN kan i dag publicera ett bildreportage av fotojournalisten Niklas Meltio som följt en rebellgrupp
inne i Syrien.
Minst 10 000 har hittills dödats
och världens ledare talar om risken
för fullt inbördeskrig. Varför görs
inte mer för att stoppa dödandet?
Det lika enkla som brutala svaret är
att Syriens befolkning ofras på realpolitikens altare, skriver DN:s Erik
Ohlsson. Nyheter 2, 8–11, Ledare 4
Diktatorns offer
○ Skakande bilder inifrån våldets Syrien ○ Flickan överlevde attacken som utplånade hennes familj
Insidan
”Jag har svårt
att orka med
min tvååring”
”Min tvååriga dotter bråkar alltid
när hon inte får som hon vill. Ofta
får hon det, eftersom jag inte orkar”,
skriver en tvåbarnsmamma. Psykologen ger råd. Insidan • Kultur 21
Länsstyrelsen slår larm:
100 000-tals
stockholmare
utan bostad 2030
Bostadsbristen ökar, ändå byggs det
allt färre bostäder. I en ny rapport
larmar länsstyrelsen om en ”mörk”
situation i Stockholm som är på väg
att förvärras. Stockholm 4–5
V på DN Debatt:
”Ge näringslivet
större ansvar för
yrkesutbildning”
Näringslivet måste ta på sig ett större pedagogiskt ansvar för yrkesutbildningen, skriver Jonas Sjöstedt
och Rossana Dinamarca från Vänsterpartiet. Debatt 6
Johan Esk:
Jag hoppas på
tyskarna –
för deras
fotbolls
skull.
Sport 12
Foto: Niklas Meltio
Fotbolls-EM
Segervissa
polacker
tror på succé
Inför dagens EM-premiär har vinden vänt och optimismen gror i Polen. ”Kvartsinal är ett minimum”,
säger sportministern till DN inför
matchen mot Grekland. Sport 12–15 •A5
TISDAG 26 MARS 2013 ○ SVERIGES STÖRSTA MORGONTIDNING ○ GRUNDAD 1864 ○ PRIS 20 KRONOR
7 388101 002004 Nr 83
STÖRST I STOCKHOLM
Hetaste spelaren:
”Jag har ofta hört att det inns
likheter med Zlatan.”
Sport 10–13
Allsvenskan – 5 dagar kvar
Ladda
ner i dag!
Fakta: Kristoffer Örstadius Grafik: Johan Andersson
Fler underkända
trots mer pengar
Bilindustrin
Så blufar
handlarna om
försäljningssifrorna
Försäljningen av nya bilar går betydligt långsammare än vad den oficiella månadsstatistiken talar om.
Det visar DN:s granskning.
Marknaden hålls till stor del upp
av handlarna själva, och förra året
registrerades var tredje nytt fordon
på bilhandlare.
Ekonomi 24–25
Ny serie. Svenska elever halkar efter i skolan. Enligt
lera stora internationella studier var vi förut bland
de bästa länderna i världen. Nu ligger Sveriges skolor
under snittet för OECD-länderna.
I dag inleder DN en artikelserie där vi granskar
hur det har blivit så här.
Nyheter 8–9
Hanne Kjöller
Diskrimineringsombudsmannen
har skapat
ett rättsproblem.
Ledare 5
Cyperns räddningspaket
Nya akuta kriser
hotar eurozonen
Cypern har räddats ur den värsta krisen, men ler orosmoln inns i eurozonen. Italien saknar regering, arbetslösheten skenar i Frankrike och den
ojämna tillväxttakten blottar sprickor
i valutasamarbetet. Ekonomi 26
Världen
Utrikesdagen
drog fullt hus
Kulturhusets hörsal var fullsatt
när DN i går bjöd in till den årliga
Utrikes dagen. I pausen mellan seminarierna tog läsarna chansen att
ställa frågor till DN:s inresta utrikeskorrespondenter. Världen 20–21
Foto: Magnus Hallgren DN:s Afrikakorrespondent Erik
Esbjörnsson (t v) ick många frågor.
DN Allsvenskan – ett digitalt
fotbollsmagasin för läsplattan.
Så gör du. Sidan 2
8 SÖNDAG 17 FEBRUARI 2013
•A2
Kultur Patienten & prislappen ONSDAG 6 FEBRUARI 2013
•A5
10
Sport
Krönika
Johan Esk
Johan Esk: Liten mot stor
bäddar för nya mirakel
F
otbollen har blivit
unik. Det är nu den
enda lagsport där
storlek spelar liten roll
för hur stor en spelare
blir.
Spanien och Barcelona styrs av
ett knattegäng, Zlatan Ibrahimovic är 194 centimeter, Cristiano
Ronaldo är 186.
Så, vem är svårast att försvara sig
mot, en stjärna som är 169 eller
en som är 194?
– Jag möter hellre en stor spelare
eftersom jag är rätt lång själv, men
om du tänker på vår kille (Zlatan)
så möter jag helst inte honom
heller.
Pontus Wernbloom, 185 centimeter, pratar och linar sen. När vi
pratar om svenska försvarsspelet
försvinner smajlet.
Det har skapats ett hål högt upp i
försvaret som skapar problem.
– Det där hålet får inte bli för
stort. Mot Tyskland ick Schweinsteiger stå och styra där, säger
Pontus.
– Det gäller att inte gå bort sig
utan att hålla positionerna. Mot
Tyskland jagade jag och Pontus boll
lite för mycket, säger Rasmus Elm.
De två (som på grund av CSKA
Moskvas tufa försäsong troligen inte startar i kväll) och/eller
Kim & Anders har fått det svårare
sedan Zlatan Ibrahimovic blev lagets ”tia”. När jag propagerade för
att Zlatan skulle spela där var en
orsak att han i försvarsspelet skulle
störa motståndarnas mittfältare
med sin blotta närvaro. I praktiken
har Zlatan ofta legat kvar högt
upp bredvid Sveriges ”nia”, när
motståndarna haft bollen.
Fördelen är att två spelare sätter
bättre press på motståndarnas
backlinje. Nackdelen är att en
Steven Gerrard eller en Bastian
Schweinsteiger fått operera ostört
en bra bit framför Sveriges defensiva innermittfältare.
– Det svåra är att om man går
fram riskerar man att bli överspelad, säger Wernbloom.
– Har man en spelare som gör
fyra mål får man ta att han inte
lägger lika mycket energi på att
jobba hemåt. Jag är van att ha det
likadant i Moskva, säger Elm.
Som med det mesta i landslaget
är det upp till Zlatan själv vad han
vill göra med sina krafter. Och med
tanke på hur han spelat mot Tyskland och England kan ingen säga
att han lagt resurserna fel.
Det går inte att se Sverige träna
på Friends utan att blicken dras
mot platsen där Zlatan lämnade
gräset, mötte bollen och skapade ett mirakel.
Jag väntar mig nya i kväll.
Man kan göra det när det är en
match mellan Zlatan Ibrahimovic
och Lionel Messi.
Det har funnits en (lång) tid när
träningslandskamper varit iskalla.
Den tiden är inte nu. Med en ny
arena har det krävts stora motståndare för att fylla Friends och i kväll
är det fullt, det snackas Zlatanmot-Messi överallt, det har varit
bra drag på svenska träningarna
och i kväll kanske det till och med
blir drag på läktarna.
Det fanns också en tid när Tommy
Söderberg såg fotbollens framtid
och han hette Thierry Henry.
Söderberg var Sveriges U21-kapten, det var match mot Frankrike
och han såg en atlet med imponerande fysik. Några år senare sade
Söderberg att han trodde att fotbollen skulle domineras av spelare
som Henry. 188 centimeter. Kropp
som en 400-meterslöpare.
Henry vann VM- och EM-guld
och ingen kunde veta att fotbollsvärlden skulle tas över av ett gäng
spanska knattar och en minsting
från Argentina.
Spanien styrs av Xavi och
Iniesta, båda 170 centimeter, de
lägger grunden för 169 centimeter
Messi i Barcelona.
Xavi, Iniesta och Messi har varit
navet i fotbollsrevolutionen som
påverkat hela världen. Överallt
har tränare velat ta över deras
passningsfotboll med stort
boll innehav. Överallt har talangscouter tittat en extra gång
innan en liten kille ratats.
I Barcelona har revolutionen
skördat ofer. Zlatan hamnade i Filosofens frysfack och det var just i
Barcelona Thierry Henry tvingades
inse att framtiden inte längre var
hans.
169 centimeter Pedro tog hans
plats.
I fotboll har storleken ingen betydelse.
169 centimeter Messi mot 194 centimeter
Zlatan gör att matchens betydelse inte påverkar intresset – det är glödhett.
Däremot har Zlatans plats på planen avgörande betydelse för Sveriges försvarsspel.
Fotboll. Här spelar storleken ingen roll
Sport
158
157
169 cm
I kväll är det fullt, det
snackas Zlatan-motMessi överallt, det
har varit bra drag på
svenska träningarna
och i kväll kanske det
till och med blir drag
på läktarna.
Sverige–Argentina
○TV4 20.25, avspark 20.30
SÖNDAG 17 FEBRUARI 2013 9
•A2
Kultur
Vad var det
som dödade
Herr B?
D
ödshjälp!, står det med stora bokstäver i sjukjournalens marginal.
Herr Gustav B, låt mig kalla honom så, avled på våren 2008. Diagnosen var cancer. Men det var inte
tumören som tog hans liv. Det var
något helt annat, som vi ännu saknar begrepp
för.
Låt oss börja från slutet. En tid efter hans död
tar fru B fram det sista fotot av sin man, taget på
sjukhuset. ”Plötsligt blir jag iskall. Varför hänger
det bara en påse från sänggaveln? Var är den
and ra? Fick han ingen näring?”
Hon ringer till sjukhuset, vill ha journalen
uppläst. Bilden ljög inte. Under den sista veckan
av sitt liv ick hennes man ingen näring. Fru B vet
att så gör man med döende. ”Men till mig sade
man att han var på bättringsvägen!”
I sin anmälan till Hälso- och sjukvårdens ansvarsnämnd anklagar hon sjukhuset för ”dold
aktiv dödshjälp”. Och när hon skriver till mig är
det på inrådan av en professor i medicinsk etik.
Han menar att jag borde undersöka vad det var
som Gustav B dog av.
Jag ber två högt kvaliicerade läkare att oberoende av varandra granska sjukjournalen. De förstår varför fru B anmälde sjukhuset. Hon hade
skäl att tro att läkarna förde henne bakom ljuset.
Inte nog med att hon har fått motstridiga besked.
Läkarnas beteende måste ha gett egendomliga
signaler. Medan några inner att patienten är förlorad och endast skall ha smärtstillande, sprutar
andra honom med penicillin. ”Fullständigt ofattbart”, säger min konsult, ”här planerar en doktor rehabilitering för en patient som överläkaren
funnit döende och som i en vecka varit utan
näring! Och varför står inte beslutet att stänga
av näringen någonstans? Och varför sätter man
i gång med återupplivning när det står ”0 HLR”
i journalen, vilket betyder ’allt hopp är ute, låt
människan dö i fred’? Det måste ha varit oerhört
förvirrande för anhöriga.”
Mina läkarkonsulter är dock eniga: Det var
inte dödshjälp. Att stänga av näringen var ett
korrekt beslut. Patienten var faktiskt bortom
räddning när det skedde.
När en saktmodig medborgare misstänker ett
svenskt sjukhus för dödshjälp, då har det gått
långt. Fru B är högutbildad, sjukvårdskunnig
och inte utan självdistans. Hon slår inte bakut vid
beskedet att hennes anklagelse saknar grund.
Hon blir lättad. Fru B vill ju inte tro att man i
Sverige tar livet av patienter. Men kan jag förstå
varför hon reagerade så?
Det kan jag, dessvärre. När en av mina konsulter läst färdigt journalen var hon mörk i synen.
”Jag antar att redan innan detta hände hade fru
B förlorat sitt förtroende för sjukhuset. Det hade
jag också gjort.”
Det är vad detta reportage handlar om. Fru B:s
förlorade tillit.
Hon verkar inte ensam om den. Skall man tro
statistiken har det blivit farligare att vistas på
sjukhus. Sedan år 2005 har anmälningar enligt
lex Maria (där sjukvården själv anmäler felsteg)
nästan fördubblats. Det skulle kunna tolkas optimistiskt, som att man blivit frejdigare med att
medge misstag. Men samtidigt ökar klagomålen
från patienter och anhöriga. I skrivande stund
väntar 5 500 ärenden i kö hos Socialstyrelsen.
Att misstron vuxit syns med blotta ögat. ”Fotografering förbjuden” står det numera vid entrén
till vartannat sjukhus. Ännu för tio år sedan blev
ingen barnmorska nervös när en nybliven fader
lyfte en kamera. Hon tog för givet att det var miraklet som han ville fånga. Numera kan hon inte
vara säker. Kanske är det hennes handlag som
skall dokumenteras, för den händelse någonting går fel. Det händer allt oftare att anhöriga
fotograferar pillerburkar och inställningar på
droppet. Vilket är den verkliga bakgrunden till
fotoförbudet: vårdfolket står inte ut med så oblyga demonstrationer av misstro. Man får förstå
dem. Ingen yrkesgrupp skulle inna sig i något
liknande. Så vad har Sveriges läkare och sköterskor gjort för ont för att förtjäna detta?
Låt oss återvända till fru B och hennes förlorade tillit. Först visar sig sjukvården från sin allra
bästa sida. Gustav B är ingen ungdom längre,
hans cancer sitter illa till, han har skrumplever
och dåliga blodvärden. Det är fara värt att han
avlider under kniven, menar narkosläkarna –
och avråder från operation. Denna avrådan är
samtidigt en dödsdom. Avlägsnas inte tumören
har Gustav B ett år kvar att leva.
A
ck, ja. Man kan inte annat än älska
kirurger. Hur många av oss har
inte deras tävlingslusta att tacka
för sitt liv? Det går nästan att höra
i journalen hur det lät. ”Jasså narkosvänner. Högriskpatient, säger
ni. Intressant... jag opererar.”
Min läkarkonsult får något saligt över anletsdragen när hon granskar operationsjournalen.
Som läste hon ett partitur av Bach. Och så, och
där, åh, såå elegant... Och efteråt: ”Okomplicerat
vårdförlopp på IVA. Pat har överstått ingreppet
väl trots stor preoperativ risk”, jublar journalskrivaren.
Men därmed är Gustav B:s goda lycka slut. Få
dagar efter den lyckade operationen börjar han
hemsökas av demoner. Sliter av slangarna, försöker ly. På intensiven har man inte kompetens
för sådant, alltså ber man psykiatrin om
hjälp. En psykdoktor anländer, föreslår
Del 1. Diagnosen var cancer. Men det var inte tumören som tog
hans liv. I dag inleder Maciej Zaremba sitt stora reportage om
de absurda konsekvenserna av ett dolt system skifte i svensk
sjukvård. llustration: Malin Koort/NU Agency
ONSDAG 6 FEBRUARI 2013
•A4
11
Sport
194
193
192
191
190
189
188
187
186
185
184
183
182
181
180
179
178
177
176
175
174
173
172
171
170
169
168
161
160
159
158
Jämförelse:
ett mål
per match
Foto: Bildbyrån och Lennart Månsson. Fakta: Oskar Sellström, Anders Lundqvist. Grafik: Stefan Rothmaier
194 cm
Tolv senaste målen
Antal skott per mål
Tolv senaste målen
Ålder
Födelseort
Längd
Vikt
Skostorlek
Bästa fot
31 år
Malmö
194 cm
94 kg
47
Höger
Lionel Andrés Messi Zlatan Ibrahimovic
I landslaget I landslaget
I klubblaget
Ligan säsong 2012/13 Ligan säsong 2012/13
Ålder
Födelseort
Längd
Vikt
Skostorlek
Bästa fot
25 år
Rosario
169 cm
67 kg
42,5
Vänster
0,35 0,33
1,55 1,0
Antal mål per match Antal mål per match
Skott
Friläge
Nick
Straff
Stöter in bollen
Frispark
Typ av mål
3,4 5,1
Antal skott per mål
Pontus Wernbloom, 185 centimeter, svarar på frågan om det är
svårare att möta en liten stjärna.
Messi är en
fantastisk spelare.
Troligtvis den bäste
individuellt, det är
därför han vinner
priser. Det han gjort
de senaste åren visar
att han är på topp.
Zlatan Ibrahimovic svarar artigt
på frågan om vad han tycker om
Messi.
Jag möter
hellre en stor spelare
eftersom jag är rätt
lång själv, men om
du tänker på vår kille
(Zlatan) så möter
jag helst inte honom
heller.
Ligan säsong 12/13 Ligan säsong 2012/13 Ligan säsong 2012/13 Ligan säsong 12/13
I klubblaget
10 SÖNDAG 20 NOVEMBER 2011
Sätt på tv:n, slå upp senaste kokboken, se en gammal
tv-såpa: ständigt möts du av denne Per Morberg.
DN Söndag reste till Sörmland för att försöka skönja
mannen bakom myten. Enligt honom själv är det sista
gången han ställer upp i tryckt press. text Anna Bodin foto Caroline Tibell
”Jag spelar
en parodi på
Per Morberg”
text Anna Bodin foto Caroline Tibell
12 SÖNDAG 20 NOVEMBER 2011
Intervju: Per Morberg
Ålder: 51 år.
Familj: Frun Inese, bonusdottern Janina, 36, samt
döttrarna Liza, 29, Alida, 26,
Molly, 19, och Astrid, 14 år.
Bor: Förhyrda rättarbostaden
på Tullgarns kungsgård, eget
torp i skogen och övernattningslägenhet i Stockholms
innerstad.
Yrke: Skådespelare och tvkock.
Aktuell med: Tv-programmet
”Den stora matresan” i Sjuan,
och en ny kokbok med samma
namn.
Bland journalister har Per Morberg rykte om sig att vara besvärlig. Ställa in i sista sekunden.
Vägra svara på frågor. Skälla ut
i första hand frun Inese, och i
andra hand närmsta reporter.
Fascination, bävan och skrattlystnad blandas i
kollegernas sneda leenden: ”Jasså, du ska göra
Per Morberg.” Fniss fniss. Himlande ögonbryn
mot taket. ”Lycka till då!”
Jag väcker upp datorn, öppnar ”Mediearkivet”
och skriver sammanbitet ”Per Morberg” i sökrutan. Jodå, tidningsdrottningen Amelia Adamo
fi ck bara vara med till lunch när hon och Per
skulle jaga älg i Ogesta. Sedan sade Per åt henne
att sätta sig i bilen. ”Stora Tara-intervjun” öppnade han med:
– Ju förr jag kan åka in till Vagnhärad och köpa
glödlampor desto lyckligare blir jag. Då vet ni
min inställning.
Expressen varnade han: ”Det är på Morbergs
premisser hela tiden. Jag kan välja om jag ska
vara svår kille eller snäll kille.” Metro utmanade
han: ”Hur ska du göra reportage om det här
då? Skriva att jag är en gris bara? Gör det!” Men
TT Spektra charmade han: Att det är farligt att
mucka med mannen i fråga är bara en myt, enligt telegrambyrån som slog fast att han i själva
verket är ”världens snällaste”.
Dags att bilda sig en egen uppfattning. Per svarar på andra signalen. När vi kommer in på logistiken kring intervjun räcker han över mobilen till Inese, som verkar vara inom en ständig
behändig armslängds avstånd. Hon och jag går
igenom detaljerna. Älgjakt på Ulvön vid Höga
kusten i Ångermanland med hockeyspelaren
Niklas Sundström. Det blir kul. Fast sedan blir
det inställt. Det blir för mycket, tycker Per. Hälsar Inese.
I stället är vi välkomna att följa med Per och
pyrscha, smyga på, rådjur på hans egna marker
i Sörmland. Per kan inte spika något datum just
nu. Snart börjar älgjakten och han vill inte få premiärveckan förstörd. Kanske ska vi fi ska i stället?
Ja, det tycker Inese låter bra, det blir nog lugnare för Per. Vi bestämmer en dag och jag får en
vägbeskrivning till rättarbostaden på Tullgarns
kungsgård.
I det ljusgula stenhuset har Ineses och Pers
fem döttrar vuxit upp, och där har TV 4 spelat
in åtta säsonger av långköraren ”Vad blir det
för mat”, med en svettande, skvimpande, spillande Per som stoppar fi ngrarna djupt ned i såskastrullerna och slickar av dem med vällustiga,
ljudliga smack. Det populäraste avsnittet sågs av
404 000 tittare.
På bestämd dag knackar fotografen och jag på
den berömda ytterdörren i Tullgarn. Så tyst kan
inte ett hus vara med Per Morberg inuti. Ett par
stelfrusna sms senare får vi kontakt med Inese.
Hon är i Vagnhärad och köper vispgrädde. Per är
i parets torp några kilometer därifrån. Han väntar på oss. Vi kör alldeles för fort på slingriga,
dimhöljda vägar genom sörmländsk kulturbygd.
Vi är nära nu. Där ligger sjön på höger sida, och
där står Per. I vadmalskostym.
Såg ni storfi lmen ”1939”, Svensk Filmindustris 30-miljonerssatsning till sitt 70-årsjubileum
1989? Per Morberg som supercharmige, svartsjuke, smygaggressive rikemanssonen Bengt. I just
kostym, bakåtkammat hår och bländvit skjorta.
Proper, oklanderlig, med livsfarlig blick. Hör ni
Zemya Hamilton sjunga soundtracklåten ”Jag
har min kind mot din kind, min arm omkring
din hals”?
Där står han. Nu i verkligheten. Vid hans fötter
ligger ett kastspö och han är i färd med att knyta
på ett drag på linan. Han har två projekt att lansera; i tv-kanalen Sjuan visas hans nya program
”Den stora matresan”, och snart kommer boken
med samma namn. Jag anar att Per har gjort sitt
val för dagen: snäll kille. Här ska det fi skas för
folket.
Nere vid bryggan gör han ett provkast samtidigt som han visar hur den polsktyske skådespelaren Klaus Kinski – känd för sin lynnighet, sina
aggressionsproblem och katastroferna detta
brukade medföra under hans fi lminspelningar
– kunde göra en hel kroppsvridning genom att
utgå med fötterna i kors.
– Han hade ett ego som var som Atlanten. Mitt
är som en kolonilott i jämförelse, kommenterar
Per.
Draget fl yger genom luften och fastnar i det
vissna vassbältet vid sjökanten. Per rycker till,
wobblern beskriver en lydig båge tillbaka och
landar mot Pers ben, där de treuddiga krokarna
sätter sig stadigt i hans luddiga, bruna vadmalsbyxor. Jag faller på knä och pillar hjälpsamt loss
dem, varpå Per lossar ekans förtöjningar. Då
fastnar draget i tampen. Per biter ihop. Sedan
biter han i tampen. Medan han kämpar lyfter jag
i fi skelådan. Den ser väldigt ny ut?
– Väldigt ny, säger Per. Väldigt Statoil. Inte alls
Per Morberg. Flytta den ur bild.
Vadmalskostymen däremot, den är ”Per Morberg hunting collection”. Hornknappar och
valkat ylletyg, sådant som jaktskildrarna Bruno
Liljefors och Gustaf Schröder hade på sig runt
Per Morberg
Per Morbergs farmor
var kokerska på Tullgarns slott där han nu
hyr rättarbostaden.
Per plockar bär och
svamp, fi skar och jagar
fortfarande i bygden.
14 SÖNDAG 20 NOVEMBER 2011
1989 Premiär på ”1939” som blir Pers
stora genombrott. Han och
Helena Bergström, som också
har en roll, åker limousine till
Globen, där fi lmen visas.
2001
Som storbonden Börje i Carin
Mannheimers ”Fru Marianne”
spelar Per mot Cecilia Frode.
2006 Per lagar mat i ett jaktprogram på TV 4 och får därefter
erbjudande om en egen serie
matlagningsprogram.
2008 Träff ar Per Meryl Streep på
svenska premiären av ”Mamma
mia!”, ber att få kyssa hennes
hand och får svaret: ”Du får
kyssa mig var du vill”. Han väljer
halsen.
Intervju: Per Morberg
och tjänat en liten slant. Det var inte självklart
i den medel- och arbetarklass som jag kommer
i från.
Per kan enligt egen utsago inte uttyda instruktionsbeskrivningen ens till en klockradio. Men
som fj ortonåring var han en jävel på att sticka.
Till ett av sina tv-program ville han bjuda in ”Mikael Persbrandt, Michael Nyqvist och de andra
grabbarna grus” för att sticka lovikkavantar. Det
blev aldrig någon macho-syjunta, men Per tycker fortfarande att idén är bra.
– Jag gillar ju att sticka, på riktigt, säger han.
Ja, jag har inte gjort det sedan syslöjden i skolan,
med då var jag bäst i klassen. Jag är bra på att
göra saker med händerna.
På västgötska skulle man säga att det ”vörnar
sig” för honom. Det blir helt enkelt bra när han
tar i något: en stickning, en sauce béarnaise eller
– misstänker jag – en kvinna. Eller för den delen en judomotståndare. Per har sedan tonåren
svart bälte, tio SM-guld och ett EM-brons.
När han kom ut på mattan tittade folk på honom. Per Morberg är en blickmagnet. Oavsett
om han gör ett judokast, bankar en biff eller
slår knytnäven i väggen framför kameran. ”Det
sprakar när jag kommer in i ett rum. Det kan jag
se själv”, sade han till Amelia Adamo (som han
inom parentes sagt tyckte var ”en jätterar och
gullig människa”) innan han försatte henne i bilarrest. Till mig säger han:
– Jag är alltid apan, det är därför mina matprogram och kokböcker säljer. Jag har sålt snart
500 000 kokböcker på 3,5 år.
Känner du någonsin att du prostituerar dig?
– Hela tiden. Det är Inese och fl ickorna och
grytor och hemma och kompisar, och jag bjuder
på allt det där. Men skådespelaren Morberg går
in och spelar en parodi på Per Morberg. Precis så
är det. I och med att jag är så driven som skådespelare lirar jag hela tiden. När det här är klart
har du inte en aning om vem jag är egentligen.
Hm. Mannen framför mig, denne Per Morberg,
är ytligt sett klädd i blåbrunrutig skjorta, breda
gröna hängslen och kängor inomhus. När han
reser sig för att spotta ut snuset genom fönstret
och lägga in en vedklabbe till i kaminen snuddar hans hjässa i det låga torpets allmogemålade
takbjälkar. Några droppar inuitblod gör kindbenen höga och pagen tjock och mörkvågig. Det är
en snygg utsida och han tycker om att exponera
den. Insidan gömmer han helst. Det gör det frestande att söka personliga karaktärsdrag i hans
professionella rollfi gurer.
Mest känd är nog Viggo i såpoperan ”Rederiet”. Han var bara med i tre av tjugo säsonger,
men under den tiden hann han göra sig hatad
av större delen av besättningen ombord på M/S
”Freja” och älskad av publiken. Som hustrumisshandlare i Kay Pollaks ”Så som i himmelen”
väcker Per bara obehag. Och som tv-kock rör
han upp mer känslor hos tittarna än allt grums
i en dåligt klarnad consommé.
– Jag har haft en väldig tur att matgrejen kom
in i mitt liv. Annars hade jag fått springa på repetitioner på dagarna och spela på kvällarna
och vara överlycklig om jag fi ck tjugo dagar i en
långfi lm vart tredje år, det är så det ser ut. Nu får
jag upp till tio kärleksförklaringar om dagen per
mejl. ”Vi älskar dig”, skriver de. ”Du har betytt
mer än Hyland”.
Mat, ja, det är faktiskt hög tid att äta lunch och
Per tänker laga till den. I köket har Inese förberett. Hon får koka upp vattnet, men inte pastan,
och absolut inte steka svampen. Matlagning
handlar för Per Morberg precis som skådespeleri
och judo om känsla, tajmning och intuition. Är
det de redskapen han använder för att hantera
allt i livet kanske?
– Verkligen inte, säger Inese. Per har dålig impulskontroll. Det blir som det blir. Känsla, tajmning och intuition handlar om att kunna läsa av
omgivningen och förutse eff ekterna av sitt agerande. Det kan inte alltid Per.
Medan Per koncentrerar sig på att få pastan
perfekt al dente vidareutvecklar Inese sin ståndpunkt.
– Jag har varit väldigt arg på Per, säger hon. Per
är ganska gräslig, han vet inte var gränserna går
här i livet.
Per vänder ryggen åt torpets AGA-spis och ansiktet mot Inese.
– Det tycker jag visst att jag har lärt mig, protesterar han.
– Allting du gör gör du så mycket av. Du äter
mycket, dricker mycket, går mycket, allt är så
mycket, argumenterar hon.
– Får man något eget utrymme bredvid en sådan person? undrar jag.
– Knappt, säger Inese. Men nu på lördag ska
jag åka till Indien i tio dagar med tjejkompisar!
Hon kan behöva lite semester. Inese är med
och skriver Pers texter i hans kokböcker och i
nya ”Magasin Morberg”. Arbetet som legitimerad psykoterapeut har hon tagit paus i för att i
stället hjälpa maken med hans många parallella
projekt.
Det är också hon som har plockat den karljohansvamp som Per nu steker på mycket hög
värme. Han nyper i den med härdade fi ngrar,
far ut i landet efter krusbladig persilja, häller
vispgrädden från Vagnhärad i en tunn stråle ner
i den heta stekpannan, river parmesanen rakt
över anrättningen och ställer fram var sin ångande djup tallrik på bordet.
– Ät nu, annars är det förstört. Det här är förmodligen den bästa pastan som serveras i Sverige i dag, säger han.
Linguine-pastan har precis det där lilla tuggmotståndet den får sekunden efter att kärnan
har försvunnit. Såsen är rikt doftande och krämig, karljohansvampen full av smaknyanser och
persiljan pinfärsk. Anrättningen är så njutningsfull att det är min tur att bli högröd i ansiktet,
vilket Per genast påpekar.
– Det är fantastiskt gott! berömmer jag.
– Tack, det var roligt att höra. Jag är inte förvånad.
Per slappnar av lite nu när maten är presterad.
Han lutar sig mot Inese som sitter bredvid med
håret okonstfärdigt hopsnott mitt på huvudet.
Fotografen lyfter kameran och Inese backar undan. Per drar henne till sig.
– Det passar mig perfekt att vara i bakgrunden, säger Inese.
– Det vore skönt att någon gång få byta roll,
men vi kan ju inte det, säger Per grinigt.
– Nej, svarar Inese mjukt.
Per tittar på henne.
– Har du min skjorta på dig, och inga knappar i
koftan, och helt osminkad. Du ser ju ut som Lilla
My, säger han. Och drar henne till sig igen.
Sedan går vi ut i skogen. Rättarbostaden
på Tullgarn hyr Morbergs, men den här
Linguine-pasta med egenhändigt plockad
karljohanssvamp från trakten.
I skogen går Per av sig
ångesten och Inese
fyller svampkorgen.
”Män över femtio blir
så svåra på bild. Fast
jag var ju svår redan
som sjuåring.”
”Jag har inte haft en ångestfri dag i mitt liv”
Med Helen Egelund i ”1939”.
Som Viggo i ”Rederiet”.
Foto: Jan Rydqvist Foto: Bengt Wanselius
SÖNDAG 20 NOVEMBER 2011 11
Intervju
SÖNDAG 20 NOVEMBER 2011 13
förra sekelskiftet. Väl lämpat för en dags fi ske på
en liten sjö där det fortfarande kryper svenska
fl odkräftor i bottenslammet. Det luktar döda löv.
Dimman driver över vattenytan i lodräta lakan.
Pers mobil tillkännager en strid ström av nya
meddelanden.
– Hör ni vad det blippar och blingar? Folk är
som tokiga. Jag har haft 1 200 förfrågningar i månaden i fyra och ett halvt år nu, det slutar aldrig.
Så fort det är något med mig, då ska det tjänas
pengar på mig, klagar Per.
Han tackar nej till det mesta. Det fi nns så jävla
mycket tokerier. Det är pinsamt. Sorgligt. Kvällstidningarna vill bara att pöbeln ska köpa lösnummer, det är ungefär som giljotinen förr i världen;
otäckt. Det är bara skit överallt:
– Det är ju ingenting som är bra, det är ju bara
jag och Skavlan och sedan är det ingenting att ha.
Eller, det fi nns en del andra duktiga tv-människor, men de är rätt få.
Säger Per.
Här på sjön fi nns heller inget att hämta. Det
nappar inte. Fy fan. Kanske är det fel drag. Nu
går vi upp till torpet och sätter oss framför kaminen i stället.
Inne i stugvärmen väntar Inese. Hon berättar
att hon skulle hissa upp en tung träpersienn för
några dagar sedan, men i stället fi ck den i skallen. Förmodligen resulterade smällen i en lättare hjärnskakning för hon har ont i huvudet och
känner sig illamående och trött. Men krämporna
är som bortblåsta i samma sekund som Per stiger in i rummet. Inese nästan översköljer maken
med uppmärksamhet.
– Vad fi n du är, och knäppt skjorta hela vägen
upp! strålar hon.
De träff ades 1979. Per var 19 och Inese var 25.
Hon satt i trappan på Sveriges första moderna
nattklubb, Alexandra, och väntade på sin kusin.
Per jobbade i köket som kock. Han fi ck syn på
den långhåriga kvinnan ”med bambivrister och
söt stjärt”. Hon utstrålade självkänsla, intelligens,
och att hon var lite svår. Så här i efterhand tror
han att hon hade turban. Han kunde se att hon
visste att hon var snygg, och det var lockande.
– Jag tänkte att henne skulle jag ha. Jag talade
om det, och så fi ck jag det. Så jävla enkelt var det,
säger han.
Inese hade taggarna utåt, men Per brydde sig
inte om det. Han gick bara rakt fram, pussade
henne på kinden och började prata.
– Helt orädd fast jag såg så sträng ut i knut och
brillor, säger Inese.
– Jag har beskrivit dig med bambivrister och
söt stjärt, invänder Per.
– Åh, gud så fånigt, svarar Inese.
År 1979 hade hon redan en fyraårig dotter.
Per bodde fortfarande i pojkrummet hemma
hos mamma och pappa. Inese fi xade en lägenhet åt honom. Efter ett tag fl yttade de ihop och
fi ck under de kommande 15 åren fyra döttrar till.
Per slet i krogköken, långt från restauranggästernas beundrande blickar. Han kände sig inte
sedd. Inese fi ck klara vardagsveckorna hemma i
Stockholm själv med småbarnen när Per drog till
scenskolan i Göteborg. Han studerade där i tre
och ett halvt års tid, och det var tuff t – för Inese.
Framför allt ekonomiskt.
– Vi pantade tomburkar. Jag gick överallt med
barnen och cyklade till jobbet på Långbro sjukhus där jag jobbade som psykiatrisyster, säger
hon.
Så fi ck Per en roll i Carin Mannheimers ”Svenska hjärtan”, som kom att bli en tv-klassiker,
sedd av över 2 miljoner tittare. Sedan blev han
erbjuden jobb på Dramaten. När kontraktet var
underskrivet tog han med Inese till restaurang
Prinsen, där han friade till henne.
Nu skickar han ut henne i torpets kök för att förbereda lunch på karljohansvamp, parmesan och
pasta, i stället för fi sken som vi inte fi ck. Någon
kvart senare skickar han i väg fotografen också.
– Hon märker det inte, men du är så störd av
att hon inte slutar plåta under intervjun att du
håller på att gå av på mitten. Det har jag läst av
för hundra år sedan. Nyss, när jag blev högröd i
ansiktet och var tvungen att öppna fönstret, var
det för att jag kände din irritation så tydligt. Den
fi ngertoppskänslan är min största begåvning,
det är därför jag är en så bra skådespelare, säger
han till mig.
Touché. Jag som trodde att vi skulle hit och gestalta en dramaqueen. Och så är det vi själva som
bjuder på konfl ikterna, och han som löser dem.
Vi börjar om från början: Per och hans lillasyster Maria är uppvuxna i Stockholmsförorterna
Hökarängen och Sköndal. Mamma var daghemsföreståndare och talpedagog. Pappa var rörmokare. Var det lugnt och harmoniskt?
– Det var det absolut inte, säger Per.
Hur var det då?
– Jag var ett väldigt livligt barn, jag hade enorma koncentrationssvårigheter, svårt att ta in
information. Jag fi ck gå i hjälpklass i en annan
barack med de andra dumskallarna, så var det
ju faktiskt, det kommer tillbaka till mig nu. Men
vem gick det bäst för i klassen? Jo mig. Jag har
svingat mig upp i världen, fått vistas i de fi nare
salongerna, träff at rätt intressanta människor
Mitt liv i år
1976 Tonårige Per är populär bland
fl ickorna – så populär att han
”får tacka nej”.
1975
Per blir svensk mästare i judo,
en titel han tar fl era gånger till
under 70-talet.
1979 Som nybakad kock rör sig Per
hemtamt mellan Stockholmsnattens inneställen. Han siktas
av regissören Roman Polanski
som vill ha honom i sin nästa
fi lm och skickar en Parisbiljett.
Men fi lmen skjuts på framtiden.
1984 Efter tre försök kommer Per in
på scenskolan i Göteborg.
Inese och Per
träff ades på
krogen 1979.
Per var 19 och
Inese 25.
”Fingertoppskänslan är min största begåvning”
SÖNDAG 20 NOVEMBER 2011 15
”Jag är för tung för
den här typen av
artiklar.”
32 SÖNDAG 25 SEPTEMBER 2011 Kenya SÖNDAG 25 SEPTEMBER 2011 ○ RESOR OCH UPPLEVELSER JORDEN RUNT
Vardagen för rovdjuren i viltreservatet
Masai Mara i Kenya går mest ut på att
ligga och sova. Här en grupp loja lejon
– ett av de fem stora djur som varje
safariresenär drömmer om att få se.
Övriga är elefant, leopard, noshörning
och afrikansk buff el.
34 SÖNDAG 25 SEPTEMBER 2011
Alla i vår lilla grupp bär på samma
dröm. Vi inser det när vi landar
på den lilla landningsbanan,
mitt i viltreservatet Masai Mara
i sydvästra Kenya. Alla hoppas
vi få se ”The big fi ve” – lejon,
leopard, elefant, noshörning och afrikansk buff el.
Uttrycket myntades av storviltsjägare, vilket
förklarar att till exempel fl odhästen inte fi nns
med. Den var inte så spännande att jaga.
Det ska snart visa sig att vissa av de fem är lättare
att få syn på än andra.
För fyra år sedan var Kenya det nya stora resmålet för charterbolagen. Här kunde man åka på
spännande safari i de stora nationalparkerna för
att sedan förfl ytta sig till tropiska stränder längs
kusten mot Indiska oceanen för bad och vattensporter.
Det hann bli en säsong. Alla charterresor till Kenya
ställdes in efter valet i december 2007 som resulterade i upplopp och våld mellan etniska grupper. Över tusen personer beräknas ha dödats och
närmare en halv miljon människor fördrevs från
sina hem.
Men inbördeskriget uteblev, och nu är situationen i huvudsak lugn igen.
Det gäller visserligen inte i den nordöstra delen
av landet, nära gränsen till Somalia. Den svenska
ambassaden i Kenya manar till stor försiktighet
om man reser närmare Somalias gräns än tre
svenska mil. Dessutom har den terrorstämplade
somaliska organisationen al-Shabaab hotat Kenya
med terrordåd. I norra Kenya är svältkatastrofen
ett faktum bland de många somalier som samlas
i redan överfulla fl yktingläger.
Det är dock långt från landets södra delar i
detta stora land, där turismen är en av de viktiga
inkomstkällorna.Nu satsar de tre stora svenska
charterbolagen åter på Kenya.
Det är lätt att förstå varför. De välskötta nationalparkerna erbjuder fantastiska scenerier, vädret är
behagligt, människorna varma och välkomnande.
Dessutom låter sig djurskådande på savannen
väl kombineras med en rejäl badsemester. Norr
och söder om Mombasa, Kenyas andra stad, breder de vita stränderna ut sig och Indiska oceanens
turkosa vatten inbjuder till såväl bad som snorkling och lata dagar vid poolen.
Safari ägnar man sig med fördel åt som en start
på Kenyasemestern. Vår resa börjar med en fl ygtur till naturreservatet Masai Mara i sydvästra
delen av landet.
På landningsbanan möts vi av massajer som ska
vara våra guider under besöket. De kan ge svar på
nästan alla frågor.
Redan på vägen från landningsbanan till vår
camp ser vi elefanter, giraff er, zebror, antiloper
och lejon. En smutsig hyena ligger mitt på vägen.
Den reser sig sävligt ur sin lergrop och lommar
i väg med en sned blick på vår bil. Den ser precis
så grym ut – i ordets gamla bemärkelse – som jag
föreställt mig.
Två av de fem stora – lejon och elefanter – är sålunda avbockade inom en timme från landningen.
I Masai Mara fi nns omkring 400 lejon. Tre honor
ligger och sover under ett träd. En har sina tassar
lojt uppsträckta mot stammen och ingen av dem
bryr sig om oss.
Det fi nns ett skäl. Parken öppnade 1961 och all
jakt på djur här förbjöds 1967. Att bilar skulle innebära ett hot går helt enkelt inte upp för lejonen
som ser ut att smälta maten efter en god jakt.
Ont om mat har de inte.Masai Mara härbärKenya
Utanför bilen breder savannen ut sig ändlöst,
fåtaliga akaciaträd och buskar bryter horisonten.
Safariproff s. Massajen Sami Kaleku
har drömt om att arbeta som guide
i Masai Mara ända sedan han var barn.
Nu lotsar han safariturister sedan
två år tillbaka och hans kunskaper
imponerar.
36 SÖNDAG 25 SEPTEMBER 2011
Kenya
Från chartersafari till strandlyx.Till Kenya fi nns resealternativ för alla smaker.
Sol och bad
○Safariresan låter sig med fördel
kombineras med sol och bad längs
Mombasakusten. Där är vattentemperaturen konstant ca 26 grader.
○För den som bokar själv går det att
hitta hotell för från 500 kronor per
dygn och uppåt.
○Visum: Ja. Kan ordnas via Kenyas
ambassad i Stockholm eller köpas vid
ankomsten.
○Bästa tid att åka: Från december till
mars.
○Vaccinationer: Grundskydd. Vaccin
mot hepatit A rekommenderas, liksom
malariaprofylax.
○Största irritationsmomentet:
”Beach boys” – strandförsäljare som
kan vara alltför påträngande. Eftersom
alla stränder i Kenya är allmänna, kan
hotellen inte stänga ute dem.
Resa dit
○De tre stora researrangörerna Ving,
Fritidsresor och Apollo ordnar alla
såväl safari- som badresor till Kenya.
○Cirkapriser: Från 10 000 kronor per
person för en vecka. Från 13 000 kronor
per person för två veckor.
○Flera mindre arrangörer fi nns som
ordnar mer exklusiva resor till högre
priser, till exempel Jambo Tours,
JK Safaris, Tour Africa, Kenzan Tours
samt Nygren och Lind.
○Allt fl er väljer dessutom att
själva arrangera sina resor, berättar
Karl-Johan von Heland, svensk som
är med och driver safaricampen
Entumoto i Masai Mara. Där tar man inte
emot de stora chartergrupperna utan
koncentrerar sig på mindre grupper och
ensamresenärer.
○Flyg Stockholm – Nairobi-tur och
retur går att hitta från 6 000 kronor.
Därefter tillkommer fl yg från
inrikesfl ygplatsen Wilson Airport till
någon av nationalparkerna.
Massajerna utgör endast 2 procent av Kenyas befolkning, men har ändå blivit en symbol för landet,
sannolikt på grund av deras levande gamla traditioner och särpräglade klädsel, för det mesta i rött.
På kvällen, i nattsvart mörker endast upplyst av
skenet från elden, dansar och sjunger gruppen på
campen igen, och bjuder upp en eller annan gäst
att dansa med.
Därefter vecklar de upp sina dukar och säljer
souvenirer och konsthantverk. Då är det svårt att
inte köpa.
På natten hör jag djur utanför som skäller och
ylar. De låter som vildhundar eller vargar, men
nästa morgon förklarar Sami lugnande: det är
bara zebrorna.
Vi kliver upp redan vid femtiden. Efter frukost
åker vi en timme genom den kolsvarta natten. Nu
ska vi se savannen från luften. Jag sviker mitt eget
löfte till mitt höjdrädda jag: att aldrig åka luftballong. Ska det ske någon gång så måste det bli här
och nu.
Snart ser vi horder av buffl ar nedanför oss, och
giraff erna som lugnt betar på trädkronorna. Det
är stilla och magiskt, och efter en timmes luftfärd
landar vi mjukt strax intill våra följebilar, som tar
oss till en uppdukad frukost under några träd på
savannen. Just där och då känner man sig som en
blandning av lyxresenär och kolonialist.
Masai Mara är ett av Kenyasmånga viltreservat
eller nationalparker. Bland övriga som svenska
reseföretag nu fl yger charter till fi nns Tsavo – East
respektive West – och Amboseli, där man kan bo
vid foten av Kilimanjaro.
Amboseli har välordnade grusvägar som bilarna inte får avvika från. Lika nära djuren som
i Masai Mara kommer man i allmänhet inte här.
De många palmerna antyder att också klimatet
är annorlunda, och landskapet är kryddat med
svarta, vulkaniska lavastenar från Kilimanjaros
senaste utbrott – för 360 000 år sedan.
Hit kommer man inte minst för de många elefanternas skull. Det är inte ovanligt att se ett 30-tal
av dem skrida fram över savannen, anförda av sin
ledare – matriarken, den äldsta honan.
En och annan gnu står och betar på savannen,
kvarlämnad av fl ocken som dragit sig tillbaka till
Serengeti på den tanzaniska sidan.
En thomsongasell ligger död bredvid vägen.
– Om några timmar är han borta, säger guiden.
Uppäten av gamar, schakaler eller hyenor.
Något senare ser vi en död hyena, och jag frågar:
– Kommer den att ätas upp av andra hyenor?
– Nej, svarar guiden. Inte av schakaler eller gamar heller. Inget djur äter en död hyena.
Man lär sig så mycket när man åker på safari.
Som att giraff erna försvarar sig med bra syn och
bra sparkar. Det gäller för dem att aldrig slappna
av helt; giraff er sover bara i snitt 20 minuter per
dygn. Giraff ens främsta fi ende är människan, som
jagar den för köttets skull. Det lär vara gott.
Så hur gick det med ”The big fi ve”?
Noshörningarna har blivit färre på grund av
jakten på deras horn. Närmare dem kom vi inte
än till de noshörningshuvuden i järn som pryder
grindarna in till en av nationalparkerna.
Också leoparderna höll sig undan. De är skygga,
lever i träden och jagar på nätterna.
Som tröst köper jag en i trä. Den får duga.
När jag stolt visar den för guiden ler han och
säger:
– Det är nog en gepard.
Mats Carlbom
är reporter på DN Söndag.
mats.carlbom
Fredrik Funck
är fotograf på DN.
Snart ser vi horder av buffl ar
nedanför oss, det är stilla och
magiskt.
Stränderna vid Indiska Oceanen är paradisiska. Reven en bit ut skyddar från de
största vågorna, här Dianai söder om Mombasa. Foto: Fredrik Funck
Kluvet. Efter
luftfärden väntar
frukost på savannen.
Det är lätt att känna
sig som en blandning
mellan lyxresenär och
kolonialist.
”Jag syns inte ...” Också
i elefanttäta parken
Tsavo East gäller det
att titta åt rätt håll om
man vill se alla djur.
Safari vid poolen. På
fl era håll, som här
i Tsavo East, kan man
uppleva några av
savannens djur utan att
kliva ur badkläderna.
Savannens farligaste
djur. En fl ock med
afrikanska buffl ar sedd
från ovan under en
gryningsfärd i ballong
i Masai Mara.
SÖNDAG 25 SEPTEMBER 2011 33
Kenyas välskötta nationalparker bjuder på fantastiska
scenerier för dem som drömmer om en klassisk safari.
Djurskådandet går utmärkt att kombinera med en lyxig
badsemester i Indiska oceanen.
Mäktiga
Masai Mara
text Mats Carlbom foto Fredrik Funck
WWW.DN.SE/RESOR
1 000 i topp. Ny bok listar resmålen du inte får missa. Sid 38
4 städer. Spring i Rocky Balboas trappa i Philadelphia. Sid 40
Koll på Kreta. Lonely Planets expert tipsar om guldkornen. Sid 43
SÖNDAG 25 SEPTEMBER 2011 35
Pigg uppstickare. En
giraff är alltid på språng
och sover bara cirka
20 minuter per dygn.
Dess värsta fi ende
är männi skan som
traditionellt har jagat
dem för köttets skull.
Långsamt
börjar hjorden
på ett hundratal
buffl ar att röra
sig mot oss med
sänkta huvuden.
Spänningen blir
påtaglig.
gerar åtta olika sorters antiloper och tre olika
sorters gaseller. De strövar i stora hjordar, liksom
zebrorna, och jag får ett nytt perspektiv på det
här med rovdjur och off er. I det stora ekologiska
spelet är det försvinnande få djur som blir uppätna. Färre i verkliga livet än i de fl esta dokumentärer om vilda djur vi kan se på tv och som
naturligt nog koncentrerar sig på de få tillfällen
då rovdjuren går till attack. Vardagen för dem är
mest att ligga och sova.
Utanför bilen breder savannen ut sig ändlöst, fåtaliga akaciaträd och buskar bryter horisonten.
Plötsligt saktar vår guide ned och pekar rakt
fram. Utan honom hade vi inte sett dem, men nu
står vi bara några meter från tre geparder. En av
dem lyfter slött på huvudet för att titta på vår bil,
men reagerar annars inte.
De tre är bröder, säger vår guide.
Hur vet han det? Förklaringen är enkel: När gepardens ungar växer upp går honorna var och en
åt sitt håll, men bröderna lever tillsammans resten
av livet. Så ser man tre geparder tillsammans så
vet man att de är bröder.
Geparden är världens snabbaste däggdjur. Den
lever och jagar på marken och äter snabbt upp
sitt byte. Orsaken är att de måste äta upp innan
konkurrenter om bytet upptäcker dem. Hyenorna
kommer i fl ock, och dem klarar inte geparderna
av. Leoparderna har det lättare; de plockar upp bytet i träden, dit varken hyenor eller lejon kan ta sig.
Vad skulle hända om vi gick ur bilen nu? frågar jag.
– De skulle springa härifrån, svarar Sami.
Och om vi gick ur bredvid lejonen?
– De skulle inte springa ...
Sami Kaleku har varit guide i två år. Det är något
han drömt om att bli sedan han var barn, och hans
kunskaper imponerar.
På långt håll ser vi ett stort dammoln som rör
sig framåt över savannen: den afrikanska buff eln.
Vi kör ditåt, och efter en kort stund står vi några
tiotal meter framför den stora hjorden – savannens farligaste djur
– De dödar människor utan annan anledning än
att man är där, säger Sami Kaleku. Hellre möter
jag ett lejon.
Buffl arna sluter sig samman, stirrar på oss. De
verkar inte ha samma avslappnade inställning till
bilar som lejonen och geparderna – och alla andra
djur på savannen. Långsamt börjar hjorden på kanske ett hundratal djur att röra sig mot oss med sänkta huvuden. Spänningen blir påtaglig och vår guide
fi nner det lämpligt att långsamt köra därifrån.
Vi kan bocka av nummer tre på listan över de
fem stora. Två kvar.
Vi är inte de enda turisterna som far omkring
på savannen med massajguide, det står klart när
vi närmar oss en storfamilj med ett tiotal lejon
vid en träddunge. Runt honorna kliver ungarna
omkring och diar den hona som är närmast – om
det är den egna mamman eller inte är ointressant
för både dem och honorna. Det är en makalös syn,
man kan inte se sig mätt.
Men snart går exklusiviteten förlorad. Ytterligare en bil ansluter. Sedan en tredje, och en fj ärde ...
Till slut är vi åtta bilar som omringat lejonen, med
turister som hänger ut med klickande kameror.
Vi störs nog mer av denna massturism än lejonen, som obekymrat leker och sover vidare i sitt
kollektiv av mammor och ungar.
Vår camp drivs av massajer som hälsar välkomna
med traditionell sång och dans, inklusive
de karaktäristiska höga hoppen.
Mitt i det vilda.
Redan på vägen från
landningsbanan till
lägret kan man se
savannens djur på
nära håll. Elefanter,
giraff er, antiloper, lejon
– och som här – en fl ock
zebror.
Sömnig sprinter.
Världens snabbaste
däggdjur, geparden,
kan komma upp
i 100 kilometer
per timme på korta
sträckor. Men efter
maten sover de helst.
Maffi g syn. I nationalparken Amboseli är
det inte ovanligt att se
ett trettiotal elefanter
skrida fram över
savannen, anförda av
matriarken, den äldsta
honan.
Massmys. I Masai Mara
fi nns omkring 400
lejon. Här en storfamilj
som obekymrat leker
och sover vidare i sitt
kollektiv av mammor
och ungar medan bil
efter bil med turister
ansluter.
SÖNDAG 25 SEPTEMBER 2011 37
○I Nairobi fi nns ett antal så kallade
ground handlers av skiftande kvalitet
som erbjuder hjälp med praktiska
arrangemang, som transfer mellan
fl ygplatser och andra detaljer.
○Utöver ensamresarna menar
Karl-Johan von Heland att det fi nns tre
kategorier av Kenyaresenärer.
1. Charterturisterna som åker i grupper
med de stora arrangörerna.
2. De som vill betala lite mer för att
åka i mindre grupp och bo på lite mer
exklusiva camper.
3. De som vill betala mest och bo
lyxigt. Då kan resan kosta uppemot
100 000 kronor per person.
Kenya
○ Antal invånare: 38 miljoner.
○ Huvudstad: Nairobi (3 miljoner inv).
○ Yta: 580 000 kvadratkilometer
(Sverige 450 000).
○Språk: Alla kenyaner talar engelska,
swahili, och ett av de 55 lokala språken.
○Religion: Ca 70 procent kristna, cirka
10 procent muslimer, minoriteter av
bahai, hinduer och sikher.
○Visste du att ...
... landet Kenya har inspirerat fi lmen
”Lejonkungen”, rollfi guren Simbas
namn är swahili för lejon. Ledmotivet
”Hakuna matata” betyder det fi nns
inga bekymmer.
25mil
UGANDA
TANZANIA
ETIOPIEN SUDAN
Nairobi Masai Mara
Amboseli
Tsavo East
Tsavo West
Mombasa
Victoria- sjön
KENYA SOMALIA
Kenya är som bäst från december till mars. Foto: Fredrik Funck
När mörkret faller och de lokala
massajmännen sjungit och dansat
lägger de fram konsthantverk och
souvenirer.
Frontpages Main paper
Frontpages Sections
News spread
Sports spread
Spreads from Sunday supplement
Culture spread
130 Chapter 5
One spatial issue that is particularly relevant to
newspapers is that of horizontal and vertical
designing. Until the mid-twentieth century, many
newspapers were designed with multiple-deck,
one-column headlines that created pages with long,
thin, ruled columns, which often made legibility
very difficult, and also gave the paper a dense and
unappealing appearance. Developments such as the
growing use of wider columns and margins, along
with the rise of tabloid newspapers and other smaller
formats, have pushed newspapers to adopt a more
horizontal design, which is more appealing visually
and also easier to read. Even in the narrow Berliner
format, designers can still create horizontal design
through the use of headlines and stories spread across
multiple columns that lead the viewer across the page
rather than up and down. Where vertical designs are
being used, it is important to allow enough margin
width to ensure good legibility and to lighten the
overall look of the page. White space and blank
columns can also be added to heighten the sense of
space and legibility further.
Design factors: the dominance of shape
A large proportion of editorial design is the
organization of shapes to support the written word
within the confines or parameters of a publication’s
style. Mark Porter describes it as ‘being in charge of the
distribution of elements in space’, these elements being
headlines, text, artwork and white space. The way these
shapes are organized creates the difference between
a satisfactory and an unsatisfactory layout. Used well,
shape distribution can be used to lead the reader’s eye
through an article as well as navigate around the page,
and create a wide range of feelings and meanings.
If you look at a layout and half shut your eyes, you will
see all its elements in the form of shapes. Type blends
into grey blocks, illustrations and pictures form
rectangles or squares with the occasional irregular
shapes of cut-out pictures or decorative type. If you
keep your eyes half shut, you begin to see how these
shapes work together and connect to form other
shapes or strong diagonal lines. White, or non-printing,
space also produces shapes. These shapes create
balance, harmony or discord. Creating patterns with
shapes helps to give a layout flow.
The front page layout of Swedish daily
newspaper Dagens Nyheter (DN) creates
impact with a reportage news picture. The
horror of the content is slightly softened by
the painterly composition and the muted
colours. The typography of the masthead and
the headline is bold and dramatic. Small
teaser stories across the bottom of the page
pull the reader further into the paper.
Creating layouts 131
Where to place items
The placement and design of copy can
communicate to and influence the reader.
Deciding whether to give an article an entire
spread or place it amongst two or three
others immediately signals its importance to
the reader. Here we see one article with a
full-bleed image, large headline and standfirst, wide column setting, lists, strong colour
and lots of white space – all this attempts to
stimulate interest and entice the reader.
In contrast, this layout demonstrates how the
same article, designed another way, can send
out different signals. Here it is laid out not as
a feature but more as a news story. With text
filling the spread from top to bottom, smaller
headlines, a narrower column measure and
less white space, the article is reduced in
priority and importance. However pull quotes,
boxes, bullet points and colour all help in
catching the eye and drawing in the reader.
BOX COPY
Which uses dummy
text or even gibberish
can have the inherent
disadvantage of
distracting attention
from itself. Simultext
is effective in any
typeface, whatever
size and format is
required for use.
This is dummy text. Intended
to be read but have no meaning.
As a simulation of actual copy.
Dummy settings which use
other or even gibberish
to approximate text have
the inherent disadvantage
they distract attention to
themselves. Simultext is
effective in any typeface,
whatever size and format is
required. Paragraphs may
be long or short. Text can
be to complete any area,
as the copy is simply repeated with different start
points. This is dummy text.
Intended to be read but
have no real meaning. As
a simulation of actual copy,
using ordinary words with
normal letter frequencies,
it cannot deceive the eye
or brain.
Settings may use other
languages or gibberish to
approximate text have the
disadvantage they distract
attention to themselves.
As a simulation of actual
copy, using ordinary words
with normal letter frequencies, can’t deceive eye
or the brain. Simultext is
effective in any typeface,
also at whatever size and
format is required. Paragraphs may be long or
short. What you see is
dummy text. Intended
to be read but have no
real meaning. As a simulation of actual copy,
using ordinary words with
normal letter frequencies,
can’t deceive eye or brain.
Copy can be produced
to complete any area, as
the copy is repeated with
different starting points.
Dummy settings which use
other or even gibberish
to approximate text have
the inherent disadvantage
they distract attention to
themselves. Simultext is
effective in any typeface,
whatever size and format is
required. Paragraphs may
be long or short. Text can
be to complete any area,
as the copy is simply repeated with different start
points. This is dummy text.
Intended to be read but
have no real meaning. As
a simulation of actual copy,
using ordinary words with
normal letter frequencies,
it cannot deceive the eye
or brain.
Settings may use other
languages or gibberish to
approximate text have the
disadvantage they distract
attention to themselves.
As a simulation of actual
copy, using ordinary words
with normal letter frequencies, can’t deceive eye
or the brain. Simultext is
effective in any typeface.
Copy can be produced
to complete any area, as
the copy is repeated with
different starting points.
ummy settings which
use other languages
or gibberish to approximate text can have the
inherent disadvantage that
they distract attention to
themselves. Simultext is
effective in any typeface,
whatever size and format is
required. Paragraphs may
be long or short. Text can
be to complete any area,
as the copy is simply repeated with different start
points. This is dummy text.
Intended to be read but
have no real meaning. As
a simulation of actual copy,
using ordinary words with
normal letter frequencies,
it cannot deceive the eye
or human brain.
Settings may use other
languages or gibberish to
approximate text have the
disadvantage they distract
attention to themselves.
As a simulation of actual
copy, using ordinary words
with normal letter frequencies, can’t deceive eye
or the brain. Simultext is
effective in any typeface.
Also at whatever size
and format is required.
Paragraphs may be long
or short. What you see is
dummy text. Intended to
be read but is not real.
As a simulation of actual
copy, while using ordinary
words with normal letter
frequencies, can’t deceive
eye or brain. Copy can be
produced to be complete
any area, as the copy is
repeated with different
starting points.
Dummy settings which use
other or even gibberish
to approximate text have
the inherent disadvantage
they distract attention to
themselves.
Simultext is effective
in any typeface, whatever
size, style and format is
required. Paragraphs may
be long or short.
Dummy settings which use
other or even gibberish
to approximate text have
the inherent disadvantage
they distract attention to
themselves. Simultext is
effective in any typeface,
whatever size and format is
required. Paragraphs may
be long or short.
Text can be made to
complete any area, as the
copy is simply repeated
with different start points.
This is called dummy text.
Intended to be read but
have no real meaning. As
a simulation of actual copy,
using ordinary words with
normal letter frequencies,
it cannot deceive eye.
As a simulation of actual
copy, using ordinary words
with normal letter frequencies, can’t deceive eye
or the brain.
Also at whatever size and
format is required. Paragraphs may be long or
short. What you see is
dummy text. Intended to
be read but have no real
meaning. As a simulation
of copy, using ordinary
words with normal letter
frequencies.
This is a headline and
is intended to be read
•••••••••••••
This is dummy
text. Intended
to be read but
have no meaning
as a simulation
of actual copy.
•••••••••••••
4 NEWS NEWS 5
The second
story headline
A three-line headline
that is an extra level
in the hierarchy
Dummy settings which use
other or even gibberish
to approximate text have
the inherent disadvantage
they distract attention to
themselves. Simultext is
effective in any typeface,
whatever size and format is
required. Paragraphs may
be long or short.
Text can be made to
complete any area, as the
copy is simply repeated
with different start points.
This is called dummy text.
Intended to be read but
have no real meaning. As
a simulation of actual copy,
using ordinary words with
normal letter frequencies,
it cannot deceive eye.
Dummy Settings use other
languages or gibberish to
approximate text have the
disadvantage they distract
attention to themselves.
As a simulation of actual
copy, using words.
Another third story
headline
D
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Dummy settings
Gibberish text
The disadvantage
Attention too
03 14 25 36
132 Chapter 5
A newspaper’s selling point is often its front
page. For this reason it must be prominent on
a news-stand. The size and placement of a
masthead, images and headlines are integral
to the newspaper’s saleability. The design
of a front page is often created in response
to having either a great image or a great
headline available, and their respective
ability to grab attention.
On a page with multiple stories, the
positioning of text and other elements guides
the reader’s eye around the page. The main
story is signalled to the reader by being placed
at the top of the page, with the largest headline,
image and stand-first and the widest column
measure. In contrast the other two articles
are across a six-column measure, with no
stand-firsts, and both utilize a much smaller
space on the page. Hierarchy between these
two articles is communicated by the headline
size, image and amount of space used.
The Masthead
This is the
headline
It is intended to
be read but have
no meaning. As a
sample of actual
copy in a natural
situation
It is intended to
be read but have
no meaning. As a
sample of actual
copy in a natural
situation
Dummy settings which use other or even
gibberish to approximate text have the
inherent disadvantage they distract
attention to themselves. Simultext is
effective in any typeface, at whatever
size and format is required. Paragraphs
may be long or short. Text can be to
complete any area, as the copy is simply
repeated with different starting points.
This is dummy text. Intended to be read
but have no meaning. A simulation of
actual copy, using ordinary words with
normal letter frequencies, it cannot
deceive eye or brain.
Settings which use other languages
or even gibberish to approximate text
have the disadvantage they distract
attention to themselves. As a simulation
of actual copy, using ordinary words with
normal letter frequencies, can’t deceive
eye or brain. Simultext is effective in any
typeface, at what ever size and format is
required. Paragraphs may be long or
short. What you see is dummy text. It is
intended to be read but have no real
meaning. As a simulation of actual copy,
using ordinary words with normal letter
frequencies, can’t deceive eye or brain.
Copy can be produced to complete any
area, as the basic copy is repeated with
different starting points. It is intended
to be read but have no meaning.
Presentation copy uses languages or
gibberish to approximate text have the
disadvantage that they distract attention
to themselves. Simultext is effective in
any typeface, whatever size and format
is required. Paragraphs may be long or
short. This is dummy text. Intended
to be read but have no meaning. As a
simulation of actual copy, using words
with normal letter frequencies, cannot
deceive eye or brain. What you see here is
dummy text.
Simultext is effective in any typeface,
whatever size and format required.
Paragraphs may be long or short. Text
can be produced to complete any area,
as the basic copy is simply repeated with
different starting points. This is dummy
text. It is intended to be read but have
no meaning.
This is dummy text. It is intended to
be read but have no meaning. As a
simulation of actual copy, using ordinary
words with normal letter frequencies,
it cannot deceive eye or brain. Dummy
settings which use other languages or
even gibberish to approximate text have
the inherent disadvantage they distract
attention to themselves. Simultext is
effective in any typeface, at whatever size
and format is required. Paragraphs may
be long or short. Text can be produced
to complete any area, as the copy is
simply repeated with different starting
points. This is dummy text. Intended to
be read but have no meaning. As a
simulation of actual copy, using words
with normal letter frequencies, cannot
deceive eye or brain. Trial settings which
use other languages or gibberish to
approximate text have the disadvantage
they distract attention to themselves.
It is intended to be
read but have no
meaning. A sample
of actual copy in
a natural surround
Paragraphs may be long or
short. Text can be produced
to complete any area.
Paragraphs may be long or short. Text can be produced to complete any area, as the copy is simply repeated with different starting points.
This is dummy text. It is intended to be read but have no meaning. Paragraphs may be long or short. What you see here is dummy text.
Exciting box copy
• Use other or gibberish to
approximate text have the •
Inherent disadvantage
they distract attention to
• Simultext is effective in any
• Typeface, at whatever size
and format is required
• Paragraphs may be long or
short. Text can made be to
complete any area, as the
copy is simply repeated with
The Masthead
20 February 2007 03
imultext is effective in any
typeface, at whatever size
and format required. Paragraphs
may be long or short. Text can
be to complete any area, as the
copy is simply repeated with
different starting points. This is
dummy text. It is intended to be
read but have no meaning. A
simulation of actual copy, using
ordinary words with average
letter frequencies, it does not
deceive eye or brain.
Settings which can use other
languages or even gibberish to
simulate text have the inherent
disadvantage that they distract
attention to themselves. As a
simulation of actual copy, using
ordinary words with normal
letter frequencies, can’t deceive
eye or brain. Effective in any
typeface, at what ever size and
format is required. Paragraphs
may be long or short. What you
see is dummy text. Intended to
be read but have no meaning.
As a simulation of actual copy,
using ordinary words with
normal letter frequencies, can’t
deceive eye or brain. Copy can
be produced to complete any
area, as the copy is repeated
with different starting points.
Settings which can use other
languages or even gibberish to
simulate text have the inherent
disadvantage that they distract
attention to themselves. As a
simulation of actual copy, using
ordinary words with normal
letter frequencies, can’t deceive
eye or brain. Effective in any
typeface, at what ever size and
format is required. Paragraphs
may be long or short. What you
see is dummy text. Intended to
be read but have no meaning.
As a simulation of actual copy,
using ordinary words with
normal letter frequencies, can’t
deceive eye or brain. Copy can
be produced to complete any
area, as the copy is repeated
with different starting points.
This is dummy text.
ummy settings which
use other or gibberish to
approximate text have
the inherent disadvantage they
distract attention to themselves.
Simultext is effective in any type
face, at whatever size and format
is required. Paragraphs may be
long or short. Text can made be
to complete any area, as the copy
is simply repeated with different
starting points. It is intended to
be read but have no meaning. A
simulation of actual copy, using
ordinary words with normal letter
frequencies, it cannot deceive eye
or brain. Dummy settings which
use languages or even gibberish
to simulate text have the inherent
advantage they distract attention
to themselves. As a simulation of
actual copy, using ordinary words
with normal letter frequencies,
cannot deceive the eye or brain.
Simultext is effective in any type
face, at what ever size and format
is required. Paragraphs may be
long or short. What you see is
dummy text. It is intended to be
read but have no real meaning.
As a simulation of actual copy,
using words with normal letter
frequencies, can’t deceive eye or
brain. Copy can be produced to
complete any area, as the basic
copy is repeated with different
starting points. It is intended to
be read but have no meaning.
Presentation copy often uses
other languages or gibberish to
approximate the text have the
inherent disadvantage that they
distract attention to themselves.
Simultext is effective in any type
face, whatever size and format is
required. Paragraphs may be long
or short. This is dummy text.
Intended
to be read but have no meaning.
As a simulation of actual copy,
using words with normal letter
frequencies, cannot deceive eye
or brain. What you see here is
dummy text.
Text is effective in any type
face, at whatever size and format
is required. Paragraphs may be
long or short. Text can made be
to complete any area, as the copy
is simply repeated with different
starting points. It is intended to
be read but have no meaning. A
simulation of actual copy, using
ordinary words with normal letter
frequencies, it cannot deceive the
eye or brain.
Languages or even gibberish
to simulate text have the inherent
advantage they distract attention
to themselves. As a simulation of
actual copy, using ordinary words
with normal letter frequencies,
cannot deceive the eye or brain.
Simultext is effective in any type
face, at what ever size and format
is required. Paragraphs may be
long or short. What you see is
dummy text. It is intended to be
read but have no real meaning.
As a simulation of actual copy,
using words with normal letter
frequencies, can’t deceive eye or
brain. Copy can be produced to
complete any area, as the basic
copy is repeated.
Dummy settings which use other or even gibberish
to approximate text have the inherent advantage
they distract attention to themselves. Simultext is
effective in any typeface, whatever size and format
is required. Paragraphs may be long or short. Text
can be made to complete any area, as the copy is
simply repeated with different starting points. This
is dummy text. Intended to be read but have no
meaning. A simulation of actual copy, using words
with normal letter frequencies, it cannot deceive
eye or brain.
Settings which use other languages or even
gibberish to approximate text have the advantage
they distract attention to themselves. A simulation
of actual copy, using ordinary words with normal
letter frequencies, can’t deceive eye or brain.
Simultext is effective in any typeface, at what ever
size and format is required. Paragraphs may be
long or short. What you see is dummy text. It is
intended to be read but have no real meaning. As
a simulation of actual copy, using ordinary words
with normal letter frequencies, can’t deceive eye or
brain. Copy can be produced to complete any area,
as the basic copy is repeated with different starting
points. It is intended to be read but have no
meaning.
Presentation copy uses languages or gibberish to
approximate text have the disadvantage that they
distract attention to themselves. Text is effective in
any typeface, whatever size and format is required.
Paragraphs may be long or short. This is dummy
text. Intended to be read but have no meaning. A
simulation of actual copy, using words with normal
letter frequencies, cannot deceive eye or brain.
What you see here is dummy text.
Simultext is effective in any typeface, whatever
size and format required. Paragraphs may be long
or short. Text can be produced to complete any
area, as the copy is simply repeated with different
starting points. This is dummy text. It is intended
to be read but have no meaning. This is dummy
text. Intended to be read but have no meaning.
A simulation of actual copy, using ordinary words
with normal letter frequencies, it cannot deceive
the eye or brain. Dummy settings which use other
languages or even gibberish to approximate text
have the inherent disadvantage they distract
attention to themselves. Simultext is effective in
any typeface, at whatever size and format is
required. Paragraphs may be long or short. Text
can be produced to complete any area, as the copy
is simply repeated with different starting points.
This is dummy text. Intended to be read but have
no meaning. As a simulation of actual copy, using
words with normal letter frequencies, can’t deceive
eye or brain. Trial settings which use languages or
gibberish to approximate text have the advantage
they distract attention to themselves. A simulation
of actual copy, using ordinary words with normal
letter frequencies, it can’t deceive eye or brain.
Simultext is effective in any typeface, at whatever
size and format is required. Paragraphs may be
long or short. Text can be produced to complete
any area, as the basic copy is simply repeated with
different starting points. Intended to be read but
have no meaning. Paragraphs may be long or
short. This is dummy text.
Smaller headline
to vary visual
strength of story
The lowest level of
headline styles
Headline for a
small article
Paragraphs may be long or short. Text can be produced to complete any area, as the copy is simply repeated with
different starting points. This is dummy text. It is intended to be read but have no meaning.
It is intended to be read
but have no meaning.
A sample of actual copy
in a natural surround
Trial settings which
use languages or even
gibberish to simulate
text have an inherent
disadvantage as they
distract attention from
the eye and brain.
Paragraphs may be long or short. Text can be produced to complete any area,
as the copy is simply repeated with different starting points.
D
S
Trial settings which may use other
languages or even gibberish to
approximate text have an inherent
disadvantage, distracting the eye
Creating layouts 133
Establishing a visual dialogue between image
and text is an excellent way of creating
structure and shape in a spread, as seen on
these examples from Inside magazine. On the
Zaha Hadid feature (left) Jeffrey Docherty
used the shape of the architecture as the
layout’s determining factor. ‘I have a true
respect for architectural photography. I find
myself shying away from the placement of
type over an image. I prefer to show images
as if they were artworks, framed and
unhindered. There are exceptions in which
an image or a story can benefit from the
combination of the two. In these instances,
the type may provide structure or a dynamic
twist to the image. However, finding the right
spot for text is vital. The obvious spaces can
be boring, so finding a dynamic fit of text and
image can be challenging. Too often, I observe
design blindly giving in to current trends and
style. Design is all about finding the proper
balance. Learning to exercise restraint is
a design quality rarely considered.’
Design factors: shape through colour
Shape is often used to break up the monotony that
might be created by a page that is type-heavy. This
can be done with photographs, illustrations, decorative
type, white space and blocks of colour, tones or the text
itself. Tonal shapes are effective in separating,
organizing or pulling elements together, and,
psychologically, the text appears easier to read when it
is broken into smaller chunks. Colour can add meaning
to a layout by linking elements together through
coloured headings, borders and rules. The eye is very
sophisticated in its ability to make connections by the
use of these types of signposts.
Designers should not be afraid to experiment with
colour, both in terms of the palette and its use in a
publication. As Mario Garcia says, ‘Colour is such
a personal issue. We think that readers today like
vibrant colours and don’t necessarily equate them
to vulgar or downmarket. For example, for years the
handbag-maker Louis Vuitton made bags in brown;
now LV bags come in yellow, lime green and pink.’
Garcia’s use of bold colours in The Observer newspaper,
both as navigation tools and layout elements, has
Shapes in a layout have to fulfil two functions. First, all
the above shapes have to work together on the page
area; second, the contents within the shapes have to
work directly with the page layout. Shape organization
and coordination are key techniques for creating
a satisfactory layout, and, through variation in the
shapes, an essential factor in making features distinct
from each other. By organizing shapes in this way, the
designer can draw the viewer’s eye to a particular
point on a page – it might be the largest image, the
loudest colour or the oddest shape, and for this reason
designers use many tricks with their palette of shapes
to create interest.
Design factors: shape as a classical
proportion
Whether through custom or an innate sense of
balance, convention tends to favour certain classical
proportions. The most famous of these in editorial
design is the golden section, which is defined by the
ratio 1:1.618, or a height of 16.2 and a width of 10. This
shape is thought of as pleasing to the eye and can be
seen in many layouts.
134 Chapter 5
Creating layouts 135
made this Sunday title vibrant, broadening its appeal
to a younger audience. ‘In surveys, readers like colour
and colour coding, and I do too. It organizes things at
a visual and practical level,’ says Garcia. He suggests
using one palette for coding and another for the rest of
the colours in the publication.
Design factors: tension
Tension can be used to great effect in supporting
an editorial stance, and is created by the shape of
elements and their relationship to each other and to
the edges of the page. For example, elements can be
positioned to create a diagonal movement, leading the
eye to other shapes or to other areas of the page, while
bleeding an image or text off the page can create a
dynamic effect. Tension can also be created by the use
of colour. Images used in conjunction with each other
can repel or attract other elements and shapes by their
colour or tone.
Design factors: repetition and flow
On many titles a visual continuity or repetition forms
the central essence or identity of the publication. In
the case of repeated tones or shape, these are usually
built on a grid structure or alignment (for more on grids,
see Chapter 6) to maintain harmony throughout the
publication. Other factors that reinforce repetition and
flow are the positioning of typography, visuals and
graphic devices, such as sidebars and rules and their
respective colours and sizes. All these elements enable
the designer to construct a flow of layouts that is
consistent but allows for variation and fluidity, as
repetition on every page is rarely desirable in any
publication (even a phone book is varied with the use and
placement of display ads and different weights of fonts).
Design factors: experiments with scale
Scale is used to guide the viewer’s eyes through the
article, provide visual interest and dramatize or
emphasize the editorial message. One large word
in a headline can change or skew the emphasis and
meaning of the whole page, an effect that can also be
achieved with images. Scale is relative, it creates a
hierarchy, and there are many situations where this
would be entirely appropriate – for example, in an
Three different ways of using shape to create
pleasing spreads. For the ‘Year In Ideas’ issue
of The New York Times Magazine (this page),
which was designed to present the best ideas,
inventions and schemes in an encyclopaedic
fashion, then art director Janet Froelich was
inspired by nineteenth-century illustration
conventions, and ‘chose the photographer
Rodney Smith for his ability to build on those
visual ideas to create images that felt like
explanations without really being explanatory’.
The combination of imagery, white space and
indented text intelligently and wittily plays
on the encyclopaedic form, and creates
a harmonious and delightful spread. For a
piece on the new Boeing offices (opposite),
Criswell Lappin at Metropolis simply created
archetypal plane shapes from image and text
boxes to visualize clearly the content, but also
to create interest and reader recognition.
136 Chapter 5
article that contained both main and subsidiary
elements. But it has a visual purpose, too, making the
page lively and creating interesting blocks and shapes.
The content of the publication plays an important part
in sizing and use of visual material. For example, a
travel magazine will often use full-bleed pictures to
create a feeling of expansiveness and to help fulfil the
dream of being in that location. If the picture were
smaller, it wouldn’t evoke the same response or desires.
Design factors: contrast
There are occasions when it is appropriate to illustrate
an editorial piece with subtle contrasts in size of the
design elements, but this has to be done with caution
as it might make the design look tentative and weak.
It is more usual to illustrate designs with extreme
contrast – one large element balanced against several
small ones. Imagery and its sizing are always affected
by the relationship to other items on the page or its
boundaries. Imagine sizing an image of a tomato slice
so that it bleeds off all the edges. It would take on a
completely different look if the same image were used
in a sidebar the size of a thumbnail.
Esopus (above) uses a huge, predominantly
red image to create an uneasy, unsettling
spread that is gripping and filmic. The New
York Times Magazine image (top) illustrates
how two figures looking away from each other
and out of the spread rather than into the
spine create tension.
Creating layouts 137
Design factors: balance
In design terms balance is very important. It can be
achieved in a number of ways. Symmetry or an equal
number of items are literal examples of balance that
are not always successful if they create little or no
dynamism, tension or contrast. Experimentation with
balance can create a relationship that strengthens the
design. For example, balance might be achieved in an
asymmetrical way: one large image could be counterbalanced with several smaller ones or a larger, dark
picture. Balancing the elements of a layout is
individual to the designer, but key to doing so
successfully is ensuring that one side of a layout
is given equal weight with the other.
Design factors: depth
Spatially, working in print is limited to two dimensions,
though the illusion of depth can be created through
production techniques such as die-cutting, embossing
and the use of metallics and fifth colours. But it can also
be achieved through the arrangement of the elements on
the page. For example, skilful overlapping of the design
elements – shape, type and colour, in particular – can
make pages stand out or even ‘jump’ out at the reader.
I.D. magazine (top) uses rules, scale, colour
and typography to ensure that each
department and the pages within those
departments have their own identity and
character. For Metropolis (above), the colour
barcodes Criswell Lappin employed as an
iconic reference to the retail industry also
give the theme of shopping a distinct identity.
‘Since we were covering a variety of shopping
environments, we needed a symbol that could
represent them all. Each barcode is used to
signify the different categories of new retail
environments that we covered.’
138 Chapter 5
Implied motion
The projection and interpretation of movement on to
a two-dimensional page is a substantial challenge.
The effect is often created using the photographic
techniques of double exposure, multiple printing,
blurred motion or the use of multiple sequences of
stills in a line.
above and top: one image, two extreme
crops, show how very different responses,
balance and expression can be conveyed
through intelligent cropping. Contrasting
sizes, colours and scales can produce
a very graphic effect, almost becoming a
pattern, as is demonstrated on the page
of I.D. left, which turns a page on
wallpapers into a very graphic form
of wallpaper of its own.
Creating layouts 139
Harmony and discord
Depending upon a publication, design can be
conservative or cutting-edge. Creating a visual
balance or disturbance on a page is often left to the
individual instinct, training and experience of the
designer, who will make the elements of a layout either
complement or compete with each other in order to
create harmony or discord. In philosophical terms, the
clash between harmony and discord goes beyond mere
style and echoes the great divide between the two
streams of human history, thought and development –
the division between the classical, ordered organizer
and the rootless, restless romantic. The competition
and compromises between these extremes makes
for a creative tension that may never be resolved.
Achieving harmony
Harmony in editorial design can be achieved in
several ways. Design purists in the Bauhaus and
Swiss movements believed that a harmonious design
should feature:
• an even grey, with no superfluous ‘tricksy’
elements such as oversized drop caps to detract
from the classical feel of the layout;
• a calm, rigid typographical grid;
• an unfussy sans-serif typeface throughout;
• small body copy;
• leading that strengthens overall visual quality
and does not draw attention to itself, but is never
so wide that the white space conflicts with the copy;
• headlines set in the same typeface as or in a
bolder version of the body copy, at just a few point
sizes larger;
• margins wide enough to differentiate text boxes
clearly, but not so wide as to appear ostentatious
or wasteful;
• any extra material such as running heads or
folios following the overriding principles
already described;
• photographs anchored by placing them across the
column grid at one-, two-, three- or four-column
widths exactly, horizontally aligned with other
elements;
Two different forms of balance on a spread:
Flaunt (top) simply balances the two pages on
the horizontal diagonally; Dazed & Confused
(above) creates a filmic storyboard.
140 Chapter 5
change and clash frequently, or by a conflict of shapes
and balance, or by the way text is handled. Text can be
hand-produced, scribbled over, cut up and generally
distressed and damaged. Text boxes can be angled,
oddly shaped or overlaid. Drop caps can be half a page
high. Beautifully considered type may be deliberately
rendered almost illegible by being printed in yellow
over the yellow dress of a model in a photo feature.
Whatever mixes are applied, the effect should not be
one of anarchy but of excitement, interest and freedom
in order to communicate meaning in some way. Such
an approach can help give a publication an identity
that makes it stand out from the crowd.
Overthrowing harmony
Why do some designers choose to emphasize discord
in their layouts? The best reason is because the
content and brand are trying to do something different,
• white space used carefully to create breathing
space and balance.
On such a layout, the overall feel is one of regularity
and evenness, with no jarring elements. This is often
seen at its best in book and catalogue design. But as
anyone who reads editorial knows, magazines and
newspapers rarely follow such a style because they
need to highlight content in different ways and to
create hierarchies and visual excitement. They do this
by marrying harmony with some discord, creating a
unity of opposites.
Fusing harmony and discord
Contemporary readers schooled in a visual style
derived from television and the internet, as well as
from printed matter, respond well to elements of
discord in layouts, and many contemporary
publications now fuse aspects of both in the same
package. Harmony can be achieved by using common
elements – a running headline, a distinctive folio, the
application of Bauhaus principles to text – and mixing
them with the discord created by typefaces that
In Metropolis (above), Criswell Lappin
demonstrated a great way of enlivening
a feature on door handles by making their
appearance three-dimensional.
Creating layouts 141
Neville Brody’s designs for The Face (above)
look tame by comparison with Speak ’s
crash-and-burn design approach (below),
but both exhibited an anti-authoritarian
design style that was directly connected
to the morally and politically stagnant
milieu in which the designers were working.
In different ways each design replaces
harmony with a vital edginess, but remains
legible and accessible.
perhaps propound an alternative lifestyle, offer a
radical political agenda, pick up on the disaffection
of a cultural zeitgeist. … Generally, great designers on
such publications will use design intelligently and
inventively to illustrate a new or alternative approach.
Neville Brody’s The Face, David Carson’s RayGun and
Martin Venezky’s Speak are extreme examples
of such ventures that fuse style and content in a
non-traditional or unexpected kind of harmony – one
that unites the discord of their design with the dissent
of their message. Producing such fresh, radical design
month after month, however, can quickly drain the
resources of even the most committed and inventive
designer. Equally, the popular acclaim and commercial
success that accrues to a radically designed magazine
will blunt its cutting edge, so designers must always
remain aware of cultural shifts and their title’s role
within them if using discord in this way. It is worth
noting that, historically, many experimental and
avant-garde titles – including the three hugely lauded
titles mentioned above – were short-lived or lost their
edge in a market that often diluted their style, but
their impact and role as catalysts in print design
are undeniable.
In summary
Harmonious designs are likely to continue to be the
norm, being commercially safe and appealing to a
corporate mindset. Such design sits comfortably with
advertising material and ensures a working environment
in which standard templates can be handed on safely
to junior designers, and where instructions are clear
and readily understood. With these considerations and
more, designs of a harmonious type are pleasant,
acceptable and easy on the eye, and are unlikely to be
challenged seriously. Although kudos and prizes do
tend to accrue to innovative layout design, the role of
the avant-garde remains as it always has been – the
testing ground for new ideas, which may or may not be
picked up and incorporated in diluted form by
larger-circulation or mainstream publications.
Creating layouts 141
142 Chapter 5
Style – what is it,
how do you get it,
how do you deliver it?
Style is difficult to verbalize for many designers,
most of whom will say it’s instinctive, a gut feeling,
something that feels right. But although no rules
as such exist for acquiring style, styles and style
techniques can be taught and learned from
recognition, appreciation, training and exposure to
visual media. Knowledge of these things will help
the designer create the right style for any particular
publication, be it formal or informal, traditional
or modern, symmetrical or asymmetrical.
When you are attracted to a publication, whether in
print or digital format, what catches your eye first? Is
it the colours, the image or the cover lines? When you
pick up a printed publication, are you conscious of its
weight, how the paper feels? Do you notice anything
else – its binding, for example? Does it stand out in
some way? Can you say what makes it stand out? If it
features a complex die-cut cover or an embossed fifth
colour, what does that suggest to you? Style will set
the mood for a readership; from the style the reader
can make assumptions about content and tone. Once
familiar with the clues, a publication becomes like an
old friend – the reader knows what to expect, looks
forward to the next encounter, enjoys spending time
with that ‘friend’. The various style components that
make up a brand can be categorized into three main
areas: editorial style, design style and advertising style.
A large part of style consideration in editorial
design is cultural. For the redesign of Brazilian
newspaper Folha de S.Paulo, Mario Garcia
(with Paula Ripoll art-directing for Garcia
Media and Massimo Gentile for the paper)
looked at everything from bylines and
jumplines to inside pages with numerous ads
and supplements, in order to arrive at a paper
that would appeal to the typical Folha reader,
who considered it ‘user-friendly’. ‘The
philosophy of the redesign intensifies that
relationship with the readers, respecting their
different ways of reading a newspaper,’ says
Garcia. At the forefront was a lively colour
palette and navigation system, which, in Garcia’s
opinion, has resulted in ‘a very vibrant, newsy
and visually appealing, but not overwhelming,
newspaper ... even though this is Brazil’.
Creating layouts 143
Editorial style
The editorial style is the organization or flow of the pages,
the expression and tone of the writing and visuals, and
the number and variation of the types of articles. Most
publications have a framework. For example, both features
and interview spreads are longer than other editorial
pages and are designed to be read from the beginning
of the story to its end. Other pages, such as reviews,
news and listings pages, can be scanned or read in
short bursts in random order. Approaching the overall
organization of the content in such a manner helps to
fulfil the reader’s expectations of editorial consistency.
This style is generally set by the editor, and the
editorial designer must ensure that it is communicated
clearly to the reader through the design style.
Design style
The design style of a magazine is how all of the visual
elements are presented – a creative counterbalance
of typography and image. The design style of a
magazine is inextricably linked to its brand and can
be subdivided into the following areas: format (size
and shape), stock, structure and design elements.
Format: the format or size of the printed publication
generally has to take several factors into
consideration. When designing, the size, shape and
number of pages are dictated by the printing presses
and the paper sizes that go on them. The format
may need to take into consideration envelope sizes
when mailing to subscribers. By conforming to a
conventional range of sizes, magazines can be stacked
and displayed on regular newsagents’ shelves. There
are, of course, magazines that choose not to follow
these dictates: UK design magazines Creative Review
and M-real make a statement by publishing on a
square. Statements, soDA and Visionaire change
formats with each issue. These sorts of format
decisions are taken on aesthetic grounds but have to
be balanced with practical cost considerations. Format
decisions should also take functionality and content
into account. Printing a glossy, oversize publication to
create a feeling of luxury is fine (if predictable!) for a
first-class hotel chain, whereas something that needs
to be portable – such as a listings magazine – serves
its reader better when in a smaller format.
Stock: this, too, plays a part in style and functionality,
and the tactile appeal of printed publications should
not be underestimated. A publication printed on
newsprint will have a more environmentally friendly
feeling than a fashion magazine printed on glossy
paper, and is therefore better suited to a particular
brand message and readership. With magazines and
books, the feeling of quality is often transmitted
through the paper, weight, binding and finish. The
tactile quality of a beautifully produced publication
such as soDA (which has used metallics and coloured
plastic on its covers), Matador or Statements will
deliver a very different feel and message to that of
a gossip weekly such as Hello, or a news weekly such
as The Economist.
Structure: readers rarely read a periodical from cover
to cover, and the traditional pace and structure is built
on the assumption that the reader starts at the front
before dipping in and out of features and articles that
are of interest. However, there is no reason not to
experiment with this pace. Regular readers will quickly
become familiar with any structure; more important is
consistency and a good navigation system to aid new
or occasional readers. Criswell Lappin, former creative
director of Metropolis, says that the key is ‘varying the
design and length of stories in the feature well to alter
the pacing and keep people interested. Readers want
to turn the page to find out what is next.’
Design elements: many elements make up a design,
including visuals, typefaces, colours, panels and
graphic elements. Individual use of these and their
combinations establishes a style and helps to create
a mood. The typefaces you choose and how you use
them will ensure a feel that is timeless or trendy, and
there are thousands to choose from. For example, Lee
Corbin at Flaunt uses type in a number of ways, as
he explains:
‘There is a lot of information to organize every month
for each issue. We use typography to organize this
information so that it is easily navigable by the
reader. We also use typography to create visually
stimulating compositions, which helps to give our
magazine its identity. In each issue of Flaunt we use
type that is chosen because of its legibility and type
that is chosen because of its character. We look for
something that fits the project. Sometimes that’s
determined by the content of a single story, or an
entire issue. If we feel it’s appropriate to depart from
what we are doing typographically in the rest of
the issue for one story, then we do. In this case
we usually let the title of the story or the images
steer us in the right direction.’
Equally, the type of illustration or photograph selected
will immediately communicate something to the
reader, but, by scaling, cropping and positioning, it can
say something completely different. There are no rules
as to how you should use these design elements,
provided that, together, they express the identity of
the publication in general and the specific content
in particular. This is true for both newspapers and
magazines – as Mario Garcia says, ‘Both magazine and
newspaper designers have to work hard to make sure
that design is there to enhance content and to make it
accessible. There are different techniques in terms of
the look and feel, but the effort and logistics are the same.’
Advertising style
A publication often has to accept advertising and
advertorials in order to cover the cost of publishing.
Advertisers wield a lot of power and can be
instrumental in determining pagination and the
number of spreads available to editorial. As a condition
of purchase they may request particular spreads or
slots facing editorial pages and, because the first third
of a publication is so desirable, this results in fewer
spreads in this section being available to the
designers. Moreover, right-hand pages are more
expensive than left-hand ones because they are more
visible, so a title may be forced to sell more of these,
resulting in whole sections consisting predominantly
of left-hand pages only. In such a case, designers have
to make these layouts work hard. If they know what the
advertisement is, they can design the editorial page
to stand out against it, but they can also create an
aesthetically pleasing spread that works in harmony
144 Chapter 5
Creating layouts 145
with the ad as well as with the magazine as a whole.
Either way, through its shapes, contrast and tones,
designers will need to design the page as an element
in its own right, as well as a strong aspect of a feature
that may span a wide range of pages.
Jeremy Leslie uses stock to confound
expectations on the Virgin Atlantic first-class
fanzine Carlos (opposite), which manages to
feel like a high-quality, luxury product, in part
‘due to a matter of context’. ‘Twenty years
ago, in a world of magazines that were not all
full-colour, Carlos would have looked cheap
because it didn’t make use of what was then
an expensive commodity: full-colour. It would
have looked like many magazines – one- or
two-colour. Today, full-colour is the norm, and
anything that’s different to that stands out
and looks rare and “expensive”,’ explains
Leslie. Swiss magazine soDA (above) changes
format and stocks with each issue, a luxury
afforded by its once-a-year publication, which
renders familiarity with its format irrelevant.
Pariscope (above right), a weekly listings title
for Paris, is small enough to fit into a bag
or pocket and has remained consistently
profitable, with sales in the region of
103,000 each week.
profile of a designer and publisher
Simon Esterson, Eye magazine
Simon Esterson’s work is characterized as bold, striking and
journalistically proud. An unassuming character, and modest in
profile, he now operates out of London as Esterson Associates.
In 1993, he was part of the team, with Deyan Sudjic and Peter
Murray, which started Blueprint, a large-format architecture
magazine, known for its striking stencil masthead and thick page
rules. Most notably Esterson took over The Guardian newspaper
in 1995 from David Hillman and carried on the bold look that
characterized the paper’s modern attitude to print. Esterson
Associates have redesigned many newspapers including NZZ in
Zurich and Publico in Lisbon (with Mark Porter). He has also
worked in Italy as creative director of Italian architecture title
Domus, and as design consultant to Tate Publishing in London.
In 2008, Esterson jointly purchased Eye magazine with editor
John L. Walters and publisher Hannah Tyson. Together they
brought Eye back to life, returning it to its independent roots.
By using the web and social media, they have ensured that the
print version can thrive again due to its large fan base, some of
whom may never handle the actual print version.
Esterson comments that, ‘the website and blog are absolutely
vital for Eye’s survival. The website because it is an archive of
what we publish and if you Google something about graphic
design then Eye will come up on the first page. The blog is vital
as we only publish four times a year so we want to be in people’s
consciousness. For us we are not just making a print magazine.
John L. Walters, the editor, is using Twitter and Flickr too. It is not
a matter of making things on as many platforms as possible.
We already have a quarterly magazine in print. By definition
you are around for longer. You play the cards you are given.’
The printed version of Eye magazine has an
elegant design following a modest grid, which
allows the storytelling to come through. The
high-quality visuals add to the branding with
their authority and quiet admiration for the
field of design and its practitioners. The
varied design content means that the Eye
blog is a rich resource for practitioners and
students. In 2012 the blog had 488,621
followers, proving that Eye could reach many
more readers through Twitter than was
possible when it was a print-only product
with a limited print circulation.
Simon Esterson’s passion for design led him
to design the start-up architecture magazine
Blueprint (opposite) in 1983. The stencil
masthead became a trademark for this
provocative publication. The aesthetic was
bold and blocky, shown here by the simple
strong coverline justified to the width of the
page. Instead of a building on the cover, each
issue featured the human face of the
business – a portrait of an architect.
Creating layouts 147 profile of a designer and publisher
Simon Esterson, Eye magazine
148 Chapter 5
!
‘Don’t follow what other graphic designers are
doing. Find your inspiration in other places,
such as art, film, fashion or history.’
Eric Roinestad, art director, Flaunt
Look around you: look at your virtual and physical
desktops. However they appear to those unfamiliar
with them, you will probably know where and what
everything is, and this is central to design thinking;
all you have to do is make the underlying structure
apparent to others. The things you collect, the way in
which these things are displayed – all of this is design.
On Speak, designer Martin Venezky would begin by
reading the manuscript:
‘After that, I’d enumerate the relationships and
imagery that stuck with me. With that fresh in my
mind, I would begin sifting through piles of pictures,
books, type and so on, pulling out things that struck
me either directly or indirectly. I make a point of not
organizing my files, which keeps the element of
surprise always in play. While looking for one kind
of image, another one might slide into view that is
more exciting and unexpected. I often refer to the
“poetic gap” as the space between a direct illustration
of the text and its more eccentric interpretation.’
Get away from your desk: ideas arrive most easily to
a mind that is allowed to wander. Your subconscious
carries a myriad of images and concepts – the trick is
to unlock and make use of these. Play games, stare out
the window, go for a walk, and always carry a small
design notebook with you. Sometimes a quick sketch
dashed off in a local park can be translated into
a dynamic, powerful and unique layout, headline
treatment, logotype or page design.
How to convert
inspiration into a layout
The search for inspiration when trying to arrive at an
interesting, dynamic and relevant layout concept can
be difficult for any designer at any point. Sitting and
staring at a computer screen is quite possibly the least
creative action that a designer can perform, but what
can you do about it? Move away from your work
environment. Going to art galleries, street markets, the
movies, shops, funfairs or just sitting in a park and
looking at the skyline can often spark an inspirational
idea by allowing you to look at things from a totally
unexpected perspective. On the following page are
a number of creative exercises that can help, too.
Where else can a designer turn for inspiration?
All creatives struggle at some point with the search for
inspiration, and all find ways out of the impasse. These
can include:
Architecture: referencing architectural structures is a
rich source of visual inspiration. Many buildings are
based on a grid structure, which, when translated to a
layout, can give exciting and useful divisions of space.
The great American designer Saul Bass realized this
and incorporated the grid structures of buildings into
some of his most successful screen-credit sequences,
in which his elegant typography slid effortlessly
across the perspective lines of office-block windows.
Nature: the hugely magnified images of butterfly
wings, insect eyes, fish scales and the exoskeletons of
arthropods can offer excellent ideas for scale, shape,
contrast and structure. Crystal Palace in London, for
example, was based on the ribs of a lily leaf.
Industrial design: images gleaned from industrial
design can be a source of inspiring imagery. Being
man-made and designed, industrial objects can often
be easily translated into text and picture boxes. Sleek
ocean liners, streamlined trains, the understated,
elegant lines of Ken Grange’s Parker Pens and the work
of Jonathan Ive at Apple Computer are the result of a
skilfully crafted application of solid design principles
– the very same principles that you can apply to your
own layouts.
Creating layouts 149
‘The theme of this issue was the classic
“coming to New York” story. We spent a year
with each of the subjects, from the moment of
their arrival through their first year in the city.
The cover had to convey that sense of wonder,
anticipation and fear. We were inspired by one
of Cindy Sherman’s untitled film stills, the one
with the hitchhiker on the road, suitcase by
her side. We scouted locations and came up
with the great lawn in Central Park, where the
buildings in the skyline feel timeless, and the
stretch of lawn unfolds with both possibility
and anxiety. We shot it in black-and-white
because it felt like the spirit of the city, and
used yellow as a spot because it’s so very
New York. Black-and-white and yellow for
taxis – very simple.’ – Janet Froelich, former
art director, The New York Times Magazine.
150 Chapter 5
Brief Four
Double-page spreads
Aim
To create a series of double-page layout features for your
magazine.
The brief
Include the following elements on the layouts for your
magazine: headline, lead image and other images,
introductory text (about 30 words) plus some body text.
You can find placeholder text in InDesign or you can
generate your own text by typing in one paragraph with
normal-length words and then stepping and repeating
the paragraph.
• Draw your own grid following the example given
earlier on pages 110-11. Use InDesign if you can,
otherwise use a similar DTP program.
• Create the content by writing the headline yourself
and the introductory copy. Include a byline. Also
write the picture captions and include any small
text that states the origin of your images (credit
line). For example, if you created the photographs
then give yourself a picture credit. If you are
showcasing a friend’s work then identify him or her
by using a caption. If you are using images from the
internet then check you are using a free source.
Even in dummy layouts it is important not to take
credit for anyone else’s work. In terms of fonts, use
your body text fonts from Brief Three.
• Save your first layout attempt and then try another
version, working until the pages have a sense of
balance and drama. Use the scale of the different
elements to create a dynamic spread design. Print
out your layouts so that you can see the actual size
of the elements. Stick the pages together on the
back with tape and trim them so that you can see
how the layout works within the actual page size.
• When you have done this a couple of times and got
it right, print out the layouts in colour and trim
them for your portfolio.
Joseph Marshall created the images for this
college magazine project (opposite) as part
of a pitch. The vertical emphasis of the
columns is offset by the horizontal axis
– a common visual device for balancing
elements of a layout.
Marshall stripped back his typographic
layouts to show his custom-drawn grid, which
displays a combination of a four-column grid
and a text box for the page (opposite). This is
a tabloid size; larger than A4 and smaller than
A3. Marshall wanted to create white space so
that he could then surprise the reader with
a complete contrast.
Creating layouts 151
Joseph Marshall created the images for this
college magazine project (opposite) as part
of a pitch. The vertical emphasis of the
columns is offset by the horizontal axis
– a common visual device for balancing
elements of a layout.
Marshall stripped back his typographic
layouts to show his custom-drawn grid, which
displays a combination of a four-column grid
and a text box for the page (opposite). This is
a tabloid size; larger than A4 and smaller than
A3. Marshall wanted to create white space so
that he could then surprise the reader with
a complete contrast.
This project (above) has a simple threecolumn grid. The tabloid size gives the
designers plenty of white space to play with.
This is a simple way to start and is in contrast
to Marshall’s complex template. The student
team of Stefan Abrahams, Jasmine Jones,
Rebecca Duff-Smith and Hudson Shively
agreed the grid at the start, so as to
complement the digital version (right),
which was also planned using a simple grid.
Choose a grid that reflects the ethos of your
magazine content.
152
6
153
Chapter 6 : Essential design skills
As we have seen, in order to create an effective
and successful publication, designers need a
broad range of practical technical and conceptual
design skills, as well as knowledge of the field.
The preceding chapters have dealt with many
of these individual skills, such as understanding
the component parts of a publication and
everyone’s role within it. In this chapter, we
continue our focus on the design skills and
knowledge required not only to be an editorial
designer but an art director too, specifically:
• the ability to master objective visualization;
• skilful page preparation;
• an understanding of and skill in working
with typography;
• an ability to keep up with changing production
skills and to keep learning new software;
• the ability to create consistency
without monotony;
• project-managing time and cost.
154 Chapter 6
! Jeremy Leslie’s guide to the editorial
designer’s must-have attributes
• The ability to engage with, understand
and make sense of the content you’re
working with, however obscure or
distant from your own interests.
• Strong visualization skills allied with
the ability to communicate your ideas
to colleagues.
• A developed sense of what’s possible
with illustration and photography.
• An understanding of the market context
and competitor magazines.
• Being able to spot a good idea
regardless of whose it is (and give
credit for it).
• Able to balance your desire to be
creative with the reality of deadlines.
• An enjoyment of the process – lack of
enjoyment will show in the pages.
• Utter self belief but also the ability to
choose the right battle.
Mastering objective
visualization
This is a complex skill that involves the ability to
select, reject, emphasize, arrange and combine essential
elements in order not only to design a layout but also
to develop a vision for a whole publication that is
completely attuned to its subject matter or raison d’être
and the readership. The designer must be able to:
• understand and make a good and accurate
interpretation of editorial material – do this by
reading the copy and, where appropriate, talking
to the features editor, writer and/or photographer;
• synchronize thinking with an editor to produce
the layouts he or she has in mind – meetings and
mock-ups are the keys to achieving clear
communication here;
• clearly identify the requirements and purpose
of a particular publication, or know the brand, the
reader and the relationship between the two;
• produce more than one version of a layout
(if, for example, the pagination alters). Always
develop more than one idea – this has the dual
purpose of testing the strength of your original
idea against other solutions, and offering
back-ups for discussion and development
if the first idea is unacceptable;
• stay inspired and, as far as possible, free from
constraints – once they have been learnt, all the
elements and structures of editorial design can be
examined, questioned, played with, revisited and
broken. Don’t get so stuck in one route and
direction that you can’t approach a graphic
solution laterally;
• visualize and produce layouts from material that
may have been created or selected before the
start of a layout. Always have a sketchbook on
you. Work out ideas and rough layouts on paper;
create sketches, diagrams and other material
before going near the computer.
The Guardian | Xxxxxday Month XX 2005 1
National
Essential design skills 155
Page preparation
and grids
Building successful foundations for layout construction
consists of choosing the format and stock, creating
appropriate grids, knowing how to use design to signal
priorities, and working with a flatplan to ensure that
sections and pagination keep the flow and pace of the
publication while working through constant changes.
Grids
Rather like blueprints in architecture, grids are
invisible sets of guidelines, or systems of order, which
help the designer determine the placement and use of
text, images and other design elements, such as white
space, margins and folios, helping to maintain continuity
while still allowing for variety in a layout. Good grid
systems anchor, but do not necessarily constrain
Chunky blocks of text in formal grid
structures can look very effective ‘floated’
in space, as seen here in the redesigned
Guardian newspaper.
156 Chapter 6
TIP Roger Black’s ten rules of design
(But remember, rules, once learnt, are there to
be broken!)
1 Put content on every page. Design shouldn’t be
mere decoration; it must convey information. Or
entertainment. Content should come to the
surface on every level. Corollary: nobody reads
anything – at least not everything. The only
person who will read every word of what you’ve
written is your mother. All other people skim and
surf. So make sure there’s content on every page.
2, 3, 4 The first colour is white. The second colour is
black. The third colour is red. Calligraphers and
early printers grasped this over 500 years ago,
and experience has proved them exactly right.
White for background, black for text, red for
accent and excitement. These three colours are
the best. Be very careful with all other colours.
5 Don’t be blown around by fashion like a hot-dog
wrapper in the wind.
6 Never set a lot of text type in all caps. After a
while, it’s just too hard to read.
7 A cover should be a poster. A single image of a
human will sell more copies than multiple images
or all type. Always has, always will. Think about why.
8 Use only one or two typefaces. Italian design is
the model: a strong sense of a few things that
work together. Avoid a free-for-all of multiple
fonts/colours.
9 Make everything as big as possible. Type looks
great in big font sizes. A bad picture always looks
better bigger.
10 Get lumpy! The trouble with most design is it has
no surprise. If you want normal people to pay
attention, you have to change pace in your
presentation. Monotonous rhythms of picture,
headline, picture, text, ad, headline, picture, ad,
etc., is like a pudding without raisins – a stew
without lumps.
Roger Black has designed Rolling Stone, The New York Times Magazine, Newsweek,
McCall’s, Reader’s Digest, Esquire and National Enquirer, among others.
items on a page. Where a publication has a particularly
fluid design, the grid acts as an anchor or point of
reference, a departure point that roots the whole
structure. Sizes and shapes of type, images and areas
of white space can be pre-planned, greatly facilitating
the process of creating a layout. They can vary from
rigid three-column grids to more complex ones of nine
or 12 units that enable greater flexibility and almost
endless permutations. In either case, the grid remains
defined, but having the confidence and knowledge to
manipulate and personalize the layout around it is
what will make it into something special.
It is useful to be aware of grid conventions that
underpin different forms of publishing, if only in order
to deviate from them if desired. A weekly or daily, for
example, usually has a formal grid structure because
its production process has to be simple and fast.
Quarterlies, by contrast, have the luxury of time,
enabling experimentation and fluidity in the grid
and columns system. In Fernando Gutiérrez’s annual
Matador, each issue is designed using a strict but
different grid and one typeface. Some publications
don’t bother with a grid at all, choosing to use just the
limits of the page as a grid. In this way they can build
up the structure of a layout around an image or
headline. Handled well, the result can be a fluid,
flexible page and publication, but caution should be
used with such an approach – it must be right for the
publication, its brand attributes and its readership.
Legibility issues play a part in the construction of the
grid, so Fassett’s theorem of legible line length should
always be considered. This states that line lengths
containing 45 to 65 characters are legible (characters
include letters, numerals, punctuation and spaces).
Line lengths exceeding these limits challenge legibility.
This does not mean that 40 characters or 75 characters
should never be used, but anything that challenges
established legibility theory should be examined closely
– including a designer’s reasons for doing so. If clear,
easy reading is important, grids must take this into
account. In newspapers, five columns are viewed as the
optimum number for tabloid or Berliner formats, and
a story deeper than 7.5 centimetres (3 inches) under a
multi-column headline is traditionally broken up with
subheads and/or images. There are stylistic conventions,
too, that might be considered: in a magazine feature,
Essential design skills 157
Many periodicals or serial publications, which
are published just once or twice a year, don’t
bother with a grid system, relying instead on
their conceptual approach to content and
treatment to create continuity from issue to
issue. Annual publication soDA (left) takes
this approach. The theme dictates the format,
design and underlying grid (if any) of each
issue. Metropolis (left below) uses a two-,
three- and four-column grid throughout the
magazine. ‘On editorial pages the text never
comes above a certain point on the page,
leaving plenty of white space at the top. The
Metropolis logo moves cinematically back and
forth across the top of the page as you
progress through the magazine. This is a
convention that still exists from Paula Scher’s
redesign in 1999. Features are printed on an
uncoated sheet, which lets readers know –
visually and tactilely – that they are in a
specific section of the magazine. This allows
us to be more experimental in the layout and
structure of this section, because it only
contains editorial content. Each feature is
designed individually, based on the content of
the story and the quality and quantity of art
that supports it. Most stories are loosely
based on the same two- and three-column
grids that appear in the rest of the magazine,
but we are not afraid of dropping the grid
altogether if another approach works better
for a particular piece.’ – Criswell Lappin,
former creative director, Metropolis.
158 Chapter 6
for reasons of legibility, the grid traditionally has three
columns, but literary magazines often use two wide
columns instead to form a classical symmetry and
deliver long lengths or squares of text that shout ‘we’re
intellectual’; many newspaper supplements take this
as their basic structure but lighten the page using
white space and other design elements.
On Inside magazine (above) the
underlying grid is restrained, but
its simplicity doesn’t hamper
design and layouts of other
department pages. ‘A simple grid
can still carry many possible
combinations. You have to look
at the bigger picture. Readers
like to feel as if they have
an understanding, almost
a relationship, with the magazine.
The consistency of the grid
nurtures this need. If it’s kept
consistent, the avid reader of a
magazine can pick up any issue
and feel comfortable navigating
through “new” material,’
says former art director
Jeffrey Docherty.
Essential design skills 159
In a magazine feature, for reasons of legibility,
the grid traditionally has three columns, but
literary magazines often use two wide
columns instead to form a classical symmetry
and deliver big, dense blocks of text. The New
York Times Magazine pages shown here take
this further, boldly using one wide column
that defies Fassett’s theory of legibility
(see p.156), while remaining accessible
and with a formal beauty provided by their
classical structure.
160 Chapter 6
Digital grids
The grid is also an important part of the editorial
designer’s toolkit for digital formats. At The Times
newspaper, the column structure of the printed version
is used to give an ordered, legible system for designers
and subeditors to work with, using the classic rules on
the hierarchy of text to lead the reader in. When
applying this philosophy to The Times for mobile
media, the same sensibility is used, but the grid is
smaller for the screen. Some users think there is no
need for traditional columns, but design director Jon
Hill explains the grid structure for the iPad as follows:
‘Navigation is linear, meaning it literally has a front
cover, so you can swipe through a bunch of pages
from page one onwards. We found we were quite
gentle about how we introduced the tablet to the
reader, and we kept the familiar column-based style
of the newspaper. We did get lots of stick for that.
Ultimately, it felt like the columns were a visual
aid for readers of the website and they were
comfortable with it. The columns made it easier to
program and easier to design too. Going from print
to digital format was a big leap for our readers, but
they are iPad literate and the columns of text were
a reassuring feature for them.’
In contrast, Mark Porter has a different attitude to
digital grids. He redesigned the grid for The Guardian
when it moved to the Berliner format in 2005, and
consulted on the iPad version in 2010. Porter has
extended the visual identity of The Guardian
newspaper, adapting the design to fit The Guardian
Online (a digital news website) and The Guardian app
by making design decisions that stem from the design
philosophy originated during the massive typographic
overhaul in 2005. As he explains, ‘It is about adapting
what you do to the medium. So the kind of grid on a
newspaper is not the kind of grid on a web or app.
Basically you can have an approach and a philosophy
about how to use them and apply that to the different
medium. You can’t just take the grids over.’
Essential design skills 161
The Times decided to retain the use of
a grid structure for their iPad version
to give the traditional newspaper
reader a familiar reading experience in
terms of navigating through the page.
The mobile version has the same
attitude to clarity and order that the
brand has had for many years. ‘It is
all about typographic structure. Once
we have our fonts established, the
structure of columns and page design
is just as important on the tablet
versions as it is in the print version.
We are looking for a polished
typographic product.’ – Jon Hill,
design director, The Times.
162 Chapter 6
Templates
Once a grid has been established, page templates
should be made up for the different sections of the
magazine – news pages, feature pages, back sections
and so on. These templates will be based on the
master grid but each should be simplified to deal with
the specific demands of the section. All the major
elements of the design – boxes for display fonts in
alternative sizes, columns, picture boxes, caption
boxes and so on – should be included (for more on
templates, including an example, see p.110).
At The Guardian, the underlying grid on the
newspaper is a 20-column grid that divides
into 5. The grid for the website is a 12-column
grid that breaks into 3 or 4. On the iPad the
grid is 6 squares by 8 squares. The hierarchy
of typography signals the importance of the
story. Crisp headlines underpin the design
and bring a spark through the juxtaposition
of words and images. Every opportunity for
graphic impact is used so that the website is
a rich experience of simple navigational tools
that help the reader get straight down to the
exact content he or she is looking for.
Like many news sites, The Guardian iPad
edition uses horizontal section heading bars
and vertical lists of subjects to enable the
reader to get to content quickly in the way
he or she would use a referencing system.
Pagination
The running order of pages has to be planned to
ensure everything fits into an issue. Such planning is
important in design terms because the flow created by
a publication’s pagination will determine the pace and
balance, and ensure that spreads of similar contents
are spaced apart. Determining pagination is usually a
collaboration between the editor, art editor, production
editor and advertising-sales head. The only real
restrictions are those of the print process – the way
sections need to be made up for the presses – and the
needs of advertising. Special attention should be paid
Essential design skills 163
to the details: a feature ending on a left-hand page with
a new feature facing it is rarely desirable, and neither
is a feature that is interrupted by four consecutive
pages of advertising, or by an unexpected advertising
insert. The best way to test the pacing and flow of your
publication is to produce miniature spreads, ‘minis’,
that can be pinned up in the studio. These can easily
be shifted around as the flatplan changes, enabling
you to monitor constantly the effects the inevitable
changes are having.
Signalling
In printed periodicals an integral part of pagination
and page preparation is the ability to signal the
importance, priority and style of articles to the reader.
All the design elements act as signals, from an article’s
position in the publication and on the page to the
width of columns (wider columns usually indicate
features or the opinion and editorial – op-ed – section
of a newspaper), type size, length and position of
a headline, length of text, style of text setting, use
and size of images and use of colour. A newspaper
illustrates this very clearly. On the front page the lead
story will be near the top of the page (so that it’s visible
to the reader at the news-stand) and have the biggest
headline and most space allocated to it, with less
important stories radiating from it. The op-ed pages
distinguish themselves from news pages by using
a lot more negative space, picture bylines, pull quotes,
wider columns and different type weights and sizes.
But this signalling is also visible in magazines. In the
news and reviews pages, signalling is similar to that of
a newspaper, but in the feature well it may be more
subtly employed. If the headline is very prominent and
the article spans eight pages in wide columns with
full-bleed, commissioned photographs, it’s clear that
the publication wants you to read it. A designer should
adopt a coherent and consistent use of such signals
appropriate to his or her publication. The day after the 7 July 2005 London
bombings, national tabloid the Daily Mirror
portrayed the capital as bloody but unbowed.
Newspapers will usually treat such huge
events pictorially.
164 Chapter 6
Digital page design
Designing for digital publications employs similar
typographic and layout principles as for print.
However, designers must understand that it is not just
the output which varies, but what the reader wants
from each different digital publication. Reading from
an app on a touch screen is different to the experience
of reading on a website; the editorial team must
understand who their reader is, what his or her
interests are, why, how and where he or she is
engaging with the media. It is then that the skill of the
art director and the editorial team comes into play; the
team must be able to respond with the right content
and design for their reader.
Navigation
The same principles of clarity in planning used in
printed publications also apply to digital ones, but are
extended to include navigation design skills for tablet
and mobile devices. Online magazines designed to be
read on an iPad or mobile device have become highly
interactive; the way the user navigates the screen has
to be carefully planned to make him or her want to
interact and delve deeper into the publication.
Navigation headings are designed to take the reader
quickly to what he or she wants to read about, and
on-screen tags and tabs are designed to help him or
In this shot taken from a video (middle) Jack
Schulze explains the thinking behind the new
geography of digital editorial (search for
Mag+Berg Bonnier video). Articles are
designed as vertical columns comprising text,
image and usual page furniture, which can be
scrolled up and down, but are then assembled
on a ‘clothes line’ that can be swiped
horizontally.
Here the layouts are being swiped left to right,
and pages moved sideways. The reader can
go up and down to read, and left to right to
see different articles. There is still a grid and
typographic style sheets, but this style of
navigation puts the viewer in control of how
they access articles.
A sketch from The Guardian’s iPad
development, showing blocks that indicate
a modular grid, some with images, some
with text. This was later developed into a slick
grid with roll–over features. Designers still
use felt-tip pens at all stages of design.
Essential design skills 165
The sketch on the flipchart (left) shows the
thinking behind the development of Mag+
software, developed by Berg London with
Bonnier. This chart shows the ‘key gestures’
the team considered at the early stages of
building the software. A gestural language
develops (top), like ‘drag and flick’ (a swipe
action) and ‘drag to dog-ear’ (the little turneddown corner at the top of the page that invites
the reader to move on to the next page).
The sketches on the wall (above) show the
pages planned out both as horizontal layouts
and overlaid with their corresponding portrait
layouts. Designers must think in terms of both
formats for mobile use and put aside the
double-page-spread thinking of print.
166 Chapter 6
her quickly find out more information on a story or
subject. The language and copy has to be easily
digestible and attention grabbing in order to engage
and intrigue the reader.
A cell system is used for a double navigational
purpose. Firstly, it signifies the importance of a story,
so a major story will get more cells than a minor story.
Second it acts as a touch entry point so that the reader
can dive into the content. As Mark Porter explains,
‘With the lead picture [on a page], we see that cell
navigation allows the user to plunge right in and open
up any story they want. Whereas in print a major story
would have a large headline, the major story occupies
two or three cells. The user slides down or right to left.’
Websites
Magazine websites can use the familiar navigation
language of the web – menu bars and drop-down tab
menus. The designer then directs the reader to
sections and pages using a hierarchy of text and
section names. The major difference is that this
form of presentation doesn’t encourage the longer
reads expected of a printed magazine. Designing a
magazine for a website also requires different design
considerations to those of designing for a touch-screen
tablet. Websites offer the designer opportunities to
showcase a brand and design incentives that
encourage the reader to make purchases.
Tablets
For the tablet version of magazines, however, the
navigation options become more exciting because of
the use of a touch screen. The designer must be aware,
however, that the reader will still want to access the
content quickly and without any complicated hurdles
being put in the way. Not all tablets devices are as fast
as others and viewers may quickly lose patience. As
Mark Porter explains, ‘That’s why there are some
successful newspaper websites where people know
what they are looking for and they can drill down to, for
example, the sports results. You go in and there is a list
of new headlines since you last viewed the website. It is
a fairly straightforward transaction. It is very hard to find
a satisfying magazine website because the way that
you want to interact with a magazine is very different.’
In this lively and colourful still-life set-up,
messy and lengthy captions are a thing of
the past. The photograph stays intact and
captions are latent content, only revealed
when the reader requires them and swipes
over one of the featured watches. In the
feature on Marilyn’s shoes, hovering over
a different shoe reveals a different story.
Essential design skills 167
Apps
Their very nature means newspaper apps need to
continually be updated, so they tend to be more
templated and website-like than magazine apps,
which have a broader selection of options to work from.
These range from a simple PDF page-turner taken
from the printed layouts (perhaps with embedded web
and social media links) to a bespoke designed and
coded app with full interactivity.
A middle route between these two extremes is
provided by the many app-creation tools, in the form
of software plug ins, that allow the designer to adapt
their print designs for tablets. Theoretically a simple
step, such a move from print to app brings many
complications. The various sizes and formats of the
different tablet screens mean that distinct apps need
to be built for each tablet, and as all tablet screens
are smaller than most print magazine pages, the
entire magazine has to be repurposed page by
page. Even with the high resolution of recent screens,
text generally needs to be larger than in print to
maintain legibility.
For reasons of cost and resource, smaller publishers
have relied on the PDF option to start with, but others
have seized the opportunity to create something more
appropriate to their readership. Sarah Douglas from
Wallpaper* magazine comments on planning a design
for her magazine’s app:
‘It is just about re-appropriating your thoughts. How
things work differently how they are read differently.
You have to think differently. You have to think
through the reader’s eyes. Think how people use it.
You can do some crossover things on an iPad. With
design for a tablet you can get a sense of scale, while
on a smartphone you are much more limited by the
screen width. Theoretically on a website you have
quite a lot of space, but once you bear in mind the
way the website is made and also the screen you,
the user, are looking at, then it is not as much space
as it looks. Most of the navigation is done by lists
and menus, which is fine if you are looking at lists
or reading a book, but it doesn’t sit very happily in
an editorial environment.’
On a tablet, enhanced features can appear by using different touch
functions. Slight pressure from a finger brings up a submenu, seen
here as radiating icons that link to other dynamic media. You can send
an image or other content from the magazine straight to social media.
In the example here, if you press and hold the screen you can send
a recipe by email, or share it on Twitter or Facebook.
All you need to know to keep
the stuff in your refrigerator,
freezer, and pantry in peak condition.
(Plus, learn when those leftovers
really should be tossed.)
THE ULTIMATE
FOOD-STORAGE
GUIDE
WRITTEN BY ELIZABETH PASSARELLA ADDITIONAL REPORTING BY RACHEL SHELASKY
PHOTOGRAPHS BY JAMIE CHUNG PROP STYLING BY KAITLYN DUROSS FOOD STYLING BY KAREN EVANS
All you need to know to keep
the stuff in your refrigerator,
freezer, and pantry in peak condition.
(Plus, learn when those leftovers
really should be tossed.)
THE ULTIMATE
FOOD-STORAGE
GUIDE
WRITTEN BY ELIZABETH PASSARELLA ADDITIONAL REPORTING BY RACHEL SHELASKY
PHOTOGRAPHS BY JAMIE CHUNG PROP STYLING BY KAITLYN DUROSS FOOD STYLING BY KAREN EVANS
All you need to know to keep
the stuff in your refrigerator,
freezer, and pantry in peak condition.
(Plus, learn when those leftovers
really should be tossed.)
THE ULTIMATE
FOOD-STORAGE
GUIDE
WRITTEN BY ELIZABETH PASSARELLA ADDITIONAL REPORTING BY RACHEL SHELASKY
PHOTOGRAPHS BY JAMIE CHUNG PROP STYLING BY KAITLYN DUROSS FOOD STYLING BY KAREN EVANS
168 Chapter 6
TIP Jeremy Leslie’s tips for digital design
1 The basic basic principle is to understand
what you are trying to say and who you are
saying it to, and then figure out how you are
going to say it.
2 People are connected by shared ideas and
common interests. The communal desire to
be part of something bigger will always be
there, and is easier than ever to achieve
today, thanks to digital technology.
3 Don’t use a channel for the sake of using it.
Ask yourself which ones add to your story,
which ones might diminish it.
4 Interactive elements can be exciting to
create and use, but don’t let them become a
distraction. Keep them useful and relevant.
5 From an editorial standpoint there is not a
huge difference between working for print
and digital – unless you make it that way.
6 Remember that magazines create a world
of their own. Readers do still get absolutely
lost in those worlds.
The flatplan
The single most important tool in producing any
publication is the flatplan. This ingenious exploded
diagram of a publication, similar to a film storyboard,
enables everyone involved in its production to see pages,
their running order,their content, print sections, editorialto-advertising ratio and pagination at a single glance.
Usually the responsibility of the production editor or
studio manager, flatplans are updated constantly to
reflect inevitable changes that will occur, from a feature
that needs to be extended, shrunk or dropped, to a specific
ad that needs to go opposite a particular editorial page.
Such changes will necessitate a rearrangement of a
section so that balance and pacing are still maintained
throughout. Each time such an alteration or amendment
occurs, a new flatplan will be printed out and distributed
to keep everyone up to date. For the designer, it means
they can quickly see how many pages they have for a
particular feature and where in the run of pages that
feature falls. Various digital flatplan systems exist that
allow immediate updates to be shared.
In the iPad edition of The Times magazine
Eureka, Jon Hill uses the masthead for impact,
and keeps the design relatively simple. Once
past the cover, the reader can tap on the
hexagons to go to the stories, thus keeping
the sciency feel of the magazine.
A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
A 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
C 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
C 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80
B 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96
Essential design skills 169
A flatplan showing pagination for a 96-page
publication using three sheets of paper (A, B
and C) to be printed on both sides. Each sheet
prints 32 pages, 16 on each side. If your
publication is not full-colour throughout, the
flatplan should clearly distinguish between
the colour and black-and-white sections by
using a tint on the colour pages or by creating
a bold keyline around them. The yellow tinted
pages indicate full-colour, the red pages
indicate two-colour and the grey tint indicates
a one-colour print such as black. The colour
sections can be placed anywhere in an
edition, as long as the colour distribution
matches up on each sheet. Most printers print
and bind in multiples of 16 pages, although 20
or 24 are also widely used. Usually the printer
will require all the pages within one sheet
section first – i.e., all the pages falling on
sheet A need to be sent to print a day or two
before those on section B and so on.
A working flatplan shows where the various
elements of a publication’s content are to
appear. Page one is conventionally the front
cover. A diagonal strike through a page
indicates that it is reserved for advertising,
but ‘AD’ written clearly on the page works just
as well, particularly if you want to use strikes
as a production schedule device – one strike
to show that the page has been designed,
another to show it’s been proofed and so on.
A good naming or numerical convention for
new versions of the flatplan is important:
mark the date, time and version number
clearly on a prominent part of the sheet. This
witty contents page for M-real gives a good
idea of how a flatplan might look once the
publication is ready to go to press.
170 Chapter 6
Stock selection
The selection of a suitable paper stock (or stocks) is
more important than ever, as print seeks to make the
most of its attributes in the face of digital competition.
Paper choice is vital to the feel, tone, style and look of a
publication, because it affects both expression of the
publication and reproduction of its contents. There are
two traditional routes for stock selection – via the
printer or a paper merchant – but the best is a
combination of the two. A printer will be able to give
you good initial guidance and work closely with you to
find the best stock for your specific production needs.
For example, if you know you want a thin, coated gloss
stock with no show-through and high brightness, the
printer will usually be able to suggest good examples.
Paper merchants are happy to send printed and blank
sample books and sheets to designers and will also
make up a sample in your chosen format (usually via
the printer), giving you a good idea of the weight and
feel of the publication. But if you require unusual print
or production techniques, such as an embossed fifth
metallic colour or die-cuts, speak to your printer – this
is where his or her knowledge and expertise come
into play. And look at existing print material that may
match your needs; you will often find that publications
list the stock or printer’s name, making your search
that much easier.
Paper considerations
Stock selection is usually a question of balancing your
needs. For example, if your main criterion is faithful
colour reproduction, then the best sheet to use is a
bright, blue-white, thick-coated sheet with an ultrasmooth finish. This reflects the most light at the best
angle without adding a tone or hue of its own. But other
issues may need to be considered: what if there is a lot
of text? Or weight is an issue? This guide should help.
Coated or uncoated? Coated papers reflect light better
and absorb less ink, giving images more detail; the
higher the number of coats, the sharper the images.
Uncoated papers offer a softness in print contrast that
Essential design skills 171
Paper manufacturers and suppliers go to
great lengths to persuade designers to use
their paper, producing numerous swatch
books and luxurious samples containing
different weights and colours of a particular
stock (above). Remember that these can look
very different with print on them, so ask to
see a job that’s been printed on the stock
you are interested in, and ask for a dummy
to be made to the size and number of pages
in your publication.
can work well with fine art or illustration and make
text easier to read.
Gloss or matt? A high-gloss stock is usually used
on a high-quality publication with a large number
of images, but many matt stocks offer excellent
reproduction and can make a publication stand out
from its competitors.
Thick or thin? We all associate thick papers with art
and ‘highbrow’ books, but thin papers can give the
same sense of opulence and richness, depending on
other qualities such as density, brightness and coating.
Dense or opaque? The opacity of stock will affect its
show-through, so bear this in mind when specifying
your stock, and test it by laying it over a black-andwhite striped design. If using an opaque stock, you will
need to consider the page carefully to minimize print
show-through. An asymmetric grid, for example, will
show through more than a symmetrical one.
Heavy or light? We associate weight in paper with
luxury, but luxury costs – not just the paper itself, but
As an independent publication or microzine,
soDA (far left) survives by selling ads, through
subscriptions and, as in this case, with the
support of printers or paper companies, who
are often keen to promote particular
techniques and stocks. For this issue about
surface, the cover is made of holographic
card, while inside pages use metallic inks and
numerous coated and uncoated stocks in
different colours. Flaunt covers are often
die-cut and embossed – this May 2001 cover
(left) mimics a schoolbook and has raised
strips of Sellotape and REM and Missy Elliott
logos to create a real three-dimensional
depth. Such covers are produced because,
‘When you’re called Flaunt, you sort of have
to flaunt yourself and be a little showy. We
have to flaunt the special inks, tricks and
embossing. It’s important to sell the word
and the image of flaunting by going the extra
distance. The embossing also throws in
another sensitivity that most magazines don’t
use – the tactile element to touching the front
cover. People love to touch the cover,’ says
Jim Turner, creative director.
172 Chapter 6
in postage and portability. Do you want to discourage
potential purchasers from carrying your publication
around with them because it’s the weight of a telephone
book? If the image you are trying to project is that of a
faithful companion, should the publication be portable?
High or low brightness? The brighter the paper,
the more blue light it reflects, which works well for
reproducing images. But such brightness can create
glare that might interfere with readability, and because
of the amount of bleaching needed to achieve high
brightness, qualities such as durability and printability
may be affected.
Recycled or virgin stock? Readers of a magazine
about environmental issues would expect it to be
printed on stock that was environmentally friendly,
which could be anything from wholly recycled
unbleached stocks to partially recycled stocks. Most
paper merchants now offer these, but you can also find
out what the different terms mean by getting advice
from environmental agencies.
Format
Format is defined as the shape and size of a page. The
most common format, A4, is dictated by the width of
paper rolls and the size of the drum on the offset web
presses commonly used to produce mass-circulation
magazines and books. Because American and
European drum circumferences differ, there are slight
variations, notably a shorter standard format in the
US. Consumer magazines also have to conform to
requirements such as shelf size in shops, and the
ability to fit through a standard letter box, as well as
taking advantage of various postage rates related to
size. While short-run publications have the luxury of
printing on a bespoke format, it is still worth bearing
in mind the reader’s needs – a large-format magazine
or odd shape can be a nuisance if filing for future
reference is important.
As newspapers continue to lose sales, they are fighting hard to find
more readers, many changing format from unwieldy broadsheets to
the popular Berliner, compact (left) and tabloid formats, and moving
towards even smaller formats such as A4. The best examples do not
simply try to ‘shrink’ content to fit the smaller page, but consider the
new format as a new design, looking at columns (their numbers, widths
and lengths), negative space, typography and other design elements
such as rules and folios. Mario Garcia uses the analogy of moving from
a large house to a small flat: ‘You have to reassess what you need and
want to keep, and what you are happy to leave behind.’
A publication’s format should be dictated
by its readership and its purpose, such
parameters allowing for a wide variety
of approaches. Microzines such as Tank
(opposite top right) have the freedom to
be as big or small as they want (or indeed
to change with every issue). Emigre
(opposite below) has experimented with
different formats. This one enabled an
expansive, large-scale design approach
suited to its subject matter, the design
work of David Carson.
Essential design skills 173
A publication’s format should be dictated
by its readership and its purpose, such
parameters allowing for a wide variety
of approaches. Microzines such as Tank
(opposite top right) have the freedom to
be as big or small as they want (or indeed
to change with every issue). Emigre
(opposite below) has experimented with
different formats. This one enabled an
expansive, large-scale design approach
suited to its subject matter, the design
work of David Carson.
Choosing and using type
Any publication should create an enjoyable, accessible and
appropriate experience for its reader, and a large part of
this is determined by the use of typography. Readers
who are accustomed to unvarying pages of dense text in
a novel would not read the same page in a magazine,
where decoration, variation, space and cohesive use of
design elements are expected. Type that is too small,
too dense and too uniform will put off the reader, as
will columns of ‘grey’ text; an editorial designer has to
employ a range of tricks to keep the reader interested.
Practical issues may need to be considered, too. On
some publications, particularly dailies and weeklies,
designers need to accommodate exact lengths of copy
and headlines. And lastly, but most importantly for a
publication’s identity and appeal, aesthetic, emotional
and contextual considerations apply. Type, more than
any other design element, signals certain associations
to the reader. To address all these issues satisfactorily,
each different form of type should be selected for its
specific function, but also to form a whole that is
appropriate to the publication. At Flaunt, Lee Corbin’s
selection of fonts is determined by what is happening
typographically throughout the entire issue. ‘I try to
take account of what’s going on in the photographs,
the clothes, the content, illustrations and so on, in
all the stories running in the issue. I decide what faces
will be used in which sections, and the varying
degrees of abstraction,’ he explains.
Two very different but equally effective
approaches to font use for headlines. In Vogue
Paris (top), the choice of a vibrant red serif
face for the words ‘L’amour absolu’ results
in a spread that is bold and passionate
without being brash or masculine. About
Town (above), by contrast, is the opposite –
confident, manly and swaggering, it visually
reflects the topic.
•A4
ONSDAG 27 MARS 2013 ○ SVERIGES STÖRSTA MORGONTIDNING ○ GRUNDAD 1864
Upptäck Stockholm.
Påskvandra genom
stan med Eva-Karin.
Sidan 10
Debatt. ”Byggbolag och politiker hotar miljön vid Råstasjön” Sid 4
Slussen. Därför kan beslut om ombyggnationen dröja ytterligare. Sid 9
Ordlistan. Vart ska alla bilar ta vägen? Tja, vad sägs om att de stannar hemma? Sid 19
Regeringen
äter upp alla
vackra hus
Sid 6–7
Graik: Stefan Rothmaier. Idé: Karin Forsberg. Foto: Virginia Mayo
Rösta på Årets Stockholmsbyggnad! Läs mer på www.stockholm.se/aretsstockholmsbyggnad
fredag 29 juni 2012 ○ SVERIGES STÖRSTA MORGONTIDNING ○ GRUNDAD 1864
•A2
Fredrik Strage: Ibland försöker
jag äta mer etiskt men det innebär oftast bara att jag undviker
gulliga djur (som kanin). Sidan 2
Filmsommar film i sommarskrud.
Filmfredag har semester men Filmsommar
håller ställningarna
fram till skolstarten.
Homoerotik. Brittiska
ilmen ”Weekend” får
en fyra av Johan Croneman. Sidan 11
filmvärlden älskar sina älskvärda
svin. frågan är varför
Kommande ”On the road” odlar en nattstånden manlig myt. Sidorna 8–9
Mellan skalmarna
på en ilmlegendar
Woody Allen låter oss följa med in i det mest privata i en ny dokumentärilm. Sidan 10
Foto: Ann-Soi Rosenkvist Illustration: Axel Björklund
SÖNDAG 16 OKTOBER 2011
SVERIGES BÄSTA HELGLÄSNING MED
MÄNNISKOR, REPORTAGE OCH RESOR
DN.Resor
Vid Medelhavet är det
fortfarande
sommar.
Elsas lilla röda
Höstens läppar är röda. Elsa Billgren och
sex andra kvinnor om sin läppstiftspassion.
Med must i
marinaden
Julmusten är en svensk älskling – Jens Linder
bejakar det i matlagningen också. Sidan 10
DN Motor. Ett mörkt monster
Mercedes C63 AMG är
svart som synden och
snabb som en gasell.
Plus: Volvos färgexpert
om svarta bilar. Sidan 18
Min lördag:
”Inte bara död,
ångest också”.
Quetzala Blanco om när
helgen är som tyngst.
Sidan 8
Sorg, elegans, frigörelse. Inget ger så många vinklar som svart – från mode till mat till motor.
Kronstams svarta
Sidan 14
SÖNDAG 23 SEPTEMBER 2012
•A4
10
Nyheter
Valet som påverkar världen.
jan
feb
mar
apr
maj
juni
juli
aug
sep
okt
nov
dec
3
Presidentval
6 november.
4
Kongressval
6 november.
2
Valkampanjen
Slutet på augusti till
början på november.
Republikanernas
kandidater 2012
Tidpunkter då de officiellt
gav upp sina kandidaturer.
Ron Paul
var uträknad tidigt
men höll kampanjen aktiv ända till
partikonventet.
Newt Gringrich
Rick Santorum
Buddy Roemer
Rick Perry
Jon Huntsman Michele Bachmann
1
Primärvalen
januari till juni.
22 maj
Mitt Romney har
fått tillräckligt många
delegater för att säkra
sin nominering på
partikonventet.
Demokraternas
presidentkandidat:
Barack Obama
Vicepresident:
Joe Biden
Romney utses
formellt till partiets
presidentkandidat
på Republikanernas
partikonvent.
Barack Obama
utses formellt till
Demokraternas
presidentkandidat på
partiets konvent.
Vägen till Vita huset
1 Primärvalen Presidentkandidaterna röstas fram i primärval
(primaries) som arrangeras av partierna och
genomförs delstat för delstat. Vid varje val
fördelas delegater som sedan utser partiets
kandidat på ett konvent. För Demokraterna
var primärvalet en ren formalitet eftersom
Obama ställde upp för omval, och ingen
utmanade honom. På den republikanska sidan
däremot blev primärvalen en långdragen
kamp mellan flera olika kandidater.
Obama och Romney slutspurtar mot Vita huset.
DN guidar dig genom valdramat.
Ballot: valsedel.
Campaign trail: presidentkandidatens turné under
valrörelsen.
Caucus: nomineringsmöte för att
välja kandidater.
Convent: partimöten där
presidentkandidaterna utses.
Exit poll: vallokalundersökning, en
prognos som görs under valdagen.
Front runner: den som leder
i opinionen.
Gerrymandering: förändring av
gränserna för ett valdistrikt
i syfte att säkra en majoritet
för en kandidat.
Incumbent: en kandidat som är
sittande president.
Poll: opinionsundersökning.
Ordlista
Tre direktsända tv-debatter:
3, 16 och 22 oktober.
Vicepresidentkandidaterna
debatterar den 11 oktober.
Debatterna kommer att ha betydelse
eftersom läget mellan kandidaterna
är jämnt.
Det finns två tv-sända debatter som
anses ha avgjort presidentval:
Kennedy–Nixon år 1960 och
Reagan–Carter 1980.
Super tuesday: Tisdag i mars då
många delstater håller primärval.
Super pac: Kampanjorgan som kan
samla in obegränsade summor.
Swing voters: osäkra väljare.
Förklaring till några av de
vanligaste amerikanska val-orden.
Maria Westholm
Texter: Hans Rosén, Michael Winiarski.
Foto: Scanpix
Demokraterna
Republikanerna
334,6 totalt
655,5 totalt
491,7
255,2
spenderat
spenderat
Källa: Washington post
Obama
Romney
Vågmästarstaterna
Ett antal avgörande delstater där opinionen
brukar väga jämnt. Kandidaterna koncentrerar
därför sina valkampanjer hit. De tyngst
vägande är Florida och Ohio.
Pengarna
Kampanjkassorna har stor betydelse för
kandidaternas möjlighet att påverka väljarna.
Nya regler har öppnat för SuperPacs, kampanjorgan som kan ta emot obegränsade summor
från miljardärer, företag och organisationer.
Framför allt läggs pengarna på politisk reklam
i tv, där det oftast handlar om att framställa
motståndaren i negativ dager.
Kampanjarbetet
Kandidaterna reser flitigt mellan olika valmöten, nästan uteslutande i vågmästarstater.
Samtidigt mobiliseras gräsrötter för att ringa
och knacka dörr och på andra sätt nå ut till
väljarna. Även nätet används till detta.
Eftersom valdeltagandet är lågt i USA handlar
valarbetet mycket om att få soffliggarna
engagerade.
2 Valkampanjen
Alaska
(AK)
Hawaii
(HI)
Washington
(WA) Montana
(MT)
North Dakota
(ND)
South Dakota
(SD) Wyoming
(WY)
Arizona
(AZ)
Kalifornien
(CA)
Idaho
(ID)
Nebraska
(NE)
Kansas
(KS)
Texas
(TX)
New Mexico
(NM)
Colorado
(CO)
Utah
(UT)
Nevada
(NV)
Oregon
(OR)
Hittills insamlade pengar
(21 sep) Miljoner dollar
Opinionsläget i USA just nu
Oklahoma
(OK)
Säker vinst Obama Lutar åt Obama
Special fredag 8 juni 2012
•a4
8
Nyheter
Våldet i Syrien fortsätter. Något slut på dödandet kan inte skönjas. Över 10 000 har
dödats sedan upproret startade förra våren. Trots detta kommer inga kraftfulla
åtgärder från omvärlden för att stoppa våldet mot civilbefolkningen.
Upproret i Syrien.
Nyhetsredaktionen Nyhetschefer: Lars axelsson, Stafan Kihlström Nattchef: niclas Lagerstedt
Nyheter Telefon: 08-738 10 00 E-post: [email protected]
En tvåårig licka skadas när byn al-Rami attackeras. Hon förs till ett hemligt sjukhus i Shnan, ett asketiskt rum med tre sängar och en sjukskötare. Flickans hela familj dödades när familjens hus
Hur många ler ska
SÖNDAG 23 SEPTEMBER 2012
•A4
11
Nyheter
januari 2013
Republikanernas
presidentkandidat:
Mitt Romney
Vicepresidentkandidat:
Paul Ryan
270 krävs för att vinna
149 68 100 41 150
Obama Romney
2008 2010 2012 2014 2016
Klass
1
2
3
21
10
20
10
24
13
Demokratiska
Så byts senatorerna ut
Republikanska
33 väljs
om i år.
100
stolar
435
stolar
Alla väljs
om i år.
Väljs
om i år.
\"Överhuset\", den mer
prestigefyllda
kammaren, består av
två senatorer från
varje delstat. Beslutar
om lagar, ratificerar
fördrag, godkänner
utnämningar till
högsta domstolen,
ambassadörer m m.
Senatorerna väljs för
sex år.
Antalet representanter motsvarar varje
delstats befolkningsmängd. Alla har rätt
till minst en representant. Beslutar om
federala lagar.
Samtliga platser väljs
om varje jämnt år.
30 37
Vinnaren tar allt
Den kandidat som får flest av folkets röster –
oavsett hur liten majoriteten är – får rätten att
välja alla delstatens elektorer. Elektorerna är
538 personer, som utser presidenten vid en
omröstning i december efter valet. Hur många
elektorer en delstat har styrs av befolkningsstorleken, men alla delstater har minst tre
elektorer. Systemet leder till att en kandidat
kan vinna (få flest elektorer) utan att ha flest
röster i landet som helhet. De minsta delstaterna får relativt sett större tyngd än de stora
sett till folkmängden.
Hålls samtidigt som presidentvalet.
Kandidater väljs till kongressens bägge kamrar,
senaten och representanthuset. Samtliga stolar
i representanthuset står på spel i årets val och
var tredje i senaten. Vilket parti som dominerar i kongressen har stor betydelse för
presidentens handlingsutrymme.
3 Presidentvalet 4 Kongressvalet 5 Elektorskollegiet
Stor skillnad mellan stora och små stater
i elektorsrepresentation
Källa: US Census bureau
Källor: Realclearpolitics, US Federal Election
Commission, Wikipedia, Utrikespolitiska institutet/
Landguiden, NY Times, senate.gov, Nationalencyklopedin.
*Räknat på antal invånare 2010
Hur går det till att rösta?
14–30 dagar (beroende på
deltstat) före valdagen
måste alla valdeltagare
registrera sig hos valmyndigheten. Det går att
rösta i förväg. På valdagen avger väljarna sina
röster i vallokaler. Rösträkningen går till på olika sätt i olika delstater.
Den har ibland skapat stora problem, som
i valet 2000.
Vem får rösta?
Amerikanska medborgare över 18 år.
I huvudstaden Washington DC, får väljarna
delta i presidentvalet, men inte i val till
kongressen (District of Columbia är inte
en delstat).
Vem får inte rösta.
Medborgare i USA-kontrollerade territorier som
Puerto Rico, Guam, med flera får inte rösta i
nationella president- eller kongressval. Det får inte
heller fängelseinterner i de flesta stater, men dömda
kan efter avtjänat straff få tillbaka sin rösträtt efter
en särskild process.
Fler elektorsröster
sedan 2008
Färre sedan 2008
Så många elektorsröster har delstaterna
CA
55
HI
4
AK
3
AZ
11
UT
6
NV
6
ID
4
MT
3
WY
3
ND
3 MN
10 WI
10
IL
20
LA
8 MS
6
AL
9
GA
16
SC
9
IN
11
MI
16 OH
18
FL
29
PA
20
MD
10
NJ
14
DE
3
D.C
3
VA
13
NC
15
NY
29
VT
3
CT
7
MA
11 RI
4
NH
4 ME
4
IA
6
MO
10
SD
3
NE
5
KS
6
OK
7
AR
6 TN
11
KY
8
WV
5
TX
38
CO
9 NM
5
OR
7
WA
12
190
4 tomma
241
Kalifornien
Wyoming
Representanthuset
*(i Maine och
Nebraska kan
rösterna
fördelas proportionellt)
677 000 inv/elektor* 187 000 inv/elektor*
Bush mot Gore år 2000
Republikanen George W Bush kunde vinna
valet trots färre röster än demokraten Al Gore
i landet som helhet. Genom att han vann i flera
små delstater och fick Floridas 25 elektorsröster med endast 571 rösters marginal fick
Bush ihop de 270 elektorsröster som krävs för
majoritet. Avgörandet kom dock först efter att
oenighet om rösträkningen avgjorts i domstol.
Så röstade folket år 2000
Så röstade elektorerna 2000
47,9% Bush 3,74% övr. 48,4% Gore
270 krävs
271 Bush 266 Gore
Senaten
Foto: Alamy Tre grupper kallade ”klasser” byts ut varannat år.
Presidenten
svär eden.
20 januari.
Vita huset
Se en klickbar
version med
DN-plus i din
läsplatta.
Valsedlar
Folkrikaste
delstaten.
Delstaten med
minst antal
invånare.
Foto: Scanpix
Minnesota
(MN)
Wisconsin
(WI)
Iowa
(IA)
Louisiana
(LA)
Arkansas
(AR)
Missouri
(MO)
Illinois
(IL) Indiana
(IN)
Ohio
(OH)
Virginia
(VA)
Georgia South Carolina (SC)
(GA)
Tennessee (TN)
Kentucky (KY)
Alabama (AL)
Missisippi(MS)
Florida
(FL)
New York
(NY)
Maine (ME)
Michigan
(MI) Vermont (VT)
Rhode Island (RI)
Connecticut (CT)
New Jersey (NJ)
Delaware (DE)
Maryland (MD)
District of Columbia (DC)
W. Virginia
(WV)
Massachusetts (MA)
New Hampshire (NH)
Pennsylvania
North Carolina (NC)
Vågmästarstat Lutar åt Romney Säkert vinst Romney Säker vinst Obama
Lutar åt Obama
Lutar åt Romney
Säkert vinst Romney
Vågmästarstat
5
Elektorskollegiet
17 december.
Special
Nästa uppslag.
Väljarnas budskap
FREDAG 8 JUNI 2012
•A5
9
Nyheter
○○I onsdags rapporterades om ännu en
massaker, i al-Qubair nära Hama, med
minst 78 dödade, många av dem kvinnor och barn.
Dagens Nyheter kan i dag publicera
ett unikt bildreportage av fotojournalisten Niklas Meltio. Han följde under
knappt två veckor i slutet av maj syriska
rebeller i gruppen al-Mujaerin al-Ansar
i bergsområdet Jabal az Zawiyah i regionen Idlib knappt tio mil norr om Hama.
Det är ett område av Syrien där den
kanske mest militanta motståndsrörelsen mot den syriska regimen inns.
I rebellgruppen om cirka 80 män,
som befriat sin by från regeringsstyrkor, ingår avhoppade militärer, bönder
och studerande, ingenjörer och lärare.
Erik Ohlsson: Kriget
är redan en verklighet
för folket i Syrien.
Nästa sida
besköts av pansarvagnar. Rebellerna lyckades rädda lickan.
Rebellerna tillverkar egna vägbomber och granater av gödsel och socker som fylls i stora metallrör och förses
med en fjärrutlösare, bomber kraftiga nog att spränga regimens pansarvagnar och militärfordon.
Rebellerna har placerat ut vägbomber nära en vägspärr och tagit upp positioner i närheten. Bomben exploderar
och regimstyrkorna öppnar eld med maskingevär som besvaras av rebellerna. Vägbomben missade pansarfordonet och dödade i stället fyra soldater som befann sig bredvid.
En del inköpt ammunition är laddad med
TNT för att explodera i vapnet och skada
skytten och måste tas bort.
behöva dö i Syrien?
Fången A hörde till en regimtrogen milis när han greps av rebellerna
sedan han skjutit mot demonstranter. Han friköptes senare av sin
familj för 1 000 dollar, pengar som rebellerna använder till vapenköp.
Niklas Meltio, foto
FREDAG 8 JUNI 2012 ○ SverigeS StörSta morgontidning ○ grundad 1864 ○ PriS 30 kronor
7 388101 003001
•A5
Nr 152
Den tvååriga lickan från byn al-Rami blev ett av den syriske diktatorns
Bashar al-Assads tiotusentals ofer.
Hennes familj utplånades, men
hon överlevde med splitterskador
och kunde räddas av rebeller som
förde henne till ett hemligt sjukhus
i trakten.
DN kan i dag publicera ett bildreportage av fotojournalisten Niklas Meltio som följt en rebellgrupp
inne i Syrien.
Minst 10 000 har hittills dödats
och världens ledare talar om risken
för fullt inbördeskrig. Varför görs
inte mer för att stoppa dödandet?
Det lika enkla som brutala svaret är
att Syriens befolkning ofras på realpolitikens altare, skriver DN:s Erik
Ohlsson. Nyheter 2, 8–11, Ledare 4
Diktatorns offer ○ Skakande bilder inifrån våldets Syrien ○ Flickan överlevde attacken som utplånade hennes familj
Insidan
”Jag har svårt
att orka med
min tvååring”
”Min tvååriga dotter bråkar alltid
när hon inte får som hon vill. Ofta
får hon det, eftersom jag inte orkar”,
skriver en tvåbarnsmamma. Psykologen ger råd. Insidan • Kultur 21
Länsstyrelsen slår larm:
100 000-tals
stockholmare
utan bostad 2030
Bostadsbristen ökar, ändå byggs det
allt färre bostäder. I en ny rapport
larmar länsstyrelsen om en ”mörk”
situation i Stockholm som är på väg
att förvärras. Stockholm 4–5
V på DN Debatt:
”Ge näringslivet
större ansvar för
yrkesutbildning”
Näringslivet måste ta på sig ett större pedagogiskt ansvar för yrkesutbildningen, skriver Jonas Sjöstedt
och Rossana Dinamarca från Vänsterpartiet. Debatt 6
Johan Esk:
Jag hoppas på
tyskarna –
för deras
fotbolls
skull.
Sport 12
Foto: Niklas Meltio
Fotbolls-EM
Segervissa
polacker
tror på succé
Inför dagens EM-premiär har vinden vänt och optimismen gror i Polen. ”Kvartsinal är ett minimum”,
säger sportministern till DN inför
matchen mot Grekland. Sport 12–15 •A5
TISDAG 26 MARS 2013 ○ SVERIGES STÖRSTA MORGONTIDNING ○ GRUNDAD 1864 ○ PRIS 20 KRONOR
7 388101 002004 Nr 83
STÖRST I STOCKHOLM
Hetaste spelaren:
”Jag har ofta hört att det inns
likheter med Zlatan.”
Sport 10–13
Allsvenskan – 5 dagar kvar
Ladda
ner i dag!
Fakta: Kristoffer Örstadius Grafik: Johan Andersson
Fler underkända
trots mer pengar
Bilindustrin
Så blufar
handlarna om
försäljningssifrorna
Försäljningen av nya bilar går betydligt långsammare än vad den oficiella månadsstatistiken talar om.
Det visar DN:s granskning.
Marknaden hålls till stor del upp
av handlarna själva, och förra året
registrerades var tredje nytt fordon
på bilhandlare.
Ekonomi 24–25
Ny serie. Svenska elever halkar efter i skolan. Enligt
lera stora internationella studier var vi förut bland
de bästa länderna i världen. Nu ligger Sveriges skolor
under snittet för OECD-länderna.
I dag inleder DN en artikelserie där vi granskar
hur det har blivit så här.
Nyheter 8–9
Hanne Kjöller
Diskrimineringsombudsmannen
har skapat
ett rättsproblem.
Ledare 5
Cyperns räddningspaket
Nya akuta kriser
hotar eurozonen
Cypern har räddats ur den värsta krisen, men ler orosmoln inns i eurozonen. Italien saknar regering, arbetslösheten skenar i Frankrike och den
ojämna tillväxttakten blottar sprickor
i valutasamarbetet. Ekonomi 26
Världen
Utrikesdagen
drog fullt hus
Kulturhusets hörsal var fullsatt
när DN i går bjöd in till den årliga
Utrikes dagen. I pausen mellan seminarierna tog läsarna chansen att
ställa frågor till DN:s inresta utrikeskorrespondenter. Världen 20–21
Foto: Magnus Hallgren DN:s Afrikakorrespondent Erik
Esbjörnsson (t v) ick många frågor.
DN Allsvenskan – ett digitalt
fotbollsmagasin för läsplattan.
Så gör du. Sidan 2
8 SÖNDAG 17 FEBRUARI 2013
•A2
Kultur Patienten & prislappen ONSDAG 6 FEBRUARI 2013
•A5
10
Sport
Krönika
Johan Esk
Johan Esk: Liten mot stor
bäddar för nya mirakel
F
otbollen har blivit
unik. Det är nu den
enda lagsport där
storlek spelar liten roll
för hur stor en spelare
blir.
Spanien och Barcelona styrs av
ett knattegäng, Zlatan Ibrahimovic är 194 centimeter, Cristiano
Ronaldo är 186.
Så, vem är svårast att försvara sig
mot, en stjärna som är 169 eller
en som är 194?
– Jag möter hellre en stor spelare
eftersom jag är rätt lång själv, men
om du tänker på vår kille (Zlatan)
så möter jag helst inte honom
heller.
Pontus Wernbloom, 185 centimeter, pratar och linar sen. När vi
pratar om svenska försvarsspelet
försvinner smajlet.
Det har skapats ett hål högt upp i
försvaret som skapar problem.
– Det där hålet får inte bli för
stort. Mot Tyskland ick Schweinsteiger stå och styra där, säger
Pontus.
– Det gäller att inte gå bort sig
utan att hålla positionerna. Mot
Tyskland jagade jag och Pontus boll
lite för mycket, säger Rasmus Elm.
De två (som på grund av CSKA
Moskvas tufa försäsong troligen inte startar i kväll) och/eller
Kim & Anders har fått det svårare
sedan Zlatan Ibrahimovic blev lagets ”tia”. När jag propagerade för
att Zlatan skulle spela där var en
orsak att han i försvarsspelet skulle
störa motståndarnas mittfältare
med sin blotta närvaro. I praktiken
har Zlatan ofta legat kvar högt
upp bredvid Sveriges ”nia”, när
motståndarna haft bollen.
Fördelen är att två spelare sätter
bättre press på motståndarnas
backlinje. Nackdelen är att en
Steven Gerrard eller en Bastian
Schweinsteiger fått operera ostört
en bra bit framför Sveriges defensiva innermittfältare.
– Det svåra är att om man går
fram riskerar man att bli överspelad, säger Wernbloom.
– Har man en spelare som gör
fyra mål får man ta att han inte
lägger lika mycket energi på att
jobba hemåt. Jag är van att ha det
likadant i Moskva, säger Elm.
Som med det mesta i landslaget
är det upp till Zlatan själv vad han
vill göra med sina krafter. Och med
tanke på hur han spelat mot Tyskland och England kan ingen säga
att han lagt resurserna fel.
Det går inte att se Sverige träna
på Friends utan att blicken dras
mot platsen där Zlatan lämnade
gräset, mötte bollen och skapade ett mirakel.
Jag väntar mig nya i kväll.
Man kan göra det när det är en
match mellan Zlatan Ibrahimovic
och Lionel Messi.
Det har funnits en (lång) tid när
träningslandskamper varit iskalla.
Den tiden är inte nu. Med en ny
arena har det krävts stora motståndare för att fylla Friends och i kväll
är det fullt, det snackas Zlatanmot-Messi överallt, det har varit
bra drag på svenska träningarna
och i kväll kanske det till och med
blir drag på läktarna.
Det fanns också en tid när Tommy
Söderberg såg fotbollens framtid
och han hette Thierry Henry.
Söderberg var Sveriges U21-kapten, det var match mot Frankrike
och han såg en atlet med imponerande fysik. Några år senare sade
Söderberg att han trodde att fotbollen skulle domineras av spelare
som Henry. 188 centimeter. Kropp
som en 400-meterslöpare.
Henry vann VM- och EM-guld
och ingen kunde veta att fotbollsvärlden skulle tas över av ett gäng
spanska knattar och en minsting
från Argentina.
Spanien styrs av Xavi och
Iniesta, båda 170 centimeter, de
lägger grunden för 169 centimeter
Messi i Barcelona.
Xavi, Iniesta och Messi har varit
navet i fotbollsrevolutionen som
påverkat hela världen. Överallt
har tränare velat ta över deras
passningsfotboll med stort
boll innehav. Överallt har talangscouter tittat en extra gång
innan en liten kille ratats.
I Barcelona har revolutionen
skördat ofer. Zlatan hamnade i Filosofens frysfack och det var just i
Barcelona Thierry Henry tvingades
inse att framtiden inte längre var
hans.
169 centimeter Pedro tog hans
plats.
I fotboll har storleken ingen betydelse.
169 centimeter Messi mot 194 centimeter
Zlatan gör att matchens betydelse inte påverkar intresset – det är glödhett.
Däremot har Zlatans plats på planen avgörande betydelse för Sveriges försvarsspel.
Fotboll. Här spelar storleken ingen roll
Sport
158
157
169 cm
I kväll är det fullt, det
snackas Zlatan-motMessi överallt, det
har varit bra drag på
svenska träningarna
och i kväll kanske det
till och med blir drag
på läktarna.
Sverige–Argentina
○TV4 20.25, avspark 20.30
SÖNDAG 17 FEBRUARI 2013 9
•A2
Kultur
Vad var det
som dödade
Herr B?
D
ödshjälp!, står det med stora bokstäver i sjukjournalens marginal.
Herr Gustav B, låt mig kalla honom så, avled på våren 2008. Diagnosen var cancer. Men det var inte
tumören som tog hans liv. Det var
något helt annat, som vi ännu saknar begrepp
för.
Låt oss börja från slutet. En tid efter hans död
tar fru B fram det sista fotot av sin man, taget på
sjukhuset. ”Plötsligt blir jag iskall. Varför hänger
det bara en påse från sänggaveln? Var är den
and ra? Fick han ingen näring?”
Hon ringer till sjukhuset, vill ha journalen
uppläst. Bilden ljög inte. Under den sista veckan
av sitt liv ick hennes man ingen näring. Fru B vet
att så gör man med döende. ”Men till mig sade
man att han var på bättringsvägen!”
I sin anmälan till Hälso- och sjukvårdens ansvarsnämnd anklagar hon sjukhuset för ”dold
aktiv dödshjälp”. Och när hon skriver till mig är
det på inrådan av en professor i medicinsk etik.
Han menar att jag borde undersöka vad det var
som Gustav B dog av.
Jag ber två högt kvaliicerade läkare att oberoende av varandra granska sjukjournalen. De förstår varför fru B anmälde sjukhuset. Hon hade
skäl att tro att läkarna förde henne bakom ljuset.
Inte nog med att hon har fått motstridiga besked.
Läkarnas beteende måste ha gett egendomliga
signaler. Medan några inner att patienten är förlorad och endast skall ha smärtstillande, sprutar
andra honom med penicillin. ”Fullständigt ofattbart”, säger min konsult, ”här planerar en doktor rehabilitering för en patient som överläkaren
funnit döende och som i en vecka varit utan
näring! Och varför står inte beslutet att stänga
av näringen någonstans? Och varför sätter man
i gång med återupplivning när det står ”0 HLR”
i journalen, vilket betyder ’allt hopp är ute, låt
människan dö i fred’? Det måste ha varit oerhört
förvirrande för anhöriga.”
Mina läkarkonsulter är dock eniga: Det var
inte dödshjälp. Att stänga av näringen var ett
korrekt beslut. Patienten var faktiskt bortom
räddning när det skedde.
När en saktmodig medborgare misstänker ett
svenskt sjukhus för dödshjälp, då har det gått
långt. Fru B är högutbildad, sjukvårdskunnig
och inte utan självdistans. Hon slår inte bakut vid
beskedet att hennes anklagelse saknar grund.
Hon blir lättad. Fru B vill ju inte tro att man i
Sverige tar livet av patienter. Men kan jag förstå
varför hon reagerade så?
Det kan jag, dessvärre. När en av mina konsulter läst färdigt journalen var hon mörk i synen.
”Jag antar att redan innan detta hände hade fru
B förlorat sitt förtroende för sjukhuset. Det hade
jag också gjort.”
Det är vad detta reportage handlar om. Fru B:s
förlorade tillit.
Hon verkar inte ensam om den. Skall man tro
statistiken har det blivit farligare att vistas på
sjukhus. Sedan år 2005 har anmälningar enligt
lex Maria (där sjukvården själv anmäler felsteg)
nästan fördubblats. Det skulle kunna tolkas optimistiskt, som att man blivit frejdigare med att
medge misstag. Men samtidigt ökar klagomålen
från patienter och anhöriga. I skrivande stund
väntar 5 500 ärenden i kö hos Socialstyrelsen.
Att misstron vuxit syns med blotta ögat. ”Fotografering förbjuden” står det numera vid entrén
till vartannat sjukhus. Ännu för tio år sedan blev
ingen barnmorska nervös när en nybliven fader
lyfte en kamera. Hon tog för givet att det var miraklet som han ville fånga. Numera kan hon inte
vara säker. Kanske är det hennes handlag som
skall dokumenteras, för den händelse någonting går fel. Det händer allt oftare att anhöriga
fotograferar pillerburkar och inställningar på
droppet. Vilket är den verkliga bakgrunden till
fotoförbudet: vårdfolket står inte ut med så oblyga demonstrationer av misstro. Man får förstå
dem. Ingen yrkesgrupp skulle inna sig i något
liknande. Så vad har Sveriges läkare och sköterskor gjort för ont för att förtjäna detta?
Låt oss återvända till fru B och hennes förlorade tillit. Först visar sig sjukvården från sin allra
bästa sida. Gustav B är ingen ungdom längre,
hans cancer sitter illa till, han har skrumplever
och dåliga blodvärden. Det är fara värt att han
avlider under kniven, menar narkosläkarna –
och avråder från operation. Denna avrådan är
samtidigt en dödsdom. Avlägsnas inte tumören
har Gustav B ett år kvar att leva.
A
ck, ja. Man kan inte annat än älska
kirurger. Hur många av oss har
inte deras tävlingslusta att tacka
för sitt liv? Det går nästan att höra
i journalen hur det lät. ”Jasså narkosvänner. Högriskpatient, säger
ni. Intressant... jag opererar.”
Min läkarkonsult får något saligt över anletsdragen när hon granskar operationsjournalen.
Som läste hon ett partitur av Bach. Och så, och
där, åh, såå elegant... Och efteråt: ”Okomplicerat
vårdförlopp på IVA. Pat har överstått ingreppet
väl trots stor preoperativ risk”, jublar journalskrivaren.
Men därmed är Gustav B:s goda lycka slut. Få
dagar efter den lyckade operationen börjar han
hemsökas av demoner. Sliter av slangarna, försöker ly. På intensiven har man inte kompetens
för sådant, alltså ber man psykiatrin om
hjälp. En psykdoktor anländer, föreslår
Del 1. Diagnosen var cancer. Men det var inte tumören som tog
hans liv. I dag inleder Maciej Zaremba sitt stora reportage om
de absurda konsekvenserna av ett dolt system skifte i svensk
sjukvård. llustration: Malin Koort/NU Agency
ONSDAG 6 FEBRUARI 2013
•A4
11
Sport
194
193
192
191
190
189
188
187
186
185
184
183
182
181
180
179
178
177
176
175
174
173
172
171
170
169
168
161
160
159
158
Jämförelse:
ett mål
per match
Foto: Bildbyrån och Lennart Månsson. Fakta: Oskar Sellström, Anders Lundqvist. Grafik: Stefan Rothmaier
194 cm
Tolv senaste målen
Antal skott per mål
Tolv senaste målen
Ålder
Födelseort
Längd
Vikt
Skostorlek
Bästa fot
31 år
Malmö
194 cm
94 kg
47
Höger
Lionel Andrés Messi Zlatan Ibrahimovic
I landslaget I landslaget
I klubblaget
Ligan säsong 2012/13 Ligan säsong 2012/13
Ålder
Födelseort
Längd
Vikt
Skostorlek
Bästa fot
25 år
Rosario
169 cm
67 kg
42,5
Vänster
0,35 0,33
1,55 1,0
Antal mål per match Antal mål per match
Skott
Friläge
Nick
Straff
Stöter in bollen
Frispark
Typ av mål
3,4 5,1
Antal skott per mål
Pontus Wernbloom, 185 centimeter, svarar på frågan om det är
svårare att möta en liten stjärna.
Messi är en
fantastisk spelare.
Troligtvis den bäste
individuellt, det är
därför han vinner
priser. Det han gjort
de senaste åren visar
att han är på topp.
Zlatan Ibrahimovic svarar artigt
på frågan om vad han tycker om
Messi.
Jag möter
hellre en stor spelare
eftersom jag är rätt
lång själv, men om
du tänker på vår kille
(Zlatan) så möter
jag helst inte honom
heller.
Ligan säsong 12/13 Ligan säsong 2012/13 Ligan säsong 2012/13 Ligan säsong 12/13
I klubblaget
10 SÖNDAG 20 NOVEMBER 2011
Sätt på tv:n, slå upp senaste kokboken, se en gammal
tv-såpa: ständigt möts du av denne Per Morberg.
DN Söndag reste till Sörmland för att försöka skönja
mannen bakom myten. Enligt honom själv är det sista
gången han ställer upp i tryckt press. text Anna Bodin foto Caroline Tibell
”Jag spelar
en parodi på
Per Morberg”
text Anna Bodin foto Caroline Tibell
12 SÖNDAG 20 NOVEMBER 2011
Intervju: Per Morberg
Ålder: 51 år.
Familj: Frun Inese, bonusdottern Janina, 36, samt
döttrarna Liza, 29, Alida, 26,
Molly, 19, och Astrid, 14 år.
Bor: Förhyrda rättarbostaden
på Tullgarns kungsgård, eget
torp i skogen och övernattningslägenhet i Stockholms
innerstad.
Yrke: Skådespelare och tvkock.
Aktuell med: Tv-programmet
”Den stora matresan” i Sjuan,
och en ny kokbok med samma
namn.
Bland journalister har Per Morberg rykte om sig att vara besvärlig. Ställa in i sista sekunden.
Vägra svara på frågor. Skälla ut
i första hand frun Inese, och i
andra hand närmsta reporter.
Fascination, bävan och skrattlystnad blandas i
kollegernas sneda leenden: ”Jasså, du ska göra
Per Morberg.” Fniss fniss. Himlande ögonbryn
mot taket. ”Lycka till då!”
Jag väcker upp datorn, öppnar ”Mediearkivet”
och skriver sammanbitet ”Per Morberg” i sökrutan. Jodå, tidningsdrottningen Amelia Adamo
fi ck bara vara med till lunch när hon och Per
skulle jaga älg i Ogesta. Sedan sade Per åt henne
att sätta sig i bilen. ”Stora Tara-intervjun” öppnade han med:
– Ju förr jag kan åka in till Vagnhärad och köpa
glödlampor desto lyckligare blir jag. Då vet ni
min inställning.
Expressen varnade han: ”Det är på Morbergs
premisser hela tiden. Jag kan välja om jag ska
vara svår kille eller snäll kille.” Metro utmanade
han: ”Hur ska du göra reportage om det här
då? Skriva att jag är en gris bara? Gör det!” Men
TT Spektra charmade han: Att det är farligt att
mucka med mannen i fråga är bara en myt, enligt telegrambyrån som slog fast att han i själva
verket är ”världens snällaste”.
Dags att bilda sig en egen uppfattning. Per svarar på andra signalen. När vi kommer in på logistiken kring intervjun räcker han över mobilen till Inese, som verkar vara inom en ständig
behändig armslängds avstånd. Hon och jag går
igenom detaljerna. Älgjakt på Ulvön vid Höga
kusten i Ångermanland med hockeyspelaren
Niklas Sundström. Det blir kul. Fast sedan blir
det inställt. Det blir för mycket, tycker Per. Hälsar Inese.
I stället är vi välkomna att följa med Per och
pyrscha, smyga på, rådjur på hans egna marker
i Sörmland. Per kan inte spika något datum just
nu. Snart börjar älgjakten och han vill inte få premiärveckan förstörd. Kanske ska vi fi ska i stället?
Ja, det tycker Inese låter bra, det blir nog lugnare för Per. Vi bestämmer en dag och jag får en
vägbeskrivning till rättarbostaden på Tullgarns
kungsgård.
I det ljusgula stenhuset har Ineses och Pers
fem döttrar vuxit upp, och där har TV 4 spelat
in åtta säsonger av långköraren ”Vad blir det
för mat”, med en svettande, skvimpande, spillande Per som stoppar fi ngrarna djupt ned i såskastrullerna och slickar av dem med vällustiga,
ljudliga smack. Det populäraste avsnittet sågs av
404 000 tittare.
På bestämd dag knackar fotografen och jag på
den berömda ytterdörren i Tullgarn. Så tyst kan
inte ett hus vara med Per Morberg inuti. Ett par
stelfrusna sms senare får vi kontakt med Inese.
Hon är i Vagnhärad och köper vispgrädde. Per är
i parets torp några kilometer därifrån. Han väntar på oss. Vi kör alldeles för fort på slingriga,
dimhöljda vägar genom sörmländsk kulturbygd.
Vi är nära nu. Där ligger sjön på höger sida, och
där står Per. I vadmalskostym.
Såg ni storfi lmen ”1939”, Svensk Filmindustris 30-miljonerssatsning till sitt 70-årsjubileum
1989? Per Morberg som supercharmige, svartsjuke, smygaggressive rikemanssonen Bengt. I just
kostym, bakåtkammat hår och bländvit skjorta.
Proper, oklanderlig, med livsfarlig blick. Hör ni
Zemya Hamilton sjunga soundtracklåten ”Jag
har min kind mot din kind, min arm omkring
din hals”?
Där står han. Nu i verkligheten. Vid hans fötter
ligger ett kastspö och han är i färd med att knyta
på ett drag på linan. Han har två projekt att lansera; i tv-kanalen Sjuan visas hans nya program
”Den stora matresan”, och snart kommer boken
med samma namn. Jag anar att Per har gjort sitt
val för dagen: snäll kille. Här ska det fi skas för
folket.
Nere vid bryggan gör han ett provkast samtidigt som han visar hur den polsktyske skådespelaren Klaus Kinski – känd för sin lynnighet, sina
aggressionsproblem och katastroferna detta
brukade medföra under hans fi lminspelningar
– kunde göra en hel kroppsvridning genom att
utgå med fötterna i kors.
– Han hade ett ego som var som Atlanten. Mitt
är som en kolonilott i jämförelse, kommenterar
Per.
Draget fl yger genom luften och fastnar i det
vissna vassbältet vid sjökanten. Per rycker till,
wobblern beskriver en lydig båge tillbaka och
landar mot Pers ben, där de treuddiga krokarna
sätter sig stadigt i hans luddiga, bruna vadmalsbyxor. Jag faller på knä och pillar hjälpsamt loss
dem, varpå Per lossar ekans förtöjningar. Då
fastnar draget i tampen. Per biter ihop. Sedan
biter han i tampen. Medan han kämpar lyfter jag
i fi skelådan. Den ser väldigt ny ut?
– Väldigt ny, säger Per. Väldigt Statoil. Inte alls
Per Morberg. Flytta den ur bild.
Vadmalskostymen däremot, den är ”Per Morberg hunting collection”. Hornknappar och
valkat ylletyg, sådant som jaktskildrarna Bruno
Liljefors och Gustaf Schröder hade på sig runt
Per Morberg
Per Morbergs farmor
var kokerska på Tullgarns slott där han nu
hyr rättarbostaden.
Per plockar bär och
svamp, fi skar och jagar
fortfarande i bygden.
14 SÖNDAG 20 NOVEMBER 2011
1989 Premiär på ”1939” som blir Pers
stora genombrott. Han och
Helena Bergström, som också
har en roll, åker limousine till
Globen, där fi lmen visas.
2001
Som storbonden Börje i Carin
Mannheimers ”Fru Marianne”
spelar Per mot Cecilia Frode.
2006 Per lagar mat i ett jaktprogram på TV 4 och får därefter
erbjudande om en egen serie
matlagningsprogram.
2008 Träff ar Per Meryl Streep på
svenska premiären av ”Mamma
mia!”, ber att få kyssa hennes
hand och får svaret: ”Du får
kyssa mig var du vill”. Han väljer
halsen.
Intervju: Per Morberg
och tjänat en liten slant. Det var inte självklart
i den medel- och arbetarklass som jag kommer
i från.
Per kan enligt egen utsago inte uttyda instruktionsbeskrivningen ens till en klockradio. Men
som fj ortonåring var han en jävel på att sticka.
Till ett av sina tv-program ville han bjuda in ”Mikael Persbrandt, Michael Nyqvist och de andra
grabbarna grus” för att sticka lovikkavantar. Det
blev aldrig någon macho-syjunta, men Per tycker fortfarande att idén är bra.
– Jag gillar ju att sticka, på riktigt, säger han.
Ja, jag har inte gjort det sedan syslöjden i skolan,
med då var jag bäst i klassen. Jag är bra på att
göra saker med händerna.
På västgötska skulle man säga att det ”vörnar
sig” för honom. Det blir helt enkelt bra när han
tar i något: en stickning, en sauce béarnaise eller
– misstänker jag – en kvinna. Eller för den delen en judomotståndare. Per har sedan tonåren
svart bälte, tio SM-guld och ett EM-brons.
När han kom ut på mattan tittade folk på honom. Per Morberg är en blickmagnet. Oavsett
om han gör ett judokast, bankar en biff eller
slår knytnäven i väggen framför kameran. ”Det
sprakar när jag kommer in i ett rum. Det kan jag
se själv”, sade han till Amelia Adamo (som han
inom parentes sagt tyckte var ”en jätterar och
gullig människa”) innan han försatte henne i bilarrest. Till mig säger han:
– Jag är alltid apan, det är därför mina matprogram och kokböcker säljer. Jag har sålt snart
500 000 kokböcker på 3,5 år.
Känner du någonsin att du prostituerar dig?
– Hela tiden. Det är Inese och fl ickorna och
grytor och hemma och kompisar, och jag bjuder
på allt det där. Men skådespelaren Morberg går
in och spelar en parodi på Per Morberg. Precis så
är det. I och med att jag är så driven som skådespelare lirar jag hela tiden. När det här är klart
har du inte en aning om vem jag är egentligen.
Hm. Mannen framför mig, denne Per Morberg,
är ytligt sett klädd i blåbrunrutig skjorta, breda
gröna hängslen och kängor inomhus. När han
reser sig för att spotta ut snuset genom fönstret
och lägga in en vedklabbe till i kaminen snuddar hans hjässa i det låga torpets allmogemålade
takbjälkar. Några droppar inuitblod gör kindbenen höga och pagen tjock och mörkvågig. Det är
en snygg utsida och han tycker om att exponera
den. Insidan gömmer han helst. Det gör det frestande att söka personliga karaktärsdrag i hans
professionella rollfi gurer.
Mest känd är nog Viggo i såpoperan ”Rederiet”. Han var bara med i tre av tjugo säsonger,
men under den tiden hann han göra sig hatad
av större delen av besättningen ombord på M/S
”Freja” och älskad av publiken. Som hustrumisshandlare i Kay Pollaks ”Så som i himmelen”
väcker Per bara obehag. Och som tv-kock rör
han upp mer känslor hos tittarna än allt grums
i en dåligt klarnad consommé.
– Jag har haft en väldig tur att matgrejen kom
in i mitt liv. Annars hade jag fått springa på repetitioner på dagarna och spela på kvällarna
och vara överlycklig om jag fi ck tjugo dagar i en
långfi lm vart tredje år, det är så det ser ut. Nu får
jag upp till tio kärleksförklaringar om dagen per
mejl. ”Vi älskar dig”, skriver de. ”Du har betytt
mer än Hyland”.
Mat, ja, det är faktiskt hög tid att äta lunch och
Per tänker laga till den. I köket har Inese förberett. Hon får koka upp vattnet, men inte pastan,
och absolut inte steka svampen. Matlagning
handlar för Per Morberg precis som skådespeleri
och judo om känsla, tajmning och intuition. Är
det de redskapen han använder för att hantera
allt i livet kanske?
– Verkligen inte, säger Inese. Per har dålig impulskontroll. Det blir som det blir. Känsla, tajmning och intuition handlar om att kunna läsa av
omgivningen och förutse eff ekterna av sitt agerande. Det kan inte alltid Per.
Medan Per koncentrerar sig på att få pastan
perfekt al dente vidareutvecklar Inese sin ståndpunkt.
– Jag har varit väldigt arg på Per, säger hon. Per
är ganska gräslig, han vet inte var gränserna går
här i livet.
Per vänder ryggen åt torpets AGA-spis och ansiktet mot Inese.
– Det tycker jag visst att jag har lärt mig, protesterar han.
– Allting du gör gör du så mycket av. Du äter
mycket, dricker mycket, går mycket, allt är så
mycket, argumenterar hon.
– Får man något eget utrymme bredvid en sådan person? undrar jag.
– Knappt, säger Inese. Men nu på lördag ska
jag åka till Indien i tio dagar med tjejkompisar!
Hon kan behöva lite semester. Inese är med
och skriver Pers texter i hans kokböcker och i
nya ”Magasin Morberg”. Arbetet som legitimerad psykoterapeut har hon tagit paus i för att i
stället hjälpa maken med hans många parallella
projekt.
Det är också hon som har plockat den karljohansvamp som Per nu steker på mycket hög
värme. Han nyper i den med härdade fi ngrar,
far ut i landet efter krusbladig persilja, häller
vispgrädden från Vagnhärad i en tunn stråle ner
i den heta stekpannan, river parmesanen rakt
över anrättningen och ställer fram var sin ångande djup tallrik på bordet.
– Ät nu, annars är det förstört. Det här är förmodligen den bästa pastan som serveras i Sverige i dag, säger han.
Linguine-pastan har precis det där lilla tuggmotståndet den får sekunden efter att kärnan
har försvunnit. Såsen är rikt doftande och krämig, karljohansvampen full av smaknyanser och
persiljan pinfärsk. Anrättningen är så njutningsfull att det är min tur att bli högröd i ansiktet,
vilket Per genast påpekar.
– Det är fantastiskt gott! berömmer jag.
– Tack, det var roligt att höra. Jag är inte förvånad.
Per slappnar av lite nu när maten är presterad.
Han lutar sig mot Inese som sitter bredvid med
håret okonstfärdigt hopsnott mitt på huvudet.
Fotografen lyfter kameran och Inese backar undan. Per drar henne till sig.
– Det passar mig perfekt att vara i bakgrunden, säger Inese.
– Det vore skönt att någon gång få byta roll,
men vi kan ju inte det, säger Per grinigt.
– Nej, svarar Inese mjukt.
Per tittar på henne.
– Har du min skjorta på dig, och inga knappar i
koftan, och helt osminkad. Du ser ju ut som Lilla
My, säger han. Och drar henne till sig igen.
Sedan går vi ut i skogen. Rättarbostaden
på Tullgarn hyr Morbergs, men den här
Linguine-pasta med egenhändigt plockad
karljohanssvamp från trakten.
I skogen går Per av sig
ångesten och Inese
fyller svampkorgen.
”Män över femtio blir
så svåra på bild. Fast
jag var ju svår redan
som sjuåring.”
”Jag har inte haft en ångestfri dag i mitt liv”
Med Helen Egelund i ”1939”.
Som Viggo i ”Rederiet”.
Foto: Jan Rydqvist Foto: Bengt Wanselius
SÖNDAG 20 NOVEMBER 2011 11
Intervju
SÖNDAG 20 NOVEMBER 2011 13
förra sekelskiftet. Väl lämpat för en dags fi ske på
en liten sjö där det fortfarande kryper svenska
fl odkräftor i bottenslammet. Det luktar döda löv.
Dimman driver över vattenytan i lodräta lakan.
Pers mobil tillkännager en strid ström av nya
meddelanden.
– Hör ni vad det blippar och blingar? Folk är
som tokiga. Jag har haft 1 200 förfrågningar i månaden i fyra och ett halvt år nu, det slutar aldrig.
Så fort det är något med mig, då ska det tjänas
pengar på mig, klagar Per.
Han tackar nej till det mesta. Det fi nns så jävla
mycket tokerier. Det är pinsamt. Sorgligt. Kvällstidningarna vill bara att pöbeln ska köpa lösnummer, det är ungefär som giljotinen förr i världen;
otäckt. Det är bara skit överallt:
– Det är ju ingenting som är bra, det är ju bara
jag och Skavlan och sedan är det ingenting att ha.
Eller, det fi nns en del andra duktiga tv-människor, men de är rätt få.
Säger Per.
Här på sjön fi nns heller inget att hämta. Det
nappar inte. Fy fan. Kanske är det fel drag. Nu
går vi upp till torpet och sätter oss framför kaminen i stället.
Inne i stugvärmen väntar Inese. Hon berättar
att hon skulle hissa upp en tung träpersienn för
några dagar sedan, men i stället fi ck den i skallen. Förmodligen resulterade smällen i en lättare hjärnskakning för hon har ont i huvudet och
känner sig illamående och trött. Men krämporna
är som bortblåsta i samma sekund som Per stiger in i rummet. Inese nästan översköljer maken
med uppmärksamhet.
– Vad fi n du är, och knäppt skjorta hela vägen
upp! strålar hon.
De träff ades 1979. Per var 19 och Inese var 25.
Hon satt i trappan på Sveriges första moderna
nattklubb, Alexandra, och väntade på sin kusin.
Per jobbade i köket som kock. Han fi ck syn på
den långhåriga kvinnan ”med bambivrister och
söt stjärt”. Hon utstrålade självkänsla, intelligens,
och att hon var lite svår. Så här i efterhand tror
han att hon hade turban. Han kunde se att hon
visste att hon var snygg, och det var lockande.
– Jag tänkte att henne skulle jag ha. Jag talade
om det, och så fi ck jag det. Så jävla enkelt var det,
säger han.
Inese hade taggarna utåt, men Per brydde sig
inte om det. Han gick bara rakt fram, pussade
henne på kinden och började prata.
– Helt orädd fast jag såg så sträng ut i knut och
brillor, säger Inese.
– Jag har beskrivit dig med bambivrister och
söt stjärt, invänder Per.
– Åh, gud så fånigt, svarar Inese.
År 1979 hade hon redan en fyraårig dotter.
Per bodde fortfarande i pojkrummet hemma
hos mamma och pappa. Inese fi xade en lägenhet åt honom. Efter ett tag fl yttade de ihop och
fi ck under de kommande 15 åren fyra döttrar till.
Per slet i krogköken, långt från restauranggästernas beundrande blickar. Han kände sig inte
sedd. Inese fi ck klara vardagsveckorna hemma i
Stockholm själv med småbarnen när Per drog till
scenskolan i Göteborg. Han studerade där i tre
och ett halvt års tid, och det var tuff t – för Inese.
Framför allt ekonomiskt.
– Vi pantade tomburkar. Jag gick överallt med
barnen och cyklade till jobbet på Långbro sjukhus där jag jobbade som psykiatrisyster, säger
hon.
Så fi ck Per en roll i Carin Mannheimers ”Svenska hjärtan”, som kom att bli en tv-klassiker,
sedd av över 2 miljoner tittare. Sedan blev han
erbjuden jobb på Dramaten. När kontraktet var
underskrivet tog han med Inese till restaurang
Prinsen, där han friade till henne.
Nu skickar han ut henne i torpets kök för att förbereda lunch på karljohansvamp, parmesan och
pasta, i stället för fi sken som vi inte fi ck. Någon
kvart senare skickar han i väg fotografen också.
– Hon märker det inte, men du är så störd av
att hon inte slutar plåta under intervjun att du
håller på att gå av på mitten. Det har jag läst av
för hundra år sedan. Nyss, när jag blev högröd i
ansiktet och var tvungen att öppna fönstret, var
det för att jag kände din irritation så tydligt. Den
fi ngertoppskänslan är min största begåvning,
det är därför jag är en så bra skådespelare, säger
han till mig.
Touché. Jag som trodde att vi skulle hit och gestalta en dramaqueen. Och så är det vi själva som
bjuder på konfl ikterna, och han som löser dem.
Vi börjar om från början: Per och hans lillasyster Maria är uppvuxna i Stockholmsförorterna
Hökarängen och Sköndal. Mamma var daghemsföreståndare och talpedagog. Pappa var rörmokare. Var det lugnt och harmoniskt?
– Det var det absolut inte, säger Per.
Hur var det då?
– Jag var ett väldigt livligt barn, jag hade enorma koncentrationssvårigheter, svårt att ta in
information. Jag fi ck gå i hjälpklass i en annan
barack med de andra dumskallarna, så var det
ju faktiskt, det kommer tillbaka till mig nu. Men
vem gick det bäst för i klassen? Jo mig. Jag har
svingat mig upp i världen, fått vistas i de fi nare
salongerna, träff at rätt intressanta människor
Mitt liv i år
1976 Tonårige Per är populär bland
fl ickorna – så populär att han
”får tacka nej”.
1975
Per blir svensk mästare i judo,
en titel han tar fl era gånger till
under 70-talet.
1979 Som nybakad kock rör sig Per
hemtamt mellan Stockholmsnattens inneställen. Han siktas
av regissören Roman Polanski
som vill ha honom i sin nästa
fi lm och skickar en Parisbiljett.
Men fi lmen skjuts på framtiden.
1984 Efter tre försök kommer Per in
på scenskolan i Göteborg.
Inese och Per
träff ades på
krogen 1979.
Per var 19 och
Inese 25.
”Fingertoppskänslan är min största begåvning”
SÖNDAG 20 NOVEMBER 2011 15
”Jag är för tung för
den här typen av
artiklar.”
32 SÖNDAG 25 SEPTEMBER 2011 Kenya SÖNDAG 25 SEPTEMBER 2011 ○ RESOR OCH UPPLEVELSER JORDEN RUNT
Vardagen för rovdjuren i viltreservatet
Masai Mara i Kenya går mest ut på att
ligga och sova. Här en grupp loja lejon
– ett av de fem stora djur som varje
safariresenär drömmer om att få se.
Övriga är elefant, leopard, noshörning
och afrikansk buff el.
34 SÖNDAG 25 SEPTEMBER 2011
Alla i vår lilla grupp bär på samma
dröm. Vi inser det när vi landar
på den lilla landningsbanan,
mitt i viltreservatet Masai Mara
i sydvästra Kenya. Alla hoppas
vi få se ”The big fi ve” – lejon,
leopard, elefant, noshörning och afrikansk buff el.
Uttrycket myntades av storviltsjägare, vilket
förklarar att till exempel fl odhästen inte fi nns
med. Den var inte så spännande att jaga.
Det ska snart visa sig att vissa av de fem är lättare
att få syn på än andra.
För fyra år sedan var Kenya det nya stora resmålet för charterbolagen. Här kunde man åka på
spännande safari i de stora nationalparkerna för
att sedan förfl ytta sig till tropiska stränder längs
kusten mot Indiska oceanen för bad och vattensporter.
Det hann bli en säsong. Alla charterresor till Kenya
ställdes in efter valet i december 2007 som resulterade i upplopp och våld mellan etniska grupper. Över tusen personer beräknas ha dödats och
närmare en halv miljon människor fördrevs från
sina hem.
Men inbördeskriget uteblev, och nu är situationen i huvudsak lugn igen.
Det gäller visserligen inte i den nordöstra delen
av landet, nära gränsen till Somalia. Den svenska
ambassaden i Kenya manar till stor försiktighet
om man reser närmare Somalias gräns än tre
svenska mil. Dessutom har den terrorstämplade
somaliska organisationen al-Shabaab hotat Kenya
med terrordåd. I norra Kenya är svältkatastrofen
ett faktum bland de många somalier som samlas
i redan överfulla fl yktingläger.
Det är dock långt från landets södra delar i
detta stora land, där turismen är en av de viktiga
inkomstkällorna.Nu satsar de tre stora svenska
charterbolagen åter på Kenya.
Det är lätt att förstå varför. De välskötta nationalparkerna erbjuder fantastiska scenerier, vädret är
behagligt, människorna varma och välkomnande.
Dessutom låter sig djurskådande på savannen
väl kombineras med en rejäl badsemester. Norr
och söder om Mombasa, Kenyas andra stad, breder de vita stränderna ut sig och Indiska oceanens
turkosa vatten inbjuder till såväl bad som snorkling och lata dagar vid poolen.
Safari ägnar man sig med fördel åt som en start
på Kenyasemestern. Vår resa börjar med en fl ygtur till naturreservatet Masai Mara i sydvästra
delen av landet.
På landningsbanan möts vi av massajer som ska
vara våra guider under besöket. De kan ge svar på
nästan alla frågor.
Redan på vägen från landningsbanan till vår
camp ser vi elefanter, giraff er, zebror, antiloper
och lejon. En smutsig hyena ligger mitt på vägen.
Den reser sig sävligt ur sin lergrop och lommar
i väg med en sned blick på vår bil. Den ser precis
så grym ut – i ordets gamla bemärkelse – som jag
föreställt mig.
Två av de fem stora – lejon och elefanter – är sålunda avbockade inom en timme från landningen.
I Masai Mara fi nns omkring 400 lejon. Tre honor
ligger och sover under ett träd. En har sina tassar
lojt uppsträckta mot stammen och ingen av dem
bryr sig om oss.
Det fi nns ett skäl. Parken öppnade 1961 och all
jakt på djur här förbjöds 1967. Att bilar skulle innebära ett hot går helt enkelt inte upp för lejonen
som ser ut att smälta maten efter en god jakt.
Ont om mat har de inte.Masai Mara härbärKenya
Utanför bilen breder savannen ut sig ändlöst,
fåtaliga akaciaträd och buskar bryter horisonten.
Safariproff s. Massajen Sami Kaleku
har drömt om att arbeta som guide
i Masai Mara ända sedan han var barn.
Nu lotsar han safariturister sedan
två år tillbaka och hans kunskaper
imponerar.
36 SÖNDAG 25 SEPTEMBER 2011
Kenya
Från chartersafari till strandlyx.Till Kenya fi nns resealternativ för alla smaker.
Sol och bad
○Safariresan låter sig med fördel
kombineras med sol och bad längs
Mombasakusten. Där är vattentemperaturen konstant ca 26 grader.
○För den som bokar själv går det att
hitta hotell för från 500 kronor per
dygn och uppåt.
○Visum: Ja. Kan ordnas via Kenyas
ambassad i Stockholm eller köpas vid
ankomsten.
○Bästa tid att åka: Från december till
mars.
○Vaccinationer: Grundskydd. Vaccin
mot hepatit A rekommenderas, liksom
malariaprofylax.
○Största irritationsmomentet:
”Beach boys” – strandförsäljare som
kan vara alltför påträngande. Eftersom
alla stränder i Kenya är allmänna, kan
hotellen inte stänga ute dem.
Resa dit
○De tre stora researrangörerna Ving,
Fritidsresor och Apollo ordnar alla
såväl safari- som badresor till Kenya.
○Cirkapriser: Från 10 000 kronor per
person för en vecka. Från 13 000 kronor
per person för två veckor.
○Flera mindre arrangörer fi nns som
ordnar mer exklusiva resor till högre
priser, till exempel Jambo Tours,
JK Safaris, Tour Africa, Kenzan Tours
samt Nygren och Lind.
○Allt fl er väljer dessutom att
själva arrangera sina resor, berättar
Karl-Johan von Heland, svensk som
är med och driver safaricampen
Entumoto i Masai Mara. Där tar man inte
emot de stora chartergrupperna utan
koncentrerar sig på mindre grupper och
ensamresenärer.
○Flyg Stockholm – Nairobi-tur och
retur går att hitta från 6 000 kronor.
Därefter tillkommer fl yg från
inrikesfl ygplatsen Wilson Airport till
någon av nationalparkerna.
Massajerna utgör endast 2 procent av Kenyas befolkning, men har ändå blivit en symbol för landet,
sannolikt på grund av deras levande gamla traditioner och särpräglade klädsel, för det mesta i rött.
På kvällen, i nattsvart mörker endast upplyst av
skenet från elden, dansar och sjunger gruppen på
campen igen, och bjuder upp en eller annan gäst
att dansa med.
Därefter vecklar de upp sina dukar och säljer
souvenirer och konsthantverk. Då är det svårt att
inte köpa.
På natten hör jag djur utanför som skäller och
ylar. De låter som vildhundar eller vargar, men
nästa morgon förklarar Sami lugnande: det är
bara zebrorna.
Vi kliver upp redan vid femtiden. Efter frukost
åker vi en timme genom den kolsvarta natten. Nu
ska vi se savannen från luften. Jag sviker mitt eget
löfte till mitt höjdrädda jag: att aldrig åka luftballong. Ska det ske någon gång så måste det bli här
och nu.
Snart ser vi horder av buffl ar nedanför oss, och
giraff erna som lugnt betar på trädkronorna. Det
är stilla och magiskt, och efter en timmes luftfärd
landar vi mjukt strax intill våra följebilar, som tar
oss till en uppdukad frukost under några träd på
savannen. Just där och då känner man sig som en
blandning av lyxresenär och kolonialist.
Masai Mara är ett av Kenyasmånga viltreservat
eller nationalparker. Bland övriga som svenska
reseföretag nu fl yger charter till fi nns Tsavo – East
respektive West – och Amboseli, där man kan bo
vid foten av Kilimanjaro.
Amboseli har välordnade grusvägar som bilarna inte får avvika från. Lika nära djuren som
i Masai Mara kommer man i allmänhet inte här.
De många palmerna antyder att också klimatet
är annorlunda, och landskapet är kryddat med
svarta, vulkaniska lavastenar från Kilimanjaros
senaste utbrott – för 360 000 år sedan.
Hit kommer man inte minst för de många elefanternas skull. Det är inte ovanligt att se ett 30-tal
av dem skrida fram över savannen, anförda av sin
ledare – matriarken, den äldsta honan.
En och annan gnu står och betar på savannen,
kvarlämnad av fl ocken som dragit sig tillbaka till
Serengeti på den tanzaniska sidan.
En thomsongasell ligger död bredvid vägen.
– Om några timmar är han borta, säger guiden.
Uppäten av gamar, schakaler eller hyenor.
Något senare ser vi en död hyena, och jag frågar:
– Kommer den att ätas upp av andra hyenor?
– Nej, svarar guiden. Inte av schakaler eller gamar heller. Inget djur äter en död hyena.
Man lär sig så mycket när man åker på safari.
Som att giraff erna försvarar sig med bra syn och
bra sparkar. Det gäller för dem att aldrig slappna
av helt; giraff er sover bara i snitt 20 minuter per
dygn. Giraff ens främsta fi ende är människan, som
jagar den för köttets skull. Det lär vara gott.
Så hur gick det med ”The big fi ve”?
Noshörningarna har blivit färre på grund av
jakten på deras horn. Närmare dem kom vi inte
än till de noshörningshuvuden i järn som pryder
grindarna in till en av nationalparkerna.
Också leoparderna höll sig undan. De är skygga,
lever i träden och jagar på nätterna.
Som tröst köper jag en i trä. Den får duga.
När jag stolt visar den för guiden ler han och
säger:
– Det är nog en gepard.
Mats Carlbom
är reporter på DN Söndag.
mats.carlbom
Fredrik Funck
är fotograf på DN.
Snart ser vi horder av buffl ar
nedanför oss, det är stilla och
magiskt.
Stränderna vid Indiska Oceanen är paradisiska. Reven en bit ut skyddar från de
största vågorna, här Dianai söder om Mombasa. Foto: Fredrik Funck
Kluvet. Efter
luftfärden väntar
frukost på savannen.
Det är lätt att känna
sig som en blandning
mellan lyxresenär och
kolonialist.
”Jag syns inte ...” Också
i elefanttäta parken
Tsavo East gäller det
att titta åt rätt håll om
man vill se alla djur.
Safari vid poolen. På
fl era håll, som här
i Tsavo East, kan man
uppleva några av
savannens djur utan att
kliva ur badkläderna.
Savannens farligaste
djur. En fl ock med
afrikanska buffl ar sedd
från ovan under en
gryningsfärd i ballong
i Masai Mara.
SÖNDAG 25 SEPTEMBER 2011 33
Kenyas välskötta nationalparker bjuder på fantastiska
scenerier för dem som drömmer om en klassisk safari.
Djurskådandet går utmärkt att kombinera med en lyxig
badsemester i Indiska oceanen.
Mäktiga
Masai Mara
text Mats Carlbom foto Fredrik Funck
WWW.DN.SE/RESOR
1 000 i topp. Ny bok listar resmålen du inte får missa. Sid 38
4 städer. Spring i Rocky Balboas trappa i Philadelphia. Sid 40
Koll på Kreta. Lonely Planets expert tipsar om guldkornen. Sid 43
SÖNDAG 25 SEPTEMBER 2011 35
Pigg uppstickare. En
giraff är alltid på språng
och sover bara cirka
20 minuter per dygn.
Dess värsta fi ende
är männi skan som
traditionellt har jagat
dem för köttets skull.
Långsamt
börjar hjorden
på ett hundratal
buffl ar att röra
sig mot oss med
sänkta huvuden.
Spänningen blir
påtaglig.
gerar åtta olika sorters antiloper och tre olika
sorters gaseller. De strövar i stora hjordar, liksom
zebrorna, och jag får ett nytt perspektiv på det
här med rovdjur och off er. I det stora ekologiska
spelet är det försvinnande få djur som blir uppätna. Färre i verkliga livet än i de fl esta dokumentärer om vilda djur vi kan se på tv och som
naturligt nog koncentrerar sig på de få tillfällen
då rovdjuren går till attack. Vardagen för dem är
mest att ligga och sova.
Utanför bilen breder savannen ut sig ändlöst, fåtaliga akaciaträd och buskar bryter horisonten.
Plötsligt saktar vår guide ned och pekar rakt
fram. Utan honom hade vi inte sett dem, men nu
står vi bara några meter från tre geparder. En av
dem lyfter slött på huvudet för att titta på vår bil,
men reagerar annars inte.
De tre är bröder, säger vår guide.
Hur vet han det? Förklaringen är enkel: När gepardens ungar växer upp går honorna var och en
åt sitt håll, men bröderna lever tillsammans resten
av livet. Så ser man tre geparder tillsammans så
vet man att de är bröder.
Geparden är världens snabbaste däggdjur. Den
lever och jagar på marken och äter snabbt upp
sitt byte. Orsaken är att de måste äta upp innan
konkurrenter om bytet upptäcker dem. Hyenorna
kommer i fl ock, och dem klarar inte geparderna
av. Leoparderna har det lättare; de plockar upp bytet i träden, dit varken hyenor eller lejon kan ta sig.
Vad skulle hända om vi gick ur bilen nu? frågar jag.
– De skulle springa härifrån, svarar Sami.
Och om vi gick ur bredvid lejonen?
– De skulle inte springa ...
Sami Kaleku har varit guide i två år. Det är något
han drömt om att bli sedan han var barn, och hans
kunskaper imponerar.
På långt håll ser vi ett stort dammoln som rör
sig framåt över savannen: den afrikanska buff eln.
Vi kör ditåt, och efter en kort stund står vi några
tiotal meter framför den stora hjorden – savannens farligaste djur
– De dödar människor utan annan anledning än
att man är där, säger Sami Kaleku. Hellre möter
jag ett lejon.
Buffl arna sluter sig samman, stirrar på oss. De
verkar inte ha samma avslappnade inställning till
bilar som lejonen och geparderna – och alla andra
djur på savannen. Långsamt börjar hjorden på kanske ett hundratal djur att röra sig mot oss med sänkta huvuden. Spänningen blir påtaglig och vår guide
fi nner det lämpligt att långsamt köra därifrån.
Vi kan bocka av nummer tre på listan över de
fem stora. Två kvar.
Vi är inte de enda turisterna som far omkring
på savannen med massajguide, det står klart när
vi närmar oss en storfamilj med ett tiotal lejon
vid en träddunge. Runt honorna kliver ungarna
omkring och diar den hona som är närmast – om
det är den egna mamman eller inte är ointressant
för både dem och honorna. Det är en makalös syn,
man kan inte se sig mätt.
Men snart går exklusiviteten förlorad. Ytterligare en bil ansluter. Sedan en tredje, och en fj ärde ...
Till slut är vi åtta bilar som omringat lejonen, med
turister som hänger ut med klickande kameror.
Vi störs nog mer av denna massturism än lejonen, som obekymrat leker och sover vidare i sitt
kollektiv av mammor och ungar.
Vår camp drivs av massajer som hälsar välkomna
med traditionell sång och dans, inklusive
de karaktäristiska höga hoppen.
Mitt i det vilda.
Redan på vägen från
landningsbanan till
lägret kan man se
savannens djur på
nära håll. Elefanter,
giraff er, antiloper, lejon
– och som här – en fl ock
zebror.
Sömnig sprinter.
Världens snabbaste
däggdjur, geparden,
kan komma upp
i 100 kilometer
per timme på korta
sträckor. Men efter
maten sover de helst.
Maffi g syn. I nationalparken Amboseli är
det inte ovanligt att se
ett trettiotal elefanter
skrida fram över
savannen, anförda av
matriarken, den äldsta
honan.
Massmys. I Masai Mara
fi nns omkring 400
lejon. Här en storfamilj
som obekymrat leker
och sover vidare i sitt
kollektiv av mammor
och ungar medan bil
efter bil med turister
ansluter.
SÖNDAG 25 SEPTEMBER 2011 37
○I Nairobi fi nns ett antal så kallade
ground handlers av skiftande kvalitet
som erbjuder hjälp med praktiska
arrangemang, som transfer mellan
fl ygplatser och andra detaljer.
○Utöver ensamresarna menar
Karl-Johan von Heland att det fi nns tre
kategorier av Kenyaresenärer.
1. Charterturisterna som åker i grupper
med de stora arrangörerna.
2. De som vill betala lite mer för att
åka i mindre grupp och bo på lite mer
exklusiva camper.
3. De som vill betala mest och bo
lyxigt. Då kan resan kosta uppemot
100 000 kronor per person.
Kenya
○ Antal invånare: 38 miljoner.
○ Huvudstad: Nairobi (3 miljoner inv).
○ Yta: 580 000 kvadratkilometer
(Sverige 450 000).
○Språk: Alla kenyaner talar engelska,
swahili, och ett av de 55 lokala språken.
○Religion: Ca 70 procent kristna, cirka
10 procent muslimer, minoriteter av
bahai, hinduer och sikher.
○Visste du att ...
... landet Kenya har inspirerat fi lmen
”Lejonkungen”, rollfi guren Simbas
namn är swahili för lejon. Ledmotivet
”Hakuna matata” betyder det fi nns
inga bekymmer.
25mil
UGANDA
TANZANIA
ETIOPIEN SUDAN
Nairobi Masai Mara
Amboseli
Tsavo East
Tsavo West
Mombasa
Victoriasjön
KENYA SOMALIA
Kenya är som bäst från december till mars. Foto: Fredrik Funck
När mörkret faller och de lokala
massajmännen sjungit och dansat
lägger de fram konsthantverk och
souvenirer.
Frontpages Main paper
Frontpages Sections
News spread
Sports spread
Spreads from Sunday supplement
Culture spread
174 Chapter 6
There are no hard-and-fast rules for how big or small
text and headings should be. Logically, the display text
information intended to catch the eye and be read first,
such as headings and introductions – will dominate
the page by being larger than body text and captions,
while body copy should always be large enough to
be readable by its intended audience. It’s a good idea
to experiment with these by printing them out at
different sizes with different leadings. There are no
formulaic type sizes that always work for all situations
– it’s more about using judgement to determine what
looks and works best for the publication’s readership.
It is also worth considering that most typefaces were
designed for a particular purpose, and for that reason
may work better at certain sizes than others. But by
using such faces in offbeat or unexpected ways, a
designer can deliver an inventive, original or starkly
awkward layout that may be perfect for its readership.
Newspaper headlines, by contrast, should have
nothing ‘tricksy’ about them; they need to be clear,
clean and unambiguous in their design. This is not to
say that serifs can’t be used for newspaper headlines;
many quality papers use italics and serifs in headlines
British tabloid newspapers (also known as
‘redtops’) rarely use serif faces, and often use
all capitals in their headlines, as seen here in
the Daily Mirror (above). While the use of
an upper-case sans serif fails to distinguish
the newspaper from its rivals, it very clearly
signals the type of newspaper it is. The
redtops pride themselves on using dense
typography to pack their pages full of stories,
and allow little white space to create
a proposal of value for money in a very
competitive market where reader loyalty
shifts with the stories of the day.
By contrast, the Swedish daily Dagens
Nyheter (top) uses serif fonts for the pull
quote and drop cap, thereby establishing
a more literary tone. The use of horizontal
white space also signals a more relaxed,
intelligent pace. These combine to convey
the sense that the content is analytical and
thoughtful. There is nothing rushed about
the page – it demands a deeper level of
engagement and commitment from the
reader than a tabloid would.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Essential design skills 175
Changing the impact of
images and copy with layouts
In this layout the headline is hero – it
dominates the page and draws the eye’s
attention. Echoing a tabloid newspaper, the
headline is hard hitting while the body text
is lowest in priority. There are only small
variations in typography, little white space
and short articles. This gives the newspaper
an immediate and throw-away quality.
Using the same image and copy, this spread
gives an entirely different feel. With a softer
headline, greater white space, and the
introduction of pull quotes and subheads,
the body text now carries the highest priority.
This layout tries to create easy access to
the article but still uses a large headline and
image to draw attention to the spread. With
the feel of an upmarket magazine, it uses
the same components to create a more
intellectual look for the article.
The image is the dominant feature of this
layout. Aided by dotted rules, a short, single
story and a dominant stand-first, it achieves a
glossy-magazine feel. These publications are
quick to navigate and easy to flick through.
The images tend to play hero in order to grab
the attention of a skimming reader.
THE HARD-HITTING
NEWS HEADLINE
Dummy settings which
use other languages to
approximate text have the
disadvantage of distracting
attention to themselves.
Simultext is effective in any typeface, at
whatever size and format is required.
Paragraphs may be long or short. Text
can be to complete any area, as the copy
is then simply repeated with different
starting points. This is dummy text. It is
intended to be read but have no real
meaning. A simulation of actual copy,
using ordinary words with normal letter
frequencies, it cannot deceive the eye.
Settings which use other languages
or even gibberish to approximate text
have the disadvantage they distract
attention to themselves. As a simulation
of actual copy, using ordinary words
with normal letter frequencies, cannot
deceive eye or brain. Simultext is always
effective in any typeface, at whatever size
needed format the required. Paragraphs
might be long or short. What you see is
the dummy text. It is intended be read
but have no meaning. As a simulation of
actual copy, using words with normal
letter frequencies, can’t deceive eye brain.
Copy can be produced to complete any
area, as the basic copy is repeated with
different starting points. It is intended
to be read but have no real meaning.
This is dummy text.
Presentation copy uses languages or
gibberish to approximate text have the
disadvantage they distract attention to
themselves. Simultext is effective in any
typeface, whatever the size and format
is required. Paragraphs may be long or
short. This is dummy text. Intended to
be read but have no meaning. As a
simulation of actual copy, using words
with normal letter frequencies, cannot
deceive eye or brain. What you see here
is dummy text.
Simultext is effective in any typeface,
whatever size and format. Paragraphs
may be long or short. Text is produced
to complete any area, as basic copy is
simply repeated with different starting
points. This is dummy text. Intended to
be read but have no meaning. This is
dummy text. It is intended to be read
but have no meaning. As a simulation of
actual copy, using ordinary words with
normal letter frequencies, it cannot
SECOND STORY
HEADLINE FOR
RELATED NEW
ARTICLE
A simulation of actual copy,
using ordinary words with
normal letter frequencies.
Presentation copy uses languages or
gibberish to approximate text have the
disadvantage they distract attention to
themselves. Simultext is effective in any
typeface, whatever the size and format
is required. Paragraphs may be long or
short. This is dummy text. Intended to
be read but have no meaning. As a
simulation of actual copy, using words
with normal letter frequencies, cannot
deceive eye or brain. What you see here
is dummy text.
Simultext is effective in any typeface,
whatever size and format. Paragraphs
may be long or short. Text is produced
to complete any area, as basic copy is
simply repeated with different starting
points. This is dummy text. Intended to
be read but have no meaning. This is
dummy text. It is intended to be read
but have no meaning. As a simulation of
actual copy, using ordinary words with
normal letter frequencies, it cannot
deceive eye or brain.
Simultext is effective in any typeface,
at whatever size and format is required.
Paragraphs may be long or short. Text
can be to complete any area, as the copy
is then simply repeated with different
starting points. This is dummy text. It is
intended to be read but have no real
meaning. A simulation of actual copy,
using ordinary words with normal letter
frequencies, it cannot deceive the eye.
Settings which use other languages
or even gibberish to approximate text
have the disadvantage they distract
attention to themselves. As a simulation
of actual copy, using ordinary words
with normal letter frequencies, cannot
deceive eye or brain. Simultext is always
effective in any typeface, at whatever size
DUMMY SETTINGS which use other languages to approximate text have
the inherent disadvantage of distracting attention to themselves.
A SIMULATION of actual copy, using ordinary words with normal letter frequencies which use
other or even gibberish to approximate text have the inherent disadvantage distract attention.
24 25
The softerhitting news
headline
Simultext is effective in any typeface, at
whatever size and format is required.
Paragraphs may be long or short. Text
can be to complete any area, as the copy
is then simply repeated with different
starting points. This is dummy text. It is
intended to be read but have no real
meaning. A simulation of actual copy,
using ordinary words with normal letter
frequencies, it cannot deceive the eye.
Dummy settings which use other
languages or even gibberish to
approximate text have the inherent
disadvantage that they distract
attention to themselves.
Settings which use other languages or
even gibberish to approximate text
have the disadvantage they distract
attention to themselves. As a simulation
of actual copy, using ordinary words
with normal letter frequencies, cannot
deceive eye or brain. Simultext is always
effective in any typeface, at whatever size
needed format the required. Paragraphs
might be long or short. What you see is
the dummy text. It is intended be read
but have no meaning. As a simulation of
actual copy, using words with normal
letter frequencies, can’t deceive eye brain.
Copy can be produced to complete any
area, as the basic copy is repeated with
different starting points. It is intended
to be read but have no real meaning.
This is dummy text.
Presentation copy uses languages or
gibberish to approximate text have the
disadvantage they distract attention to
themselves. Simultext is effective in any
typeface, whatever the size and format
is required. Paragraphs may be long or
short. This is dummy text. Intended to
be read but have no meaning. As a
simulation of actual copy, using words
with normal letter frequencies, cannot
deceive eye or brain. What you see here
is dummy text.
Simultext is effective in any typeface,
whatever size and format. Paragraphs
may be long or short. Text is produced
to complete any area, as basic copy is
then simply repeated with different
starting points. This is dummy text. It is
intended to be read but have no real
meaning. A simulation of actual copy,
using ordinary words with normal letter
frequencies, it cannot deceive the eye.
This is dummy text. It is intended
to be read but have no meaning.
A simulation of actual copy.
Simultext is effective in any typeface, at
whatever size and format is required.
Paragraphs may be long or short. Text
can be to complete any area, as the copy
is then simply repeated with different
starting points. This is dummy text. It is
intended to be read but have no real
meaning. A simulation of actual copy,
using ordinary words with normal letter
frequencies, it cannot deceive the eye.
Settings which use other languages
or even gibberish to approximate text
have the disadvantage they distract
attention to themselves. As a simulation
of actual copy, using ordinary words
with normal letter frequencies, cannot
deceive eye or brain. Simultext is always
effective in any typeface, at whatever size
needed format the required. Paragraphs
might be long or short. What you see is
the dummy text. It is intended be read
but have no meaning. As a simulation of
actual copy, using words with normal
letter frequencies, can’t deceive eye brain.
Copy can be produced to complete any
area, as the basic copy is repeated with
different starting points. It is intended
to be read but have no real meaning.
This is dummy text.
Presentation copy uses languages or
gibberish to approximate text have the
disadvantage they distract attention to
themselves. Simultext is effective in any
typeface, whatever the size and format
is required. Paragraphs may be long or
short. This is dummy text. Intended to
be read but have no meaning. As a
simulation of actual copy, using words
with normal letter frequencies, cannot
deceive eye or brain. What you see here
is dummy text. This is dummy text.
Use even gibberish to
approximate text
Simultext is effective in any typeface,
whatever size and format. Paragraphs
may be long or short. Text is produced
to complete any area, as basic copy is
simply repeated with different starting
points. This is dummy text.
Settings which use other languages
or even gibberish to approximate text
have the disadvantage distract attention
This is dummy text. It is intended
to be read but have no meaning.
A simulation of actual copy with.
Effective in any typeface, at whatever size
needed format the required. Paragraphs
might be long or short. What you see is
the dummy text. It is intended be read
but have no meaning. As a simulation of
actual copy, using words with normal
letter frequencies, can’t deceive eye brain.
Copy can be produced to complete any
area, as the basic copy is repeated with
different starting points. It is intended
to be read but have no real meaning.
This is dummy text.
Presentation copy uses languages or
gibberish to approximate text have the
disadvantage they distract attention to
themselves. Simultext is effective in any
typeface, whatever the size and format
is required. Paragraphs may be long or
short. This is dummy text. Intended to
be read but have no meaning. As a
simulation of actual copy, using words
with normal letter frequencies.
Dummy settings which use other languages to approximate text have
the inherent disadvantage of distracting attention to themselves.
What you see is the dummy text.
24 25
The mediumhitting news
headline
imultext is effective in any type
face, at whatever size and format
is required. Paragraphs may be long or
short. Text can be to complete any area,
as the copy is then simply repeated with
aifferent starting points. This is dummy
text. It is intended to be read but have
no real meaning. A simulation of actual
copy, using ordinary words with normal
letter frequencies, it cannot deceive eye.
Dummy settings which use other
languages or even gibberish to
approximate text have the inherent
disadvantage that they distract
lots of attention to themselves.
Settings which use other languages or
even gibberish to approximate text
have the disadvantage they distract
attention to themselves. As a simulation
of actual copy, using ordinary words
with normal letter frequencies, cannot
deceive eye or brain. Simultext is always
effective in any typeface, at whatever size
needed format the required. Presentation
copy uses other languages or gibberish to
approximate text have the inherent
disadvantage they distract attention to
themselves. Simultext is effective in any
typeface, whatever the size and format
is required. Paragraphs may be long.
This is dummy text. It is intended
to be read but have no meaning.
A simulation of actual copy with.
Effective in any typeface, at whatever size
needed format the required. Paragraphs
might be long or short. What you see is
the dummy text. It is intended be read
but have no meaning. As a simulation of
actual copy, using words with normal
letter frequencies, can’t deceive eye brain.
Copy can be produced to complete any
area, as the basic copy is repeated with
different starting points. It is intended
to be read but have no real meaning.
This is dummy text.
Presentation copy uses languages or
gibberish to approximate text have the
disadvantage they distract attention to
themselves. Simultext is effective in any
typeface, whatever the size and format
is required. Paragraphs may be long or
short. This is dummy text. Intended to
be read but have no meaning. As a
simulation of actual copy, using words
with normal letter frequencies. Graphs
might be long or short. What you see is
the dummy text. It is intended be read
but have no meaning. As a simulation of
actual copy, using words with normal
letter frequencies, can’t deceive eye brain.
This is dummy text.
Dummy settings which use other languages
or even gibberish to approximate text have
the inherent disadvantage of distracting.
S
24 25
176 Chapter 6
to impart a gravitas and quality that sans-serif heads
sometimes lack.
Readability and usability are the main considerations
when choosing a body typeface because of its vital
role in communicating the editorial message. Broadly
speaking, we are more accustomed to reading serif
faces, and, traditionally, these are used in long columns
of text, such as feature pages, with sans-serif faces
offering visual variation through their use in shorter
texts (news pages, reviews, box text and so forth).
The use of a serif typeface gives a formal feel, while a
sans-serif face has a more relaxed, contemporary look.
If a letterform is curvaceous and flowing like a script
face, this delivers a softer feeling, whereas a hardedged, Germanic gothic typeface makes a very
different statement (but as both of these are very hard
to read neither should be considered for large amounts
of body copy). Type is meant to be read as a shape, and
While Fishwrap’s format and stock change
from issue to issue, what unites them, says
graphic designer Lisa Wagner Holley, is
‘typography – a sensitivity to working with
it, and carefulness about the read and the
reader’s experience’. Editorial elements are
shared also, using pull-quote texts to unify
images (footnoting conversational ideas to
address the reader more intimately). Fonts –
in this issue, Minion, Trade Gothic, Knockout
and Young Baroque – are carefully considered
so that they work with each other. As Wagner
Holley explains, ‘The text is very important
to us as we try to keep the read friendly,
legible, smart.’
Essential design skills 177
sometimes as a visual element in its own right. It is
one of the most flexible elements of editorial design –
the stylistic muscle of a publication.
Type use in newspapers
While typography underpins the design of all editorial
matter, its use in newspapers differs from that in
magazines. As Mark Porter explains, ‘In newspapers
the first priority is always legibility of typefaces and
readability of pages. Only after that do you think about
using type to establish a distinctive voice for the paper,
and try and create beautiful and dramatic typographic
design.’ In terms of key font considerations for handling
typeface in newspapers, Porter adds, ‘Text legibility is
by far the most crucial. In display type, colour and
range of weights also become more important.’ Porter’s
introduction of the custom-designed Egyptian for The
Guardian as both headline and body font is unusual,
but, with more than 200 weights, the font shows a
versatility and ability to perform in its different roles
that is rare for a single typeface.
In introducing new fonts to a publication, whether
commissioned or existing, the creative director must
ensure that the relationship of the type to the brand,
content and other design elements works as well as it
can. They do this by trusting their instinct and by
understanding the publication, says Mark Porter:
‘Egyptian was commissioned for The Guardian
because we wanted something that had some of
the properties of a classic serif typeface, while
remaining modern and distinctive. It had to be
legible and flexible and have a strong personality,
and it succeeds in this. The range of weights also
enables us to avoid the system, which most other
newspapers adopt, of mixing a serif and a sans –
in most sections we only use Egyptian, which gives
the paper a unique typographic character.’
Type as expression
In layouts where it isn’t possible to use images, or
where images are dull, typography has to be handled
particularly creatively, a role that evokes medieval
illuminated manuscripts and continues with
At design magazine Metropolis, former
creative director Criswell Lappin was not
afraid to experiment with guest headline fonts
if such an approach worked for a particular
piece. While fonts for body text and caption
information stay consistent (Bodoni Book
and Trade Gothic), the typography used in
headlines is often dictated by the story,
especially if a specific font or stylistic
treatment relates to the content. This is a
significant part of the Metropolis brand and
is the opposite of the standard ‘house fonts’
system used in most publications. This
opener for a 20-page feature on Rem
Koolhaas’s design for the new Seattle Public
Library is a good example. Driven by the
concept of the building, ‘the main idea was to
identify the building as a collaborative project
rather than attribute the building to one iconic
architect, which is so often the norm with
a well-publicized building like this,’ explains
Lappin. ‘The names on the first page function
as an extensive byline for the project, and the
list is cropped to indicate that there are more
participants. We have the liberty to do this
because of the subject we cover – design.
There are not many magazines where I think
this system would work. Sometimes we have
a feature well where each headline is set in
a different typeface, but it still works because
it is done smartly with consideration to the
content of each piece.’
178 Chapter 6
Too many publishers, editors and designers
fear that large blocks of text will deter a
reader. But used as shapes and tones, blocks
of text can offer an elegant, simple beauty.
David Hillman on Nova (left below) happily
filled spreads with nothing but dense columns
of text together with pull quotes or drop caps,
while on an issue of Emigre (opposite) David
Carson used just text and folios to express an
intensely intellectual dialogue.
A great combination of fonts underpins The
New York Times Magazine (left): Cheltenham
(redesigned by Jonathan Hoefler), Stymie
(redesigned by Cyrus Highsmith and Matthew
Carter), Garamond and Helvetica. The
designer’s care and love of typography are
particularly in evidence in this issue about
design. ‘This page serves as an introduction
to the entire issue, it telegraphs to the reader
that they will be reading and discovering ideas
about design and culture. That mission drives
the design, the idea of which was to present
the history of typography in a concise,
telegraphic fashion. We asked the
typographer Tobias Frere-Jones to choose 12
fonts that presented the history of type, from
Old English through to grunge style. We began
the story in the magazine with an initial cap
from one of those fonts, and all of those fonts
are represented at the bottom of this title
page with the letter “A”. The design is
satisfying because the hierarchy of
information is clear, the proportions are
classic and the letterforms are both beautiful
and informational.’ – Janet Froelich, former
art director.
Essential design skills 179
imageless advertising posters. The confident editorial
designer can have a huge amount of fun with type. In
fact, the duller the material, image or copy, the greater
the challenge for the designer to employ imaginative
and creative skills, using techniques such as typeface
juxtaposition, changing the shape and arrangement of
elements or letterforms, and creating scale contrast.
Look at concrete poetry, such as the work of Carlos
Drummond de Andrade, Stéphane Mallarmé, George
Herbert and Ian Hamilton Finlay; look at Russian
Constructivism, the Bauhaus and the Dadaists, and,
later, the work of Otto Storch on McCall’s magazine,
Alexey Brodovitch on Harper’s Bazaar, Tom Wolsey on
Queen and Town, Harri Peccinotti on Nova, Neville
Brody on The Face, Fabien Baron on Vogue, David
Carson on Beach Culture and RayGun, Martin Venezky
on Speak and Vince Frost on Zembla to see some great
examples of type used in this way.
Type as illustration
While type is, at its most basic, a method of conveying
words, it can, of course, do much more. An editorial
designer will use type to interpret and express the
editorial, communicate meaning, offer variation, work
with the image and other design elements to convey
emotions or make symbolic or lateral links. These can
be achieved in a number of ways: manipulation can
offer opportunities for creating links between, or
playing off, the type, image and meaning; combining
different weights, leadings, sizes and ranging can offer
expressive abstract or literal interpretations of the
content; the use of a particular clichéd typeface, such
as a gothic or typewriter face, can create a symbolic or
cultural link that immediately conveys something
about the content.
180 Chapter 6
The serif/sans combination is the standard
system used in almost every newspaper in
the world, so when Mark Porter brought Paul
Barnes and Christian Schwartz in to design a
new face for the Berliner Guardian (above and
left), he was expecting to combine a redrawn
Helvetica with the new face. ‘But when we
arrived at the Egyptian and they created three
basic weights – a thin, a regular and a black
– there was a light-bulb moment when we
realized that a full range of weights in the
Egyptian would give us all the flexibility we
needed,’ says Porter. There are now more than
200 weights to the font, beginning with the
8-point Egyptian text face.
Essential design skills 181
These two spreads show very different but
equally strong and innovative uses of type
as illustration. For Speak magazine (right),
Martin Venezky draws on his collection of
typographic ephemera to construct an
innovative illustration for the subject – an
exploration of the relationship between rock
and contemporary art. Equally appropriate
and reflective of its subject is Vince Frost’s
typographic illustration for a Zembla feature
about nationalism (above).
182 Chapter 6
Finding type
Whether it is in the form of cookie cutters, fridge
magnets, pasta shapes or hair accessories, type can
be found in many ways. Martin Venezky scours flea
markets and antique stores for it; Vince Frost has
probably visited every letterpress foundry in England
in search of it; Alan Kitching has made a career from
illustrating with it; and most designers will probably
have some quirky examples of it knocking around.
Letterpress and wood type now have a limited use, and
most unusual forms of type are used for display rather
than for body copy, but finding such three-dimensional,
physical examples of type can prove inspirational to
designers who now rarely handle physical examples of
type, instead obtaining fonts through print and online
font catalogues and foundries, most of which can
supply fonts immediately via the internet.
Two spreads that use type as illustration
in very different ways. The scale and
manipulation of headlines in the magazine
Inner Loop (middle) were entirely in keeping
with the frenetic, anarchic tone of this indie
dance magazine. ‘Because the two headline
faces were quite different in style (militarystyle template and a kind of script), they
helped to lend each feature its own identity
within the mag, but also combined to give the
whole a distinct Inner Loop feel. I think they
expressed the different voices of those being
interviewed. They were also very robust faces,
which could stand out from strong graphic
elements such as running across a bitmapped
photo,’ says former art director Ivan Cottrell.
Fernando Gutiérrez’s use of type in Vanidad
(left) is not just a wonderfully decorative
juxtaposition and skilful arrangement of type
and image; it breaks down the words of the
subject, ‘Belle de Jour’, into letters – a fitting
illustration for a call girl who became famous
for the entries in her online diaries. The crop
and scale of ‘Belle de Jour’ on the right-hand
page is elegantly balanced by the headline on
the far left, creating an arrangement over the
spread that is harmonious and tender but has
massive impact.
On Inside magazine (below), Jeffrey Docherty
used type craft to distinguish individual
departments in the magazine ‘so that they are
sufficiently distinct from each other, but still
recognizably part of a brand’. He kept font use
to a minimum: separate faces for body and
heads, and a third face, which may be in
complete contrast to the others. ‘This third
typeface can change the mood of the
magazine. On this spread about a library in
Cottbus, Germany, the architects used a letter
motif to surround the entire exterior panelling
of the building, which I decided to replicate in
the titling. Interlinking the individual letters
and stacking them one above the other gave
an automatic visual reference to the project,’
says Docherty.
Essential design skills 183
Custom-designed type
As in any creative industry, type design and use tend
to follow trends, which can result in publications
looking very similar. An obvious way to distinguish
yourself from the crowd is to commission your own
font family. As well as creating a unique identity, such
a move also affords you a font that truly expresses
and conveys your brand attributes. Flaunt, Another
Magazine and The Guardian newspaper are all titles
that have taken this route recently. Lee Corbin at
Flaunt felt it was time for change, so decided to
introduce a custom font to the new body fonts,
Berthold Akzidenz Grotesk and Century Schoolbook,
both of which he believes fit very well with the new
custom faces.
‘In the previous year of issues we used Gotham and
Hoefler Text for our standard faces. Both faces were
designed by Frere-Jones & Hoefler, so they worked
well together. Gotham has a strong character that
does not call too much attention to itself, but in its
heavier weights it really dominates the area around
it. We matched Gotham up with Hoefler because
Hoefler has such a classic look. It’s also an enormous
family, which gave us plenty of options.’
With a new logo came the need for a new font, which
Corbin designed in two weights – a bold and a light
face – with more variations to come.
‘The logo came first, but I was already interested in
creating an extra-bold face based on geometric
figures. I exploited the use of symbols, like crosses,
x’s, triangles and circles, as letterforms. Because
that’s what I did in the logo, this gave the face more
character and reinforced the new logo. It was also
used very sparingly so that both the logo and
typeface don’t become tired.’
A final few words of warning on using type: the
development of pre-press technology meant the
sudden demise of professionals such as the typesetter
and compositor, roles that became the responsibility
of the designer and the computer. The latter’s default
settings in programs such as QuarkXPress and Adobe
InDesign should not always be assumed to be right for
your publication, so an understanding of, and care
with, kerning, hyphenation, leading, letter spacing,
trapping and tracking are necessary. Similarly, page
Letterpress is a highly illustrative form of
typography that can be used to build a layout,
as seen in this piece from FT The Business
by British letterpress lecturer and illustrator
Alan Kitching.
composition and make-up, which used to involve
physically moving elements such as display text,
galleys and images around three-dimensional space,
is now all done on screen. Arguments rage as to
whether this is a good or bad thing, but when
construction of a three-dimensional delivery medium
is undertaken in a two-dimensional environment,
there is unquestionably a physical and emotional
diminishment. Try to compensate for this by handling
and playing with paper, colour, inks, photographs and
mark-making implements as much as possible. Print
out layouts as often as you can - they are very different
from screen layouts. Always proof on page rather
than on screen and never rely solely on a program’s
spell-check function. Read all headlines, display
text and captions carefully; these are often spelled
These enlarged woodblock-style letterforms
make a perfect textural statement for this
double-page spread. It is a recklessly bold
and carefree typographic choice, reflecting
the confidence of Zembla at that time.
184 Chapter 6
Essential design skills 185
incorrectly because the subeditor’s focus is on the
body copy and no one thinks to check the display text.
Also make sure that ligatures, hyphenation and
kerning are corrected.
In 2006, Flaunt magazine created its own
typeface (top), ‘because there wasn’t
anything pre-existing that possessed the feel
I wanted for the new issues, but also because
a new typeface would be exclusive to our
magazine’, says art director Lee Corbin. He
has built many alternate characters into the
new Flaunt face so that ‘it will allow for more
unique combinations in titles. It was based on
the logotype that I created for the redesign,
so that it would reinforce the new identity
beyond the cover of each issue.’ Of the two
initial weights shown here, the bold face is
used more sparingly and with ample space
around the individual characters. ‘The letters
that make up the new Flaunt logo come from
this alphabet, so the use of the face in the
magazine is meant to reinforce the new
identity. The thin face is used more frequently
and more experimentally. It is also displayed
larger as it is not so dense,’ explains Corbin.
A brilliantly expressive use of type by
Fernando Gutiérrez on Vanidad (above). Think
about how the design elements make it work.
Consider, in particular, scale, cropping,
balance and arrangement.
186 Chapter 6
Artwork skills and
production issues
Editorial designers need a strong hands-on
knowledge of layout, design and image-manipulation
software programs like Adobe’s Creative Suite
(comprising InDesign, Photoshop and Illustrator) or
QuarkXPress. This is vital to make the best of their
visual ideas, but also needed to be able to react quickly
and effectively to sudden and often late layout and
flatplan changes.
They also need an understanding of the technical
issues around screen calibration, colour management,
pre-press and printing, as well as the more creative
aspects of the role, like commissioning illustration
and photography.
Software
Early layout software fitted into the traditional
production process, but today’s programs have
developed to the point where the same computer (and
thus designer) now handles most of these traditional
processes. Once dealt with by specialists, typesetting,
pre-press and proofing are now the responsibility of
the designer and/or production editor. Therefore the
complexity and ability of these programs is vast, and
being able to experiment and get the most out of them
depends on your knowledge and understanding.
Screen calibration
Computer screens present colour using light,
i.e. additive colour, whereas print uses inks, i.e.
subtractive colour. To help match these two very
different representations of colour, so that what the
designer sees on screen is as similar as possible
to the printed result, screen-calibration software
can be used to prepare the screen. Apple users, for
example, might find that BERG Design’s shareware
application, SuperCal, makes a very noticeable
difference. This can also be done by using your
computer’s own colour-balance features in the
‘gamma’ control panel. Photoshop has an excellent
step-by-step guide to using this control panel in
its ‘help’ menu.
For indie title Amelia’s Magazine (top), the
cover was wrapped in a cut-out by artist and
illustrator Rob Ryan, giving readers a limitededition piece of art, but also turning a twodimensional cover into a three-dimensional
one. Esopus (above) takes the concept of
fold-out further with its 3D-art pop-ups.
Printing
The best printer is one who prints a lot of similar work
to yours, so look through such publications and find
the name of the printer, or contact the publication’s
production editor and ask for it. But other factors
should be considered, too: can the printer handle your
print run? Can they work with your paper stock and
format? Can you get an ICC profile (see below) off the
press that you can apply to your desktop system? Will
the printer be able to meet the turnaround time you
require? Is their fee acceptable? It is always a good
idea to get quotes from three or four printers before
making your decision, but communication is the most
important factor – a good, long-term relationship with
your printer will reap massive rewards. Printers have
knowledge, experience and skills that you will never
have, so nurture your relationship with them to get the
best from them.
Colour management
Reproducing colour is complicated, as there are three
different aspects that need to be addressed: what the
eye sees, what the monitor shows and what a print
nozzle produces. Fortunately, the print industry has
developed a colour-management system that gives
an image a profile (called an International Colour
Consortium, or ICC profile) so that as it moves through
the printing process – from original to monitor viewing,
separation, pre-press, proofing, plating and printing –
all the tools involved are calibrated and adjusted to
ensure colour accuracy and consistency. If your
Twen (above) often used fold-outs to enable
the use of great visual elements (including
games, art reproductions and topical
photo stories).
publication is being produced without ICC profiling,
stick to ‘safe’ colours when making up colour palettes
or using spot colours (check the gamut warnings for
these, which indicate when a selected colour will alter
appearance when converted from RGB to CMYK), and
don’t rely on what’s on screen. In such cases it is best
to make up colours using a Pantone swatch book,
which should be updated annually to allow for colour
fade. Be aware, however, that not all Pantone colours
are reproducible in CMYK; if you want to use a Pantone
colour that brings up a gamut warning in your layout
program, you may need to make the colour up as a fifth
one, in which case consult your printer about the best
way forward.
Essential design skills 187
188 Chapter 6
Acquiring, evaluating
and using images
When working with a photograph, choose one aspect of
it that is the heart of the image—it may be the framing,
the density of colour (a perfect blue sky or a rich red
dress, the composition, the light, the subtlety of tones …
). Whatever it is, a good image will have something
that makes it stand out, and it’s this that you want to
maximize. Keep whatever it is in mind while you’re
working with the image—it may determine the shape,
scale or structure of a layout and will often be the most
important element of it. If necessary, work with the
printers at the soft-proof stage (on screen) to optimize
this element. Their knowledge of colour levels and how
these will affect the image’s reproduction will be
greater than that of even the very best designer. But
initially, consider the following.
How good is your original? Highlights and shadows
should span the gamut from as light as possible to as
dark as possible, with well-defined midtones. It is a good
idea to ensure that tones, highlights and shadows are
brought to their optimum output in the pre-press stage.
In CMYK, highlights should be set as:
C: 5%
M: 4%
Y: 4%
K: 0%
Proofs and how to use them
Print proofs, often referred to as ‘contract proofs’, are
the means to ensure the colour quality of type and
image on press. There are a number of different proof
systems, and especially in the US, printers are working
with and only offering PDF screen proofs free; all
others have to be paid for. But it is worth budgeting
for proofs, especially for front covers and other pages
that have a lot of full-colour images, for instance.
The most common (and affordable) are digital proofs
(Epson or similar), which are printed on large-format
digital inkjet printers and profiled to the final printing
stock for an accurate. result. Wet proofs, using the inks
that’ll be used on the real print run, are still sometimes
used to proof covers that have special finishes (such
as ‘special’ inks – Pantone or similar – foil blocking,
embossing or debossing, graining, lamination and
spot-UV varnishes) although you shouldn’t assume the
proofing press will exactly reproduce the
circumstances of the real run.
Laserjet proofs from commonly available photocopier
or laserprinters are so poor for colour accuracy that
they can be badly misleading if you are intending to
use as colour reference on press, but they can be
useful for checking type, positions and so on,
particularly if you like to proof on page rather than on
screen. Finally, there is the PDF proof, also known as a
soft proof which, again, gives little indication of colour
output unless it is viewed on a calibrated monitor, Eizo
or similar, but is useful for checking everything else.
Imagery can define an era or event in a way
that words simply cannot. The ability to find or
create such imagery is a crucial part of a
designer’s skill, as Janet Froelich recalls while
discussing the aftermath of 9/11. ‘9/11
happened on a Tuesday morning. The New
York Times Magazine (above), which is on a
weekly schedule, completes each issue on
a Friday, nine days before the publication
date. So we had three days to tear apart
the September 23 issue and remake it in
response to 9/11. We had to think forward,
while almost everyone was simply reacting to
the nightmare of what had just happened. One
of the ideas was to ask artists and architects
for their thoughts on a memorial. Two artists,
Paul Myoda and Julian LaVerdiere, had been
part of a group working in studios in one of the
Twin Towers. They came up with a plan, which
they called “Towers of Light”, in which
they imagined two powerful beams of light,
positioned in the centre of the footprint and
pointed towards the sky. I worked with a
photograph by Fred Conrad, which showed
lower Manhattan the night of the disaster
with that awful arc of dust and debris, and
with a Photoshop artist to create the vision
of those twin beams of light. That became
our cover and, one year later, it became one
of the most moving memorials to the events
of 9/11, as the Lower Manhattan Development
Corporation made it a reality. It is hard to
describe the combined feeling of pride
and awe, to see the cover of our magazine
become a living memorial, viewable for
80 kilometres [50 miles] in all directions,
to such a terrible event.‘
Essential design skills 189
190 Chapter 6
Midtones or gamma should be adjusted to improve
overall brightness or darkness of the image without
affecting the highlights adversely. To do this, use
Photoshop’s image-adjusting curves and raise or lower
the curve at the 50 per cent point until the brightness
is accurate.
How does it look on the monitor? Assuming your
monitor is calibrated correctly, what you see on it
should be the very best approximation of what you will
get in print. So, if you’re not happy with it on screen, fix
it before going to press. Photoshop has a number of
features that will improve images, but a very basic one
is Unsharp Masking, which most professional bureaux
use to improve the quality of an image. An average
unsharp-mask setting is amount: 160 per cent; radius:
2 pixels; thresholds: 9 levels. Adjusting these settings
will improve nearly all photographs.
Finding images
A good editorial designer will be constantly on the
lookout for new photographers and illustrators, and
will locate them through agencies, degree shows, other
publications and media, and awards books and CDs.
Most image-makers now have online portfolios but is
always worth trying to meet them too. Set aside
enough time to go through the portfolio properly,
asking questions about the pieces and the way the
photographer or illustrator works. When it comes to
commissioning, the kind of brief you give will
determine to a large degree what is produced, so be
clear about what you want and communicate this.
However clear the brief is, talk to the people you have
commissioned to make sure they understand what’s
required. Make sure deadlines, fee and administrative
requirements (invoicing, expenses, payment, tax
matters) are clear. And finally, make sure that the
shoot, if there is one, is well organized.
Using images from the internet
Lots of websites offering free content and others where
you pay for images. For example, www.istockphoto.com
is a royalty free and copyright free service where you
pay a small fee. The availability of such stock images,
however, does mean that other users can use the same
images as well. Large picture agencies, such as Getty
Information graphics
Internet-inspired developments in data collection have caused
a huge resurgence in interest in information graphics
(infographics). They offer the designer a great way to vary the
presentation of content, promising the ability to make complex
information easily absorbed. Graphs, diagrams, images and
data can combine to tell stories with great clarity.
Infographics are perfect for the visual-information culture of the
twenty-first century, but they were actually popularized some 75
years ago, when designer and typographer Thomas Maitland
Cleland devised a format for business magazine Fortune that
unified editorial and visual concepts in a completely new way.
Since then, magazines such as the Radio Times, Wired, and
Bloomberg Businessweek, have refined and made ever-greater
use of information graphics.
When commissioning information graphics designers need to
retain a very clear concept of what the story being explained
is – it is easy to get caught up with the visuals and lose focus.
Essential design skills 191
On the television-listings magazine Radio
Times, David Driver used a number of
techniques and styles to deliver
information on subjects as diverse as
how the Apollo and Soyuz spacecraft
docked (opposite), how an orchestra
works (far left) and how the police
districts in Kojak’s New York were laid out
(left). A firm favourite were the graphics
of Richard Draper, who devised pictorial
approaches to information graphics, as
seen here in the ‘Underground
movements’ panel (below). Driver also
used montage, incorporating graphic
panels that crossed and unified spreads
and illustrated covers to enhance visually
and consistently engage the readership
of a publication that, by necessity, was
text-heavy and densely packed.
192 Chapter 6
For this spread about a mid-air plane collision
(right), Brazilian newspaper Folha de S.Paulo
uses information graphics to illustrate
aspects of the tragedy, such as the planes’
routes, locations and designs that
photography could not illustrate. They act as
additional information rather than graphic
replacements for photography; through the
use of such devices, readers are given a more
thorough understanding of an event.
In this spread from The Guardian (right)
illustrating the arms trade, the shapes of
the various weapons immediately impart
knowledge and communicate figures
associated with specific arms.
opposite top: During the 2012 Olympics, The
Times ran dense infographic charts like this
one designed like a running track. The listing
of gold, silver and bronze shows analytical
depth in detail, a particular strength of the
title, whic has a rich store of data and images
in its archives to draw upon.
opposite below: Analysis before the event
comes in The Times’ wallchart giving
information reminders about key dates when
significant gold medal moments in the
Olympics are to occur. The use of icons,
colours, text and images, gives different
information in a variety of layers. Infographics
help to enhance content and make the
product last longer in the reader’s mind.
20 1GG Monday August 6 2012 | the times
soviet union
us
gb
germany
trinidad & tobago
australia
cuba
namibia
barbados
bulgaria
netherlands
new zealand
panama
portugal
south africa
The fastest
men on earth
Men’s 100m
justin gatlin
US
Age 30
Height 6ft
Weight 12st 7lb
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
6th
7th
8th
81 MEDALS THE BREAKDOWN
THE HISTORY
HOW TEAM GB FARED
us
us
ger
Thomas
Burke
1896
us
aus
us
Frank
Jarvis
1900
us
us
us
Archie
Hahn
1904
saf
can
us
Reginald
Walker
1908
us
us
us
Ralph
Craig
1912
us
gb
us
Charles
Paddock
1920
can
ger
gb
Percy
Williams
1928
us
ger
us
Eddie
Tolan
1932
us
hol
us
Jesse
Owens
1936
us
pan
us
Harrison
Dillard
1948
us
gb
jam
Lindy
Remigino
1952
us
aus
us
Bobby Joe
Morrow
1956
ger
gb
us
Armin
Hary
1960
us
can
cub
Bob
Hayes
1964
us
us
jam
Jim
Hines
1968
sov
jam
us
Valery
Borzov
1972
tri
sov
jam
Hasely
Crawford
1976
gb
bul
cub
Allan
Wells
1980
us
can
us
Carl
Lewis
1984
us
us
gb
Carl
Lewis
1988
gb
us
nam
Linford
Christie
1992
can
tri
nam
Donovan
Bailey
1996
us
bar
tri
Maurice
Greene
2000
us
us
por
Justin
Gatlin
2004
jam
us
tri
Usain
Bolt
2008
gb
nz
us
Harold
Abrahams
1924
12.0 11.0 11.0
=OR
10.8 10.8 10.8 10.8
OR
10.3
OR
10.2
OR
9.92
WR
9.84
WR
9.87 9.85 9.69
=WR
10.0
WR
9.95
=OR
10.3 10.3 10.4 10.5
=OR
10.6
38 16
13
9
3 2 3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
12
2
2
2
1 2
8
canada
5 2 3
jamaica
7 2 4 1
4
4
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
12sec
11.5
11.0
10.5
10.0
9.5
9.0
The men’s 100m is the blue riband
event of the athletics programme.
Here is how the drama unfolded in
the 27th staging of this classic
Olympic race
10.20sec 10.10 10.00 9.90 9.80 9.70 9.60 9.50
1896 - 1964 Cinder tracks
1896 US sprinters introduce crouch start 1968 Synthetics tracks introduced
1912 First use of electronic timing and photo-finish cameras
1948 Starting blocks used for first time 1988 Ben Johnson (Can) disqualified
10.14 10.06 10.25 9.99 9.96
ectronic timing and photo
Round one
Reaction time
Semi-final
Final
Round one
Reaction time
Semi-final
Round one
Reaction time
Semi-final
Final
Round one
Reaction time
Semi-final
Final
Round one
Reaction time
Semi-final
Final
Round one
Reaction time
Semi-final
Final
Round one
Reaction time
Semi-final
Final
Reaction time
Semi-final
Final
churandy martina
Netherlands
Age 28
Height 5ft 10in
Weight 11st 9lb
Dwain Chambers
Round one: Heat 7–1st 10.02 (0.157, +2.0)
Semi-final: Heat 2–4th 10.05 (0.154, +1.0)
James Dasaolu
Round one: Heat 4–3rd 10.13 (0.174, +0.4)
Semi-final: Heat 1–7th 10.18 (0.175, +0.7)
Adam Gemili
Round one: Heat 5–2nd 10.11 (0.156, 0.0)
Semi-final: Heat 3–3rd 10.06 (0.158, +1.7)
round one
54 athletes
16 qualifiers
2 national records
3 personal bests
8 season’s bests
Fastest: 9.88 Ryan Bailey (US)
Slowest: 10.94 Divilert A Kimbembe (Congo)
semi-finals
23 athletes
2 national records
1 personal best
2 season’s best
Fastest time: 9.82 Justin Gatlin (US)
Slowest time: 10.31 Rondel Sorrillo (Tri)
preliminary round
29 athletes
10 qualifiers
1 national record
8 personal bests
5 season’s bests
Fastest: 10.42 Gerard Kobeane (Burkina Faso)
Slowest: 12.81 Timi Garstang (Marshall Is)
Abrahams Hary Hines Lewis Bailey Greene Gatlin
ryan bailey
US
Age 23
Height 6ft 4in
Weight 15st
tyson gay
US
Age 29
Height 5ft 11in
Weight 11st 11lb
richard thompson
Trinidad and Tobago
Age 27
Height 6ft 2in
Weight 12st 8lb
yohan blake
Jamaica
Age 22
Height 5ft 11in
Weight 11st 14lb
a safa powell
Jamaica
Age 29
Height 6ft 3in
Weight 12st 4lb
usain bolt
Jamaica
Age 25
Height 6ft 5in
Weight 14st 11lb
Lane
2nd 10.14 (wind –1.4 metres per second)
8th 11.99 (wind +1.5)
7th 9.98 (wind +1.5)
1st 10.08 (wind –1.4)
1st 10.08 (wind –1.4)
1st 10.09 (wind +0.4)
3rd 10.20 (wind 0)
2nd 10.20 (wind +0.7)
1st 9.88 (wind +1.5)
2nd 9.96 (wind +1.0)
1st 9.87 (wind +1.0)
1st 9.85 (wind +1.7)
3rd 10.02 (wind +1.0)
(0.151)
(0.147)
(0.147)
(0.151)
(0.145)
(0.175)
(0.176)
(0.179)
(0.200)
(0.178)
(0.165)
(0.180)
(0.177)
(0.155)
(0.176)
(0.168)
(0.148)
(0.139)
(0.187)
(0.178)
(0.155)
(0.155)
(0.158)
(0.160)
1st 9.84 (wind +0.7)
2nd 9.84 (wind +1.7)
2nd 9.80 (wind +1.5) SB
2nd 9.75 (wind +1.5) =PB
3rd 9.79 (wind +1.5) PB
1st 9.88 (wind +1.5) =PB
1st 9.94 (wind +1.5)
1st 10.00 (wind +1.3)
1st 9.97 (wind +0.7)
1st 9.82 (wind +0.7)
75 (wind +1.5) =PB
PB
1st 9.63 (wind +1.5) OR
The Games 6 Athletics The Games 6 Athletics
Total Total Total Total Total Total Total Total Total Total Total Total Total Total Total Total
10am 11am 12am 1pm 2pm 3pm 4pm 5pm 6pm 7pm 8pm 9pm 10pm 11pm
Overall
Total
Total
Total
day 1
Saturday July 28
day 2
Sunday July 29
day 3
Monday July 30
day 4
Tuesday July 31
day 5
WednesdayAugust1
day 6
ThursdayAugust 2
day 7
FridayAugust 3
day 8
SaturdayAugust 4
day 9
SundayAugust 5
day 10
MondayAugust 6
day 11
Tuesday August 7
day 12
WednesdayAugust 8
day 13
ThursdayAugust 9
day 14
FridayAugust10
day 15
SaturdayAugust11
day 16
SundayAugust12
IN ASSOCIATION WITH
FOLLOW TEAM GB Keep track of Britain's podium successes with your own Olympic medal table
3.15pm
Superheavyweight
boxing final
Anthony Joshua, 21 and
91kg, is Britain’s big hope
3pm
Basketball final
Will LeBron and Kobe
emulate the US Dream
Team of 1992?
4.30pm
Women’s
BMX final
Shanaze Reade fell in
Beijing but will be looking
for better luck here
FOLLOW THE OLYMPICS WITH
THE TIMES
7.45pm
Women’s
football final
The United States and
Brazil are favourites
to reach Wembley
8pm
Women’s
hockey final
The Dutch, champions
four years ago, are
the team to beat
10.05am;
11.40am;
8.35pm
Women’s heptathlon
Jessica Ennis competes
in the final three events:
long jump, javelin and
the 800m 11am
Men’s marathon
Kenya and Ethiopia could
battle to the finish on
The Mall
12pm
Women’s
10k marathon
Keri-Anne Payne, second
in Beijing, will be braving
the Serpentine
7.30pm
Men’s 400m
medley final
Michael Phelps hopes for
the first of seven golds
7pm
Men’s 56kg final
Little guys lifting
incredible weights of
more than 300kg
3pm
Synchronised
10m platform final
Tom Daley and Peter
Waterfield dive in
10.30am
Mens’ eights final
This could be Eton
Dorney’s first chance to
hear the national anthem 11am
Women’s
marathon
Paula Radcliffe has
battled injury to compete 11.30am
Men’s triathlon
The Brownlee brothers,
Alistair and Jonathan,
face off
9pm
Women’s
200m final
Allyson Felix, who won
silver in 2008, is favourite
4.30pm;
5.15pm Women’s boxing finals
Savannah Marshall and
Nicola Adams debut as
GB’s first female boxers
10am
Men’s road race
Mark Cavendish aims to
start Britain’s two-wheel
gold rush on The Mall
8.44pm
Women’s 100m
backstroke semi-finals
Gemma Spofforth closes
in on the title
8.15pm
Women’s 400m
freestyle final
Will it be a first gold for
Rebecca Adlington?
7.30pm
Women’s 100m
freestyle semi-finals
Fran Halsall looks to
qualify for the final
7.47pm
Men’s 200m
butterfly final
Prepare for Phelps
at his brilliant best
3.06pm
Men’s C1
slalom final
Fast and furious, David
Florence takes to
the white water
2.15pm
Individual
time-trial
Bradley Wiggins, fresh
from the Tour de France,
goes for a fourth gold
8.17pm
Men’s 100m
freestyle final
James Magnussen, of
Australia, is favourite
7.45pm
Women’s 800m
freestyle final
Rebecca Adlington
aims to keep her title
10.30am
Women’s double
sculls final
Cheer on Anna Watkins
and Katherine Grainger
8.27pm
Men’s 4x100m
medley final
Could it be a magnificent
seven for Phelps?
7.45pm;
9.50pm Men’s 100m semi-finals
and final
Can Bolt live up to his
2008 performance?
5.43pm
Men’s sprint final
Jason Kenny beat Hoy
for the sole British place
in the sprint
8.45pm
Men’s 400m
hurdles final
Dai Greene aims to add
Olympic gold
to world
gold
5.50pm
Men’s keirin final
Hoy, who won three gold
medals in Beijing, lights
up the velodrome
4pm;
5.26pm Women’s sprint
semi-finals and final
Victoria Pendleton aims
to keep hold of her title
9.15pm
Men’s 110m
hurdles final
Aries Merritt and Liu
Xiang may fight for gold
9pm
Women’s beach
volleyball final
Sun, sand, bikinis and
Horse Guards Parade
7.30pm
Men’s
5,000m final
Could this be Mo Farah’s
double-gold moment?
8.40pm
Women’s 4x100m
freestyle final
Watch the fastest women
swimmers in the world
2pm
Women’s 57kg
judo semi-finals
Gemma Howell may end
a 12-year medal drought
6.15pm
Men’s team
sprint finals
Sir Chris Hoy leads
the British pack
4.30pm
Women’s
individual all-around
The highlight of the
artistic gymnastics
9.15pm
Men’s 10,000m
Mo Farah goes for gold
after taking silver at the
World Championships
2.50pm
Women’s
uneven bars
Beth Tweddle has twice
won gold on bars at the
World Championships
10.15pm
Women’s
taekwondo
welterweight final
Sarah Stevenson is
the one to watch
8.45pm
Men’s boxing
bantamweight final
Luke Campbell is boxing’s
bright young thing
8.30pm
Men’s 10m
platform final
Daley dives for
individual gold
12.30pm
Equestrianism
Zara Phillips tackles the
eventing cross-country
course in Greenwich Park
3.30pm
Men’s table tennis
singles final
China has won 20 of the
24 gold medals to date
1.30pm
Badminton mixed
doubles final
Britain won medals in
2000 and 2004 2pm
Men’s Finn
medal race
Ben Ainslie attempts
to win a fourth gold
in Weymouth
CLICK Open the Hub online
for schedules, results
and medal tables
SWIPE Glide your way through
three iPad editions
every day
LISTEN Enjoy ten minutes of
chat every morning on
the games podcast
READ
the games
A special pullout
every day
16 days of sporting history
The bronze, silver and golden moments you must not miss
Essential design skills 193
194 Chapter 6
Images, have information on their websites about the
legal issues surrounding rights and clearance.
Social media has ushered in a range of online
photo-sharing sites. Some offer photo sharing for free
others are subscription-based sites. Flikr, Pixable and
Snapfish are all well known photo-sharing sites which
offer a great source of images for designers.
Always check the resolution of an image is suitable for
print reproduction, clear copyright and make sure you
credit the image correctly.
Consistency without
monotony
One of the editorial designer’s most challenging—and
enjoyable—tasks is creating a distinct, individual
product or issue that is obviously part of a strong
brand, but does not look or feel the same with every
issue. How do they do it? With a good grid that is
flexible, pagination that ensures similar spreads are
interspersed with other pages, and inventive use of the
design elements at their disposal.
A daily newspaper or weekly news-based magazine
will have tight deadlines and short lead times, and the
design has to be led by functionality and legibility. As
a result, the designer has to develop and adopt a
problem-solving approach, setting in place a grid and
production system that enables fast layouts, fast repro
and printing, and a design approach that is ordered
and organized. But one need only compare a few of
these titles to see that, within such order, there are still
many opportunities for inventive structure, different
directions and wholly distinct results, as seen here in
these weekly news titles from Europe and America.
German weekly news magazine Stern’s cover,
feature pages and photographic spreads all
display a lively, populist approach to the
news. Bold crops such as the face halved by
the edge of the cover(above), along with the
straightforward three-column grid on feature
pages and ever-popular aerial photography,
all appeal to a broad audience.
The cover on UK financial magazine The
Economist (right) is witty and eye-catching—
in contrast to the calm orderliness of its
feature pages. Again, this illustrates how
magazines can remain original and engaging
from issue to issue and page to page.
Essential design skills 195
The cover on UK financial magazine The
Economist (right) is witty and eye-catching—
in contrast to the calm orderliness of its
feature pages. Again, this illustrates how
magazines can remain original and engaging
from issue to issue and page to page.
profile of an independent editor and publisher
Dan Rolleri
Dan Rolleri, editor and publisher of Speak magazine, rode the
crest of the independent magazine wave when he came out of
college in the mid-1990s. The desktop-publishing revolution
ushered in by microcomputers and publishing programs had
spawned thousands of magazines dealing with hundreds of
specialisms, and Rolleri decided to follow suit.
Rolleri’s first title – a music-video trade magazine – was, in his
own words, “a horrible failure”. His second attempt was the
popular-culture magazine Speak, which is widely regarded as
an excellent example of the genre. This success was due in no
small part to the combative but collaborative relationship that
existed between Rolleri and the publication’s art director, Martin
Venezky. And, from the outset, Rolleri had strong ideas about his
magazine’s designer:
‘At the time, there was a glut of magazines on the news-stand,
and I wanted Speak to stand out visually. It was important that
the art director be willing to push the form. It was also
important that the art director have an organic quality about
his or her work. But more than anything, it was important
that I liked the art director’s work (not a small challenge
because I didn’t like much).’
Rolleri’s ensuing stormy relationship with Venezky, which
included the two suing each other, is well documented, but what
is less well known are Rolleri’s very strong feelings and
understanding of the designer’s impact on the magazine:
‘It was important for me that the art director be intellectually
driven and curious about the magazine’s content, as opposed
to only looking to follow a template or showcase his or her
abilities separate from the magazine.’
Rolleri knew that Venezky had all that, and more:
‘He reads, he thinks, he’s extremely diligent. I wanted to
match his effort, to get the editorial to live up to the design.
I probably failed more times than I succeeded, but after my
time with Martin I can’t imagine ever working with another
designer again.’
Essential design skills 197
An annual, monthly or quarterly publication has the
luxuries of more loosely structured frameworks, a
bigger visuals budget, greater flexibility in such
elements as grid, fonts and image treatment, and the
ability to experiment almost endlessly with layouts.
But this can present its own problems; it can be
difficult to adhere to the brand message when
presented with greater freedom, so it is important to
find a balance between those elements that need to be
constant (brand and identity) and those that will
change with every issue.
!
‘Editors and art directors need to have a
dynamic rapport. And healthy respect. And
an ability to argue and to sometimes lose.’
Martin Venezky, art director, Speak
The house style and style shoots
A magazine is an ongoing series of publications that
need to present a familiar look from issue to issue so
as to be recognisable to the reader. This distinct look is
created and then controlled at several levels. At the top
level, the format, paper stock and logo design will all
be agreed upon. These generally won’t change issue
to issue. Then there are the looser visual elements
– styles of photography for instance, or rules such as
certain types of headlines always running over two
lines. These are usually noted by printed examples.
Perhaps most importantly, there are the detailed
typographic instructions for every element on the
page, applied via style sheets. Part of the section
templates, style sheets are a series of pre-set guides
that apply font, size, colour and parameters to every
element on the page (headlines, standfirsts, body text,
credits, footnotes and so on). They allow the designer
(or a group of designers) to automatically apply
consistent and detailed design attributes from
page to page.
Similar rules exist for the content too, usually overseen
by the sub editor.
Two spreads from the same department of
Inside magazine (above) – ‘In Profile’ – offer
very different solutions to layouts, while
sharing a bold use of type and design
elements. The layout process has many
potentially determining factors, such as
the number of pages per article, word count,
image crops and even the advertising within
the publication. Colour and flow also need
to be considered as the magazine is
being constructed.
198 Chapter 6
‘The entire magazine has been rebuilt, graphically at
least, to accommodate more variation and a new
identity. We simply had to do away with most of our
preceding visual identity to make room for new
ideas. Our magazine is constantly changing; as
we are a monthly publication we need to embrace
spontaneity—we had to give the magazine a new
voice.’ – Lee Corbin
While redesigns happen fairly frequently on
magazines, newspapers rarely overhaul their
publications – such a step is a logistical nightmare
from a production perspective for a daily title.
As Mark Porter explains:
‘Newspaper redesign is usually market-driven. There
is a tendency for editors to assume that what they
are doing is totally successful. It’s only when sales
start to fall that they realize they might need to
change. But this is a particularly interesting moment,
because newspaper readerships are in decline all
over the world, and pressure from television and the
internet is forcing journalists and designers to
question their assumptions about what modern
readers need. There has never been so much
redesigning and format-changing going on.’
Media such as the internet and changes in distribution
and demographics are having a design impact on both
newspapers and magazines: formats are shrinking,
pages are becoming more uniform and navigation is
becoming simpler, because, says Mario Garcia, ‘The
internet has created a savvy, impatient reader who
expects hierarchy, good navigation and fast motion on
the printed page’.
In the last five years pre-press information has
changed. To keep up with the latest information you
should look at online tutorials or if possible talk to your
printer. For a great overview and to find out the correct
printing terms Ambrose and Harris’ The Visual Design
Box Set: Pre-Press and Production, Typography, Graphic
Design, Illustration (Fairchild, 2012) is useful.
Redesigning –
when and why?
Designers may tweak elements of a layout to update
a publication and keep it feeling contemporary and
relevant (for example, a heavy font may be replaced
with a medium or light version from the same family
to accommodate changing tastes), but, eventually,
even the best-designed long-running publication may
become outdated and stale. In this case, a major
overhaul or redesign should be considered. Many
publications also redesign when sales are falling, or
in times of economic recession when advertising
revenue drops and they need to boost sales, but doing
so is a risky strategy, as any redesign can – and almost
certainly will – alienate some existing readers while
enticing new ones.
‘Editorial design is the framework through
which a given story is read and interpreted. It
consists of both the overall architecture of the
publication (and the logical structure that it
implies) and the specific treatment of the story
(as it bends or even defies that very logic).’
Martin Venezky, art director, Speak
The best reason for a redesign is to stay in tune with,
and reflect, the needs of a readership; over a period
of five years, fashion, taste and styles will alter
sufficiently that a magazine aimed at 16-year-olds will
have to redesign to keep in step. But it is important not
to let readers dictate the redesign; contextualizing the
publication through cultural trends and shifts is the
best approach. It is also important that a redesign is
not conducted in a vacuum. If visual trends shift over
time, so, too, do the other elements that go to make up
a publication: the content and tone should also be
carefully examined and addressed to ensure that no
one element is isolated and that the whole publication
is moving forward cohesively and intelligently. Flaunt
magazine took this approach in 2006 when it
completely overhauled the look of the magazine, even
creating a new logo and custom-designed fonts:
Essential design skills 199
In 2003, art director Kobi Benezri, working with his
predecessor Nico Schweizer, undertook a redesign of I.D.
magazine (left). ‘When we started working on the design we
knew that the look of I.D. had to be updated (the last
redesign by Bruce Mau took place in 1992). The new design
came in correlation to a new editorial approach – coverage
of a broader range of design fields, different takes on
particular previously discussed subject matters, new
departments and a more critical approach; we wanted to
make sure the design took the same attitude and was very
informative and objective. At the same time we had no
intention of impressing anyone with overpowering design
elements or eye candy. There was a clear purpose for the
layouts and we tried to keep it subtle and elegant, and put
our mark where it was necessary.’ New features included
new fonts – Scala was replaced with the very modern Gerard
Unger font Coranto for body text; Meta was replaced with
a variety of fonts that would change over time to keep
the design up to date – and new sections, including
a photospread called ‘Scape’ and a new back section
called ‘Crit’ (above left). Mark Porter’s redesign of
Portuguese daily Público (above) in 2007 followed
his earlier redesign of The Guardian in 2005.
200 Chapter 6
TIP Mario Garcia’s top ten dos and don’ts
of redesign
1 Not all redesigns are alike, so customize
your work to make it appropriate for the
specific product undergoing a ‘rethink’.
2 Get a full briefing of expectations, target
audience and extent of change. I always
say that some redesigns are nothing
more than a face-wash, while others
are the full bath, complete with bubbles
and candles!
3 Plan the rethink of the publication
around the four major story structures:
typography, page, architecture and colour.
4 Story structuring should be the first step:
how do editors tell stories in this
publication? How many styles of
storytelling techniques should be created?
How can hierarchy be emphasized?
5 Typographically, test at least three font
combinations of serifs and sans serifs
to choose the most convenient
and appropriate.
6 For page architecture, develop at least
two grid patterns with various column
measurements, and perhaps include both
in the final design.
7 Play with a colour palette that starts with
two dozen combinations of colours, from
dark to light and in-between, then create
a simple palette of no more than ten
shades for continuous use.
8 Emphasize navigation – readers who
surf the internet become impatient and
bring that impatience to print. Work
hard to make sure that navigational
strategies are a top consideration of the
redesign process.
9 Review the ‘break of the book’ – the order
in which content will appear. Time to
move elements in or out? Or to change
the order of events?
10 Work closely with editors and reporters,
as they will bring that necessary
journalistic ingredient to the process
of visually changing a publication.
Materials, Process, Print: Creative Solutions for Graphic Design by
Daniel Mason
Mario Garcia has redesigned newspapers
worldwide, frequently working with new
formats. In 2005, he redesigned The Observer
newspaper, taking it from a broadsheet to a
Berliner format. He thinks size is not an issue,
and certainly not a negative one. ‘The canvas
is smaller, therefore one must be more
focused and direct in creating hierarchy. So,
what the publication must do in creating
criteria for inclusion and exclusion is simply
draw up a list. Study your readers of today. Do
your visual and editorial archaeology and
evaluate what needs to stay and what must
go. Differentiate between real antiques and
Aunt Clara’s old teacup, so to speak.
Newspapers have a tendency to drag old
visual things as “antiques”. But they are
nothing more than old things, not worthy of
preservation.’ On The Observer redesign, he
retained the elegance of the broadsheet
through use of typography, but gave the
paper a more vibrant, youthful feel through
colour coding, which readers in surveys have
been shown to like. He used one palette for
coding and another one for other colours
throughout the paper to ensure that such
colour coding would work with other elements
on the page. He approaches all of his
redesigns from the standpoint of journalism,
because, he insists, ‘People come to a
newspaper for its content, not its look. Design
is part of the enhancement of that content.’
Essential design skills 201
Stern’s straightforward three-column grid
on feature pages (left) and ever-popular
aerial photography (above) all appeal
to a broad audience.
TIP
Tips and techniques for avoiding
monotonous layouts:
• Try to vary your approach to constructing
layouts.
• Experiment with building up a page from
colour blocks or cut-outs, which bring
white space and geometric considerations
into play alongside text, images and other
design elements.
• Visualize each layout as a separate entity
with the use of the style book.
AMPHIBIAN ISSUE
JULY
JUNE
HUNTING ISSUE
AUGUST
HOME ISSUE
Brief Five
Finishing and presenting work
Aim
To take your double-page spread designs from Brief Four
and finish them to a higher standard.
The brief
Check the details of all the elements on your layouts and
then print them out on good quality paper.
1. Check details such as baseline alignment and
widows (re-break any ugly lines). Add in picture
credits if you need them and spellcheck the whole
document for accuracy. This is a very important
step for any text on a layout. Do not put work with
spelling mistakes in your portfolio as you need to
show you can pay attention to detail.
2. Once you have completed the proofreading stage,
print the layouts on cheap paper so that you can
check again that the text size is not too big (a
common mistake due to working on screen). Then, if
you want a really good colour calibrated version for
your physical portfolio, print the layouts on quality
paper using a good colour printer. You should also
make a PDF of your double-page spreads to store in
your online portfolio. Don’t make the file sizes too
large, however, or they will take the viewer too long
to download.
3. You can extend this exercise by taking the visual
principle of your design and adapting it for different
platforms. Design the home page of your magazine’s
website and then plan any further navigation
system from there, together with the interactive
toolbox. You can just mock up the pages that may
later become interactive. What if your magazine
could be read anywhere? Beware of simply putting
PDFs straight on to a website and calling it an
online magazine. If the type is too small to read
then it will not be fit for purpose. Remember that
designers create content, both text and image, all
the time. So have no fear about being original and
be confident in your efforts. Even if your photos are
not as good as those by designers you admire, they
still have value in your portfolio for other reasons.
In this version of an imaginary travel
magazine called Escape, undergraduate
Sandra Autukaite had decided on images and
concept using pictures taken from the
internet. The simple iconic framing meant that
the photography was actually a primary
element of the idea behind the magazine.
At the finishing stage Autukaite decided to
shoot some images for herself, thereby
ensuring she owned the copyright. With
student projects like this it is not likely that
the magazine will go into production. However,
it is ethical behaviour to make your own images
and take credit for them, rather than to take
credit for images you found on the internet.
202 Chapter 6
In this team project, handwritten headings
were collaged with images taken at college, to
create a publication based around the idea of
organized chaos. Designer Ben Silvertown
pushed it on further and finished it off by
sending it to print on newsprint (right). He
also mocked up the iPad layout and included
a video in his portfolio. Other members of the
team contributed to the creation and each
took the design and used it in their own
portfolios. Each gave credit to the others
as is the norm in a group project.
Essential design skills 203
204
7
205
Chapter 7 : Looking back, looking forward
All designers benefit from an awareness of trends, cultural shifts and the
contemporary zeitgeist, and this is doubly so for editorial designers, many
of whom have to ensure that they are in the vanguard of visual fashion and
culture. For this reason, we look at broad cultural and design trends and
delivery media. But editorial designers can also gain huge insight into their
craft – not to mention ideas and inspirations – by looking at work from the
past, especially those designers and publications that were particularly
influential, innovative or ground-breaking. Whether through an understanding
of print techniques, a style of cropping, a certain grid or structure, a use of
typography and symbols as a means of expression, or the ability to exploit
the latest print technologies, designers over the last 80 years have created
graphic ephemera that stand shoulder to shoulder with fine art in their
ability to inspire visual delight and express cultural concerns in
conceptual form. The designers who have done so are numerous, but
in this chapter are gathered a handful of the best. In studying the
work of these past masters, contemporary designers should
focus on the following:
• motivating and underlying principles;
• reasons why a particular design works in
a specific context (in any given period);
• how the past plays a part in mapping out
future trends and directions.
206 Chapter 7
Looking back –
motivating and
underlying principles
All designers look at other design work, but many
focus exclusively on contemporary work. This is
important in terms of being aware of cultural shifts and
changing and emerging trends in typography, illustration,
photography, stock and so on; but it is equally important
to look at work that has gone before. What should you
look for? Ideas and directions certainly, but you won’t
understand them unless you understand the principles
underpinning them, which in the past were often closely
aligned to movements in art and culture, which, in
turn, were contextualized both politically and socially.
So, for example, the ideas around mechanization and
functionality, which formed part of the Bauhaus
principles of the 1930s, reflected the industrialization
of Western society and the rise of socialism in eastern
Europe. When Neville Brody appropriated the
typographical and geometrical styles of Russian
constructivism in the mid-1970s, it was a cultural gesture
that drew on the spirit of overthrowing oppression. An
understanding and exploration of such principles, and
how they relate to and reflect their cultural and political
milieu, will give contemporary editorial designers a set
of tools with which to develop their own cultural
responses and connections, which are needed to
acquire a true understanding of their publication’s
readership. So, study from the past often – not to copy
great designers, but to understand their work.
Understanding why a particular
design works in a specific context
Understanding how designers work involves an
understanding of why a design works in its particular
context. This means examining the broad picture—the
underlying and motivating principles of a publication
as outlined above – then focusing on individual
layouts and understanding why they work for the
publication in question and its readership. How do the
layouts work to communicate the principles? Find out
by deconstructing the layout, then looking at how the
individual elements work alone and together. Using
The Face as an example, Neville Brody understood
that, in principle, a publication about alternative
culture could draw on influences and styles outside its
own cultural milieu, and give them a contemporary
forward-looking twist to communicate its cool outsider
status. But which styles to choose? He intelligently
opted for an appropriate visual style with roots and
connections that were abundantly clear to a youthful
readership, whose political integrity was untainted and
whose cultural cachet was assured. He conveyed these
principles through layouts composed predominantly
of type, shapes and geometrical elements – rules,
blocks and scale. The effect was startling: new, bold,
irreverent and absolutely right for the readership.
Exploring the past to map future
trends and directions
It is clear from the influential designers and
publications listed here that the intellectual, moral and
cultural climates of an era play a part in creating key
design movements, which in turn influence the styles
of editorial design. Such movements and styles do not
exist in a vacuum, and do not become meaningless or
irrelevant as the zeitgeist shifts. They may go out of
fashion, but through an understanding of their
principles they always have something to offer.
The one key difference between the past and present
is that inspirational design can now be shared more
easily. Today, we have fast and reliable access to the vast
array of images that exist in the digital cloud. More
importantly, designers continue to use social media,
such as Twitter, Facebook and blogs, as a sharing tool,
giving everyone the opportunity to learn from highlyskilled practitioners. The generous spirit of editorial
designers and art directors means that the design
community is fuelled daily by news of good practice,
talks and events. In the following section, we select some
modern pioneers who are worth following, alongside
the many figures from the past who have inspired
generations of designers. These people form a ‘Hall of
Fame’, each one providing a different source of inspiration.
Looking back, looking forward 207
Hall of Fame – designers
and publications
M.F. Agha
Dr Mehemed Fehmy Agha (known as M.F. Agha) was
one of the first ‘art directors’. A Russian–Turkish
constructivist working on German Vogue, he was
discovered by Condé Nast, who was trawling Europe
looking for designers to introduce the modern
(European) style to his publications. In 1929, Agha
took over the flagship Condé Nast title, American
Vogue, and lived up to expectations; control of Vanity
Fair (right) and House & Garden followed. What he
brought to these titles was fresh, new and vital art
direction. He pioneered the use of sans-serif typefaces
and emerging print and photographic techniques such
as montage, duotones and full-colour photographs,
choosing photography over fashion illustrations
wherever possible. He experimented successfully with
photographic layouts, exploiting double-page spreads
to take images across gutters and using full-bleeds to
create an exciting sense of space and scale. His use of
leading photographers, including Cecil Beaton and
Edward Weston, was matched by his employment of
artists such as Matisse and Picasso years before any
other American magazine.
On Vanity Fair M.F. Agha adapted the stylistic tenets of
European modernism to a US title and its market. He
achieved this by simplifying and systemizing type use,
recognizing the spread as a palette on which the
various design elements – gutters, margins, headlines
and white space – could be endlessly expanded and
manipulated to create vibrant and varied spreads. He
understood that by playing with the position and size
of his design tools, such as floating small headlines on
white space at the bottom of the page, he could create
impact and energy – something hitherto unseen in
editorial design. Hence, traditional decorative
elements were pushed off the page in favour of sparse
layouts in which scale and shape became the primary
means of decoration.
Even at the height of the Depression, Agha
was creating bold but elegant designs that
communicated their message with humour
and clarity.
208 Chapter 7
A desire to innovate and experiment lay at the
heart of Brodovitch’s work: a very instinctive
approach based on eschewing the rational
and the dogmatic for the constant pursuit of
change and modernity.
Alexey Brodovitch
Russian émigré Alexey Brodovitch was art director at
Harper’s Bazaar from 1934 to 1958, and in that period
initiated techniques that have set standards of art
direction ever since. Indeed, he pioneered the notion of
art direction as conceiving and commissioning visual
material rather than simply laying out pages. In terms
of style, Brodovitch introduced asymmetrical layouts,
movement, stripped-down simplicity and dynamic
imagery to magazines (and US editorial design in
general), which had previously been dominated by
static pages filled with decorative but irrelevant
clutter. These innovations were based on the simple
‘modern’ graphic style he had helped develop in
Europe in the 1920s, which, in turn, was based on an
amalgam of modernist movements and styles in art
and design – notably Dada and constructivism.
Obsessed with change and new ideas, including early
abstract expressionism, Brodovitch developed a style
that by the 1950s was a byword for elegance, largely
achieved through white space and understated colour,
along with contrasts of scale, precise, restrained
typography (often Bodoni), and photo shoots and
spreads invested with lively drama.
Part of Brodovitch’s skill lay in his ability to discover
and nurture new photographic talent, including Irving
Penn and Richard Avedon. He introduced the work of
avant-garde European photographers and artists such
as A.M. Cassandre, Salvador Dalí, Henri CartierBresson and Man Ray to the American public. He used
this photography as the backbone of spreads that were
light, spacious, full of movement and, above all,
expressionistic – something we take for granted today.
To achieve this, he took shoots outside the studio, and
made the models – what they were doing, where and
why – as important as the clothes they wore.
Essential design skills 209
Cipe Pineles
Nowadays, it is a given that photographers, illustrators,
artists and editorial designers are allowed to interpret
a story personally; indeed, it’s a practice that virtually
guarantees a result that, whether conceptual,
impressionistic, expressionistic or literal, will be
original and unexpected. Its invention was the
brainchild of Cipe Pineles, who in 1946 initiated the
practice on Seventeen magazine when she began
commissioning visuals for fiction.
Pineles began her career under M.F. Agha at Condé
Nast, where in five years she learned enough to take
her to Glamour in 1942 as the first autonomous female
art director. Here, she took fashion shoots into galleries
and open spaces, bled images off spreads, cleverly
guided readers from four-colour to two-colour images,
introduced drama and scale to photographs, and gave
a personal twist to editorial design by integrating
modernist principles of structure and abstraction with
playful use of visuals and type. But it was on Seventeen
(above), the first magazine aimed at teenage girls, that
she really came into her own.
Both Pineles and Seventeen’s founder and editor Helen
Valentine viewed their readers as serious, intelligent
young adults, and gave them serious, intelligent
content. Pineles did so by introducing them to some of
the most thought-provoking art of the time: the radical
politics of Seymour Chwast and Ben Shahn, among
others. She also introduced a system for the use of type
to define and shape individual sections, and brought
American figurative typography into the fashion and
editorial spreads, replacing type with objects to create
visual puns, and manipulating and interacting with
letterforms (scratching, tearing, hand-lettering and so
forth) to add meaning and expression to a story. In this
sense her work echoed what was happening in the
American art world, where expression was moving
away from the figurative to explore directions such as
conceptualism and abstract art with the use of wildly
varying media.
Pineles expanded her experimentation and
intervention with type on Charm magazine in 1950.
Once again, here was a thoughtful, intelligent
publication, bearing the strapline ‘for women who
work’, which consciously and firmly located its readers
in the context of a working and changing world in
which women played a vital part. Pineles responded to
the magazine’s remit with a modern realism that was
refreshing and new. Fashion shoots were conducted
against city backdrops and freeways to reflect the
country’s industrial revolution, vernacular type
expressed the two-dimensional realism of urban
space, and typography was used to give impact and
emphasis. Above all, it was Pineles’s ability to find and
work with artists and photographers, treating them as
friends as well as professionals, that marks her as one
of the great art directors. She won every major design
award possible during her lifetime, illustrating the
importance of strong productive relationships with
contributors and the ability to communicate effectively.
210 Chapter 7
Tom Wolsey
Many of the big names of modernist design are
Europeans who fled their homes to forge new
careers and lives in America. A notable exception is
Englishman Tom Wolsey, whose extraordinary art
direction on tailor’s magazine Man About Town (later
About Town, then Town) during the early 1960s
brought Swiss modernist ideals to the previously
ornate, classical taste of English periodical publishing.
His work was typified by the use of slab serifs and
modern sans serifs such as Haas Grotesk – he
aggressively combined the brute force of these faces
with equally uncompromising, startling illustrations
and set the two onto grid-free layouts that were all
about horizontals and angles. The result was a form of
design that had immediate and forceful impact but
was never monotonous, thanks to Wolsey’s rejection of
the grid, occasional playful integration of display fonts,
masterly use of picture placement, unerring ability
to create movement and dynamism, and instinctive
knowledge of good photography. He commissioned
some of the best photographers of the decade, among
them Don McCullin and Terence Donovan, and
employed excellent print production to reproduce their
work, setting the standards and styles for magazine
design in the 1960s and on.
Looking back, looking forward 211
Henry Wolf
Austrian émigré Henry Wolf, who was art director of
Esquire from 1952 to 1958, completely overhauled the
design of this up-and-coming literary magazine,
giving it a sophisticated and innovative style. In 1958,
he became art director at Harper’s Bazaar, succeeding
Alexey Brodovitch. He remained there for three years,
leaving in 1961 to start his own magazine, Show.
Wolf saw his task on all these titles as being to express
their contents visually by integrating rigorous
typography with expressive, eye-catching layouts. On
Harper’s Bazaar, where he inherited Alexey Brodovitch’s
stable of outstanding visual talent, Wolf built on this
legacy, introducing simple, streamlined fonts and
calm, spare compositions, which invested the layouts
(illustrated left), and the magazine as a whole, with a
measured pacing and flow. This was unusual for a
designer who was more comfortable with opening
spreads and covers than with the hard graft of lengthy
features and their attendant problems of continuity
and sustaining interest.
Not surprisingly, given his success in advertising, Wolf
reigned supreme in creating the concept cover, often
best seen in his work on Show, where he designed
surrealist covers that were clever, witty and always
original. Famous for the belief that ‘a magazine should
not only reflect a trend, it should help start it’, Wolf was
an intuitive designer who was instrumental in introducing
Americans of the 1950s to European modernism.
212 Chapter 7
Willy Fleckhaus
German designer Willy Fleckhaus is noted for his work
on just two publications, but Twen (illustrated here)
and Frankfurter Allgemeine Magazin (FAZ) are widely
regarded as among the most influential titles in
post-war editorial design. Fleckhaus’s genius was to
take the International Style, which dominated post-war
graphic design, and give it an explosive 1960s energy
created by the use of huge, tightly cropped pictures
anchored to a rigid, grid-ruled approach to design. The
resulting spreads offered a formal simplicity that he
carried through to Frankfurter Allgemeine Magazin ten
years after leaving Twen. This news magazine
experimented and played with illustration in much the
same way that Twen had done with photography, and
retained the simple formalism of the earlier title, which
was copied throughout Europe. In his book designs for
publishing houses such as Suhrkamp, Fleckhaus’s
work shows as much aplomb and understated panache
as that used in his magazines.
Twen
Twen launched in 1959 as a provocative youth title
that combined erotic photography with thoughtful,
intelligent articles. Its aim was to attract a new
readership that demanded to be seen as distinct from
its parents, an audience that was finding a language
and style of its own: the emerging youth culture that
was sweeping the West. This culture demanded a new
graphic style, and designer Willy Fleckhaus provided it
by combining elements of Swiss formalism –the
rationalism of the grid and simple typography – with
the witty and bold visual aesthetic of American
publishing. To achieve this, he devised a 12-unit
modular grid for the publication’s large-scale format
(265 x 335mm [10.4 x 13.2in]). The importance of this
grid lay in its ability to combine units in a seemingly
endless number of ways, enabling the use of two, three,
four, or six columns, while horizontal units could be
used to break down the columns into chunky blocks.
What Fleckhaus put in place was a series of versatile
coordinates on which to anchor his layouts – a brilliant
solution that stood out from every other publication.
Into this grid Fleckhaus then dropped some of the
most striking imagery of the time, cropping and
manipulating compositions to produce strange shapes
and massive close-ups that looked like weird
landscapes, surreal portraits … anything went as long
as it was dramatic, visually subversive and different.
Combining the large format with distinctive black
pages, minimal type (though a trained journalist,
Fleckhaus didn’t like writing and believed that visual
storytelling had more impact) and some of the most
eye-popping visual reportage of the day, Twen offered
a dramatic shock-of-the-new publication that perfectly
reflected its social and cultural milieu.
Essential design skills 213
Combining the large format with distinctive
black pages, minimal type (though a trained
journalist Fleckhaus didn’t like writing and
believed that visual storytelling had more
impact) and some of the most eye-popping
visual reportage of the day, Twen offered
a dramatic shock-of-the-new publication
that perfectly relected its social and
cultural milieu.
214 Chapter 7
Nova
Founded in the UK in 1965, the radical women’s
monthly Nova saw its remit from the outset as being
a women’s version of a men’s magazine – a title that
would offer its readers intelligent conceptual content
that went far beyond fashion and make-up. Art director
Harri Peccinotti and editor Dennis Hackett were united
in their determination to design a magazine that
reflected this forward-looking stance, and drew on the
American expressionist style developed by M.F. Agha
and Alexey Brodovitch in the 1950s to do so. Covers, in
particular, used a combination of unexpected image,
space and text to reflect confrontational and often
explosive topics such as racism, abuse, sex and
politics. Photography was stark and expressive, both in
content and cropping. But type was also innovative:
stand-firsts in Times font covered half a page and
demanded as much attention as the images. The legacy
that Peccinotti left for David Hillman, who worked on
Nova from 1969 until its demise in 1975, was ideal for
documenting and exploring a period of intense social,
sexual and political upheaval through bold, in-yourface visual elements (in particular photography, which
he was highly skilled at using as reportage).
Hillman’s ability to take design beyond defining a
publication’s identity to expressing its content, tone
and stance was honed on Nova, highlighting the
importance of being involved in all aspects of editorial.
Acting as both deputy editor and art director, he was
able both to interpret the magazine’s identity as an
uncompromising, individualistic title, breaking
boundaries and taking risks, and to look at individual
stories. Crucially, he believed photographs could tell
stories, and commissioned many such ‘stories’ from
photographers with different perspectives and even
opposing stances. As a result, the magazine consistently
broke new ground, but always in a way that was
entirely appropriate to its identity and content.
Looking back, looking forward 215
Oz
Radical psychedelic magazine Oz was first published
in Sydney, Australia, as a satirical publication edited
by Richard Neville and co-edited by Richard Walsh
and, crucially, artist, cartoonist, songwriter and
filmmaker Martin Sharp. It was Sharp who drove the
design direction of the magazine in its second
incarnation as a London hippy magazine (from 1967
to 1973), where it garnered artistic kudos in equal
measure with establishment opprobrium, and in 1970
a prosecution that would result in (at the time) the
longest obscenity trial in British legal history. For the
London issues of Oz, Sharp was able to take advantage
of new advances in printing, stock and inks to design
or show some of the most experimental and
adventurous covers
ever seen in editorial; man
y
editions of the magazine included dazzling wraparound covers or pull-out posters and were printed
in metallic inks or on foil. With these covers and
materials Sharp was pushing at the boundaries
of print technology and offering a rich metaphor for
Oz’s content, which was extending the limits of
what was permissible by exploring accepted notions
of pornography, libertarianism, obscenity and
radical thinking.
Formats and sizes changed frequently, with Sharp as
happy to explore the possibilities of landscape formats
as he was portrait ones, but what remained constant
was the ability of Oz to reflect and express brilliantly a
subculture’s shift from anti-authoritarian, drug-fuelled
anarchy and experimentalism to dilution and eventual
absorption in the establishment it had raged so hard
against. It did this not just through its covers, but also
through its design by Jon Goodchild. Working often
with Sharp and other contributors, Goodchild turned
the art room into ‘a theatre of experiment’, happily
using paste-up to create collages and loose
typographic layouts that moved editorial design away
from the rigours and constraints of the prevailing
Swiss style, with a lasting impact on graphic design.
216 Chapter 7
Neville Brody
Neville Brody joined The Face in 1981, and immediately
established a design aesthetic rooted in, but not aping,
the work of the twentieth-century art movements
Constructivism, Dada and Expressionism. Here, once
again, was typographic symbolism: playful
experimentation that looked back to the
mechanization of print and the opportunities it
afforded the visual communicator, and utilized the
expressionism inherent in stark, bold, geometric
shapes and symbols. This was visual culture affiliated
to political rebellion, which had a particular appeal
for the overtly political designer. The Face’s antiauthoritarian, post-punk political and visual identity
was a perfect match for Brody’s experimental,
individualistic approach to design because they
shared the same rebellious spirit and helped define
the look and feel of their time. Brody’s main
contribution to this youth-culture magazine was to
break with traditional methods of type construction
and establish it as a versatile, malleable design
element that was barely distinguishable from imagery
and could act as a vehicle for meaning.
The Face
Neville Brody’s design of 1980s counter-culture
magazine The Face revolutionized the editorial role of
type and would have a lasting impact on graphic
design. Brody’s strength lay in using type to express
meaning: by employing different faces within words to
suggest nonconformity, positioning and angling type
to echo the radical edginess introduced by Russian
constructivism, and using graphic devices and
symbols as page furniture to unify spreads and create
visual cohesion. He also took a bold approach to
images, cropping and framing to emphasize content
visually. Full bleeds with just a portion of an image
visible underlined the title’s identity as anachronistic,
anarchistic and thoroughly individual. As the
magazine matured, so, too, did Brody’s use of type and
image, remaining in step with the readers, but always
offering innovative and skilful design solutions. He
was less successful in applying these same styles to
other publications such as City Limits and Per Lui, but
his work on The Face continues to stand out as a
defining piece of editorial design.
Looking back, looking forward 217
Fabien Baron
For Fabien Baron, art direction runs in the family. After
just one year of art school at the École des Arts Appliqués
in Paris, he started work with his father, who art-directed
a number of French newspapers (including Jean-Paul
Sartre’s radical left-wing newspaper Libération), later
moving to Self, and then to GQ in the US. But it was on
Italian Vogue in 1988, and then on Harper’s Bazaar with
Liz Tilberis, that he carved a reputation for strong,
distinctive art direction that broke all the rules, including
commercial ones. On Italian Vogue, for example, he
simply ignored the accepted diktat of close-up
figurative cover shots, and commissioned photographers
such as Albert Watson to shoot arresting abstract
portraits by reducing shapes to strong graphic devices
that had real impact on the news-stand.
Baron’s trademark style of bold graphic solutions was
developed by minimizing the elements of design, as
well as the range within those elements, drawing his
colour palette from primary colours used sparingly
and to startling effect with big blocks of black.
Similarly, his illustration style is reduced to a few
select artists (on Italian Vogue he only ever used
illustrator Mats Gustafson, who created Interview
magazine’s logo) and his photos are mostly black-andwhite images cropped in unusual ways to create
striking results.
Above all, it is his use of typography as a constructive
architectural element that Baron is famed for. On
Italian Vogue, his use of huge full-page headlines to
open a feature, combined with a minimalist style and
large amounts of white space, created a new modern
aesthetic. His letterforms echoed elements of an
image; scale combined with a shape, a curve or a
colour would act as the cornerstone on which to build
a typographic solution. These became visual
responses and connections that were perfectly
adjusted to the magazine. On Interview he used this
approach to strengthen textual portraits of
interviewees, constructing type to express a sense of
the person visually. In both cases, Baron presented the
reader with visual solutions that were always coherent
and exuberant pieces of editorial design. More than
a decade later, his work on Vogue Paris (above)
continues to do this, playing with image, text, space
and scale to express the movement, action and vitality
of fashion in a new century.
Mark Porter
Mark Porter was art director at Colors magazine,
followed by the Evening Standard’s ES Magazine, and
the first two issues of Wired in the UK. He is best
known for his spectacular redesign of The Guardian
newspaper during his time there as creative director
there from 1996 to 2010. The redesign of that paper
won a Design and Art Direction association Black
Pencil award and a Society of Publication Designers
design award, and was significant at the time as
newspapers sought to break out of their old model into
new formats. During his time at The Guardian, Porter
also art directed the Weekend magazine and redesigned
it six times with the assistance of Richard Turley.
Porter’s passion for detail, and keen eye for a good
image, has made his work very popular. He is a visual
journalist first and foremost, reflecting his background
as a language graduate. He now runs his own studio
and recent work includes Publico and Financiele
Dagblad. Publico is a Portuguese daily full colour
newspaper, which has been praised for its very simple
and bold design. The publication is graphic and
features images throughout. Its smaller size makes
it a modern version of a colour newspaper – almost
a daily news magazine.
Financiele Dagblad is a daily financial paper produced
in Amsterdam. It is designed first for print, but also
appears in a website format and in a version for tablet.
Porter has had to consider how the overall design
format can be adapted for each different output.
218 Chapter 7
Looking back, looking forward 219
Gail Anderson
Gail Anderson is one of the most prolific unsung design
heroes and her work is a lasting inspiration to editorial
designers. Born in the Bronx to Jamaican parents, she
started at Random House after leaving the School of Visual
Arts and then worked for the Boston Globe newspaper.
However, it is for her years at Rolling Stone (1987–2002)
that she is best known. Although she worked in a partnership
with the esteemed Fred Woodward, it was Anderson who
explored decorative letterforms and came up with
double-page spreads that were good enough to be album
covers in their own right. In his interview with her when
she was awarded the 2008 AIGA MEDAL, Steve Heller
calls this ‘typographic eclecticism’. Her style at Rolling
Stone shows a painstaking, craft-based attention to
detail in densely designed pages, many featuring
illustration that she had commissioned. Despite winning
many awards for SPD and AIGA, she is a modest and
quietly diligent person, and generous in crediting her
influences as Paula Scher and Fred Woodward.
After Rolling Stone, Anderson joined the entertainment
advertising agency SpotCo, where she designed stunning
theatre posters for the entertainment industry. Her
playful images combined great ideas, illustrative solutions
and typographic play to create memorable images, some
that have branded entire shows or plays on and off
Broadway, such as the Avenue Q puppet. She designed
a postage stamp for the US Postal Service as well as
being on the Stamp Advisory Committee. The common
thread in her work is good, strong ideas and skillful,
attentive delivery, using both new and old letterforms
in a contemporary mix-up. She describes the skill of
having many ideas during her time at SpotCo to Steve
Heller, her co-author on various books:
‘You approach each project searching for a dozen
great ideas, not just one or two,’ Anderson explains
how her work competes for the attention (and
dollars) of theatregoers. ‘After about seven designs,
you realize there really are infinite ways to look at a
problem. I now completely enjoy the process, though
I’m keenly aware that all but one of those great ideas
will eventually be killed off. It’s strangely liberating.’
Anderson now teaches on the design programmes at
the School of Visual Arts, New York and has her own
boutique design firm.
220 Chapter 7
Fernando Gutiérrez
Everyone associates Benetton’s Colors magazine with
its original creators Oliviero Toscani and Tibor
Kalman, but it is also very much the product of
Fernando Gutiérrez, who became its creative director
in 2000, adopting Kalman’s original concept of visual
reportage as honest, stark storytelling. A versatile
designer, Gutiérrez has worked on everything,
including book publishing, communications
campaigns and editorial design, all produced by his
own company within just seven years of graduating
from the London College of Printing. Since then he has
been quietly reshaping the landscape of editorial
design in Spain and beyond, first on a governmentdepartment youth magazine, for which he created a
format based on a double grid, but most notably on
the Spanish fashion magazines Vanidad and Matador
– a literary and a photography journal respectively –
and on the newspaper El País. He has designed
and art-directed a full range of daily sections and
supplements for El País, including the youth-oriented
Tentaciones (left and ‘Conexión’ spread opposite) and
the Sunday EPS, which has a nationwide readership of
1.2 million. These are printed on low-grade newsprint,
yet play to the strengths of the format and stock but
are not confined by them. Gutiérrez was keen to design
them as stand-alone magazines rather than as newspaper
supplements, and the dynamism and panache with
which he achieved this goal saw sales rocket.
On all these publications what is evident is Gutiérrez’s
ability to use design elements to express the title’s
identity and give readers an appropriate experience.
Moreover, his work is infused with a cultural and
national identity, which makes these magazines stand
out from the crowd. On Matador, for which Gutiérrez
plans to produce 29 issues by 2022 (each annual
issue being ‘numbered’ with one letter from the
Spanish alphabet, representing a homage to a different
typeface), the key design elements are the high-quality
stock, large-scale format and the printing. These
combine with a formalism in the layout (see below) to
create a dramatic and distinctly unique publication.
Themes focusing on identity are overtly about
nationality, but other less obvious topics also
keep the title’s Spanish parentage in evidence.
Looking back, looking forward 221
Big magazine (below), an alternative style title printed
in Spanish and English, he worked with letterpress
guru Alan Kitching to produce type that he employed
playfully as skyscrapers, speech bubbles, a mask and
various other objects, all responding to the stunning
accompanying photography, which in turn echoed the
work of seminal New York photographer William Klein.
And on the UK magazine Zembla, a literary magazine
that wanted us to ‘have fun with words’, Frost literally
interpreted that fun on every page, with bright,
energetic, irreverent and playfully unpredictable
designs centred in most cases on type as decoration.
Frost’s skill goes beyond individual page solutions,
however, to incorporate another, equally important
aspect of editorial design: the ability to handle the flow
of a publication so that the whole product is an
exciting, constantly unexpected experience for the
user. Nowhere is this more evident than on Zembla,
where stunning photography, much of it black-andwhite, was combined with letterpress to surprising
and delightful effect, and where the regular editorial
department—letters, reviews, news and so on
– was given as much attention as feature pages.
Vince Frost
No designer since David Carson has used type in
editorial as expressively as Vince Frost. The results
could hardly be more different, but what unites the two
is an inherent understanding of the need for editorial
design – and particularly typography – to express the
content and identity of a publication visually. For both
designers, this has resulted in accusations of pointless
obstruction in their visual solutions, but set against
this is Frost’s constant desire to intrigue and engage
the reader through vibrant, exciting design.
Along with art-directing The Independent on Saturday
newspaper’s magazine in the UK during the mid1990s, Frost devised the design for the Financial
Times’s weekend magazine FT The Business. Both
reveal a delight in intelligent conceptual design. Frost
favours simplification and ‘tidy’ designs, which may
explain his extraordinary ability to work with
letterpress and woodblock typography as decorative
elements that are always wholly related to content –
though perhaps not always appropriate to its tone and
style. By reducing the number of design tools in his
palette, Frost is able to focus on making each element
work extra hard to arrive at clean, bold solutions. On
222 Chapter 7
Janet Froelich
Janet Froelich is well known for her strong art
direction for The New York Times Magazine and Real
Simple, and for her passion for photography and
design. Over her long career, her ability to work with
diverse creative partners has helped her strive for the
best images and the best ideas. Froelich began her
career as a painter, and studied fine art at Cooper
Union and at Yale University.
Froelich was art director of The New York Times
Magazine from 1986 to 2004, becoming creative
director in 2004, and has won over 60 design awards
from the Society of Publication Designers, the Art
Directors Club and the Society of Newspaper
Designers. Under her direction, The New York Times
Magazine won the Society of Publication Designers
“Magazine of the Year” award in 2007. In 2004, she
became the founding creative director of T: The New
York Times Style Magazine, an award-winning
publication filled with beautiful fashion and design
content which she helped develop. In 2006, she also
became founding creative director for Play: The New
York Times Sports Magazine and Key: The New York
Times Real Estate Magazine. As we go to press, Froelich
is the creative director of Real Simple magazine where
she heads the creative team on this lifestyle, food and
home title for Time Inc. She oversees design for print
and tablet, mobile and web, as well as product
packaging, all of which benefit from her clear vision of
design and commitment to excellence in photography
and typography. The images in Real Simple are
beautiful and striking, and often succeed
in telling a whole story in a single image, even when
it is downsized into an icon for mobile media.
In 2006, Froelich received the Art Directors Club Hall
of Fame award, and she has inspired many young
designers through her work, and through teaching at
the School of Visual Arts, New York. She has served on
the boards of the Society of Publication Designers and
the Art Directors Club, and was the president of the
New York chapter of the American Institute of Graphic
Arts (AIGA), organizations that each help to raise the
profile of design.
Froelich’s passion for fine art has informed
many of the choices she has made, and has
helped her to collaborate with artists and
designers to make memorable images.
Looking back, looking forward 223
224 Chapter 7
Scott Dadich
Originally from Texas, Scott Dadich worked on the
beautifully crafted Texas Monthly before arriving at
Wired magazine in 2006. After winning many awards
for groundbreaking design, characterized by his
can-do attitude to the magazine format and innovative
engagement with the readership, Dadich became one
of the pioneers of good magazine design during the
transitional period from print to iPad. He initiated the
concept of the Wired app and led the entire team in its
development. Wired was the very first app built in the
framework that would become DPS. He also designed
the second app, which was for The New Yorker, and in
2012 this app became one of the most successful in
terms of sales in the entire industry. With the backing
of the renowned Condé Nast publishing company,
Dadich’s team also launched The New Yorker for
iPhone in 2012.
Dadich investigated the transition from flipping
through magazine pages as linear PDFs in early apps
to include digital pages too. He called it the ‘stack’
system where pages of both digital and print are
arranged as if on a clothesline. With the investment
of Condé Nast behind his team of designers and
developers, he explored the format when it was still
in its infancy.
Dadich’s thirst for innovation continues to drive him
on in his role as Vice President, Editorial Platforms &
Design at Condé Nast. His passion and eloquence
for the medium, and his generosity in sharing has
made him an outstanding contributor to the design
community as it moves through the greatest
transition since the invention of the printing press.
For print
Stacks
Screens
Model, designer, actress – and
ELLE cover girl for the third
time. Find out why we can’t
get enough of Rosie.
Our exclusive behind-the-scenes
film at elleuk.com/elle-tv
WATCH IT
42 ELLEUK.COM
Compiled by: Emma Sells. Photography: Alamy, Anthea Simms, Jacob Lillis, Mariano Vivanco, Victoria Adamson.
Rosie Huntington-Whiteley: supermodel superpower
BOOK IT Do something different
with our pick of the best adventure
holidays at elleuk.com/travel
SEE IT Team ELLE’s fashion
week front-row wardrobe at
elleuk.com/style
WIN IT A classic snakeskin
bag, worth £1,520, from Lara
Bohinc at elleuk.com/comps
READ IT Simone Rocha tells
us what makes her label tick at
elleuk.com/promotion/cointreau
Looking back, looking forward 225
Suzanne Sykes
Suzanne Sykes is a British art director known for her
work in reinventing fashion magazines. She was the
launch designer for Marie Claire UK in 1989 with editor
Glenda Bailey. Her various D&AD design awards came
for her work on Grazia, which took the glamorous
fashion monthly aesthetic and translated it into a
fast-paced, newsy weekly formula. At the time this was
a revolutionary approach to top-selling fashion brands.
The look was dramatic and divided opinion, but
changed the fashion magazine landscape with its
layered pages and coloured panels.
After a stint in New York as art director of Marie Claire
US (2007–12), Suzanne tackled an ambitious redesign
of Elle UK, which had its heyday in the supermodeldominated ’80s. Sykes recognized the need to respond
to a changing readership, now less likely to buy glossy
magazines, but keen to use social media for their
fashion advice. With art director Mark Leeds she
created a publication both online and in print that
directly connected both platforms – unlike the
competition, which produced sibling versions from
the master print title.
Talking about digital and print in March 2013 she said:
‘Print is the hero brand. We set our stall in print, driving
readers to the digital arena.’ In 2013, Elle sold 177,094
copies in print; website readership was 450,000
unique users per month. Elle was the first UK women’s
mag to have 1.13 million Facebook followers. Sykes
says that with editor Lorraine Candy she is ‘aiming for
the reader to be able to buy directly from the page’.
Suzanne’s design follows the bold mother
brand but expands to the enhanced app
version, (elle.com page). Here, the cover
model Rosie Huntington appears in a video
on ElleTV, giving the reader a variety of ways
of exploring and sharing content.
226 Chapter 7
Looking forward
While it is almost impossible and perhaps foolish to
try and predict emerging trends in design, it is useful
to touch on technological and other changes which are
affecting design practice. All the figures listed above
have benefited from the new technologies of their era,
be that the increased availability of colour printing or
the flexibility of phototypesetting. Today, the Apple
computer on the desk of every editorial designer
enables them to be a true multi-disciplinarian: part
printer, part art director, part image-maker, part coder,
part editor, part blogger, part marketer … but he or she
must be more than the sum of all these parts. Designers
must be aware of economic, cultural and technological
shifts in different media, and be ever-ready to adapt to
new technologies in order to survive.
In this section, we look at the challenges that may be
coming up in the near future and reveal insights from
industry experts.
Technological shifts
The tablet magazine
As we go to press, the biggest challenge to the editorial
design industry is the variety of channels that
magazines face across print, tablets and social media.
The 2010 launch of the Apple iPad triggered a race to
make app versions of print magazines in the hope that
these would be the answer to monetizing digital
content. Adobe, Woodwing, Mag+ and others quickly
developed plug-ins for InDesign that allowed print
designers to adapt their layouts for the iPad and other
tablets. Overnight, a whole new stage in the editorial
workflow was introduced. The print edition completed,
the design team would adapt the final pages to the
smaller tablet screen, reformatting everything and
adding interactive elements – animation, video, audio.
It remains to be seen how genuinely successful such
apps might become, but the production process has led
editorial designers to add interactive skills to their
ever-increasing list of responsibilities.
Responsive design
Initially developed to cope with the multiple screen
sizes on which a website might be viewed (desktop,
Essential design skills 227
non-designers. They developed a bespoke software
called Arthr and negotiated good rates with printers
based on using their press downtime. The result was
a service where anyone could upload words and text,
have the software lay it out as pages, and order a small
run of newspapers (design-literate users could upload
their own designs as PDFs).
A more personal form of print-digital crossover came
with Little Printer, developed by London-based studio
Berg. Rejecting the traditional publishing model that
you print editorial, distribute it and hope somebody
buys it, Little Printer offers a selection of material to
choose from via a web dashboard. The content arrives
via WiFi to be printed on receipt paper by the Little
Printer (see pp.232–33). Bearing some similarities to
Flipboard, it is a typically playful experiment from
Berg. Principal Jack Schulze, explains:
‘Little Printer is a product that has a couple of
qualities to it and behaviours that are very different
from Flipboard. One is that everything is archived in
the cloud. It has a history of its behaviours if you
want to look at it. Second it schedules a release of
small poignant personal data and information for
you. You ought to be able to access it with just a
single point of interaction. Some of this output is
usual content e.g. puzzles, weather, some is social
media content, plus a mix of broadcasters and big
publishers like The Guardian. It is just junk being
sent around in pixels. The point is that it is at 8.15am
and it is my friends. The Big M media and the small
media all come out in the same language. Little
Printer does not differentiate.’
Finite publishing
A recent focus of interest has been the notion of
presenting digital content – usually endless in its open,
linked, internet guise – within a finite boundary to echo
the way a printed publication is limited by the number of
pages. Instead of an infinite quantity of website content,
a website or app might flaunt an exact finiteness. One
such experiment is The Magazine, an iPhone app
launched by Marco Arment (founder of reading app
Instapaper) that presents four technology-orientated
pieces of writing to subscribers every two weeks.
Available exclusively via Apple’s Newsstand and not in
print, there are no visuals or decoration, simply readable
text delivered in small volumes with a clear end, or ‘edge’.
tablet, phone), responsive design means the width of
the browser window triggers an algorithmic change of
layout to suit each environment. The broad multicolumn screen design for desktop browsing automatically
changes to single-column design for the smartphone.
To help the designer cope with the changes in the
workflow discussed above, it has been proposed that
a similar algorithm-based responsivity might be
developed to account not only for the change between
print design and tablet design, but also to account for
the more subtly varied tablet screen sizes and formats.
Automated content
With RSS feeds, the automatic magazine is a reality
with algorithms (calculation/problem-solving processes
performed by a computer) working out the content the
reader wants and delivering it via application software
to different mobile devices. In 2012, the most popular
provider of aggregated content was Flipboard, which
was founded in the US two years previously by Mike
McCue and Evan Doll. Flipboard is a digital social
magazine that aggregates content from social media
such as Facebook and Twitter and displays the content
in magazine format on an iPad or Android mobile
device. Users can also “flip” through feeds from
websites that have partnered with the company, for
example, subscribers of The New York Times can now
read the publication’s content on Flipboard. As Jeremy
Leslie, creative director of magCulture, notes:
‘There is no art director in that sense, there is an
algorithm. Flipboard is the first that has brought some
sense of scale and space. I use it on my phone for my
social network feeds. Twitter is a great example and it
works well with Flipboard. The way the pages turn on
Flipboard is also worth a mention. Traditionally page
turning on devices was an unhappy aesthetic between
purpose and function, looking very uncomfortable.
The way that Flipboard splits the iPad screen down the
middle is very clever, it refers to a magazine without
directly mimicking it.’
Combining print and digital
Another algorithm-based project demonstrates one
of the most interesting recent themes in publishing,
the combining of traditional print and new digital
technologies. The Newspaper Club developed from
its founders desire to open up print production to
228 Chapter 7
Available on both Apple and Android devices,
the automatically produced content of
Flipboard has a magazine-like feel, with
sharp black text appearing on a clean
white background along with images and
links, and clean white text appearing over
images as shown here.
Looking back, looking forward 229
Another start-up, Aeon Magazine (aeonmagazine.com),
publishes one original long form essay every weekday,
again concentrating on the quality of content rather
than quantity. The material is highly progressive,
thought-provoking and written by specialists, the aim
being that readers focus on this daily serving of
valuable content rather than drown in endless ‘must
reads’. Aeon essays are published daily on the web, as
well as being available via a subscription email on a
daily or weekly basis, and aadapt respnsively to
desktop, iPad and smart phone screens.
Availability of data Many companies, such as The Times
newspaper, can use increased data availability to their
advantage. Jon Hill, design editor at The Times, says:
‘..new developments in data availability can be
pushed further, of which GPS is just one part of what
we can do. The other exciting thing is that we can
contextualize stories and show picture galleries
using our archive, which goes back 225 years, in an
interesting way. This project has great potential for
an organization like The Times .... We have a lot of
feedback now for the editions too, telling us how
much time the readers spend. There is now
microdata on our work, with analysis showing which
infographics people spent time looking at. Before, if
you put it out and if people looked at it then that was
great, but now we have detailed feedback telling us
what was actually successful.’
Changing business models The sharing of ideas
and editorial opinions used to be person-to-person,
but is now done via social media networks such as
Twitter and Tumblr. These tools help to bring
audiences back to print and are part of the multichannel network of support systems that publications
use to share their content.
News media companies like NewsCorp are working on
how to sustain their large organizations via a mix of
multi-channel products and services. Some of these
prove to be lucrative business models, while others
consist of more traditional and historic parts that don’t
generate high income. As Jon Hill says:
‘...the big thing is with the paywall and the digital
editions. We have to look at our workflow at The
Times and see how we produce these things
efficiently and make sure the design team are having
proper input. We are working hard to try to sustain all
the different platforms at once, 24 hours a day. We
can’t make bespoke editions for every single new
tablet or mobile platform that comes up so we will
prioritize our design efforts. We want to make a
difference to the design of each part of the output.’
So can magazines survive just in print? Simon
Esterson, co-publisher of Eye magazine answers:
‘ … too hard to generalize. Smaller publishing
companies have been cleared out as supermarkets
take over distribution of a selection of titles. Small
newsagents are no longer able to compete. At one
end you have got big publishing in print and at the
other you have got a fertile area of self-publishing.
… The difference the web makes is that you can
actually purchase back copies and subscriptions
from abroad and have them delivered to your home.
Instead of schlepping to specialist collectors, you can
find them online. Small publishers like Eye, can keep
in touch with readers once they find us and let them
know about events and new issues. For small
publishers, their titles may not be in the shops but
that’s not a problem.”
It appears that the iPad is really loved by many of its
users as a unique object. However, it cannot be
assumed that this tablet or other cheaper Android
tablets will continue to have the same appeal to
consumers in the future, or that these or any new
devices will remove paper from our lives.
profile of a design innovator
Jack Schulze
While Jack Schulze has one foot in the future, he also has an
interest in designing beautiful aesthetic work, influenced by his
passion for typography and respect for a good idea. His work for
Mag+ showed a simple way of navigating through different types
of content within a magazine app.
The idea of new software and exploring different deliveries for
editorial continues to interest BERG, a company founded by
Schulze and Matt Webb in London in 2005 (they were later
joined by Matt Jones).
In February 2012, Fast Company ranked BERG one of the ‘World’s
50 most innovative companies’. This annual guide to companies
whose innovations have made an impact in technology and
culture, applauded BERG for ‘wildly imagining the marriage of
physical and digital’. Through its playful and off-the-wall
thinking, BERG helps companies to realize their potential with
digital technologies and offers innovative products, such as
Little Printer, as an alternative to usual publishing thinking.
In the following interview, Schulze puts forward his views on the
role of big media companies and what might happen in the future.
How can the big media companies stay agile and keep in
touch with what consumers want?
They need to become software companies. Steve Jobs and
Amazon have changed the rules of the relationship with
consumers. There are two big games in town: one is experience,
the other is data. Basically media companies need to be making
software, it is not enough to be making content.
Where does this leave the big media companies?
Those big media companies do still have value. Alan Rusbridger
(editor of The Guardian), for instance, is clever and understands
collaboration. However, Big Media are in trouble. Historically if
you are a successful media company you want to be the largest.
Media is used to owning stuff (assets) and having a lot of output
and reach into TV, into hotel rooms, etc. In the software sector
you want to be three dudes in a basement. What you want to be
is small.
What those businesses rely on is the value of their
infrastructure. If you are a broadcaster you own many buildings
and on the top of hills you have 40-foot (12 metre) antennas
scooping up electricity and signals and beaming out TV and
radio. It was enough when there wasn’t any other alternative, but
now we can just check Facebook. Broadcasters have all that
huge hardware and business just for mundane content. If you
are a news company and let’s then say you own buildings and all
these printing presses. You would also have trucks that drive the
newspapers and distribute them, just in case someone might
happen to want to spend 90 pence on a fixed piece of paper that
they then have to carry home and read cover-to-cover. It is
a very expensive way to do things. When there was no
alternative it was fine. Now it seems ridiculous and a waste
of energy and money.
How does Little Printer work?
When I need to configure it then I go online to subscribe to one
of the publishing streams. I say these are the things that I want
and it delivers them once a day. For me, for instance, I want it
delivered in the morning. On the top is a button. If a delivery is
sent, the light gently flashes, a bit like an answering machine. If
you don’t print it out and the next delivery comes, then you just
get one, not two. If you go away for a couple of days then on your
return you don’t get everything, just the new delivery, but the
rest is still stored on the cloud.
Take this for example: the content stream How many people are
in space right now? tells you that there are six people in space
right now. If you subscribe to this stream then you get news only
when it changes. You only need to know an update when there
are seven people in space. Daily newspapers have to come out
every day. They always have to fill space with their columnists,
even on a slow news day, and rely on habits of readers. Here we
can create content only when it matters. Some days there is not
much to say. There are ways of creating publishing only when
there is something to publish. Why not publish something only
when something happens because that is when it matters. Why
publish every day? Media companies don’t work like that.
What is your prediction for the future?
This ubiquitous cheap Android tablet device made in China is
going to look like the USB key or a CD in a few years time. They
will be giving them away with a film on it or a book on it. It will
be in your fruit bowl at home and when you want to check your
email you won’t go to your computer but will be picking up one
of these.
It is literally a cheap factory-made tablet device. Google make
Android as an open system so that Samsung, Nokia and Apple
could use the Android system on their hardware. Apple matters
because people want it. The difference is that people want the
Apple product.
profile of a design innovator
Jack Schulze
The thermal printer reduces all the different
subscribing feeds to a single thermal printout.
This is your own personal data, designed
in a friendly device connected to your
home broadband.
Looking back, looking forward 231
232 Chapter 7
Cultural and behavioural shifts
The boundaries between what is marketing,
publishing, broadcasting and advertising have blurred.
People now consume more media in their daily lives;
often using mobile and television, or web and music,
at the same time. Global web traffic statistics from
marketing data services, such as Neilson BookData,
show that consumers seem to be hungry for more.
Journalists can share their ideas on social media. Editors
no longer have control over the journey that the reader
once took when a magazine or newspaper was a more
linear experience. Increasingly editors need to look for
more ways for their publication to stand out.
The blurring of print and digital outputs also
continues. Jeremy Leslie says:
‘We are at the stage of print and digital where you
can say what is the difference? You have to just
understand the difference between making a
pamphlet of your own, having a Twitter feed, a blog
or a magazine. Ask yourself how does your voice
decrease or diminish in different worlds? Now it
is all publishing, it is communicating opinion.’
One example of this is the travel and culture magazine
Monocle, known for its innovative approach to
magazines and the blurring of boundaries between
advertising and editorial. In 2011, editor Tyler Brûlé
launched a television show on Bloomberg network
and an internet radio station, Monocle 24. Both of
these channels seek to broadcast an intimate
experience for the magazine’s jet-setting readership
and reflect Brûlé’s keen understanding of his
readership, borne out by 2.5 million downloads a
month. Radio adds an intimate touch and nostalgic
quality to the brand using a faintly BBC World Service
style of broadcasting.
Economic shifts and new world markets
While the emerging ‘BRIC’ markets (Brazil, Russia,
India and China) were thought to offer the big media
(Big M) companies new markets, we have seen
evidence that the freedom of the press is not what
it was in the US or the UK. This affects news
organizations such as The New York Times and
the BBC as they struggle to make their services pay.
As Jack Schulze from BERG observes:
‘American Big M media is interested in the Chinese
market. The difference in the market is scale. If they
can get 5 per cent of that market, it would be
significant and a way to sustain their business model
back in the US. There is nothing unique or sensible
about trying to launch a media platform in China. (It
is just desperation in my view). Likewise, The
Guardian is interested in the US because it prolongs
their UK-based business model … In Africa SMS is
significant because any kind of connectivity be it
social or whatever can be exploited for social and
economic gain. Stef Magdalinski runs businesses in
Africa and runs a Yellow Pages service via SMS,
NOVEMBER 2012
holiday
entertaining
made easy
85
RECIPES,
STRATEGIES
+ IDEAS TO
STRESS LESS,
CELEBRATE
MORE
REDUCE YOUR DEBT:
5 EXPERT TRICKS
WHAT’S THE BEST
SKIRT LENGTH FOR YOU?
STAIN REMOVAL 101
LIFE MADE EASIER
Looking back, looking forward 233
Readers are no longer static while they read.
They are more likely to be on the move or
doing two things at once. In the ‘Wild Summer
Walks’ feature (opposite) from The Times,
interactive content is provided in App form.
The reader can use the content to guide their
walk, as here on the Welsh coastline, for
example, where the reader will use the
location to enhance their interaction
with the content.
Real Simple magazine is often used in the
kitchen on the iPad, as the user follows
recipes. Content is interactive, and can
be used to follow step-by-step instructions.
Other media may often be consumed
at the same time – TV, email, social
media. The way we enjoy magazines
is constantly evolving.
which is very popular. He is one to watch as he aims
to bring information and data to many people.’
The use of a simple solar panel device can bring
electricity to populations who do not have power to
charge a computer or a mobile device. However, the
network coverage available in remote, poorer regions
is insufficient to enable publishing to be downloaded,
so there is still a cap on the expansion until mobile
networks catch up. The networks need to see a financial
reward for their investment in infrastructure before
they will bring network availability to remote areas.
Real benefits of using social media
The next generation of publishing talent will still need
to tell the stories which need to be told, but will use
their natural ease with social media as part of their
output tools. At the point of writing, it is a myth that
there is a singular ‘next big thing’ which will replace
print. Instead, editors and designers are now telling
stories in every medium that readers can consume in.
Janet Froelich, creative director at Real Simple, relates
one example of this:
‘Real Simple was the first magazine to gain over
100k followers on Pinterest. Most of our images are
re-posted on readers’ blogs and on personal favorites
pages. Our photo and art teams have been shooting
what they find visually stimulating, and posting
these images on Instagram. We often get hundreds of
“likes” on each of them. Those photographs expand
our audience, keep the dialogue going, and showcase
the vision and talent of our team. We are always
working to create a more seamless integration of
print, digital and social media.’
234
The evolution of the printed page
ad 105 Paper is invented in China.
770 Relief printing is practised in China.
868 The world’s earliest dated printed book,
a Chinese Diamond Sutra text, is created
using woodblocks.
Early 15th century Professional writers join the ranks
of monks in writing books as trading and
wider education lead to more books for the
upper and middle classes in Europe. In Paris,
these writers form themselves into a guild –
publishing has arrived.
1450 In Mainz, Germany, goldsmith Johannes
Gutenberg invents movable type (also known
as ‘foundry type’ or ‘hot type’), and five years
later uses it to begin a print run of 180 copies
of the Gutenberg Bible.
1457 Gazette, claimed to be the first printed
newspaper, is printed in Nuremberg, Germany.
The earliest example of colour printing
arrives with the Mainz Psalter by Johann Fust
and Peter Schöffer.
1476 William Caxton returns from Cologne,
Germany, with a range of typefaces and sets
up a printing press in Westminster, London,
having already produced the first book in the
English language, The Recuyell of the
Historyes of Troye, in Bruges.
1486 The first English, colour-illustrated book is
printed in St Albans, England.
1494 Typographer, teacher and editor Aldus
Manutius establishes the Aldine printing
house in Venice, Italy.
1500 Approximately 35,000 books have been
printed, 10 million copies worldwide.
1501 Italic type, designed by Francesco Griffo, is
first used in an octavo edition of Virgil printed
by Manutius’s Aldine Press.
1588 Englishman Timothy Bright invents a form
of shorthand.
1605 The first regularly published weekly
newspaper appears in Strasbourg.
1622 Nathaniel Butter, the ‘father of the English
press’, publishes Weekly Newes, the first
printed English newspaper, in London.
1650 Leipzig in Germany becomes home to the
first daily newspaper.
1663 Erbauliche Monaths-Unterredungen (‘Edifying
Monthly Discussions’), considered the world’s
first magazine, is published in Germany.
1690 America’s first newspaper, Publick Occurrences
Both Forreign and Domestick, is printed in
Boston, Massachusetts, and subsequently
suspended for operating without a royal licence.
1702 The first daily news-sheet, The Daily Courant,
is published in England.
1703 Sankt-Peterburgskie Vedomasti newspaper
founded by Peter the Great in Russia.
1709 The Copyright Act is passed in England.
Tatler, the first major magazine, is launched
in London.
1714 Henry Mill is granted a patent for a writing
machine in London.
1719 German engraver Jakob Le Blon, granted a
privilege by George I of England to reproduce
pictures and drawings in full colour, produces
the basis of modern four-colour plate printing.
1731 The Gentleman’s Magazine, considered the
first modern magazine, published in England.
1741 Benjamin Franklin plans to publish America’s
first magazine, General Magazine, but
American Magazine comes out three
days earlier.
1764 Pierre Fournier of France develops the point
system to measure type sizes. His system is
further refined by François Didot, establishing
consistency in type measure throughout
the world.
1784 The Pennsylvania Evening Post is America’s
first daily newspaper.
1785 The Daily Universal Register is founded in
London by John Walter. Three years later it
is renamed The Times.
1790s Lithography is invented by Alois Senefelder
in Bavaria, Germany, streamlining the
reproduction of images by eliminating the
need for engraving or carving.
1791 The Observer, the country’s first Sunday
newspaper, is launched in England by
W.S. Bourne.
1814 An early version of the cylinder press is used
to produce the London Times at a rate of 1,100
copies an hour, but it is not refined and taken
up universally until 1830, when Richard
March Hoe perfects the drum-cylinder press,
capable of producing 2,500 pages per hour.
By 1847 he has expanded this to a
five-cylinder press.
1828 The Ladies’ Magazine is launched to become
the first successful American magazine
for women.
1842 The Illustrated London News is founded in
England by Herbert Ingram and Mark Lemon.
Using woodcuts and engravings, it prompts
the growth of illustrated publications.
1844 The Bangkok Recorder is the first newspaper
published in Thailand.
1845 Scientific American launches in America. It
has been published continuously since that
date, making it the longest-running magazine
in American history.
c.1845 Paperbacks are introduced in America (four
years after their appearance in Germany) as
newspaper supplements, and soon appear as
small-sized reprints of existing books.
1850 Heidelberg’s first press is made by Andreas
Hamm in the Palatine city of Frankenthal in
southwest Germany.
1851 The New York Times launches, priced at one
cent.
1854 Le Figaro newspaper is launched in Paris,
France.
1856 The first African-American daily, the New
Orleans Daily Creole, is published.
1867 The first Japanese magazine, Seiyo-Zasshi
(‘The Western Magazine’), is published.
1874 E. Remington and Sons in Illinois
manufactures the first commercial
typewriter, invented seven years earlier by
Wisconsin newspaperman Christopher
Latham Sholes. It has only upper-case letters
but a QWERTY keyboard. The machine is
refined the following year to incorporate
lower-case letters.
1875 Offset litho printing – printing onto etched
metal plates from a smooth surface rather
than letterpress – is introduced.
1878 In the United States, inventor William A.
Lavalette patents a printing press that greatly
improves the quality of printing, particularly
in terms of legibility and quality.
In Scotland, Frederick Wicks invents the
typecasting machine.
1886 The Linotype typesetting machine is
invented by Ottmar Mergenthaler. Combining
keyboard unit, matrix magazine and caster in
one unit, it can cast letters at the rate of
17,000 per hour by compositors pressing keys
to create ‘slugs’ – lines of matrices combined
then redistributed for reuse.
1900 An estimated 1,800 magazines are being
published in America, where total newspaper
circulation passes 15 million a day.
1903 The first offset printing press is used by
Ira Washington Rubel in America, and,
separately, by Caspar Hermann in Germany.
1911 Typesetting is refined further with the
introduction of the Ludlow typesetting
machine, developed by Washington I. Ludlow
and William Reade in Chicago, Illinois.
1912 Photoplay debuts in America as the first
magazine for movie fans.
1917 The first ‘op-ed’ (opinion and editorial) page
appears in The New York Times.
1923 Time magazine debuts in America.
1933 Esquire launches in America as the first
men’s magazine.
1934 Alexey Brodovitch is hired to work on Harper’s
Bazaar in New York, bringing a visual flair and
dynamism to the layouts.
1936 Allen Lane’s Penguin Press reintroduces the
paperback book in the UK.
In America, photojournalism magazine Life is
founded by Henry Luce for Time Inc. It was
to dominate the American news market for
40 years, selling more than 13.5 million
copies a week.
1941–44 Documentary photography reports back
from WWII and magazines publish stories
led by reportage. Some images are restricted
and questioned.
1945 Ebony, the first magazine for the African–
American market, is founded in the US by
John H. Johnson.
1953 The first issue of TV Guide magazine hits the
newsstands on April 3 in ten American cities,
with a circulation of 1,560,000.
235
Playboy magazine appears, its cover featuring
Marilyn Monroe.
1955 Dry-coated paper is developed at the Battelle
Memorial Institute, Columbia, Ohio.
1955 Esquire magazine in the US publishes bold
cover with minimal cover lines due to the
strong sense of brand. Only a few other
publications are able to use colour.
1958 Henry Wolf becomes Art Director at Harper’s
Bazaar and pushes graphic language to
connect photoshoots and typography.
1956 The first hard-disk drive is created at IBM.
1962 British national newspaper The Sunday Times
launches a full-colour magazine supplement
designed by Michael Rand.
1964 In America, statistics show that 81 per cent of
adults read a daily newspaper.
1965 Teen magazine Twen is launched by German
publishing giant Springer. Designed by Willy
Fleckhaus, it comes to be regarded as a
ground-breaking example of editorial design.
In the UK, the Daily Mirror’s magazine
division launches Nova, with Dennis Hackett
as editor and David Hillman as designer.
1967 The ISBN (International Standard Book
Number) system starts in the UK. Rolling
Stone debuts in the US, followed by New York
Magazine in 1968, spawning the popularity of
special-interest and regional magazines.
1969 Andy Warhol launches Interview magazine.
1971 Newspapers worldwide begin the switch from
hot-metal letterpress to offset.
1975 Nova magazine closes.
1977 Apple Computer launches the Apple II
microcomputer.
1980 At the European Organization for Nuclear
Research (CERN) in Geneva, Switzerland,
Tim Berners-Lee takes the first steps towards
a worldwide web, creating a software program
called ‘Enquire Within Upon Everything’ after
a Victorian-era encyclopaedia remembered
from his childhood.
The Face is launched in the UK by Nick Logan
as a style and culture alternative to women’s
glossy magazines
1981 The cover of Rolling Stone shows a naked
John Lennon and clothed Yoko Ono. This
iconic Annie Leibovitz image epitomizes the
power of magazines within the music business.
1982 Daily newspaper USA Today launches. Taking
its visual lead from television, it uses colour
throughout, features numerous graphics,
and is an immediate success. Innovative
techniques assist distribution, enabling the
final edition to be printed in multiple
locations across the country.
1983 The Apple Lisa is launched by Apple
Computer, ushering in a new Graphic User
Interface (GUI) that makes home computing
– and publishing – accessible and affordable.
1984 The Apple Macintosh, or the Mac, is
introduced, marking the first successful
commercial implementation of a GUI, which
is now used in all major computers.
Emigre magazine launches in California and
is soon to be a creative showcase for digital
fonts and imagery.
1985 The first desktop-publishing program, Aldus
Pagemaker 1.0, is created by Paul Brainerd
and Aldus and released for the Macintosh.
This desktop-publishing program leads to
a new type of publishing and puts design
and editing tools into the hands of everyone.
1987 QuarkXPress is launched. Despite the release
of Aldus Pagemaker two years earlier,
it quickly becomes the pre-eminent
desktop-publishing program.
1991 The World Wide Web debuts. Using Tim
Berners-Lee’s HTML (hyper-text mark-up
language), anyone can now build a website
and share it with at first hundreds, but
quickly millions, of people worldwide.
1994 In Italy, an A5 handbag-sized version of
Glamour is launched by Condé Nast.
In America, the first beta version of the
Netscape browser Mosaic is released.
The first wiki is developed in Portland Oregon
by Ward Cunningham. Wikis enable users
to create and link pages of content in a
non-linear and collaborative way on the web.
1995 Salon, a US liberal magazine published in
online form only. This format challenges the
traditional business model for print media.
1997 The New York Times introduces colour photos
to its news pages.
2004 In the UK, The Independent newspaper moves
from a broadsheet to a tabloid format. Within
a year, The Times also produces a daily
tabloid.
2005 The Guardian newspaper moves to a Berliner
format and to full colour.
The First Post online news magazine
launches in the UK.
2006 Video-sharing website YouTube purchased
by Google for $1.65 billion in stock.
Online newspaper websites in the US attract
over 58 million readers, according to a report
for the Newspaper Association for America.
2007 UK online publication Financial Times reports
a 30 per cent increase in advertising sales.
The wireless Kindle e-book reader goes on sale.
2008 In America the number of adults who say
they read a daily newspaper the day before is
30 per cent.
2009 Newspaper sales fall following world financial
crisis. The Faster Times is launched in the
US by Sam Apple as an experiment to find
a model for ‘on-demand journalism’.
thetimesonline.co.uk has a daily readership
of 750,000
2010 The Apple iPad goes on sale; 3 million units
are sold within 30 days.
Amazon Books announces that sales of
ebooks have surpassed the sale of
paperbacks for the first time.
WIRED magazine releases its tablet edition
for the iPad.
The Times launches an interactive issue for
the tablet market.
Wikileaks publishes classified documents
from anonymous new sources and upsets the
news media by bypassing usual established
practices. In light of the demise of large news
publishers the validity of news stories on the
web is challenged by this activism.
2011 The Guardian tablet editions launches.
iPad2 goes on sale. Over 15 million units are
sold in the first year.
The New York Times’ publisher announces
that it will charge frequent readers for access
to its online content in the US.
News International introduces a paywall for
the London Times.
2012 Cross-platform magazines like Little White
Lies and Letter to Jane branch out into
different formats and leave print behind.
2013 Independent magazines start to thrive due
to low cost of production on the internet.
Following the Leveson Inquiry into press
misconduct in the UK, a Royal Charter aimed
at underpinning self-regulation of the British
press is proposed and meets opposition from
many editors.
At the Modern Magazine Conference in
London, the term ‘Golden Age’ is used to refer
to the industry as publishing activity starts
to normalize following the impact of three
years of the iPad. Large publishers and small
independents develop the freedom that
digital media brings to the industry.
236
Further reading
Editorial art direction
Theodore E. Conover, revised by William W. Ryan, Graphic
Communications Today, fourthedition, Clifton Park, New York:
Thomson Delmar Learning, 2004
Stephane Duperray and Raphaele Vidaling, Front Page: Covers of the
Twentieth Century, London: Weidenfeld and Nicolson, 2003
Roger Fawcett-Tang (ed.), Experimental Formats: Books, Brochures,
Catalogues Crans-Près-Céligny, Switzerland and Hove, Sussex:
RotoVision, 2001
Peter Feierabend and Hans Heiermann, Best of Graphis: Editorial, Zurich:
Graphis Press, 1993; Corte Madera, California: Gingko Press, 1995
Chris Foges (ed.), Magazine Design, Crans-Près-Céligny, Switzerland
and Hove, Sussex: RotoVision, 1999
Sammye Johnson and Patricia Prijatel, The Magazine from Cover to
Cover: Inside a Dynamic Industry, Lincolnwood, Illinois: NTC, 1999
Stacey King, Magazine Design That Works: Secrets for Successful
Magazine Design, Gloucester, Massachusetts: Rockport
Publishers, 2001
Jeremy Leslie, foreword by Lewis Blackwell, Issues: New Magazine
Design, London: Laurence King Publishing Ltd, and Corte Madera,
California: Gingko Press, 2000
Jeremy Leslie (ed.), MagCulture: New Magazine Design, London:
Laurence King Publishing Ltd, and New York: HarperCollins, 2003
Jeremy Leslie (ed.), The Modern Magazine: Visual Journalism in the
Digital Era, London: Laurence King Publishing Ltd, 2013
Horst Moser, Surprise Me: Editorial Design, translated from the German
by David H. Wilson, West New York, New Jersey: Mark Batty Publisher,
2003
William Owen, Magazine Design, London: Laurence King Publishing
Ltd, 1991
B. Martin Pedersen (ed.), Graphis Magazine Design, volume 1, New York:
Graphis Press, 1997
Jan V. White, Designing for Magazines: Common Problems, Realistic
Solutions, revised edition, New York: Bowker, 1982
Jan V. White, Editing by Design: For Designers, Art Directors and Editors
– The Classic Guide to Winning Readers, New York: Allworth
Press, 2003
Kaoru Yamashita and Maya Kishida (eds.), Magazine Editorial Graphics,
Tokyo: PIE Books, 1997
Typography
Phil Baines and Andrew Haslam, Type and Typography, London:
Laurence King Publishing Ltd and New York: Watson-Guptill
Publications, 2002; revised edition, 2005
Andreu Balius, Type at Work: The Use of Type in Editorial Design, Corte
Madera, California: Gingko Press, 2003
Robert Bringhurst, The Elements of Typographic Style, Vancouver:
Hartley and Marks, 1997
Carl Dair, Design with Type, Toronto: University of Toronto Press, 2000
Steven Heller and Mirko Ilic, Handwritten: Expressive Lettering in the
Digital Age, London and New York: Thames & Hudson, 2004
David Jury, About Face: Reviving the Rules of Typography, Hove,
Sussex: RotoVision, and Gloucester, Massachusetts: Rockport
Publishers, 2002
Ellen Lupton, Thinking with Type: A Critical Guide for Designers, Writers,
Editors, & Students, New York: Princeton Architectural Press, 2004
Ruari McLean, The Thames & Hudson Manual of Typography, London
and New York: Thames and Hudson, 1980; reprinted 1997
Rick Poynor (ed.), Typography Now: The Next Wave, London:
Booth-Clibborn Editions, 1991
Andrew Robinson, The Story of Writing: Alphabets, Hieroglyphs and
Pictograms, London and New York: Thames and Hudson, 1995
Erik Spiekermann and E. M. Ginger, Stop Stealing Sheep & Find Out How
Type Works, Berkeley, California: Adobe Press, 1993; second edition, 2002
There are many great sources for typographic inspiration on the web.
The photo-sharing website Flickr (www.flickr.com) has numerous
groups devoted to type, such as the excellent Typography and
Lettering group to be found at: www.flickr.com/groups/type.
Layouts
Gavin Ambrose and Paul Harris, Layout, Lausanne: AVA Publishing, 2005
David E. Carter, The Little Book of Layouts: Good Designs and Why They
Work, New York: Harper Design, 2003
David Dabner, Graphic Design School: The Principles and Practices of
Graphic Design, London and New York: Thames & Hudson, 2004
Kimberly Elam, Grid Systems: Principles of Organizing Type, New York:
Princeton Architectural Press, 2004
Gail Deibler Finke, White Graphics: The Power of White in Graphic Design,
Gloucester, Massachusetts: Rockport Publishers, 2003
Allen Hurlburt, The Grid: A Modular System for the Design and
Production of Newspapers, Magazines and Books, New York: John
Wiley, 1982
Carolyn Knight and Jessica Glaser, Layout: Making It Fit – Finding the
Right Balance Between Content and Space, Gloucester, Massachusetts:
Rockport Publishers, 2003
Lucienne Roberts, The Designer and the Grid, Hove, Sussex: RotoVision,
2002
Timothy Samara, Making and Breaking the Grid: A Graphic Design Layout
Workshop, Gloucester, Massachusetts: Rockport Publishers, 2003
Imagery
Gavin Ambrose, Image, Lausanne: AVA Publishing, 2005
Charlotte Cotton, The Photograph as Contemporary Art, London and New
York: Thames & Hudson, 2004
Geoff Dyer, The Ongoing Moment, London: Little Brown, and New York:
Pantheon Books, 2005
Angus Hyland and Roanne Bell, Hand to Eye: Contemporary Illustration,
London: Laurence King Publishing Ltd, 2003
John Ingledew, Photography, London: Laurence King Publishing, 2013
Scott Kelby, The Photoshop CS2 Book for Digital Photographers,
Indianapolis, Indiana: New Riders, 2003
Robert Klanten and Hendrik Hellige (eds.), Illusive: Contemporary
Illustration and its Context, Berlin: Die Gestalten, 2005
Gunther Kress and Theo van Leeuwen, Reading Images: The Grammar
of Visual Design, London and New York: Routledge, 1996
Susan Sontag, On Photography, New York: Farrar Straus and Giroux,
1977; London: Allen Lane, 1978
237
Susan Sontag, Regarding the Pain of Others, New York: Farrar Straus and
Giroux, and London: Hamish Hamilton, 2003
Julius Wiedemann, Illustration Now!, Cologne: Taschen, 2005
Lawrence Zeegen, The Fundamentals of Illustration, Lausanne: AVA
Publishing, 2005
Inspiration
Lewis Blackwell and Lorraine Wild, Edward Fella: Letters on America,
London: Laurence King Publishing Ltd, and New York: Princeton
Architectural Press, 2000
Lewis Blackwell and David Carson, The End of Print: The Grafik Design
of David Carson, revised edition, London: Laurence King Publishing
Ltd, 2012
David Carson, Trek: David Carson – Recent Werk, Corte Madera,
California: Gingko Press, 2003
David Crowley, Magazine Covers, London: Mitchell Beazley (Octopus
Publishing Group Ltd), 2006
Alan Fletcher, The Art of Looking Sideways, London: Phaidon Press, 2001
Richard Hollis, Swiss Graphic Design: The Origins and Growth of an
International Style, 1920–1965, London: Laurence King Publishing
Ltd, and New Haven, Connecticut: Yale University Press, 2006
Cees W. de Jong and Alston W. Purvis, Dutch Graphic Design: A Century
of Innovation, London and New York: Thames & Hudson, 2006
Tibor Kalman and Maira Kalman, Colors: Issues 1–13, New York: Harry
N. Abrams, 2002
Barbara Kruger, Barbara Kruger, Cambridge, Massachusetts: MIT
Press, 1999
Beryl McAlhone and David Stuart, A Smile in the Mind, revised edition,
London: Phaidon Press, 1998
The Society for News Design, The Best of Newspaper Design 27,
Gloucester, Massachusetts: Rockport Publishers Inc., 2006
Martin Venezky, It Is Beautiful … Then Gone, New York: Princeton
Architectural Press, 2005
Printing and colour use
Josef Albers, Interaction of Color, revised and expanded edition, New
Haven, Connecticut: Yale University Press, 2006
Leatrice Eiseman, Pantone Guide to Communicating with Color,
Cincinnati, Ohio: Grafix Press, 2000
Mark Gatter, Production for Print, London: Laurence King Publishing
Ltd, 2010
Johannes Itten, The Art of Color: The Subjective Experience and
Objective Rationale of Color, revised edition, New York and
Chichester: John Wiley & Sons Inc., 1997
Naomi Kuno and FORMS Inc./Color Intelligence Institute, Colors in
Context, Tokyo: Graphic-sha Publishing, 1999
Alan Pipes, Production for Graphic Designers, fifth edition, London:
Laurence King Publishing Ltd, 2009
Michael Rogondino and Pat Rogondino, Process Colour Manual: 24,000
CMYK Combinations for Design, Prepress and Printing, San
Francisco: Chronicle Books, 2000
Lesa Sawahata, Color Harmony Workbook: A Workbook and Guide to
Creative Color Combinations, Gloucester, Massachusetts: Rockport
Publishers Inc., 2001
Journalism and communication
Harold Evans, Editing and Design, five volumes, London: William
Heinneman (Random House Group Ltd), 1972–1978
Harold Evans, Essential English for Journalists, Editors and Writers,
London: Pimlico (Random House Group Ltd), 2000
Stephen Quinn, Digital Sub-Editing and Design, Oxford: Focal Press
(Elsevier Ltd), 2001
Mike Sharples, How We Write: Writing as Creative Design, Oxford:
Routledge (Taylor & Francis Books Ltd), 1998
General design books
Joshua Berger and Sarah Dougher, 100 Habits of Successful Graphic
Designers: Insider Secrets on Working Smart and Staying Creative,
Gloucester, Massachusetts: Rockport Publishers Inc., 2003
Charlotte Fiell and Peter Fiell, Graphic Design Now, Cologne: Taschen, 2005
Lisa Graham, Basics of Design: Layout and Typography for Beginners,
Clifton Park, New York: Thomson Delmar Learning, 2001
Richard Hollis, A Concise History of Graphic Design, revised edition,
London and New York: Thames & Hudson, 2002
Johannes Itten, Design and Form: The Basic Course at the Bauhaus,
revised edition, London: Thames & Hudson, 1975
Michael Johnson, Problem Solved: A Primer in Design and
Communication, London: Phaidon Press, 2002
Ellen Lupton and J. Abbott Miller, Design Writing Research. Writing on
Graphic Design, New York: Kiosk Press, 1996
Quentin Newark, What Is Graphic Design?, Gloucester, Massachusetts:
Rockport Publishers Inc., and Hove, Sussex: RotoVision, 2002
Rick Poynor, Design Without Boundaries. Visual Communication in the
Nineties, London: Booth-Clibborn Editions, 2000
Adrian Shaughnessy, How to Be a Graphic Designer, Without Losing
Your Soul, second edition, London: Laurence King Publishing
Ltd, 2010
Edward R. Tufte, Visual Explanations. Images and Quantities, Evidence
and Narrative, Cheshire, Connecticut: Graphics Press, 1997
238
Page numbers in italics refer to
captions
About Town 80, 173 see also Town
Abrahams, Stefan 151
Adbusters 30, 62, 65, 81
Adobe Creative Suite 19, 186 see
also InDesign; Photoshop
Aeon Magazine 229
Agha, M.F. 207, 209, 214
Amelia’s Magazine 186
Anderson, Gail 219
Anorak 47, 126
Another Magazine 183
Ansel, Ruth 102
apps 23, 24, 29, 37, 47, 59, 165, 167,
224, 226
Arena 73
Arment, Marco 227
art directors/editors 14, 18, 21, 32–3,
60, 99, 128, 153, 165, 196
Arthr (Newspaper Club) 227
Autukaite, Sandra 202
Bar, Noma 42
Barnes, Paul 180
Baron, Fabien 55, 84, 179, 217
Bass, Saul 148
Bauhaus 139, 140, 179, 206
Beach Culture 55, 57, 179
Belknap, John 21
Benezri, Kobi 199
BERG Design 164, 186, 227, 230
Big 221
Black, Roger 156
Blah Blah Blah 70
Blitz 56, 124, 126
blogs 35, 48, 60, 91, 124, 126, 146,
206
Bloomberg Businessweek 32–3, 190
Blueprint 146
body copy 8, 83, 85, 87, 88, 90, 96,
114, 116–17
Bonnier R&D 164
Boston Globe 29, 59, 219
Boston Sunday Globe 46
box copy 82, 88, 90, 121, 140, 176
branding 35, 42, 57
covers 30, 41, 42, 44, 45, 47, 50,
57, 65, 98
logos 42, 69–70, 85
style 35, 42, 73, 83, 91, 141, 142,
143, 156
supplements 31, 34, 85
typography 42, 88, 177, 182, 183
see also identity
Brodovitch, Alexey 50, 179, 208, 211,
214
Brody, Neville 55, 57, 82, 92, 97, 141,
179, 206, 216
Brown, James 64
Brûlé, Tyler 10, 232
budget issues 34, 97–8, 127, 128,
188, 197
Burrill, Anthony 48
Business 2.0 82
business-to-business (B2B)
magazines 35
bylines 27, 87, 88, 110, 113, 114, 121,
163, 177
captions 88, 89, 90, 98, 110, 120–1,
166, 174
Carlos 36, 62, 103, 104, 145
Carson, David 55, 57, 70, 91, 115, 122,
141, 173, 178, 179, 221
Chambers, Tony 10
Charm 209
City Limits 56, 216
Cleland, Thomas Maitland 190
collage 50, 64, 215
Colors 18, 218, 220
colour printing 27, 34, 50, 52, 55, 57,
187, 188, 190
colour selection 37, 42, 46, 72, 85, 92
columns 27, 83, 96, 110, 113, 114, 130,
150, 158, 160, 163
Condé Nast 24, 50, 52, 68, 207, 209,
224
Constructivism 70, 82, 97, 179, 206,
207, 208, 216
consumer magazines 30, 35, 57, 60,
125–6, 172
Cook, Gary 82, 127
copy see body copy; box copy; panel
copy
Corbin, Lee 143–4, 173, 183, 185, 198
Cottrell, Ivan 182
cover lines 30, 47, 55, 64, 69, 70, 73,
86
covers 41, 44
abstract 65–6
and branding 30, 41, 42, 44, 45,
47, 50, 57, 65, 98
brief 74–5
celebrity covers 55, 56, 57, 59
components 64, 69–73
custom-made 48–9, 65
design approaches 62–7
development of 50–61
digital media 41, 44, 47, 60, 68, 98
figurative 62–3, 65
importance of 44, 50, 52, 98
logos 50, 62, 64, 65, 66, 69–70,
73, 86
magazines 44, 47, 50–7, 59
newspapers 45, 101
photography 50, 52–3, 55, 62, 64
supplements 52, 55
text-based 66–7
Creative Review 124, 126, 143
credits 87, 88, 110, 121 see also
picture credits
cross-heads see subheads
customer magazines 35, 36, 57, 124
Dadaism 97, 115, 179, 208, 216
Dadich, Scott 68, 224
Dagens Nyheter (DN) 130, 174
Daily Mirror 163, 174
Dazed & Confused 48, 57, 62, 139
deadlines 127, 128–9, 154, 187, 190,
194
design directors 14, 21
design skills 7, 95
artwork skills 153, 186–7 see also
images
brief 202–3
concepts 38–9, 153, 157, 190
consistency 153, 194, 197
digital design 32, 160, 164–5, 168
monotony, avoiding 135, 153, 156,
194, 197, 201
production issues 153, 186–7
visualization 153, 154
see also page design; typography
Deuchars, Marion 102
digital media 24–5
automated content 60, 227
covers 41, 44, 47, 60, 68, 98
data availability 229
digital design 32, 160, 164–5, 168
finite publishing 227, 229
the future 226, 227, 229, 230, 232
grids 126, 151, 160, 161, 162
magazines 19, 20, 29, 36–7, 59,
164, 166, 224, 226 see also
named magazines
navigation 8, 16, 29, 60, 160, 164,
166–7, 168
newspapers 28, 29, 59, 166, 167
see also named newspapers
print crossover 227
print media compared 29, 124–5,
126
responsive design 226–7
terminology 29
see also tablets; websites
Diprose, Andrew and Philip 12, 47
Dixon, Chris 81
Docherty, Jeffrey 133, 158, 182
Doll, Evan 227
Domus 146
Douglas, Sarah 10, 12–13, 167
Draper, Richard 191
Driver, David 191
drop caps 34, 92, 110, 116, 117–18,
123, 140, 174, 179
Duff-Smith, Rebecca 151
Dvorani, Jetmire 75
Eat 105
The Economist 31, 143, 194
Editions 37
editorial, defined 7, 8
editorial design
defined 7, 8
design factors 18, 129–38
designers 18, 98 see also design
skills
the future 226–9, 232–3
key staff 14, 18–21
the past, exploring 205, 206
purpose 8, 10, 18
editors 14, 18, 21, 60, 92, 98
Edwards, Neil 48
Elle 53, 225
Ellis, Darren (Sea Studio) 104
Emigre 55, 91, 99, 173, 178
ES Magazine (Evening Standard)
218
Esopus 136, 186
Esquire 50, 52, 66, 211
Esterson, Simon (Esterson
Associates) 15, 35, 146–7, 229
Eureka magazine (The Times) 92,
168
Evans, Harold 27
Expressionism 208, 214, 216
Eye 146, 229
The Face 55, 82, 97, 126, 141, 179,
206, 216
Facebook 37, 44, 206, 225
Fact 66
fanzines 30, 48, 103, 145
Fassett’s theorem of legible line
length 114, 156, 158, 159
Feltier, Bea 102
Financiele Dagblad 218
Fire & Knives 48, 126
Fishwrap 112, 116, 121, 176
Flaunt 69, 89, 123, 139, 143–4, 171,
173, 183, 185, 198
Fleckhaus, Willy 18, 84, 212, 213
Flipboard 37, 60, 61, 227, 228
fold-outs 186, 187
Folha de S. Paulo 142, 192
folios 88, 90–1, 110, 121, 172
fonts
digital media 24, 55, 91, 92
print media 50, 82, 90, 91, 92, 172,
176, 177, 178, 199
Fortune 190
Frankfurter Allgemeine Magazin
(FAZ) 212
Frere-Jones, Toby 178, 183
Froelich, Janet 24, 34, 65, 66, 70, 79,
114, 116, 117, 123, 135, 149, 178, 188,
222–3, 233
Frost, Vince 8, 18, 57, 59, 64, 115, 117,
179, 181, 182, 221
FT The Business Magazine 70, 82,
101, 127, 183, 221
Garcia, Mario 31, 45, 46, 97, 134–5,
142, 144, 172, 200
Gentile, Massimo 142
Glamour 173, 209
golden section 134
Goodchild, Jon 215
GPS (Global Positioning System) 8,
16, 28, 29, 37, 229
GQ 24, 73, 217
Graphic International 121
Grazia 225
grids 55, 80, 84, 85, 110, 127, 135, 151,
155–62, 212
The Guardian 15–17, 45, 59, 60, 101,
102, 103, 124, 146, 155, 160, 162,
164, 177, 183, 192, 218, 232
Gustafson, Mats 70, 217
Gutiérrez, Fernando 65–6, 73, 156,
182, 185, 220
Hackett, Dennis 214
Hall, Alistair (We Made This) 49
Harper’s Bazaar 50, 70, 102, 179,
208, 211, 217
Harrison-Twist, Jordan 108
headings 13, 113–14, 119, 128, 162,
165, 174, 203 see also subheads
headlines 8, 13, 16, 26, 45, 64, 83, 87,
88, 89, 96, 110, 113–14, 131, 173–4,
175 see also running headlines
Hill, Jon 92–5, 160, 161, 168, 229
Hillman, David 15, 18, 146, 178, 214
Holley, Lisa Wagner 176
Hort 48
House & Garden 207
Huck 47
the human eye and how it scans
a page 128
ICC Profile 187
icons 81, 82, 119, 192
i-D 48, 55, 62, 124
I.D. 104, 105, 137, 138, 199
identity 14, 15, 28, 34, 36, 42, 47, 110,
197 see also branding
The Illustrated Ape 104
Illustrated News 52
illustration 48, 62, 63, 91, 102, 103–4
images
bleeding 85, 123
cropping 8, 100, 104, 122, 138, 185,
194
cut-outs 27, 64, 85, 201
finding 98–9, 190, 194
full-bleed 8, 66, 83, 85, 98, 136
importance of 98, 121, 122, 188
from the Internet 98–9, 190, 194
originals, evaluating 188, 190
and text combination 99, 122, 133,
175
working with 97–8, 121–2, 123,
188–94
see also illustration; photography
The Independent on Saturday 64,
221
independent publications 14, 30, 32,
47
InDesign (Adobe) 21, 167, 183, 186,
226
infographics 14, 28, 190–3
initial caps 116, 117–18, 178
Inner Loop 113, 182
Inside 158, 182, 197
Instapaper 29, 227
International Style 212
interns 19
Interview 53, 70, 217
intros see stand-firsts
iPads 10, 16, 23, 24, 68, 99, 124, 160,
226, 229
iPhones 20, 60, 94
The Jewish Chronicle 21
Jones, Dylan 18
Jones, Jasmine 151
Joyce, James 48
jumplines 119, 120, 142
junior designers 19, 85
Kalman, Tibor 18, 220
King, David 52, 56
King, Scott 66
Kitching, Alan 183, 221
Kuhr, Barbara 65, 68
Lappin, Criswell 80, 100, 103, 122,
135, 137, 140, 143, 157, 177
Lasn, Kalle 81
Lawyer 35
layouts 197
alignment 110, 113, 116, 135, 139
balance 27, 114, 129, 130, 133, 134,
137, 139, 150, 185
brief 150–1
colour, use of 110, 128, 131, 134–5,
137, 145, 197
components 110–19, 143–4
construction 127–38
contrast 85, 113, 136, 145
depth 83, 123, 137, 171
discord 117, 130, 139, 140–1 see
also tension below
flow 78, 130, 135, 197
format 129, 143, 145, 155, 172, 173,
176
harmony 122, 130, 135, 139–41,
144, 182
inspiration, finding 50, 79, 115,
148
leading 110, 114, 116, 139, 174, 179
movement, implied 83, 98, 105,
123, 138
placement issues 73, 112, 131, 132,
139, 155
repetition 54, 135
Index
239
scale issues 27, 42, 98, 110, 135–6,
185
shape 82, 90, 113, 114, 116, 130,
134–5, 145
spatial issues 124, 129–30, 131,
132 see also white space
stock 143, 145, 155, 170–2, 176
structure 143
tension 110, 122, 123, 135, 136, 139
see also discord above
type/typefaces 110, 112, 114, 133,
134, 143–4
see also grids; page design; style
Leeds, Mark 225
Leslie, Jeremy 10, 35, 63, 66, 103,
124–6, 145, 154, 168, 227, 232
Libération 217
Licko, Zusanna 55
Liebermann, Alexander 50, 52
Life 52
Little Printer (BERG) 227, 230
Loaded 64, 73, 83, 87, 128
Logan, Nick 82, 124
logos
branding 42, 69–70, 85
covers 50, 62, 64, 65, 66, 69–70,
73, 86
typography 34, 70, 73
Lois, George 66
Lowe, Rob 48
Lubalin, Herb 66
M-real 35, 63, 124, 143, 169
MacUser 55
Mag+ software (BERG and Bonier)
165, 230
The Magazine 227
magazines 8, 14, 18, 23, 30–7
automated content 60, 227
back sections 78, 85–6
contents pages 78–81, 82
covers 44, 47, 50–7, 59
digital 19, 20, 29, 36–7, 59, 164,
166, 224, 226
feature well 78, 81, 83–5
front sections 78, 82
independent publications 14, 30,
32, 47
news pages 78, 81, 82
section openers 85, 86
typography 55, 57, 70, 82, 83,
173–4
see also named magazines;
supplements
magCulture 124, 126
Magdalinski, Stef 232
Marchbank, Pearce 64, 66
Marie Claire 73, 225
Marshall, Joseph 150, 151
Martinesva, Esa 19
mastheads 38, 47, 69, 82, 96 see
also logos
Matador 143, 156, 220
McCall’s 179
McCue, Mike 227
McNay, Mike 15
Metropolis 80, 100, 103, 122, 135, 137,
140, 157, 177
mobile devices see mobile phones;
tablets
mobile phones 14, 16, 23, 60 see also
iPhones
Modernism 122, 208, 210, 211
Monocle 126, 232
montage 62, 191, 207
Morla, Jennifer 65
Murray, Peter 146
navigation
digital media 8, 16, 29, 60, 160,
164, 166–7, 168
print media 27, 78, 81, 91, 121
Neal, Christopher 103
Nest 70
Net-a-Porter 20, 166
The New York Times 24, 47, 113, 227,
232
The New York Times Magazine 32,
34, 65, 66, 70, 79, 90, 102, 114, 116,
117, 135, 136, 149, 159, 178, 188,
222
The New York Times Style Magazine
34, 70, 222
The New York Times T: Travel
Magazine 85, 123
The New Yorker 59, 224
Newspaper Club 29, 227
newspapers 8, 18, 21, 23, 26–8
Berliner format 15, 28, 130, 160,
172, 200
broadsheet format 15, 28, 57, 172,
200
content 78, 82
covers 45, 101
digital media 28, 29, 59, 166, 167
horizontal and vertical design 27,
45, 130, 162
sizes 28
tabloid format 15, 27, 28, 130, 172
typography 15, 16, 27, 28, 47, 92,
174, 176, 177, 180
websites 57, 166
see also named newspapers;
supplements
Newsweek 29
Nova 10, 53, 70, 178, 179, 214
NZZ 146
The Observer 134–5, 200
The Observer Music Monthly 112
Oh Comely 47
Oliver, Vaughan 57
Oz 10, 52, 215
page design 153, 155
digital design 164–5
double-page spreads (DPS) 52,
53, 110, 150–1
flatplans 14, 155, 163, 168–9
format 143, 145, 155, 172, 173, 176
gutters 96, 110
pagination 155, 162–3, 168, 169,
194
signalling 16, 34, 113, 131, 132, 162,
163
stock selection 143, 145, 155,
170–2, 176
templates 82, 85, 110–11, 162, 167,
197
see also grids
page furniture 64, 82, 90, 165, 216
El País 45, 65–6, 89, 113, 220
panel copy 27, 88, 90, 121
paper, selecting 170–2
Pariscope 145
Het Parool 118, 128
Patterson, Christian 104
paywalls 29, 57, 92, 229
Peccinotti, Harri 179, 214
Per lui 216
photography 99–101
close-ups 63, 104, 105
covers 50, 52–3, 55, 62, 64
reportage 16, 52, 55, 96, 130, 131,
212, 214, 220
selecting photographs 99, 101,
188
Photoshop (Adobe) 20, 186, 188, 190
picture credits 98–9, 121, 194
picture editors 14, 99, 101
Pineles, Cipe 209
Plunkett, John 65, 68
Pop 63
Port 19, 47
Porter, Mark 14, 15, 16, 18, 27–8, 32,
45, 103, 130, 160, 166, 177, 180,
198, 218
print media
digital crossover 227
digital media compared 29,
124–5, 126
fonts 50, 82, 90, 91, 92, 172, 176,
177, 178, 199
the future 29, 206, 229, 232
navigation 27, 78, 81, 91, 121
see also magazines; newspapers
printing and printers 47, 52, 55, 57,
96, 143, 187, 188
Pritchard, Meirion 10, 12–13, 24,
48–9
production managers 14, 18, 162
proofs/proofing 14, 57, 128, 185, 186,
188
Publico 27, 146, 218
pull quotes 85, 87, 88, 89, 110,
118–19, 163, 174, 175, 176, 179
QuarkXPress 21, 167, 183, 186
Queen 179
quotes 118 see also pull quotes
Radio Times 190, 191
RayGun 55, 57, 70, 91, 99, 141, 179
Read, Steve 64, 83
Real Simple 36, 37, 222, 233
redesigning 15, 32, 45, 142, 146, 198,
200
The RiDE Journal 12, 47
Ripoli, Paula 142
Robinson, Nigel 48
Roinestad, Eric 148
Rolleri, Dan 196
Rolling Stone 53, 55, 219
rules 81, 82, 86, 119, 121, 134, 135,
172, 175
running headlines 88, 119, 128, 139,
140
Ryan, Rob 186
Salomi 38, 39
San Francisco Chronicle Magazine
31
Schulze, Jack 164, 227, 230–1, 232
Schwartz, Christian 180
Schweizer, Nico 199
screen calibration 186, 190
Self 217
Self Service 126
sells see stand-firsts
Seventeen 209
Sharp, Martin 52, 215
Shively, Hudson 151
Show 211
sidebars 88, 121, 135, 138
Silvertown, Ben 203
Sims, Michael 104
Sleazenation 57, 66, 80
slugs 13, 120
social magazines 37, 61, 229
social media 35, 47, 48, 146, 167, 194,
227, 229, 232, 233 see also
Facebook; Twitter
soDA 143, 145, 157, 171
software 16, 24, 29, 91, 95, 164, 186,
227 see also apps; named
software
Speak 90, 91, 115, 141, 179, 181, 196
Der Spiegel 53
spines 73, 110, 122, 136
Stack Magazines 47
stand-firsts 83, 85, 87, 88, 110, 114
Stark, Gemma 20
Statements 143
Stern 194, 201
Storch, Otto 179
straplines 119, 209
studio managers 18, 166
style
advertising style 144
and branding 35, 42, 73, 83, 91,
141, 142, 143, 156
defined 142
design style 143–4
editorial style 143
house style 83, 197
style sheets 21, 82, 106–7, 114, 197,
201
sub-decks see stand-firsts
subeditors 14, 21, 87, 114, 118, 129,
160, 185
subheads 87, 110, 114, 118, 158, 175
Substance UK 70
Sudic, Deyan 146
The Sunday Times Magazine 34
SuperCal (BERG) 186
supplements 23, 31, 34, 52, 55, 65
see also named supplements
Sykes, Suzanne 225
tablets 23, 230
development of 23, 59, 60, 226
importance of 10, 14, 16, 19, 29
navigation 16, 60, 166, 167
see also iPads
tag-lines 64, 87, 117
Tang, Kam 48
Tank 173
Tentaciones (El Pais) 65–6, 220
Texas Monthly 224
3D techniques 171, 186
Time Out 64, 66, 67, 124
The Times 26, 92, 160, 161, 168, 192,
229, 233
Toscani, Oliviero 220
Town (prev. About Town) 179, 210
Turley, Richard 32–3, 218
turn arrows 119, 120
Turner, Jim 69, 171
turns 45
Twen 53, 80, 84, 100, 119, 187, 212,
213
Twitter 12, 32, 37, 126, 146, 206, 227,
229
type/typefaces
capitals see drop caps; initial
caps
custom-designed 183, 185, 199
expressive use of 177, 179, 181,
182, 216, 221
finding 182
in layouts 110, 112, 114, 133, 134,
143–4
myths about 96
selecting 70, 112, 139, 143–4, 156,
173–7, 184
serif vs. sans serif 118, 121, 139,
174, 176, 180
woodblock 70, 182, 184, 221
see also fonts
typography 86–91, 95, 96
branding 42, 88, 177, 182, 183
brief 106–7
digital media 29, 86, 91, 92, 161
digital techniques 48, 55, 57, 59,
183, 185
interpreting text 116–17, 179, 181,
182, 217
letterpress 182, 183, 221
logos 34, 70, 73
magazines 55, 57, 70, 82, 83,
173–4
newspapers 15, 16, 27, 28, 47, 92,
174, 176, 177, 180
playing with 70, 117, 177, 179, 219
style sheets 106–7, 197
supplements 31, 34, 90
see also fonts; type/typefaces
VanderLans, Rudy 55, 91
Vanidad 73, 182, 185, 220
Vanity Fair 24, 73, 207
Venezky, Martin 10, 87, 90, 91, 115,
121–2, 141, 148, 179, 181, 182, 196,
197, 198
Visionaire 143
Vogue 50, 55, 59, 73, 179, 207, 217
Vogue Paris 84, 173, 217
WAD 65, 87
Wallpaper* 10–13, 42, 48–9, 73, 87,
98, 99, 167
Warhol, Andy 53
Watson, Steve 47
Watts, Michael 99, 101
the web 8, 21, 24, 59, 82, 98–9, 119
see also websites
Webb, Matt 230
websites 23, 24, 29, 44, 57, 95, 166,
226–7 see also named websites
Weekend magazine (The Guardian)
218
Weidmann, Micha 67
white space 15, 46, 83, 84, 85, 99,
114, 129, 130, 135, 201
WIRED 12, 18, 24, 59, 65, 68, 82, 190,
218, 224
Wolf, Henry 50, 70, 211
Wolsey, Tom 179, 210
Woodward, Fred 219
Zembla 59, 79, 115, 117, 179, 181, 184,
221
zines 30, 48
240
Picture Credits
Author Credits
Special thanks to:
All those who contributed images and profiles, in particular to
Janet Froelich, Jon Hill, Mark Porter, Sarah Douglas, Jeremy
Leslie, Richard Turley and Scott Dadich.
To all at Laurence King Publishing for their keen editing skills,
particularly Peter Jones and Susan George, and to Mari West
for pictures.
Thanks to all my students at Central Saint Martins Graphic
Design who shared their projects from my design briefs with
generosity: Stefan Abrahams’ team, Sandra Adukuaite, Oliver
Ballon, Salomi Desai, Iliana Dudueva, Jetmire Dvorani, Jordan
Harrison-Twist, Joseph Marshall, and Ben Silvertown’s team.
Thanks to my father Eddie Caldwell, a compositor who
encouraged me to draw and love print, and to my husband John
Belknap for his advice and endless cups of tea, and to Sam, Ed
and Daisy for their patience. Thanks to Karen Sims and the
Highbury Book Club for support.
Also thanks to Yolanda Zeppaterra, a Central Saint Martins
graduate who wrote the excellent first edition of Editorial Design
back in the print age of 2007.
6, 73, 182b, 185b, 204, 220 Courtesy Fernando Gutiérrez; 8, 65tr Courtesy WAD magazine; 9tl, 86
Courtesy Numéro magazine; 9tr Paper Sky; 9bl Courtesy Time Out Group, August 11-18 1993, no.
1199; 9br FT Business cover 26.02.00. Photographer: Gareth Munden; 11-13, 49, 98 Courtesy
Wallpaper* magazine; 14 Photographer: Cath Caldwell; 15 © Guardian News & Media Ltd 2013; 16t
© Guardian News & Media Ltd 2013. Photographers: Darren Kidd and Erci Ogden / Retna; 16b ©
Guardian News & Media Ltd 2013. Photograph © www.lfi.co.uk; 17, 162, 165t © Guardian News &
Media Ltd 2013. Courtesy Mark Porter. Creative Director: Mark Porter@ Mark Porter Associates.
Designers: Andy Brockie, Barry Ainslie; 19, 99, 102bl, 125b Courtesy: Port magazine. Designer:
Jeremy Leslie. Coding: Tim Moore. Design Assistant: Esa Matinvesi; 20 Courtesy Gemma Stark,
Net-a-Porter; 21 Courtesy John Belknap, Jewish Chronicle; 22, 34tr, 34b, 65bl, 65br, 66r, 79r, 85b,
90, 113br, 114, 116b, 117, 123t, 135, 136t, 149, 159, 178t, 189 The New York Times Magazine. Courtesy
Janet Froelich; 25, 37bl, 37br Real Simple magazine. Courtesy Janet Froelich; 26, 92-94, 160-161,
168, 193, 232 Courtesy Jon Hill, The Times; 27, 199tr, 218 Publico: Creative Directors: Mark Porter
and Simon Esterson. Publico Design Director: Sonia Matos; 30, 62, 65tl Courtesy www.adbusters.
org; 31t Courtesy San Francisco Chronicle Magazine February 12 2006 A Serosorting Story by
Christopher Heredia; 31b © The Economist Newspaper Limited, London, November 17, 2012; 32
Creative Director: Richard Turley. Photo Illustrator: Justin Metz; 33t Creative Director: Richard
Turley. Graphics Director: Jennifer Daniel; 33bl Creative Director: Richard Turley. Illustrator:
David Folvari; 33br Creative Director: Richard Turley. Illustrator: Noma Bar; 34tl The New York
Times Magazine. Courtesy Janet Froelich. Photographer: Raymond Meier; 35, 63l, 169b Courtesy
M-real magazine; 36, 103t, 144 Courtesy Carlos magazine; 37tl, 37tr, 60-61, 228 Courtesy
Flipboard; 38-39 Designer and Photographer: Salomi Desai (sdesai1.workflow.arts.ac.uk); 40,
42-43 Courtesy Wallpaper* magazine. Illustrator: Noma Bar; 44, 89b, 113bl Courtesy El País; 45 ©
Guardian News & Media Ltd 2013. Photograph: Reuters / Namir Noor-Eldeen; 46 Boston Sunday
Globe; 47 Courtesy Andrew Diprose, The Ride Journal. ILoveDust / Shan Jiang; 48t Courtesy Fire
& Knives. Art Director: Rob Lowe. Illustrator: Marie Claire-Bridges. Editor: Tim Hayward; 48b
Courtesy Pop Sox Designed and printed by Mr Edwards; 50, 66l Images courtesy of Esquire
magazine / Hearst Corporation; 51, 102t, 208, 211, 217tl Images courtesy of Harper’s Bazaar
magazine / Hearst Corporation; 52, 215 Courtesy Hapshash and the Coloured Coat; 53 Interview
magazine, August 1972, Liza Minelli. Photographer: Berry Berenson. Designer: Richard Bernstein.
Courtesy Brandt Publications, Inc.; 54 Cover image by Annie Leibovitz, Rolling Stone, No. 335,
January 22, 1981, © Rolling Stone LLC 1981. All Rights Reserved. Reprinted by Permission; 55,
172b, 179b Designer: Rudy VanderLans / Emigre; 56l Courtesy Jeremy Leslie; 56r David King
Collection. Designer: David King; 57t Courtesy Dazed & Confused. Photographer: Rankin; 57b, 81b
©www.PYMCA.com; 58 Photographer: Lachlan Bailey, MAO/Model: Magdalena/Vogue Paris/
Vogue.fr © Condé Nast Publications Ltd; 59, 78-79, 115t, 181t, 184, 221 Courtesy Vince Frost, Frost
Design. Editor: Dan Crowe. Creative Director: Vince Frost. Designer: Matt Willey; 63r Courtesy Pop
magazine; 64tl, 83, 128 Courtesy Loaded magazine / Blue Publishing Ltd; 64tr Courtesy Time Out
Group, January 13-19 1978, no. 406; 64br, 172tl Courtesy The Independent; 67l ©www.PYMCA.
com. Art Directior and Designer: Scott King and Earl Brutus; 67r Courtesy Time Out Group,
December 14-21 2005, no. 1843; 68 Courtesy Scott Dadich. WIRED © Condé Nast Publications
Ltd; 69, 89t, 123b, 139t, 170r, 185tl, 185tr Courtesy Flaunt magazine; 70tl, 71 The New York Times
Magazine. Courtesy Janet Froelich. Photographer: James Wojcik; 70tr The New York Times
Magazine. Courtesy Janet Froelich. T by Philippe Apeloig; 70b The New York Times Magazine.
Courtesy Janet Froelich. Photographer: Stephen Lewis; 74-75 Designer: Jetmire Dvorani
(jetmiredvorani.wordpress.com); 76 Photographer: Nick Knight. Vogue © Condé Nast Publications
Ltd; 80, 85t, 100b, 119t, 119m, 119br, 187, 212-213 Twen magazine; 81tl, 173b, 210 Collection Tony
Quinn; 81tr, 122, 137b, 157b, 177 Courtesy Metropolis; 82, 97, 141t, 216 Courtesy Neville Brody,
Research Studio Ltd; 84 Vogue par Sofia Coppola, Sofia Coppola. Photographer: David Sims, Art
Partner – © Vogue Paris © Condé Nast Publications Ltd; 88, 96, 118, 129 Courtesy Het Parool; 91
Courtesy Speak magazine. Photographer: Ira Nowinski; 100t Courtesy Metropolis. Photographer:
Sean Hemmerle; 101 © Guardian News & Media Ltd 2013. Photograph: Allsport/Getty Images;
102br © Guardian News & Media Ltd 2013. Illustrator: Marian Deuchars; 103b Courtesy
Metropolis. Illustrator: Christopher Silas Neal; 104 Image courtesy Paul Davis/Illustrated Ape
magazine www.theillustratedape.com; 105t Courtesy Eat Creative. Creative Director: Steve
Martin. Art Director: Tin Brown. Writer: Antony Head, Photographer: Satomi Ono; 105bl, 105br,
137t, 138bl, 199tl, 199b Courtesy I.D. magazine; 106-107 Photographer: Jordan Harrison-Twist;
108 © Guardian News & Media Ltd 2013. Courtesy Simon Esterson; 112t © Guardian News & Media
Ltd 2013. Courtesy The Observer. Photographer: Murdo MacLeod; 112b, 116t, 121, 176 Courtesy
Fishwrap magazine; 113t, 182m Courtesy Inner Loop; 115b, 181b, 196bl Courtesy Speak magazine;
119bl iStock; 120 Graphic International; 124, 125t Courtesy Port magazine. Designer: Matt Willey;
127 FT Business. Photographer: Sasha Gusov; 130, 174t Courtesy Dagens Nyheter; 133, 158, 182t,
197 Courtesy (inside) magazine www.australiandesignreview.com; 134 Courtesy Metropolis.
Photographer: Michelle Litvin; 136b Courtesy Esopus. Photographer: © 2004 David Michalek;
139b Courtesy Dazed & Confused; 140 Courtesy Metropolis. Photographer: Conrad Kiffin; 141b
Courtesy Speak magazine. Illustrator: Brad Holland. Photographer: Steve Sherman; 142, 192t, 226
Courtesy Mario R Garcia, Folha de S.Paolo; 145l Courtesy soDA www.soDA.ch, Benjamin Güdel
www.guedel.biz; 145tr Courtesy Pariscope; 146-147 Courtesy Simon Esterson; 150 Designer:
Joseph Marshall (www.josephbisatmarshall.co.uk); 151t Designers: Stefan Abrahams, Rebecca
Duff-Smith, Jasmine Jones and Hudson Shively; 152, 219 Courtesy Gail Anderson; 156 ©
Guardian News & Media Ltd 2013; 157t Courtesy soDA www.soDA.ch, Alex Capus - www.
alexcapus.de / Benjamin Güdel - www.guedel.biz / Marc Kappeler - www.moire.ch; 163, 174b
Courtesy Mirrorpix; 164, 165m, 165b, 167, 231 Berg Ltd and Bonnier AB; 166 Courtesy Jon Hill;
170l Courtesy soDA www.soDA.ch, Courtesy soDA. Marc Kappeler - www.moire.ch; 172tr Courtesy
Tank magazine. Thierry van Biesen; 173t Vogue Paris © Condé Nast Publications Ltd; 178b, 179t,
214 Courtesy David Hillman; 180t © Guardian News & Media Ltd 2013. Photograph: Francesca
Yorke 2006; 180b © Guardian News & Media Ltd 2013. Photograph: Getty Images; 183 FT
Business. Courtesy: Alan Kitching; 186t Courtesy Amelia’s Magazine. Art Director: Amelia Gregory.
Illustrator: Rob Ryan; 186b Courtesy Esopus. Ghost Form, 2004 © William Christenberry; 190,
191tl Courtesy Radio Times © BBC Worldwide Limited; 191tr Courtesy Radio Times © BBC
Worldwide Limited. Illustrator: Lyn Gray; 191b Courtesy Radio Times © BBC Worldwide Limited:
Illustration: Richard Draper; 192b © Guardian News & Media Ltd 2013. Grundy Graphics 2006;
194 Courtesy Stern; 195 © The Economist Newspaper Limited, London, August 26th-September
1st 2005; 196br Courtesy Speak magazine. Illustrator: Austin Cowdall / New Studio; 200 ©
Guardian News & Media Ltd 2013. Courtesy The Observer; 201t Courtesy Stern. Photographer:
Vincent Laforet/Polaris; 201b Courtesy Stern. Photographer: Volker Hinz; 202 Designer: Sandra
Audukaite; 203 Joint project by Ben Silvertown (bensilvertown.com), Iliana Dudueva, Manon
Dafydd and Violetta Miller. Portrait of Haley Ma: © Tate; 207 Vanity Fair © Condé Nast
Publications Ltd; 209 Courtesy Seventeen magazine / Hearst Corporation; 217tr Vogue Italia ©
Condé Nast Publications Ltd. Photographer: Barry McKinley. Stylist: Krizia; 222t, 222m Real
Simple magazine. Courtesy Janet Froelich. Photographer: Rodney Smith; 222b Real Simple
magazine. Courtesy Janet Froelich. Christopher Griffiths; 223 Real Simple magazine. Courtesy
Janet Froelich. Photographer: Robert Maxwell 224t Courtesy Scott Dadich, The New Yorker ©
Condé Nast Publications Ltd; 224m, 224b Courtesy Scott Dadich; 225 © Grazia magazine.
Courtesy Suzanne Sykes; 233 Real Simple magazine. Courtesy Janet Froelich. Photographer:
David Meredith